Home

MTZ 2022.5 Tier 4 User Manual

1. Figure 7 15 1 Quick disconnect couplers kit 320 2022 5 0000010 OM 8 TRACTOR STORAGE 8 1 General instruction ATTENTION THE PRESENT SECTION CONTAINS THE STORAGE REGULA TIONS FOR TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 CHASSIS SYSTEMS AND UNITS ENGINE STORAGE PRESERVATION REPRESERVATION DEPRESERVATION REGULATIONS ARE SPECIFIED IN THE ENGINE OPERATION MANUAL The tractors shall be stored according to the requirements of GOST 7751 85 in the indoor area or under a shed If indoors premises are not available tractors may be stored on outdoor special sites with obligatory preservation sealing and components dismounting that require warehousing Put tractors in the inter shift storage if their operation is interrupted for up to 10 days short term storage if duration of idle interval is from ten days to two months and long term storage if interruption of use lasts for over two months Start preparation for short term storage straight after works completion and for long term storage not later than ten days after works termination 8 2 Requirements for inter shift storage of machines Tractor may be stored on storage yards and inter shift storage grounds or directly on works execution sites All openings through which atmospheric precipitation can get inside tractor cavities shall be tightly covered Accumulator batteries shall be switched off 8 3 Requirements for short term tractors storage Put tractor in storage in co
2. gt TE iee mp mi ae ee ss T EEF P F P a na a a is TT ae renee zanr ar IP een Z ee Sete eee i ia re f i PPEP E z Y H E Pi E r i ee S l Le A ZA 1 gear 2 piston 3 drum 4 jaw semi clutch 5 spring 6 shaft 7 splined bush ing 8 torsion member 9 cardan shaft fork 10 koxyx 11 electro hydraulic valve group 12 pusher 13 switch 14 plug Figure 3 12 4 FDA drive The FDA drive is intended for torque transfer from the gear box secondary shaft through the FDA drive gear a multidisk frictional hydraulically operated clutch a torsion member and a cardan shaft to the front driving axle FDA drive is engaged disengaged with a help of a hydraulic clutch according with a signal from the sensor which is influenced by a free wheel mechanism depending on the rear wheel skidding The FDA drive is located in the gearbox body to the right as viewed along tractor movement hereby the torsion shaft crosses the coupling clutch case The support for the cardan shaft sliding fork is mounted in the coupling clutch case The drive consists of the following parts and components The shaft 6 figure 3 12 4 is installed in the gearbox body on roller bearings The gear 1 staying in constant meshing with the FDA drive gear is running freely on the shaft with the clutch disengaged With the clutch engaged the gear 1 is connected with the drum 3 o
3. 7 Ef EC Te Gd IC E D Ol TF ea ae LV INE W MN alt ice sayy Th ee ext oa NN se ee z DA E t im erage ee EE td m m ACT SIS 3 D R Eal ak BA ih a J ee Tee i EEH EP HPHH 4 Hr i ela i 1 ihe sre T at i SS h fa RS SN 1 A A A AEEA o 1 1 ii JA SS ee 91 HH oe ora PISSA f SSS S T ES HE 100 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 7 2 Rear PTO control The rear PTO is controlled with a control lever 1 of the switch 24 figure 3 7 2 located on the side console Moving the lever 1 by means of a cable 6 and a rod 12 turns a lever 22 of a cock controlling the oil flow supplied to the PTO friction clutch piston and to the PTO brake piston To make the friction clutch engage smoothly a damping device 9 on a bracket 8 is mounted at the entry to the friction clutch The lever 1 has two positions extreme front position PTO engaged PTO friction clutch engaged extreme rear position PTO end extension brake engaged The lever of the oil flow control cock has two fixed positions lower brake en gaged and upper fixed position PTO engaged The PTO begins operating only with the engine running i e when there is pressure in the transmission hydraulic system The rear PTO control is adjusted as follows set the lever 1 of the switch 24 into the ex
4. cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeee sees 329 ANNEX C compulsory Electrical circuit diagram of electrical equipment Ol BELARUS 20220 tracto eenean atic tu ctlan des AE Ea 330 2022 5 0000010 OM Introduction The present manual is designed for studying the structure operation rules and maintenance of tractors BELARUS 2022 5 Scrutinize this manual and operation manual of the engine 4260 S3B 0000100 P attached to your tractor It will help you to study the rules of correct operation and maintenance Failure to follow this instruction can lead to operator s injury or a breakdown of a tractor Operation of a tractor its maintenance and repair shall be carried out only by em ployees familiar with all of its parameters and characteristics and informed about neces sary safety requirements to prevent casualties In connection with constant development of the tractor some changes which are not depicted in the present manual can be introduced in the structure of certain units and parts Any arbitrary changes made by a consumer release the manufacturer from respon sibility for possible further injuries to the operator and tractor breakdown Adopted abbreviations and conventional notations ADL automatic differential lock AB accumulator battery DL differential lock RADL rear axle differential lock PLU pilot lamps unit SU switching unit FB fuse block FC fast coupling ECU engine c
5. ccccceeeeeeeeee eee 82 3 3 4 3 Clutch check for purity of disengagement ccccceee cence eee sense eeaeens 83 329 O CUCI CASE are paea ASE 83 OA GCAMDOX eiere a r e aeei 85 S24 1 SON e hal MNONO resna E elcadaw ena eenian wiauage eaten 85 3 4 2 Mechanism of engine start up lock with range engaged and mechanism of FDA disengagement When reVelrsing ccccccceeeeeesceeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeneeesgaaeeneas 89 343 Gearbox COMO MECHANISM asiron aa A TE 89 37420 1 GENELAl INTORMAUON saan sateen aar R UEA E AS 89 3 4 3 2 Speed shifting MECNANISM cc ccc cece cece ARAE A 89 314 3 3 RANGE SAIMMING Mechan Sisira eriaren EEEN ENC inni 90 3 4 3 4 Mechanism of switching between the higher and the lower passes of the GEaroOx TEGUCTON MIN hsp sni a a O ey eamatiecs oF 91 3 4 5 0 GEarbOX CONO aessa aerer r EAT EAEN ASETETA 92 3 5 Reduction unit electro hydraulic CONtIOI cc cece cece eee eee ee seen eeeeaeeeeees 93 2022 5 0000010 OM POREC Ae sauces imac canna tart a hueae a eat A 95 3 0 General INOMMA NOM otctstcaasancaed er cmeeaadacanceesaneeesAneneistaignreesenesaaceaetada 95 3 0 2 VAIN GFIV EEEE EEEE OE EEEE T 96 SABINI LE Ale E EAE N E EE E A E EA A ETE ET 96 260 4 REI aE dVE s T TAO T 96 30O RNA dIVE espr A EAEAN 96 3 6 6 Rear axle final drive adjustMent 00 cece cece eee eee enseeeeeeeaeeeeenaeeenes 97 3 6 7 Differential lock MECHANISM secrirsiicruorrsicircornrres irana NE 98
6. audible beep A alarm signaling im fuel AX coolant heating plugs an engine speed Oy Oil pressure in the engine a temperature of engine cool ant off stop f on start a gradual adjustment control manipulations fast lt gt S slowly he ih th forward reverse accumulator charging ER cab roof light O00 parking lights a o gt tractor turn indicator 1p trailer turn indicator ZD upper beam ZD low beam K working lights lti 48h differential lock EA PTO engaged 11 front screen wiper ae s QW rear screen wiper and washer KY brake fluid level in main cyl inder tanks O oil pressure in HSC VJ beacon D oil pressure in gearbox O braking of gearbox air pressure in pneumatic system J gt swivel lever up swivel lever down Y 2022 5 0000010 OM lt 50 front driving axle drive g6 fan air filter clogged O engine start road train gt 0p external cylinder retracting lt O L_D external cylinder protracting m o external cylinder floating 12 T engine stop 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 TRACTOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 1 1 Tractor assignment The tractor BELARUS 2022
7. The indicator of emergency oil temperature in the HLL tank lights up as oil tempera ture in the HLL tank exceeds a permitted value i e when the sensor 2 goes off figure 3 17 1 In case the sensor of emergency oil temperature in the HLL tank goes off stop working find out and eliminate reasons for emergency state in order to avoid breakdown of HLL components 1 HLL tank 2 sensor of emergency oil temperature in HLL tank Figure 3 17 1 Installation of sensor of emergency oil temperature in HLL tank 138 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 18 Rear lift linkage 3 18 1 General information The rear lift linkage is used for coupling mounted and semi mounted agricultural im plements to the tractor The agricultural implement are attached to the tractor in three points to lower link pivots and to top link or with a help of automatic coupler On rear axle tubes brackets 11 are mounted figures 3 18 1 on which two hydrau lic cylinders 4 are mounted with a help of pins 10 Cylinder rods are connected with exter nal levers 3 left and right by means of pins 3a The external levers 2 are mounted on a shaft 2 that is installed in the rear axle cover 1 with their splined openings The levers 3 are connected with lower links 7 by means of arms 5 The lower links are mounted in brackets 11 right and left with their front pivots on special pins 13 which are draft control sensors The brackets 12 are fixed on side faces of the rear a
8. To level down the hood 4 the following actions shall be performed heft the hood 3 to release the link 4 or 8 out of the bracket 5 or 9 depending on the position the hood was fixed after its opening 3 fix the link 4 or 8 back in its place lower the hood 3 into down position until you hear specific click lock 2 response In order to get better access to the master cylinders tanks of hydraulic drives of clutch and breaks control systems installed on the tractor cab it is necessary to open hatch 6 fll a el oo oe a a 1 5 a ag 1 K a oo oe i P Te a a the first position b the second position 1 control cable handle 2 lock 3 hood 4 link 5 supporting bracket 6 hatch 7 locking mechanism 8 link 9 supporting bracket Figure 6 2 1 Opening and closing of the hood 233 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 3 Maintenance procedure Contents of scheduled servicing operations for chassis external part of water cool ing systems charged air cooling and engine air cleaning of tractors BELARUS 2022 5 in course of operation are listed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Opera ae Periodicity h Operation description TONO 250 1000 1 Check oil level in the transmission line X 2 Check oil level in an tank of HLL X 3 Check oil level in an tank of HSC XxX 4 Check hydraulic brake fluid level in tanks of X master cylinders of hydraulic drive of clutch and breaks operating contr
9. fixed position position Ill rear screen wiper and rear screen washer are on simultaneously non fixed During tractor operation on forward motion the cut out switch 8 fig 2 1 1 shall be in on position i e in upper position Pressing the cut out button 6 fig 2 3 1 activates Road train signal lights and an indicating lamp built in the button the Road train lights are installed against order 2s S 2 amp Ts Pasa ty 2 Juul E 1 flash beacon cut out button 2 cut out button of front working lights mounted on the cab roof 3 cut out button of rear inner working lights 4 cut out button of rear outer working lights 5 cut out button for rear screen wiper and washer 6 cut out button of Road train signal lights Figure 2 3 1 Upper shield unit of button switches 2 4 Conditioner control 2 4 1 Conditioner control in conditioning mode The conditioner control unit 4 figure 2 1 1 has switches 1 and 2 figure 2 4 1 1 Switch for air flow adjustment 2 Conditioner cut out switch and cooling capacity adjustment Figure 2 4 1 Conditioner control unit With the help of the switch 1 you can change air flow by changing fan speed The switch 2 allows to change temperature of cold and dry air outcoming from deflectors 6 fig 2 1 1 in the conditioning mode 26 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION THE AIR CONDITIONER CAN BE SWITCHED ON AN
10. For side screen position adjustment the following shall be done take off a cap 5 loosen a nut 6 turning an eccentric bushing 4 figure 3 24 7 find necessary screen position be tween the side glass contour and the screen aperture contour a minimum positive clear ance shall make 2mm tighten the nut 6 put the cap 5 for equal adjoining of the side screen to the window aperture change a quantity of washers 1 installed between the screen 2 and the hinge 3 es T 1 washer 2 screen 3 hinge 4 eccentric bushing 5 cap 6 nut 7 rear sup port of cab frame 8 fixation pin Figure 3 25 7 Side screen adjustment 155 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 24 5 Rear screen The rear screen is open type which is hinged to the cabin frame The rear screen in a closed position is secured by a lock 1 figure 3 24 9 in an opened position it is secured by two pneumatic lifts For rear screen position adjustment the following shall be done take off a cap 3 figure 3 24 8 loosen a nut 4 turning an eccentric bushing 1 find necessary position of the screen between the rear glass contour and the screen aperture contour a minimum positive clearance shall make 2 mm tighten the nut 4 put the cap 3 adjust the position of a lock 1 figure 3 24 9 taking off a cover 2 loosening bolts 3 then moving the lock in horizontal plane in axial and cross directions achieve an opti mal position relative
11. Note Current decrease in charging circuit of auxiliary AB GB2 is below 15 mA can give evidence of standard accumulator charging when this happens the converter shuts down and charge indicating lamp lights up in voltage indicator of ob board circuit Voltage in terminals of AB GB1 and GB2 in proper operating charge system should be much the same and correspond to generator voltage and make from 13 to 15 V 7 14 2 4 Absence of power in engine electronic control module EMC Converter FU26 15A is installed in SU through circuit of which a voltage signal is trans ferred for switching on of power relay of engine and transmission control system of PASU which is installed on tractor side console In case of fuse element FU26 breakdown replace it If after fuse element FU26 replacement power is still not supplied in engine control unit with instruments of board functioning check circuit continuance leading from fuse element to PASU operability of the corresponding relays and fuse elements of PASU see subsection 2 19 Protection and switching unit or contact your dealer 308 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 14 3 Search and elimination of failures in engine start up system 7 14 3 1 Starter makes low rpm if winter operating conditions are observed a Correct possible unfastening or corrosion of power circuit terminals on accumulator batteries on clutch coupling case minus circuit on power circuit breaker QS 1 o
12. Possible failures of transmission hy draulic system and guidelines for troubleshooting Control cylinder rod is moving but Adjust clearance spaces in bend brake FPTO does not transmit full torque or after FPTO shaft disengage ment PTO shaft end extension is still rotating Cylinder rod over stroke a FPTO does not transmit full torque or after FPTO shaft disengagement PTO shaft end extension is still rotating If clearance spaces in bend brakes Replace bends of PTO shaft are adjusted then it gives evi dence of significant wear of bend brakes E Noise in FPTO reducing gear Reducing gear parts breakdown Dismount reducing gear from tractor replace bearings and parts causing failure 284 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 7 Possible failures of brakes and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible brakes failures and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Ta ble 7 7 Table 7 7 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Inefficient braking Increased pedal free travel in Adjust pedal free travel as indicated in subsection creased clearance space between 3 9 3 Service brake adjustment piston and main cylinder piston fol lower Presence of air in hydraulic brake Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hydrau control system lic brake control system as indicated in subsection 3 9 3 Service brake adjustment Hydraulic brake fluid shortage in Bring hydraulic brake
13. a connecting pin diameter 40 b yoke gap height 85 c yoke gap width 70 d yoke position for the implements driven by rear PTO shaft Lowermost position e distance between PTO shaft end extension and 110 160 connection pin axis mm 6 Trailing appliance for connection to DH a type Rigid with tractor drawbar clevis b vertical load in hitch point KN not more than 25 c trailing appliance steering angle in horizontal 60 plane degrees not less than z d protective mean type Safety chain rope e connection point of protective mean to the tractor Lifting device bore 1 Recommended Implement accessories ATTENTION IT IS FORBIDDEN TO PUT DH 2V YOKE TO A POSITION WHERE ITS BODY OVERHANGS THE DH SUPPORTING BRACKET END FOR MORE THAN 15 MM 194 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 4 3 Drawbar hitch DH 3V ue N eo ed k i pane A FIN Y Sts fir bg AA y aN QA a_i FN W ae GJ FN l wy ed W L j Z at IF fr EJ oO a i ESN tc y H J S L J N k i l J i 7 1 l D foo ce aS 73 Ns P N o g i CO an foe ree ee ed a a AQ J N BA ard eae t t ao hifi lt lt U FAIN r N N N WH l Y et ee ee ee 7 i l i jt 7 i y A N 3 JA OS a JEN A x gt K i y LA SK chr sear ee ma T LU UL JEN Wz wsz FN fi zZ N ON Figure 5 4 2 Installation var
14. speed of RLL lowering and uplifting Turning of the handle clockwise against the stop corresponds to the max speed of lowering uplifting turning the handle contraclockwise corresponds to min speed lowering uplifting 47 2022 5 0000010 OM The handle 7 has four positions a middle position disengaged b upper position uplift c lower position lowering in operation automatic control d moving the handle downward nonfixed from B position implement penetra tion herewith the automatic control is off During RLL lowering or penetration the annunciator 6 turns on and during uplifting the annunciator 5 turns on The system automatically limits a frequency of correction under draft control to an average of 2 Hz In case of intensive heating of oil in hydraulic system it is necessary to reduce frequency of correction by moving the handle 2 towards the position method of control and the handle 1 towards turtle In a case of raising working out of the agricul tural implement when moving over consolidated soil or ruts deepen the implement by pressing the handle 7 downwards After releasing the handle 7 will come back to its fixed position of lowering Thus the agricultural implement returns to the mode of the depth set up before by the handle 4 The implement is raised by moving the handle 7 into the upper position When height adjustment of RLL is carried out during operation the
15. 3 16 Hydraulic lift linkage HLL 3 16 1 General information The hydraulic lift linkage ensures operation of the linkage and hydraulic working units of agricultural implements coupled with the tractor It provides a possibility of using depth draft position or combined means for adjusting running depth of agricultural ma chines and implements The rear lift linkage is operated by a regulator with electromag netic control that ensures draft position combined means of control when operating with mounted and semi mounted implements The hydraulic lift linkage shown includes the following main components a welded oil tank 2 figure 3 16 1 with a filler neck 1 mounted on the upper sur face of the coupling body arms 4 controlling spools of the sections of the BOSCH integrated unit 5 a gear type oil pump 14 with a drive 15 proving 1890 rpm of the pump at rated speed of the engine it is mounted on the left of the coupling body high pressure hose 12 drain oil filter 10 with a free drain clutch 9 free drain is provided to meet the re quirement of coupling the agricultural machines that have a hydraulic drive for working unit constant operation hydraulic motor for example seeders low pressure pipelines 7 8 11 Drainage from the RLL hydraulic cylinder rod end is provided to prevent environ mental discharge of oil Note A hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 may be installed instead of BOSCH integrated uni
16. Ajddns samod 9903443 40 0e4 JO asnJ soy jon ul 2Uu s Id Ja eEM JO JOSUBS 0 un jOJ UOD DIUOIJOSs a SuIBbUS 6 aiNJesOdW9 zu iqwe JO JOSUSS g yOO q sny Jayeay wajsAs jo1 u09 u Hu zo pueog 9 Aeldsip uoewoyzui G p394 N O1JUOD O jpuey DIUOIDElO y P 4 N O1 UOD O jep d 004 31U01 799 s ss usey HuldeuUOd Z Wed osu s BUIHUS o yun JOJ UOD 91U01709 SUIBUS y wo ss uley 0l J Jas I 2 ce ee g w i he a 74 2022 5 0000010 OM ae i ee ee 1 intermediate connector of SCR system 2 tank with urea 3 catalyst 4 NOx sensor 5 dosing module urea injector 6 sensor of exhaust gas temperature before the catalyst 7 urea warm up valve 8 feeding module Figure 3 2 2 Selective catalytic reduction system SCR Note The urea warm up valve and the feeding module are located between the catalyst and the coupling clutch body 1 urea delivery hoses 2 sensor of urea temperature in the tank 3 sensor of urea level in the tank 4 harness of SCR system 5 tank with urea Figure 3 2 3 Sensor installation on the urea tank 75 2022 5 0000010 OM se a ls Glan la BL iira pi n 1 NOx sensor module 2 sensor NOx 3 left cab handgrip Figure 3 2 4 NOx sensor installation 1 bracket 2 sensor of a
17. The dosing pump is gerotor type The type of the rotation mechanism two hydraulic cyl inders of bidirectional operation and a steering linkage The front driving axle is portal frame beam type with planetary cylindrical final gears The main drive is a pair of bevel gears with circular teeth The differential is self locked with increased friction The FDA is driven from the gearbox through the frictional hydraulically operated clutch and the crankshaft The FDA control is electro hydraulic The hydraulic lift linkage is remote cylinder providing for the draft position and combined adjustment of tillage depth of agricultural machinery and suppression of vertical oscillation of agricultural implements in traveling position with electrohydraulic system HER of rear lift linkage automatic control The system has three pairs of independent out lets 19 2022 5 0000010 OM Free drain is available at the back of the tractor for operation with hydraulic units with constant delivery hydraulic motors for instance The rear lift linkage is a three point linkage of category 3 under ISO 730 and a link age 3 under GOST 10677 There are two cylinders 90x250 The front lift linkage against order is a three point linkage of category 2 under ISO 730 and a linkage 2 under GOST 10677 There are two cylinders There are two cylinders Ts90x250 Drawbar hitches of a lift type towing yoke DH 2V for coupling with semi trailers and semi trai
18. and floating The first section spool can be fixed in positions uplift neutral and floating it is equipped with a device of automatic return from the position uplift to the position neutral as the preset value is achieved The discharge openings of the valve sections are used for rear outlets of the hy draulic system in case the front lift linkage is mounted the hydraulic cylinders are powered from a middle section of the valve with use of high pressure hoses The valve spools are operated by two directional cables 5 providing control of the valve spools 4 by means of control levers 7 which are located on a panel to the right of the operator s seat The cable braiding is fixed by means of nuts in a bracket 6 from one side and in adapters 4 of the valve Shifting the lever from neutral position forward along tractor movement sets the spools into positions lower and floating backward into position uplift 7 WE Se S z Gi id AN LUP 2 NW A i 8 J 1 high pressure hoses 2 regulator EHR 23 LS 3 hydraulic valve 4 spools adapters 5 operating cables 6 bracket 7 control levers 8 hydraulic cylinder LI90x250 l first spool lever ll second spool lever Ill third spool lever Figure 3 16 5 HLL valve control 135 2022 5 0000010 OM Instead of the BOSCH integrated unit your tractor may be equipped wit
19. 1 compressor 2 line from engine intake manifold 3 condensate drain valve 4 brake valve 5 feed line 6 7 connecting heads 8 control line 9 tank 10 pres sure regulator 11 air bleed valve 12 air pressure sensor 13 emergency air pressure sensor Figure 3 10 2 Double line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes 111 2022 5 0000010 OM Air is taken to the pneumatic drive from the engine intake manifold through the line 2 Figure 3 10 2 The air is compressed in the compressor 1 and delivered to the tank 9 through the pressure regulator 10 maintaining required pressure in the tank From the tank compressed air goes to the brake valve 4 and to the feed line 5 with the connecting head 6 with red cap that is always under pressure The brake valve 4 is connected through the control line 8 with the connecting head 7 with yellow cap There is no pres sure in it Brakes of trailers and agricultural machines are controlled in two modes direct and automatic Direct control of the brakes is executed at the cost of pressure rise in the control line 8 to 0 65 to 0 8 MPa when the tractor decelerates In such case the feed line 5 re mains under pressure and delivery of compressed air to the trailer pneumatic system is retained Automatic control of the brakes automatic braking is executed in case of coupling break and disconnection of the trailer due to pressure drop in the trailer feed line A
20. 16 emergency air pressure sensor Figure 3 10 3 Diagram of combined pneumatic drive of trailer brakes 112 2022 5 0000010 OM If the trailer with single line pneumatic drive should be connected the trailer con necting head will be connected with the connecting head 8 black color and air will come to the trailer pneumatic drive When pressing brake pedals or engaging parking brake compressed air will come out of the connecting line 5 to the atmosphere through the brake valve 4 The air valve group in the trailer will be actuated delivering compressed air from the trailer tanks to the brake chambers and the trailer brakes In case of emergency trailer de tachment the connecting heads get disconnected air from the trailer line comes out to the atmosphere and the trailer brakes automatically The direct brake control is effected at the cost of pressure drop in the connecting line 5 to 0 MPa as the tractor brakes In such case delivery of compressed air to the sys tem stops Automatic brake control automatic braking happens in case of coupling break and trailer disconnection because of pressure loss in the trailer connecting line If the trailer with two line pneumatic drive should be connected the trailer connecting heads will be connected with the connecting heads 7 with red cover and 9 with yellow cover that means with feed line 6 and the control line 10 Herewith compressed air con stantly comes to the trailer through th
21. 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 6 2 1 Calculating method for selection of implements for coupling lf a calculating method is used on the basis of input data and help technical litera ture evaluation by corresponding formulas listed in the reference books comparison of corresponding performance characteristics of a tractor and an implement selection of the implements are carried out and then based on the data received the conclusion about possibility of coupling with tractors BELARUS 2022 5 This method may be recom mended for approximate calculations when there is no experimental data or when it is necessary to know immediately approximate structure of the machine and tractor unit As average values are used at calculations and all features of coupling are not always con sidered the unit made in such a way on the basis of a tractor may sometimes appear not efficient and its may require further development in course of operation in field conditions If a calculating method is used on the basis of reliable data and all power consump tion and environment are considered it is possible to check carefully enough the possibility of coupling of the implements with a tractor It is recommended to do such operational cal culations before purchasing of a new implement 5 6 2 2 Experimental method for selection of implements for coupling When an experimental method for selection of implements and further composition of units by practical inspection on the
22. 33 cover 21 securing bolt and wire 22 lever 23 toothed clutch 28 lock ring 29 securing bolt 30 fork 31 shaft gear 32 pump drive gear 36 nut 38 shaft Figure 3 3 6 Coupling clutch case assembly 84 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 4 Gearbox 3 4 1 General information The gearbox is mechanical fixed ratio with constant mesh gears range type four ranges for forward travel and two ranges for the reverse six speeds within each range are shifted by means of synchronizers The gearbox provides 24 speeds for forward travel and 12 speeds for the reverse and also FDA drive The gearbox layout is introduced in figure 3 4 1 ATTENTION OIL LEVEL IN THE TRANSMISSION SHALL ALWAYS STAY AT THE MARK Tl 5 MM WHEN CHECKED OVER THE OIL LEVEL GLASS TO ENSURE NORMAL OPERATION OF THE GEARBOX AND THE COUPLING CLUTCH IT IS NEC ESSARY TO WATCH THE VALUE OF OIL OPERATING PRESSURE IN THE TRANS MISSION Py INI 1 s T Gas o ma ay f 0 H A Pipe for oil lubrication Location of FDA A Z Oil level glass drive cover Pressure JETE Se ae Oi a wits of engine start bock fs ie T FRA engagement wileh 3 Ji i p mh i pm Insialaon pace 2 for brates k a kpdraibe punigi i NE ae MIT SSS L Place for marking K z x l reariax mikel i pimp pm Place for markie HF KA 1 plat serial mimber in
23. AFTER ENGINE START FOR THE FIRST TIME AND AFTER LONG PRESERVATION LET THE ENGINE OPERATE FOR 2 3 MIN AT IDLE BEFORE LOADING IT TRACTOR OPERATION IS FORBIDDEN IF THE ENGINE EMERGENCY OIL PRESSURE LAMP IS ON WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING STOP THE ENGINE IMMEDI ATELY 163 2022 5 0000010 OM Before starting to move define a necessary speed of tractor movement The speed diagram of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 with tires of basic configuration is given in the instruction table attached to the right glass of the cab and also in subsection 2 13 2 Trac tor velocity diagram To put the tractor in motion the following shall be done reduce engine speed depress the clutch pedal set a required gearbox range using the range shifting lever as per the range shifting dia gram if required press the button of the reduction unit higher pass H Hereby a LED lamp of red color will light up on the speed and pass shifting handle and also the higher pass annunciator will light up on the control panel of the rear axle DL FDA drive and FPTO drive if installed informing that a higher pass of the reduction unit is engaged set a desired speed for this shift the speed and pass shifting lever from neutral N into any of positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 as per the speed shifting diagram disengage the parking break slowly release the clutch pedal increasing at the same time fuel feed The tractor will start moving IT IS FO
24. AZO EMCI G SO cas ctamcenst jaunaseatscanweat gain dhaaansgsatesaecsascaete se iocnaauaeriaecasscante ones 165 42 6 Getting Off THE WACION cerci aa i a A ANa h 165 APT PITO USS aerO 165 4 2 8 Selection of optimal inner pressure in tires depending on operational conditions and load on tractor axles instructions for tire USe noannnennnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnnrrrnnnnn 167 4 2 8 1 Selection of optimal inner pressure in tires depending on operational condi WONS ANGIOAG ON Taclo AXES sses a E S ais 167 4292 IMSICUCHONS TOF UC US Eri I a E ha 2am ta acted yas Beato 171 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 8 3 Permissible combination of front and rear wheels 0cceeeeeeeeeee teens 172 42 al NG G1 SLO eeteeeee eet A TENS ran ne Ps meee Ua eee ere 172 4 2 9 Rear wheel track formation cccccceccee cee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 173 4 2 10 Rear WNECLIWINMING 2i certcosexn cue st ice cod Eo aE EEEE 174 4 2 11 Front wheel track formatiOn cece cece eee ee cece ee eenseeeeeeeeeeeasaeeeteeeeenas 175 4 3 Safety measures to be taken when operating the tractor c cccceeeeee eee 177 4 3 1 General safety measures to be taken when operating the tractor 177 4 3 2 Fire Salely MEASUlCS scarps aeste ote See tees care tame ou cle Ea 180 4 4 Tractor final assembly and ruUn in cece cece cece eee e ee eee ease ee eeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 181 AAA PFACtOr Anal ASSCMDIY vntacnwdaisunec
25. Filling in of the liquid shall be carried out in the following order jack the tractor round the wheel 2 Figure 5 12 1 in such way that the vent 1 is in the above posi tion screw out the spool and insert in its place a compound air water vent 2 Figure 5 12 2 through which simultaneous filling in with water solution and tire venting is car ried out perform filling in with water solution after filling in withdraw the compound vent and screw in the spool meanwhile ad just pressure to the standard tire operating pressure ATTENTION WATER SOLUTION FILLED TIRES PRESSURE SHALL BE CHECKED ONLY WHEN THE VENT IN THE ABOVE POSITION OTHERWISE THE WA TER ENTERING THE TIRE PRESSURE GAUGE CAN RESULT IN PRESSURE GAUGE FAILURE ATTENTION FILL IN LIQUID ONLY INTO THE INNER TIRES OF THE DOUBLED WHEELS AND FOR NOT MORE THAN 40 OF THE TIRE VOLUME 1 vent 2 wheel Figure 5 12 1 Position of the wheel during filling up of the liquid 1 tire 2 compound air water vent Figure 5 12 2 Liquid filling up scheme 5 12 6 Order of partial water or water solution drain from the wheels tires For partial liquid drain the following shall be carried out unload the wheel with liquid jack the wheel in order it not to touch the ground set the wheel in such a way that the vent is in the bottom screw out the spool and drain the water or non freezing solution up to the level of vent posit
26. If power is not sup plied replace the switch 7 14 5 2 Air conditioner does not operate no cooling effect with the motor running Check compressor clutch YC A3 2 operation When switch S1 is turned the com pressor clutch should switch on in one of the positions audible click Otherwise by means of multimeter check operability of pressure sensors module A3 3 Measuring unit outputs 70e K and 70x P should be closed among themselves If this outputs are not closed replace pressure sensors module A3 3 312 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 14 6 Search and elimination of failures in operation of front and rear wiper windscreen washer acoustic alarm 7 14 6 1 Front wiper M4 does not work a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU21 15A of power supply of front wiper M4 replace fuse element if it is faulty b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on carrier socket of wiper wire 65r red or 65B green depending on the wiper speed chosen by means of under wheel switch SA6 If power is not supplied replace the switch If power is supplied replace the wiper 7 14 6 2 Rear wiper M5 does not work a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU6 15A of power supply of rear wiper M5 and rear windscreen washer M6 replace fuse element if it is faulty b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on wiper when switch SA2 is on and availability of ground on wiper If power is not supplied replace the s
27. Interlock switch have follower in the form of rod with normally closed contacts The interlock switch is located in speed control mechanism and put into circuit brown wire be tween coil K9 2 starter relay K9 located in SU and ground When transmission range is engaged breaker contacts will unclose locking engine start When transmission range selector lever is in neutral position the control follower won t have an effect on switch plunger its contacts are closed ensuring ground of coil K9 2 of starter relay K9 and possibility of engine start up To test breaker SB3 operability perform the following remove wires holding block from terminals of switch switch on multimeter in ohmmeter mode by connecting it to breaker SB3 con tact set transmission range selector lever in neutral position breaker contacts should be closed resistance tends to zero set transmission range selector lever in operating position breaker contacts should be unclosed resistance tends to infinity in case the specified requirements are not met dismount the breaker SB3 carry out testing of dismounted breaker if its nonoperability is confirmed replace interlock switch if its operability is confirmed adjust interlock switch using adjusting washer 309 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 Check operability of starter interlock system circuits with GB in on position as fol lows Check operability of circuit from a starter rela
28. Level check in a tractor hydraulic tank and its refill shall be carried out with re tracted cylinder of the implements coupled You must not fill in the oil when working at tachments of the implement coupled are in raised position as it can result in the tank over flow and blow out of elements of a hydraulic drive by the excessive oil being displaced from cylinders at the subsequent landing of the working attachments 199 2022 5 0000010 OM Major characteristics of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 HLL for working attachments drive of other components of the hydraulically operated implements and units coupled are shown in Table 5 8 Table 5 8 Characteristics of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 hydraulic drive Parameter Description opener P Value characteristic 1 Paired hydraulic outputs free tives pars 2 Oil drain line for hydromotors free drain pe One item line 3 Total oil consumption through hydraulic outputs l min up to 53 4 Rated minimum diameter of oil pipeline mm oil pressure pipeline 12 0 oil drain pipeline 16 0 free drain 25 0 5 Hydraulic system working pressure MPa 16 0 6 Pressure relief cracking pressure MPa 20 2 7 Allowable extraction of hydraulic fluid from a tank not more than 8 Allowable hydrostatic power take off GSPTO kW not more than 9 Coupling thread of fast coupling joint sleeves mm oil pressure pipeline and oil drain pipeline M20x1 5 free drain oil pipeline M
29. SEMI TRAILED AND TRAILED IMPLEMENTS FOR FULFILLMENT OF DIFFERENT WORKS WHEN SPEED DOES NOT EXCEEDS 15 KM H TO THE ENDS OF LOWER LINKS OF REAR LIFT LINKAGE Sizes and structure of RLL of tractors BELARUS 2022 5 make it possible to cou ple all implements having the corresponding dimensions of attachment elements of con nection triangle shown in RLL diagram Rear lift linkage diagram of type LL 3 is shown in Figure 5 3 1 Rear lift linkage diagram of type LL 2 is shown in Figure 5 3 2 187 2022 5 0000010 OM In construction of rear LL a possibility of use of an adjusting rod which by fixing of the lower links of a certain size among themselves ensures necessary length of a suspen sion axis and facilitates their connection to an implement For protection of coupled imple ments from rocking length adjustable limit external rods are used To ensure the implement is in the right position the following adjustments of RLL by means of upper link crossbeams and limit rods are provided in vertical and horizontal plane 1 Modification of length of upper link It is carried out in order to ensure penetration of operative parts alignment of run ning depth of operative parts located one after another along the tractor run If mounted plough carriage reaches forward along the tractor run and the front plough body cuts deeper than the rear one extend the upper link and if the front plough body cuts for the more shallow depth than
30. current numeric value of one of tractor system parameters Figure 2 7 3 Information fields of the multifunctional display 1 the digital symbol of the gear engaged digits O to 6 is displayed only on trac tors with the CECS Due to absence of the CECS on BELARUS 2022 5 tractors the number of the gear engaged is not displayed on the multifunctional indicator The informa tional field displays letter A 33 2022 5 0000010 OM The following parameters are displayed in the information field 2 figure 2 7 3 total elapsed engine time instant fuel flow on board voltage remaining fuel volume time of running with remaining fuel rear PTO speed testing workability of soeed sensors testing workability of frequency fuel volume sensor FFVS testing workability and connection of CAN bus to the Integrated Indicator Switching between indication modes of Total elapsed engine time Instant fuel flow Remaining fuel volume Time of running with remaining fuel On board voltage Rear PTO speed and switching between messages on faults are effected with Mode button of the control panel figure 2 7 2 Samples of displaying operating parameters of the tractor on the multifunctional display and their short description are given in table 2 3 Table 2 3 Samples of displaying operating parameters of the tractor on the multifunctional display Parameter
31. disk and the rim mm K mm method tire 420 70R24 The disk mates with the ee Support outer surface The disk mates with the 1890 Support inner surface The rim is turned by 180 The disk mates with the Support inner surface 2105 E 09 Kan O c xX RL O Kaz ua O cc Oo O Q 2 Q The rim is turned by 180 The disk mates with the ENR support outer surface To set a required track proceed as follows brake the tractor using the parking brake Put stop members at the front and at the back of the rear wheels jack up the tractor front part or front wheels one by one ensuring clearance be tween the wheels and the ground to obtain the track by displacing the wheel from one sideboard to the other one without changing disk position with respect to the rim unscrew the nuts fastening the wheel disk to the gear group flange take the wheels off and change from one sideboard to the other one to obtain the track by changing disk position relative to the rim with the wheels taken off the tractor unscrew the nuts fastening the wheel rim to the disk and depending on the track required set mutual arrangement of the rim and the disk as shown in the dia gram in table 4 7 torques of tightening screwed connections that fasten the wheels are given in sub section 6 4 2 Maintenance services in every 125 hours of operation Mounting the wheels make sure the wheel
32. e p 2 i fl i 27 K 26 0 9 K4 K20 2 R XS2 20 345 0 0 7858 Oe f ill 18 3 418 3 aah Oc T XS2 9 SB3 Hl 17a XY ma m re Heating plugs relay Sair i d 50a r a BP2 5 k 12V power feed of PASU 10mm o oHa i z A 3 9 12V power feed of EDC 4mm i a 7 F Ti K 12V power feed of front socket 2 5mm R XS2 10 Bp1 S 0 3 Ret 7 E a z Variant with heating plug electronic unit with 1 Wires 18 265 298 296 32 366 362 37 76 77 84 85 87 87a with section 0 5 mm Wires 1a 13 k 2 2a 8 8a 85 8b 152 153 70 with section 2 5 mm 38a X analogue indication of engine temperature Wires 42 7 7a 78 9 9a 10a 105 106 102 12 12a 15a 155 162 17 17a 20 21 25 25a 26 26a 27 Wires 5 16 with section 4 0 Ar EE YeP 28 29a 30 30a 305 300 302 30e 34 34a 346 39 39a 390 40 40a 400 505 506 502 500 50u 50k Wires 1 12 10 1e 1x 156 with section 6 0 mm reat 1 50 j 50n 50m 50H 50n 50p 50c 50m 50u 504 50w 51 51a 52 59a 593 78 78a 785 79 86 with section 0 75 mm Wires 153 15a 15M with section 25 0 M E 390 P Least Wires 4 4a 48 46 52 50 6x 75 90 15 15e 15x 15u 15K 160 16e 16x 18a 185 20a 205 21 266 Wires 5 5a 55 with section 35 0 m 28a 30d 32a 36 37a 41 42 420 425 44 440 445 446 45 45a 456 450 46 46a 465 47 47a Raia PO ees Wires 56 with section 50 0 mM 61a 74 with section 1 5 mm 2 Heating plug control unit Table C1
33. on annunciator 4 fuse block 5 FDA drive control valve group 6 sensor of FDA drive automatic engage ment 7 sensor of guide wheel turning angle 8 bracket for attaching sensor of guide wheel turning angle 9 bracket activating deactivating sensor of guide wheels turning an gle Figure 3 13 2 FDA drive control 124 2022 5 0000010 OM The system is powered from the tractor on board electrical circuit through the fuse block 4 The FDA drive control system gets powered after the engine has been started The switch 2 has three positions FDA automatic control upper fixed position FDA engaged positively lower fixed position FDA off middle fixed position In position of the switch 2 FDA off the FDA drive clutch is connected with drain and FDA drive is off In position of the switch 2 FDA automatic control the FDA drive is automatically engaged as the tractor reverses by the sensor 6 sending enabling signal depending on the rear wheel skidding Herewith oil flow is supplied under pressure to the FDA drive en gaging clutch The FDA drive is unlocked automatically when the front wheels are turned to the angle of more than 25 to any direction from the straight line position As the tractor reverses and the FDA is controlled automatically the FDA drive always disengages When the switch 2 is set into position FDA engaged positively the FDA drive is forcedly eng
34. red color 6 annunciator of linkage lowering green color 7 handle to control RLL 8 retainer of blocking of RLL control handle 9 trou bleshooting annunciator red color 10 button to engage dampening mode 11 an nunciator of dampening mode activation orange color Figure 2 15 1 RLL control panel Order of RLL control is the following set a method of control depending on operation character using the handle 2 figure 2 15 1 Turning of handle clockwise against the stop position method of control contra clockwise against the stop draft control in between combined control the combined con trol is preferential set a required height of implement uplifting in transport condition with the handle 3 Turning the handle clockwise against the stop corresponds to max uplifting contraclock wise against the stop to min uplifting set tillage depth with the handle 4 Turning the handle clockwise against the stop corresponds to min depth contraclockwise up to A position corresponds to max depth turning of the handle contraclockwise against the stop corresponds to floating position lower the linkage moving the handle 7 to a lower fixed position Then during operation it is required to adjust a trailed implement for optimal opera tion conditions with the handle 2 combination of control means with the handle 4 depth of soil tillage with the handle 1
35. shaft to drive PTO 5 hub 6 bear ing 7 heavy duty shaft 8 bushing 9 torque vibration damper 10 release lever 11 lever age mechanism 12 back plate 13 fork 14 washer 15 adjusting nut 16 throw out bear ing 17 shifter 18 shifter bracket 19 throw out fork 20 control shaft 21 cage 22 pres sure spring 23 insulating washer 24 driven disk Figure 3 3 1 Coupling clutch 78 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 3 2 Peculiarities of clutch installation dismantling and adjustment 3 3 2 1 General information N gt N 4 0 1 RRS La el a oe ee Haack peel a a We ates nae 10 lock plate 11 cage 12 aod J 4 pressure plate 5 bushing 6 R M eed k i EEE be La id sA A Workholder H H f Pate a E D 4 p n p i Rh T y ISSPISS ALEZ i POI NNN 4 ee 400 80 0 0 0 8 EERS bushing ws Z cee aN FIR a ar N we O LL pd m 14 Figure 3 3 2 Installation dismantling and adjustment of clutch release levers B Foka TonTon a Sa a L te er ee ST ee aa EE 2 RSE So eae a mht 9 adjusting nut HEN HR eepe oe le H ANA i a S a ga gl nae eee ee So et ASN SOT NS k ee E Pa EA Yy male S iiz Ha V Up S 5 X i i a re DE E E R NOO 3M 4 A and eat a rn caee
36. 10 11 GOMES Fa MNO MAU ON essan R E ee eee 98 3 6 7 2 Differential lock mechanism adjustMent cccceee cece eee eee eee eeaeenaens 98 3 Rear power takeoff SAAN evscscccerancescicnewenined disaweeonkdudsseuaennanddiesewennndudesagesands 99 FEGA Fal MON aO aseccwa taste ase aiees ieee une aecn wacmaine E 99 See Real Or CONTO oaa dag bua bieaueuad eae seaman esee biadueus tude bana E 101 3 0 Front DOWEr TAKEO SN AM dc veewanavesdviaeswus vesdeiewiwuines EEA 102 CO AC Sica go eee ep es ee ieee SS et ase aeons ee 104 3 91 General IMIOMMANON eeren 104 3292 SENICE Drake COMTO reani E Tr 105 3 9 3 Service brake adjUStMent cece cece cece cece eee e eee ence teat tease enaeenateeaeeenaes 106 SQA Parkina Drake iste scasecessre veocaisudteadecccaGudgeshaccadeesteaseacasducteakeccatausmeisenassn 108 39 5 Parking Drake adjustment niccccnensnsncarmiaemarenaguassanenanaeiarsmnrmaeuesanernnanrenta 109 eM SU tC SY Se i aciern acetates aes eos saspnnee eosuceteaee aioe acs neomaian eae rete anak 110 310 1 GENEL Al MOF MANOM isc sricuractrnc sie a a EEEE 110 3 10 2 Single line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes cc cece cece eee ence teen eens 110 3 10 3 Double line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes cc ccc cece eee ee ee encase nn 111 3 10 4 Combined pneumatic drive of trailer brakes cccc cece cece cece eee teens eee ees 112 3 10 4 1 General InNformatiOn cccc cece cece ee eee eee ee eee
37. 112 120 122 124 bolt 5 7 24 40 57 63 72 82 97 100 103 106 119 bushing 6 8 9 22 23 25 33 34 35 38 39 41 56 59 62 66 71 83 88 101 gear 10 29 tapered bearing 11 adjusting washer 12 secondary shaft 13 21 36 55 61 64 70 85 104 needle bearing 14 37 58 69 synchronizer 15 46 52 109 roller bearing 16 42 78 95 117 shaft 17 31 45 49 75 79 94 107 nut 18 80 87 99 105 128 lock ring 19 threaded bolt 20 73 108 washer 26 74 81 86 93 roller bearing 27 115 121 123 125 126 127 carrier 28 84 clutch 32 spherical bearing 43 50 53 92 96 cage 44 PTO drive shaft 47 dowel pin 48 primary shaft 51 angle piece 54 gearbox case 60 91 gasket 65 fork housing 68 adjusting screws 77 strap 89 102 ring 90 cover 98 creeper drive gear 110 FDA friction coupling 113 guide piece 114 spring 116 locking ball 118 half clutch 129 plate 130 center pin 131 seal ring Figure 3 4 2 second part Gearbox 87 2022 5 0000010 OM The speed group consists of the primary shaft 48 figure 3 4 2 on which the driving gears 56 59 66 71 of the fifth the sixth the third and the fourth speed respectively are mounted on the needle bearings 55 61 64 70 The toothed rim of the shaft 48 is the first speed and the gear 62 is the seco
38. 13 The gear 12 is mounted on the case 10 through a ball bearing 11 which is prevented from axial movement by mounting a strap 8 and bolts 9 Switching between the rear PTO modes standard and economy is effected by a toothed clutch 23 a lever 22 and a switching shaft 38 having flattened surfaces for the wrench To switch between the modes it is required to loosen a securing bolt 39 and turn the shaft 38 until the clutch is engaged after that tighten the securing bolt To switch the standard mode it is required to turn the shaft contraclockwise until it stops to switch the economy mode it is needed to turn the shaft clockwise until it stops The HLL oil pump is driven through the gears 12 and 32 and the transmission hy draulic system drive through the gears 12 32 and shafts 31 37 The driven gears 20 24 are mounted through roller bearings 14 on a driven shaft 16 of the continuous PTO drive The gear is prevented from axial movement by mounting a washer 15 and a lock ring on the shaft 16 The clutch engagement shifter is controlled by means of a fork 30 secured by a bolt 29 83 2022 5 0000010 OM Pi y E 4 i 26 25 26 231 be EER g 1 heavy duty shaft 2 shifter bracket 3 26 cotter pins 4 5 17 25 34 gas kets 6 11 14 27 35 bearings 7 driving shaft 8 strap 9 18 39 bolts 10 clutch case 12 20 24 37 gear 13 splined bushing 15 washer 16 driven shaft 19
39. 2 fault testing annunciator 3 testing jack 4 panel cover Figure 2 9 1 Panel of engine control system The button switch of testing activation 1 figure 2 9 1 is intended to call up active errors form the memory of the engine electronic control unit by means of light codes dis played by the fault testing annunciator 2 This way of testing is alternative in comparison with information display 21 figure 2 1 1 Regarding reading and decoding light errors as well as fault elimination refer to the engine operation manual attached to your tractor The eliminated errors are to be eliminated To eliminate the detected faults please contact your dealer Five heater activation relays are located under the cover 4 from the side as per fig ure 2 9 1 After the key of the starter and instrument switch is turned from the position Off into the position Instruments are on the system is powered After the system has been powered it carries out a self check If there are no errors in the operation of the system the fault testing annunciator 2 on the panel of engine control system shall turn on and go out thus testifying of workability of the annunciator 2 lamp and its correct connection to the tractor on board system A special testing jack 3 is intended for connection of system testing devices KTS of BOSCH company to carry out an extended service diagnostics of the engine under op eration The named system testing devi
40. 3 sealing Figure 6 4 11 Drainage of the sediment from coarse fuel filter ATTENTION IF THE MESSAGE ABOUT PRESENCE OF WATER IN COARSE FUEL FILTER APPEARED IN THE DATA DISPLAY UNIT DRAIN THE SEDIMENT FROM COARSE FUEL FILTER NOT WAITING FOR THE DAY OF MS 1 244 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 2 9 Task 23 Cleaning of the filter cartridges of ventilation and air heating sys tems Ventilation system filters are located on both sides of the tractor cabin as indicated in Figure 6 4 12 Filter consists of two filter cartridges To clean the ventilation system and cabin heating filter it is necessary to perform the following to get access to the filter install the leg support or a small step ladder remove two caps 1 Figure 6 4 19 from the bolts 2 and two caps 3 from the bolts 4 under the overhanging verge of the cabin roof dismount a protection grid 5 by unscrewing two bolts 2 dismount a frame 8 with filter cartridges 7 by unscrewing two bolts 4 and one bolt 6 withdraw the filter cartridges 7 from the frame 8 clean the filter cartridge with a compressed air under pressure of not more than 0 1 MPa Keep the hose spray head not closer than 300 mm to the filter cartridge in order not to damage it install the filter cartridges 7 in the frame 8 than mount the frame 8 and the protec tion grid 5 on the cabin put the caps 1 and 3 on the bolts 2 and 4 accordingly perform the listed operations relating to the filter locat
41. 3 25 5 Figure 3 25 5 Location of transmission number 3 25 7 Rear axle number The rear axle number corresponds to the transmission number 160 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 INTENDED USE OF TRACTOR 4 1 Safety measures to be taken preparing tractor for operation Strict observance of safety requirements ensures safe operation of the tractor and improves its reliability and durability Only persons not younger than 17 holders of a tractor driving license who have been briefed on accident and fire prevention may be admitted to operate the tractor Prior to operating the tractor scrutinize the Operator s Manual and the Engine op eration manual Insufficient knowledge of tractor controls and servicing is a potential of likely accidents When performing depreservation of the tractor and optional equipment follow the fire prevention instructions and sanitary requirements when dealing with chemicals rag wastes and oiled paper Before starting to operate the tractor replace special nuts of rear wheel hubs one at each hub used for tractor fastening on the vehicle platform with the nuts of basic hub configu ration attached in a set pf spare parts tools and accessories Tighten the nuts with a torque of 700 750 Nm The tractor should be run in in accordance with the requirements under subsection 4 4 Tractor final assembly and run in The tractor should be completely outfitted and in good working order DO NOT allow disman
42. 302V lt 40 Not permitted e 160 180 permitted load 10 ZV lt 30 as per technical requirements 302V lt 40 ments Not permitted ATTENTION VALUES MARKED WITH INDEX SHALL BE APPLIED ONLY IN THOSE CASES WHEN A TIRE IS NOT EXPOSED TO A CONTINUOUS USE WITH HIGH TURNING TORQUES AT FIELD WORKS AND OTHER CONDITIONS OF CONTINUOUS USE WITH HIGH TURNING TORQUES THE VALUES CORRE SPONDING TO THE SPEED OF 30 KM H ARE USED ATTENTION AT TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE INCREASE THE PRESSURE BY 30 KPA BUT NOT MORE THAN TO 190 KPA 169 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 4 3 Rates of pressure in rear tires of basic configuration for tractors BELARUS 2022 5 with effective load and speed Pressure in tires kPa Tractor configura Load ap Speed Sale tion plied to front km h e E Inner Outer axle kg 580 70R42 580 70R42 Tractor without 120 100 implements 102V lt 20 120 100 tractor mass is 4390 equal to operational mass as per tech 202V lt 40 120 Not permitted nical requirements 120 100 6000 Tractor with addi tional load when coupled with 6500 agricultural machines 7000 7500 10 20 204V lt 40 Not permitted Oy ON 2A 20 V lt 40 Not permitted Tractor with max permitted load 102V lt 20 160 Not permitted ATTENTION VALUES MARKED WITH INDEX SHALL BE APPLIED ONLY IN THOSE CASES WHEN A TIRE IS NOT EXPOSED TO A CONTINUOUS USE WITH HIGH
43. 5 is intended for performance of various general purpose agricultural operations for basic and preseeding treatment of soil planting of crops and other cultures in a structure with wide span and combined units for harvesting operations in a structure with heavy duty harvesting complexes that are designed for for age conservation crop harvesting for transport and loading operations The tractor BELARUS 2022 5 is a general purpose wheeled tractor of traction class 3 with the wheel formula 4X4 Appearance of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 is presented in figures 1 1 1 13 2022 5 0000010 OM Figure 1 1 1 Tractor BELARUS 2022 5 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 2 Technical specifications Main parameters and technical specifications of the chassis are given in table 1 1 Table 1 1 PM ell title Parameter value for the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 1 Traction class as per GOST 27021 2 Rated traction force kN 3 Engine a model 260 4 S3B TAR charged air c number and position of cylinders d displacement 1 7 12 e engine power kW 1 rated 2 normal f crankshaft rated speed rpm 156 0 3 0 148 6 3 0 2100 g specific fuel consumption at normal power g kW h h turning torque rated factor 249 30 i max turning torque N m 923 0 4 Power on rear PTO in PTO mode 5 Specific fuel consumption at power on not more than 6 Number of gears a for forward travel 24 b for bac
44. 8 8 ee eee ea eae eee eee ee eee Denomination Ne21 Ne22 Ne23 Ne24 NO2 Length qe 8 e Be BBB E S i i Denomination Ne26 Ne27 No28 Ne299 Ne30 Diameter 18 M16 7H M16 7H M16 7H M16 7H Length Y 8 O TB TB 168 Y 23 eoan a a a a a a aa a a M16 7H M16 7H M16x7H M16x7H 1 a a a a AMR GRE REINO De A SS ne OL Diameter 2 8 1 8 M22x156h M22x1 5 6h a a l a O M22x1 5 6h M22x1 5 6h M10x6H M10x6H M20x6H E a l M20x6H M20x6H M20x6H M20x6H I mI Ir I II Ia aI Denomination Ne 51 Ne52 Ne53 O Neoe5 amp M20x6H M20x6H ee Length Bottom hole Thread parameters for a screw hole NOTES sizes in Table 5 15 are given in mm Holes 1 26 38 49 right and left Holes 49 53 n 54 for installation of pins Holes 1 31 odd numbers upper row Holes 2 32 even numbers low row In course of mounted components installation ensure safety of bushings in holes 1 6 and 14 It is not recommended to use holes with bushings meant for coupling ATTENTION IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE SIDE HOLES WITH BUSHINGS MOUNTED LOADER COMPONENTS SHOULD NOT CAUSE BUSHING DESTRUCTION 229 2022 5 0000010 OM SS 41 42 TF oh ed 2 h 43 a LIN WY bb rar y oe lt 39 4 40 40 42 i N M 150 70 115 5855 DED eae a ee ee ee ee eS 25 2i 29 26 28 30 ae 19 21 23 20 22 2 lIEFT SIDE 150 _ 150 50 11 1
45. 80 in the gearbox case In the case 54 the shaft 117 with the half clutch 118 the bushing 119 and the FDA friction coupling 110 is mounted In the case 54 on the carriers the fork 30 switching the toothed clutch 28 the fork 111 switching the toothed clutch 84 and the fork 3 switching the synchronizer 14 are mounted The carriers are secured in the case by means of ball locks In the fork housing 65 three carriers the fork 67 the ball lock and parts of the mechanism that locks simulta neous engagement of two speeds a ball a pin are mounted The fork housing 65 is fas tened on the gearbox case 54 The shifting forks are mounted on the carriers 123 126 and are fixed with adjusting bolts and further locked with wire 88 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 4 2 Mechanism of engine start up lock with range engaged and mechanism of FDA disengagement when reversing To prevent the possibility of engine start with the tractor speed engaged a special locking device is installed It consists of a switch 6 figure 3 4 3 a pin 8 a rod 2 axis 3 balls 4 11 As the range is engaged the lock mechanism opens contacts of the switch 6 and breaks the circuit of interposing starter relay and the solenoid starter switch To adjust the switch 6 it is necessary to mount a required number of adjusting shims 7 if the adjust ment is not effected by mounting a required number of shims then it is needed to replace the switch and repeat the adjustment ATTENTION BEFORE
46. ASSIOMNMOM aee E EN 13 1 2 FECHIGAl SDECIICANONS nec txarcacdewaannannensdeeatearennsepeammareansdeseerarmaniayeaananeabean 15 ISS FACtOl COMPOSIVONM ticscortiiies ti neeiatwet une E EE 18 1 4 Vibration level at operator s working place of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 e eeee 20 1 5 Noise level at operator s working place of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 08 20 LO RACION Manin G a 42ceu nesta cee nGa cil oe me areleee areas eG ers arth oie aoe eetns 21 LT da EE peer ere SR nc E AA eg A Re nen ee eee mee cee 21 2 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS 0c ccc ccc cece ence eee e eee eenaeee teens 22 2 1 Layout of controls and instruments of the tractor ccc cece cece eee ee teen eeaes 22 22 OWIICHES OF instrument DOAN six rrna ea aAa EEEE 23 2 3 Upper shield unit of button switches occ ccc cece eee eee neat eee eeneeeeeeeeeennaes 26 24 COMGINONeh COMUO lessee cca erases att atten chet tata a aa ahetu E OAR 26 2 4 1 Conditioner control in conditioning MOdE cccccecc ee cee eee ee eee eeeeeeee eee enes 26 2 4 2 Conditioner control in heating MOE cc cece eee c eee cece e eee e eaten eeeeeeeee ees 2 24 3 Cab ventila Onnes E ee ace eee ee ct OAE EVES 28 25 Instrument Doade enaner E iaden 28 26 Pilot lampS Niteen OE aAA E ORATIE 30 2 7 Integrated indicator and integrated indicator control panel ceeeeeeees 31 2 VOEN ral MOM MAU Oee E R E TAE ET T 31 2 2 As
47. Adjustment of clutch control Clearance between operating cyl Adjust clearance space according to clause 3 3 4 1 inder rod 24 Figure 3 3 4 and hy Adjustment of clutch control draulic amplifier push rod 27 is nil Air in clutch control hydraulic system Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hydrau lic system Zi 2022 5 0000010 OM Continuation of Table 7 1b Failure l Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Insufficient level of hydraulic brake Fill hydraulic brake fluid to the required level in fluid in hydraulic system reservoir main cylinder reservoir Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hydraulic system Leakage of work space of main Replace cups and O rings in main and operating and operating cylinder due to cylinder in case they are worn out Check if cylinder damage wear of cups and O rings bearing surface has sharpened edges ridges or pits Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hy draulic system Brake fluid leakage in joints and Tighten up joints replace damaged parts Circulate pipelines in hydraulic drive system fluid through the hydraulic system Air inflow in hydraulic drive system Clogging of opening in tank fitting Unclog the opening Circulate fluid through the hy causing depression in main cylin draulic system der as a result of which the air leaks into cylinder through sealing Clogging of pipelines of hydraulic Replace pipelines Ci
48. E pressure sensor V V VRAS co Information disptay 803 tT 1682 P 5 V power supply of urea pressure sensor V_V_5VPRAS Outer view of XS39 1 ae BERETS ERIS 157a 3X Signal of urea pressure sensor 0 38 A PRAS XS4 1 0 V power supply of urea pump G_G_RAPMP 180a X 17 V power supply oF urea pump OV RAST srz Manual control sensor 124a K Signal of valve of urea reverse flow O_S RARV filt 173a Ky Actuating signal of common heating relay O0_S_MRHH 194 Ky Tt all 193a K Actuating signal of relay fo heat urea charging hose O_S_ PHH K9Z 192 0 EEEN E a a E Actuating signal of relay to heat feeding module 0_S_ SMH K25 125 C TTT E Control of heating of urea charging hose _ A_PHH 158 5 TT E Ee eee ees a E y Leal of heatha of irei biete Tora TA S E eo a TE on SGT oP Sage E Speed FION 49 3 AOT a a 9 202a K Signal of engine rotation speed O_F ENGN K4 9 149 3K a zo a mae Mae ss sir Cable recepracte opaa OO T mR 120a C 1330 4 EEN E eae ree E ac aE amy ee aa EY a a i E a sages S848 ie 3 5 E a ododd dodot 139 0 7 Ambient temperature sensor Ss lt 3 eh Pasar emeena se ES SS RS Na RS I m xS25 XS26 xs27_ SESS TSR Fema recprce reset _ d ont fT mi EL E a a a sai 5 ae a a C e Raa anes o lt lt fi e 24 V remote battery Connectors of AMP company Zz of charging hose of drain hose of intake hose pee hE Female receptacle 0 1418984 1 a esting connector x 3 i i l al sell pA
49. Electrical circuit diagram of electrical equipment of BELARUS 2022 5 tractor Table C1 continued D lt e Designation Denomination Npumeyauue AE P SCS Cae Rossi SSCS J 2 SCS EES voem SSCS S OT e a E E Cee Lamp akranesi OOOO G owa a meas eer asansa taa i Se B amaes a GEE FurFu3o cut out ooo a ef 332 Doubte end borns oo e e Dowbte end bot M Me Doubte end borns MLS eba 25A relay power contacts fs CC 25A relay coll ns 45A relay power contacts fa fo k2 45Aretycot oo e e Ke Heating plugs unit o G K941 Starter retay power contacts e e ko2 Starterrelayeot 0 e e E S Table C1 continued mn ar Designation Denomination Npumeyauue AAG oe SSC SCS TR Aerator addedrestonee oS E E vs Rectifier dude OOOO S a E Trust Fuse tie dt ar PNA saute SSCS PFU 20a cutout tse i A Tot Aerator av dew OOOO a noe Gene Accunstater battery Baa E Pat towpitentern SSCS wae Wohnen nore SSC PS E Tact Piortompunt SSCS Pass Roatan tens SSCS SPSS A PC CA E PSS Cas fem ooo S ew frenes SSCS SCS E E E OCS m ee OOOO p me Poraiel notion sereen wpe SSCS ws sereenwner SSCS CSCS 330 Table C1 continued nn _ Designation Denomination Npumeyauue oi __ ntegratetindeatr SSCS CCS e S ast 20v remote battery a SP SS sa Roadetrahntanpawieh E SP CCS C sme Switeh of sereen wiper and wasr oS sas Working Ugh ear externat o
50. Lowering valve of the section EHR 23LS disassembly procedure put the electro hydraulic section EHR back in its place Deadlock of the lowering valve of a To eliminate failure contact your dealer regulatory section if hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 is installed 304 2022 5 0000010 OM End of Table 7 13 Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting Spontaneous lifting of RLL lifting without a command received from the in strument panel or remote control buttons Deadlock of the lift spool of a regu Elimination of failure should be carried out directly latory section EHR 23LS if inte in tractor without the need of integrated unit disas grated unit BOSCH is installed sembly for which perform the following thread out four screws fastening lower solenoid 13 Figure 7 13 1 then withdraw the solenoid withdraw the lift spool 14 and the spring 15 rinse the mentioned components and the bore in the section housing assemble the lift valve in reverse sequence Deadlock of the lift spool of a regu To eliminate failure contact your dealer latory section if hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 is installed Failure diagnostics signaling device located on the RLL control panel re ports numerical error codes Damage in electrical wiring sole Eliminate the failure according to the subsection noids corrosion of terminals sen 7 12 Possible failures in the electronic control sys sors failure force or posit
51. Moving the handle 7 up or down deactivates the annunciator 9 In case failures are detected in the system after the engine start the annunciator 9 begins to show code information of the failure If necessary the system gets blocked The failure code is displayed as a two digit number where the first digit is equal to the number of flashings of the annunciator 9 after the first long pause and the second digit 50 2022 5 0000010 OM is equal to the number of flashings after the second long pause For example the opera tion algorithm of the annunciator 9 is the following engine start continuous glowing after the system is unblocked the annunciator goes out three time flashing of the annunciator long pause glow missing six time flashing of the annunciator long pause glow missing It means that the system has a failure with a code 30 If several failures are de tected simultaneously the system indicates failure codes one after another dividing them with a long pause All failures are divided by the system into three groups complex medium and light lf complex failures are detected the control is stopped and the system gets deacti vated The system is not controlled either with the control panel or with the remote buttons The troubleshooting annunciator shows a failure code After the failure has been elimi nated and the engine started the system recovers With medium failures the control is sto
52. PTO shaft can not be engaged and its end extension does not rotate When the FPTO is engaged indi cating lamp does not light up unit does not operate or FPTO can be engaged only for a very short pe riod Pressure channel loss in FPTO control Comply with instructions of subsection 7 3 Possible failures in the electronic system for rear axle differ ential lock front driving axle drive front power take off shaft control GB reducing gear and guidelines for troubleshooting FPTO control valve spool jamming is possible Check control valve operability by pressing the rub ber cap of electromagnet After pressing the cap cyl inder rod must be shifted If cylinder spool does not move replace the control valve If the control valve spool moves and cylinder rod remains fixed then check tractor transmission hydraulic fluid pressure Working pressure should be within 0 9 to 1 2 MPa In case pressure is below the required value elimi nate transmission hydraulic system failure as pro vided by subsection 7 9 Possible failures of trans mission hydraulic system and guidelines for trouble shooting Front PTO does not transmit required power FPTO shaft end extension is rotat Operation at lower pressure in transmission hydraulic system skidding of FPTO band brake Operation with FPTO at lower pressure in trans mission hydraulic system is excluded Eliminate transmission hydraulic system failure as provided by subsection 7 9
53. STARTIING THE ENGINE SET THE RANGE SHIFTING LEVER INTO NEUTRAL POSITION To disengage the FDA as the tractor reverses there is a device which consists of a pin 15 a spring 16 a switch 18 When the range shifting lever is set into neutral and any range of forward travel is engaged the range shifting lever is in front position the contacts of the switch 18 are open As the reverse range is engaged the range lever is in back position the contacts of the switch 18 are closed and the FDA drive automatic control turns off accordingly To adjust the switch 18 it is required to mount a required number of the adjusting shims 17 if the adjustment is not effected by mounting a required number of shims then it is needed to replace the switch and repeat the adjustment 9 amp 5 ie E E A 15 B 16 7 12 18 10 NN PVG 1 15 pin 2 rod 3 axis 4 11 ball 5 10 14 16 spring 6 18 switch 7 17 adjusting shim 8 pin 9 guide member 12 washer 13 bolt Figure 3 4 3 Mechanism of engine start up lock with range engaged and mecha nism of FDA disengagement when reversing 3 4 3 Gearbox control mechanism 3 4 3 1 General information The mechanism of gearbox control consists of a speed shifting mechanism and a range shifting mechanism with an electrohydraulic system of switching between the higher H and lower L passes of the gearbox reduction unit 3 4 3 2 Speed shifting mechani
54. THE YELLOW COVER OF THE CON TROL LINE SHALL RISE FROM ZERO TO 0 65 0 8 MPA AS THE INTERCONNECTED BRAKE PEDALS ARE FULLY DEPRESSED OR THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER DIS PLACED TO THE MAX VALUE 115 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 10 5 Check and adjustment of pneumatic system pressure regulator It is necessary to adjust the pneumatic system pressure regulator during mainte nance MS3 and also when the pressure regulator operation is disturbed as well as after its disassembly for washing or for replacement of worn out parts Check and adjustment of the pneumatic system pressure regulator should be made after adjustment of service brake control of parking brake control and brake valve actua tor Check the pneumatic system pressure regulator in the following order connect the pressure gage with scale factor of 0 01 0 02 MPa and scale at least up to1 6 MPa to the connecting head with red cover take off a cap 1 figure 3 10 6 using a wrench screw a cover 2 to the casing against the stop turn the pneumatic compressor on start the engine and fill the tank with compressed air until a safety valve 7 is actu ated at pressure of 0 85 1 MPa If the valve is actuated at pressure less than 0 85 MPa or more than 1 MPa make its adjustment with a screw 9 having previously loosened it and then having tightened a lock nut 8 Adjust the pneumatic system pressure regulator in the following order gradually unscrewing of the cover 2 adju
55. TRACTOR INCREASE TIRE LIFE AND DECREASE WEAR OF POWER TRAIN COMPONENTS COMBINATION OF WORN OUT AND NEW TIRES OR TIRES WITH DIFFERENT DIAMETERS OR DIFFERENT ROLLING RADIUS MAY RESULT IN EXCES SIVE WEAR OF TIRES AND BREAKDOWN OF FDA PARTS THE TABLE 4 4 PROVIDES PERMITTED COMBINATION OF TIRES FOR FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Table 4 4 Permissible combination of front and rear tires 420 70R24 480 65R24 11 2R24 Bt fe 580 70R42 11 2R42 S a es ee ee 4 2 8 4 Tire inflation Inflate tires through an air bleed valve of a pressure regulator 1 figure 4 2 2 for this do the following let air out of a balloon 3 of the pneumatic system through a condensate removing valve unscrew a winged nut 2 of the air bleed valve cap connect a pipe to inflate tires to the air bleed valve cap and to a tire valve start the engine and inflate the tire to reach a required pressure controlling it with a pressure gage detach the pipe from the tire valve and from the air bleed valve cap screw the winged nut back on the air bleed valve cap ATTENTION AS PRESSURE IN THE BALLON GOES UP TO 0 77 MPA THE COMPRESSOR IS SWITCHED TO IDLE RUNNING BY THE PRESSURE REGULATOR AND TIRE INFLATION STOPS AUTOMATICALLY FOR THIS REASON CHECK THE PRESSURE OVER THE INDICATOR ON THE DASHBOARD FROM TIME TO TIME AND IF NECESSARY REDUCE IT THROUGH THE CONDENSATE REMOVING VALVE 1 pressure regulator 2 winged nut 3 balloon of the pneumatic sys
56. TRENCHES AND PITS IS NOT ALLOWED 5 13 2 Application of substances for the purpose of chemical treatment The cabin is equipped with ventilation heating and conditioning system according to GOST 12 2 120 In ventilation system there are four paper filters with performance capa bilities according to GOST ISO 14269 5 Cabin design ensures its proofness under GOST ISO 14269 ATTENTION CABIN OF THE TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 CAN NOT PROTECT FROM POSSIBLE DAMAGING EFFECT OF SUBSTANCES USED FOR CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF AGRICULTURAL PLANTS AND SOILS INCLUSIVE OF SPRAY TREATMENT THEREFORE WHEN TREATING CHEMICAL SUBSTANSES THE OP ERATOR SHALL WEAR INDIVIDUAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH OPERATING CONDITIONS IT IS FORBIDDEN TO PLACE SUBSTANSES USED FOR CHEMICAL TREAT MENT OF AGRICULTURAL PLANTS AND SOILS IN THE CABIN THE OPERATOR MUST NOT ENTER THE CABIN WEARING CLOTHES OR SHOES CONTAMINATED WITH SUBSTANCES USED FOR CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF AGRICULTURAL PLANTS AND SOILS For safe and proper application of the specified substances it is necessary to com ply with instructions written on the labels and documents accompanying the substances All individual protective equipment and specialized clothing kKnockabout suit and foot gear etc corresponding to the operating conditions and current safety requirements are required If the use of a breathing mask inhaler is required for chemical treatment by the application data sheet of the subst
57. The figure 2 22 2 shows position pneumatic system compressor off 65 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 23 Connector elements of the electrical equipment 2 23 1 Socket to connect coupled agricultural equipment A standard seven pin socket with an additional receiver to connect a portable lamp figure 2 23 1 is intended to connect current consumers of a trailer or trailed agricultural implement It is mounted on the rear cab support A male plug of wire harness from a trailer or coupled agricultural implements is connected to the socket 1 left turn indicator 2 horn 3 ground 4 right turn indicator 5 right clear ance lamp 6 brake light 7 left clearance lamp 8 receiver to connect a portable lamp or other electrical elements with useful current up to 8A Figure 2 23 1 assignment of seven pin socket terminals with an additional receiver to connect a portable lamp 2 23 2 Connection of additional electrical equipment of coupled machines To control the working process of coupled machines it is assumed to install control equip ment control consoles which belongs to the coupled machine Coupled machines are equipped with various electrical and electronic units the ac tivity of which can influence readings of tractor instruments Thus the used electrical in struments shall have a certificate of electromagnetic compatibility as per international re quirements Connect electrical equipment of coupled m
58. Variant 2 1 gauge to indicate oil pressure in the transmission system 2 signal lamp of emergency air pressure in the pneumatic system 3 gauge to indicate air pressure in the pneumatic system 4 pilot lamp of additional accumulator battery charge with 24V 5 voltage gauge 6 signal lamp of reserve fuel volume in the tank 7 gauge to indicate fuel volume in the tank 8 signal lamp of emergency temperature of engine coolant 9 gauge to indicate temperature of engine coolant 10 gauge to indicate oil pressure in the engine lubrication system 11 signal lamp of emergency oil pressure in the engine lubri cation system Figure 2 5 1 Instrument dashboard 2 5 1 The gauge of oil pressure in the transmission hydraulic system 1 figure 2 5 1 indicates oil pressure in the hydraulic system of friction clutches control in tractor transmis sion The scale of oil pressure gauge has three zones working from 800 to 1500 kPa green color emergency two from 0 to 800 kPa and from 1500 to 1800 kPa red color The normal working oil pressure in the hydraulic system of the transmission is 900 to 1100 kPa 2 5 2 The scale of the gauge of oil pressure in the pneumatic system has three zones working from 500 to 800 kPa green color emergency two from 0 to 500 kPa and from 800 to 1000 kPa red color A signal lamp 2 red color is built in the gauge scale which lights up when t
59. accumulation in cavities and Rinse and clear pressure control valve channels of pressure control valve Adjust pressure control valve as specified in sub valve adjusting cap section 3 10 5 Check and adjustment of pneumatic system pressure control valve control valve spring shrinkage workshop ing part of pressure control valve or refer pressure control valve to repair workshop Cc Pressure control valve gets actuated frequently engages pneumatic com pressor without air bleeding from receiver tank Air leakage from pneumatic sys Detect and stop the air leakages tem or pressure control valve fail ure of back pressure valve Pressure control valve operates in mode of pressure relief valve Pressure control valve adjusting Adjust pressure control valve as specified in sub system pressure control valve ton seizure seizure control valve adjusting cap 288 2022 5 0000010 OM End of Table 7 8 Failure external manifestations cause Air feeding in connecting hose through air bleed valve of pressure control valve is nil valve rod in pressure control valve tighten it Decompress receiver tank to the value below 0 65 pneumatic compressor for idle MPa stroke eee eee Ineffective operation of trailer brake Brake valve actuator got out of ad Adjust brake valve actuator as indicated in clause justment 3 10 4 2 Check and adjustment of single line and double line pneumatic system brake valves Brak
60. adjustments 2 20 1 General information The seat has a mechanical suspension consisting of two spiral torsion springs and a gas charged shock absorber of bidirectional operation A scissors type guiding mecha nism ensures a strictly vertical movement of the seat A dynamic seat stroke is 100 mm ATTENTION BEFORE STARTING TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR ADJUST THE SEAT TO REACH THE MOST COMFORTABLE POSITION CARRY OUT ALL ADJUSTMENTS WHEN STAYING IN THE SEAT THE SEAT IS CONSIDERED CORRECTLY ADJUSTED ACCORDING TO THE MASS IF IT MOVES HALF OF THE STROKE UNDER THE OPERATOR S WEIGHT THE SUSPENSION STROKE IS 100 MM 2 20 2 Seat adjustments 1 handle to adjust according to the weight 2 handle for longitudinal adjustment 3 handwheel to adjust the backrest tilt Figure 2 20 1 Seat adjustments The seat has the following adjustments adjustment according to the operator s weight It is carried out by means of a handle 1 figure 2 20 1 within the range from 50 to 120 kg To adjust the seat for a bigger weight it is re quired to shift the pawl of the lever 1 into position A and tighten the springs with a reciprocal movement To adjust the seat for a smaller weight it is required to shift the pawl into position B and release the springs with a reciprocal movement longitudinal adjustment It is carried out by means of a handle 2 within the range of 80 mm from the middle position To move the seat forward backward
61. after the given mode is exited input of a non fixed parameter value digits of the set parameter value stop flashing A newly entered value is set last in the list of parameter values permitted for program ming At single pressing the button Mode in the programming mode entering an arbitrary value of a parameter is not possible If the buttons Mode Parameter Value are not pressed within seven seconds in the mode of entering a non fixed value the Integrated Indicator transits automatically into the main operation mode of the multifunctional indicator storing the set parameter values It is allowed to enter one non fixed value within the following ranges for Z parameter from 23 to 69 for l parameter from 1 000 to 4 000 for R parameter from 400 to 1000 for KV2 parameter from 0 346 to 0 600 for ZV parameter from 12 to 99 for V parameter from 0 to 1000 A list of programmable parameter values for the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 graphic samples of displaying parameters and their values on the multi functional indicator in the pro gramming mode is given in the table 3 4 7 6 J 147 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 3 4 List of programmable parameter values for the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 Parameter Z Z number of teeth of gears of final shafts of driving wheels left and right above which speed sensors are mounted Parameter l is a step up
62. aiceces banat ast eat ede ea a bea e A teretetr ua 195 54 4 Drawbar teM DeZ Rictancd vctecetsaued erea ied eb acatd dune pains EELEE 196 5 4 5 Drawbar hitch DH ITM Tirri sinica R 197 5 4 6 5 Drawbar hitch DH 1 ccc cece cece eee een ete eeensetteeeeneeteeeeaaeeteeeegaentes 198 5 5 Usage patterns of tractor hydraulic system for driving of operated parts and other elements of unitized hydraulically operated machines and aggregates 199 5 6 Selection of implements for COUPIING 0 cece cece cence eee e ee eeneeeeteeeeeennanees 201 5 01 GeNEeLalMINSUIMICHONS scpreie sate dacie eine atea vrrsdecnceedcers esnea aE 201 5 6 2 Methods of selection of the implements for COUDIING cccceeeeeee eee eee 201 5 6 2 1 Calculating method for selection of implements for Coupling 0000 202 5 6 2 2 Experimental method for selection of implements for Coupling 005 202 5 7 Test of correctness of composition of the machine and tractor unit 08 205 5 0 SElIOCHOM Of DIOUQNS eenaa a R S Sean seuss S dace 206 5 9 POWer lake Olr Shalt GNU Sexier cca te eats ee ee PEE eie aes 207 5 10 Determination of PTO shaft and cardan shaft applicability 0000 cee 208 5 11 Features of application of PTO shafts and cardan shafts cccceceeeeee ees 211 5 12 Ways of changing of drawbar features and passing ability of the tractors 215 B12 Gen
63. and a corresponding pres Rate of solution sure kPa for one tire Tire stan dard size 11 2R24 420 70R24 480 65R24 4250 580 70R42 3970 11 2R42 inner pressure shall be increased by 25 values can be applied only for outer tires when tires are used in a twinned vari ant Notes 1 Pressure shall be set in cold tires 2 Performing operations requiring large pulling force on the hook set the pres sure as for the speed of 30 km h When performing transport operations on roads with solid surface increase the pressure by 30 kPa 3 Tractor operation with twinned tires is permitted only at the speed of 20 km h 4 Total loading capacity of twinned tires shall not exceed the loading capacity of a single tire by more than 1 7 times 5 When twinning make sure the pressure of outer tires is 1 2 1 25 times lower than the pressure of inner tires 168 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 4 2 Rates of pressure in front tires of basic configuration for tractors BELARUS 2022 5 with effective load and speed Load lied Pressure in tires kPa Tractor configu oad applie ration to front axle kg Speed km h Siete Siete 420 70R24 plements tractor mass is 102V lt 30 equal to opera tional mass as per technical require 302V lt 40 Tractor with addi ea tional load when e al 102V lt 30 ricultural ma chines 302V lt 40 Not permitted V lt 10 130 102V lt 30 Not permitted
64. and force sensors in proportion to the balance set with a handle to select the control mode 2 on the control console Note The rules of RLL control are described in subsection 2 15 Rear lift linkage control The electric circuit diagram of real lift linkage electronic control system is given in subsection 7 12 Possible failures in the electronic control system of RLL and guidelines for troubleshooting 142 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 20 Front lift linkage 3 20 1 General information The front lift linkage is installed on the tractor against order The front lift linkage is intended for operation of the tractor with complex units and serves for coupling the tractor with mounted agricultural machines located in front of the tractor and also for installation of ballast weights The tractor with FLL is equipped with a continuous power takeoff shaft that is mounted on a front plane of a bracket 5 figure 3 20 1 The FLL is mounted on a front plane of a beam 9 and is attached with additional plates to the side beam surface In a lower part of a bracket 5 of the FLL there are two eyelets to which two turnbuckles 6 are attached The other ends of the turnbuckles are at tached to two brackets 7 which are mounted on strengthening strips High pressure hoses 10 connect one section of the valve group located behind the tractor cab with hydraulic cylinders 3 of the lift linkage The double action hydraulic cylinders are attached to the b
65. are still not being displayed replace FFVS 12B Indicator S H he Figure 7 14 3 Diagram for connection of FFVS to triple circuit junction socket Table 7 14 Purpose for which contact socket contacts were designed number fuel volume indicator signal to indicator S E 2 Sensor power supply ground a a sensor power supply 12V 318 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 15 Possible failures of air conditioning and cab heating systems and guide lines for troubleshooting List of possible failures of air conditioning and cab heating systems and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Tables 7 15a and 7 15b Table 7 15a Possible failures of air conditioning and cab heating systems and guidelines for troubleshooting Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting Warm air is not supplied into the cab Coolant is not circulated through heating unit turn over heater control valve Open heater control valve heater fan is out of operation Correct fan trouble check electric circuit of fan switching on according to electrics diagram in An nex C Warm air of high humidity is supplied into the cab Leakage of coolant in heating ra Stop leakage or replace heating radiator diator Leakage of coolant in heating sys Tighten up coupling bands tem connection WARNING DURING TRACTOR DISCONNECTION CLOSED CIRCUIT AIR CON DITIONING SYSTEM MAY BE DETACHED BY MEANS OF SEPARATI
66. below the specified limit adjust valve by installation of auxiliary washers 5 Figure 6 4 38 between spring 3 and plug 6 Valve 7 maintains oil pressure before centrifuge rotor It should be from 0 77 to 0 83 MPa and can be adjusted by means of installation of washers 9 Lubrication valve 12 is ad justed for pressure from 0 2 to 0 25 MPa and maintains oil pressure in GB lubricating sys tem Valve adjustment can be performed by means of washers 11 To increase pressure increase number of washers to reduce pressure decrease number of washers LF E SSS MRL VA SS f 7 iy 12 1 GB driven centrifuge 2 valve 3 spring 4 casing 5 washer 6 plug 7 rotor valve 8 spring 9 washer 10 spring 11 washer 12 lubrication valve Figure 6 4 38 Adjustment of valves of GB driven centrifuge ATTENTION IF PRESSURE FALLS UP TO 0 7 MPA STOP THE TRACTOR AND CCORRECT FAILURE IN TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 266 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 8 3 Task 64 Maintenance of engine air cleaner Maintenance of engine air cleaner should be performed after air cleaner filter indi cating lamp gets on which is located in control indicator unit at instrument board If the indicating lamp is on replace main filter cartridge MFC To replace MFC perform the following open tractor hood mask to get access to air cleaner pull yellow locking device 1 Figure 6 4 39 turn cover 2 countercl
67. brakes and if necessary add as per section 6 Maintenance services fill the engine cooling system with cooling fluid through the extension tank filler Fill until the cooling fluid level in the extension tank is 50 70 mm below the top edge of the filler check and if necessary set a desired pressure in tires according to tables 4 2 and 4 3 make sure there are protective guard shields for RPTO FPTO etc carry out operations in shift time technical maintenance of the engine listed in the engine operation manual check engine running operability of lighting and warning devices action of brakes and steering control and also check functioning of the other systems and units of the trac tor over on board control gauges Before starting to run in check tightness of nuts attaching rear wheels to the hub the torque shall make 700 to 750 N m nuts attaching front wheels to FDA gear group flanges the torque shall make 280 to 320 N m and nuts attaching the front wheel disks to the rim brackets the tightening torque shall make 180 to 240 N m 4 4 3 Tractor run in ATTENTION THE FIRST 30 HOURS OF TRACTOR OPERATION HAVE GREAT INFLUENCE ON OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS AND LIFE SPAN OF THE TRACTOR YOUR TRACTOR WILL FUNCTION PROPERLY FOR A LONG TIME PROVIDING YOU CARRY OUT THE RUN IN CORRECTLY AND PERFORM OPERATIONS IN TECHNICAL MAINTENANCE IN TERMS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE SERVICES ATTENTION IT IS OBLIGATARY TH
68. cel decane bealectlenned aa 316 7 15 Possible failures of air conditioning and cab heating systems and guidelines TOM TFOUIDIC SMO OUI G eate escheat eem E EA EREE ETE E 319 SI RACTOR STORACE ouer a E TN 321 0T General INSUUCHONS uee e wae edn ee ei eE AT Oa ER 321 8 2 Requirements for inter shift storage of MACHINES cece eee eee cena eeeeeeeeaes 321 8 3 Requirements for short term tractors StOrage ccccceee cence eee eeeeeeeneeenaeeees 321 8 4 Requirements for outdoors long term StOrage cccceec cece cece teense eeaeeeaeeeens 321 So i OSENI araa E neath nuilenie anni soeiaak eau E santa 323 8 6 Depreservation and represervatiOn ccc cece c eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeeneeees 323 8 7 Putting tractor into operation after long term Storage ccc cee eee cena ee eeee eens 323 8 8 Safety requirements for preServatiON c ccc cce cece eee ee eee e eee enneeeeeeeeeeenanaees 324 9 TRACTOR TRANSPORTATION AND TOWING 0 ccccceeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 325 OF maclor tral epon aOR sser a E maroon 325 52 TOWN Ol Wal ClO rererere E 325 10 TRACTOR DISPO A Eara E A 326 SERVICE BULLETINS saraa a aE Eae 327 ANNEX A compulsory Electric circuit diagram of engine electronic control system OF BElahUS 2022 5 taclo eai aa ar r 328 ANNEX B compulsory Electrical circuit diagram of the DL FDA and gearbox reduction unit control system of Belarus 2022 5 tractOr
69. cooler Figure 3 1 2 Charged air cooling system 69 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 1 4 Engine cooling system The system of engine cooling is a liquid closed type with forced coolant circulation from a centrifugal pump two thermostats and a deaerating compensation circuit It in cludes a cooling jacket a water pump a radiator with an in built deaeration system a fan an expansion tank connection hoses clamps drain plugs a plug of the expansion tank with a steam and air valves The engine thermal mode is controlled by a thermostat The cooling system radiator is a ribbed tube type The operating range of the cooling system is 80 to 98 C A short time up to 10 min increase of temperature to 100 C is allowed Coolant temperature is controlled on the coolant temperature indicator and a pilot lamp of the engine coolant emergency tem perature on dashboard The pilot lamp of the engine coolant emergency temperature goes off within the temperature range 102 to 109 C Information on the parameters mentioned is transmitted to master instruments via CAN cable from the electronic unit of engine control that works signals from sensors Installation of elements of the engine cooling system is introduced in figure 3 1 3 2 3 ko 6 di 8 G 10 H Arc to attach air puritier filter 1 tie rod 2 upper compactor 3 side compactor 4 radiator 5 fan case 6 deaeration tube 7 pipe from engine water pump to w
70. detachable ballast Hinge mounted quick detachable factory made ballast weights are usually used for additional loading of the front driving axis and for providing of adequate tractor weight distri bution during operation with various agricultural implements 5 12 4 Filling up the tires with water solution for the purpose of adhesive weight increasing Filling up the tires with water solution is carried out for the purpose of adhesive weight increasing increase in the tractor drawbar power ATTENTION HOWEVER THE LOADING OF A TIRE SHAL BE DECREASED AC CORDING TO THE FIILED IN WATER ATTENTION IN CONDITIONS OF SATISFACTORY AND SUFFICIENT TIRE TRACTION TO THE GROUND FILLING UP THE TIRES WITH LIQUID IS NOT REC OMMENDED BECAUSE OF THE TRANSMISSION OVERLOAD 216 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION ADDITIONAL WHEELS LOADING BY FILLING TIRES UP WITH WATER SOLUTION HOPPY3KA SAHLL BE USED ONLY IN CASE WHEN THE TIRE TRACTION TO THE GROUND IS POORE IN ADVERSE CONDITIONS ON SANDY WATERLOGGED SOILS ETC TIRES FILLED UP WITH LIQUID IMPAIR THE TRAC TOR TRAVELLING COMFORT AT A SPEED EXCEEDIND 20 KM H AND IN CASE IF THE TIRE RUNS INTO ANY OBSTACLE CARCASS BREAK CAN HAPPEN ATTENTION YOU MUST NOT FILL IN THE TIRES WITH WATER SOLUTION FOR MORE THEN 75 OF THER VOLUME AS OVERSIZE AMOUNT OF LIQUID CAN RESULT IN TIRES BREAK DOWN If water solution is used in front or rear tires tire stiffness track depth and firming of soil is improve
71. detent pump off the shaft is turned clockwise against the stop and is set on the detent To turn the shaft 1 to any of two positions loosen a bolt 2 by 1 5 2 revolutions and turn the shaft 1 together with a plate 3 Tighten the bolt 2 Ll 2 3 4 5 1 shaft 2 bolt 3 plate 4 cover 5 gearbox body Figure 2 21 1 Controlling drive of transmission hydraulic system pump Note The figure 2 21 1 shows position the transmission hydraulic system pump drive is on If the cover 4 must be removed when doing maintenance the shaft 1 shall be set into position pump off ATTENTION TURN THE TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PUMP DRIVE ON AND OFF ONLY WITH THE ENGINE NOT RUNNING OR WITH MIN IDLE SPEED OF THE ENGINE 2 22 Controlling pneumatic system compressor Handle to turn the pneumatic system compressor 1 on figure 2 22 2 has twp posi tions left the arrow on the handle is directed forward as viewed along tractor move ment compressor off right the arrow on the handle is directed backward to tractor cab compressor on ATTENTION TURN THE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM COMPRESSOR ON AND OFF ONLY WITH THE ENGINE NOT RUNNING OR WITH MIN IDLE SPEED OF THE EN GINE 1 handle to turn the pneumatic system compressor on 2 pneumatic system compressor 3 diagram of pneumatic system compressor control Figure 2 22 2 Pneumatic system compressor control Note
72. dismount the link 16 with the crossbar 12 abutment 11 brace 12 crossbar 13 pin 14 bolt 15 unit 16 link 17 pin 18 bracket Figure 3 21 1 All purpose drawbar hitch The basic parameters and connection dimensions of the TSU are given in section 5 Tractor coupling 6 145 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 22 Electrical equipment 3 22 1 General information The electric circuit diagram of tractors BELARUS 2022 5 is shown in annex C 3 22 2 Heating plug operation principle As a means of start facilitation heating plugs are used in tractors BELARUS 2022 5 they are mounted in the cylinder head For individual control of heating plug op eration modes indication of their operation a heating plug control unit is used The heating plugs are activated if the engine temperature exceeds 60 C Hereby a heating plug pilot lamp 4 figure 2 6 1 lights up for 2 sec or doesn t light up at all If engine temperature is below 60 C the heating plugs are activated automatically as the key of starter and instrument switch is turned from position 0 off into position I Instruments on Hereby the heating plug pilot lamp 4 lights up in the pilot lamp unit of the dashboard The heating plug operation time depends on engine temperature as per table 3 3 The engine is to be started as the lamp 4 goes out after the time specified in table 3 3 After the engine start up the heating plugs rema
73. dry surface results in in creased loads of transmission components and chassis and impedes maneuvering THE TRACTOR MUST NOT BE OPERATED WITH REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL BLOCKING ENGAGED WHEN THE DRIVING SPEED IS IN EXCESS OF 13 KM H THE TRACTOR MUST NOT BE OPERATED IN TRANSPORT POSITION ON THE HARD SURFACE ROADS WITH CONSTANTLY ENGAGED REAR AXIS DIFFERENTIAL BLOCKING 5 12 10 Doubling of wheels To improve the passing ability on boggy areas and forest lands and to improve drawbar features during operation on mellow soils on waterlogged soils in fields prepared for seed ing doubling of the tractor wheels is used Doubling of wheels in combination with minimum ballasting in standard soil conditions allows coupling with heavy duty compound implements in fields with different slope ATTENTION DOUBLE TIRES SHALL NOT BE USED FOR IMPROVEMENT OF LIFTING AND DRAWBAR POWER AS THEY SERVE FOR PRESSURE RELIEVE DURING OPERATION IN FIELD Effect of wheels doubling on the tractor drawbar dynamix on mellow soils appears as fol lows In the area of the nominal drawbar power and at slow speed slipping is decreasing by 1 4 times and drawbar power is increasing When operated with low hook drawbar power and at high speed the drawbar power of the double wheeled tractor is less than of single wheeled tractor due to the increased rolling resistance ATTENTION IT IS RECOMMENDED NOT TO USE FOR OPERATION WITH THE IMPLEMENTS OF TRACTOR TRAILERS AND SEMI TRAILE
74. eee eeae eens 123 3 13 1 Rear axle differential lock CONtrOl 0 cece cece cece cence ee ee teense teats enaeenes 123 2TA FDA VS CONTO Pee eee em ee eo Re ae ee 124 910 0 FOM PTO CO Ol acacia sseancsacancassnagresacesteancsksasaeosaenesanennesncecasenrenserace 125 3 14 Undercarriage and tractor wheels cccccecceeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeneass 126 3 OD Hydrostatic Steering Conio kesret E pene Yee 127 3 10 General MTOR all ON aE E 127 2152 LOOSING PUMP sarniwenadamcosiin E RN NS 128 3 15 3 Steering Hydraulic CVNde rsrsrsrsrs iden csateed lat oud teedte cettan deus 129 SAO OC Oll Tait seere remanence hated a eae aeons Minds aa 130 2022 5 0000010 OM 316 Hydraulic ittlinkage A eeen aiie aE ETENE OTEN EOE 131 321621 Generalki orma UON eae AE 131 ITG AOAN E aeran E EEE NEEE 134 3 10 0 ALE DUMP AVE seriearen 134 3 16 4 Valve QrOU Prasei an E I EA E E EEEE EE EET 135 3 16 5 Installation and adjustments of position and force sensors of RLL ECS 136 3 16 95 Genieral 1MOlMAtlON msiesari enine erR EN 136 3 16 5 2 Installation and adjustment of the position SenSor sseccccerrrrrrrrecerrnn 136 3 1025 FOlCe SeNiSOl ANS tall atlOnissicsncise gas tsteeetnaehyuedubusiedelevies ETENA SENEE 137 3 17 Indication of emergency states of hydraulic lift linkage ccee cece eee 138 TOREA MM MAKAGC aeaea E itis Sele yehia oat nat iee ea E 139 3 18 1 General INfORMANON wy isodccesthsiveded d
75. figure 3 13 1 1 control panel 2 rear axle DL control switch 3 rear axle DL on annunciator 4 fuse block 5 rear axle DL control valve group 6 sensor of guide wheels turning angle 7 bracket activating deactivating sensor of guide wheels turning angle 8 bracket for at taching sensor of guide wheel turning angle Figure 3 13 1 Rear axle DL control The rear axle DL control system consists of the following elements a button switch 1 figure 3 13 1 of real axle DL control and a rear axle DL on an nunciator 3 located on the control panel 1 a sensor of guide wheel turning angle 6 mounted on the FDA at its left two sensors of service brakes on state located in the cab over the brake pedals a valve group 5 mounted on the GB cover to its right and hydraulically linked with the rear axle DL clutch engagement cylinder connecting cables The system is powered from the tractor on board electrical circuit through the fuse block 4 The rear axle DL control system gets powered after the engine has been started The switch 2 has three positions Automatic lock upper part of the button is pressed fixed position Positive lock lower part of the button is pressed non fixed position Lock off middle position In position of the switch 2 Lock off the rear axle DL clutch is connected with drain In position of the switch 2 Automatic lo
76. filter 1 and supplies it to the system through the safety valve KI11 adjusted for the pressure of 1 8 2 MPa to the full flow mesh filter A2 and further to the centrifugal distributing filter A3 The cleaned oil is supplied under the pressure of 0 9 1 MPa to electro hydraulic valves P controlling the FDA drive the rear axle DL and the GB reduction unit accordingly Oil is also supplied under pressure to the cock KP controlling the rear PTO directing the flow to the friction clutch M4 and the brake M3 For smooth engagement of the friction clutch M 4 a damping device Il is mounted in the hydraulic line The electro hydraulic valves are connected by means of oil pipelines with the executive mechanisms FDA drive friction clutch M 1 for FDA drive on off piston M 2 for rear axle DL clutch on off hydraulic cylinder LI for engaging higher or lower passes of the GB re duction unit The oil cleaned by the centrifugal oil filter is supplied to the lubrication system under the pressure of 0 2 2 5 MPa maintained by the lubrication valve lower valve of the distrib uting filter KO2 Further the oil is delivered to bearings of the GB shafts of the planetary re duction units rear axle final drives support of FDA drive sliding fork The oil drained through the lubrication valve and the middle valve of the distributing filter lubricates the differential and the rear axle main drive 118 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 12 Front driving axle 3 12 1
77. fluid in the main cylinders hydraulic brake control system reservoirs to the required level then circulate brake tanks fluid through the hydraulic brake control system Loss of sealing of work spaces of Replace main and operating cylinders cups and O main and operating cylinders due rings in case they are worn out Check if cylinder to damage wear and tear of cups bearing surface has sharpened edges ridges or and O rings pits Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hy draulic system Hydraulic brake fluid leakage in Tighten up junctions replace damaged parts then junctions or pipelines in hydraulic circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hydraulic drive system Air inflow in hydraulic system brake control system Clogging of opening in tank fitting Unclog the opening Circulate hydraulic brake fluid causing depression in main cylin through the hydraulic system der as a result of which the air leaks into cylinder through sealing Clogging of pipelines of hydraulic Replace pipelines Circulate hydraulic brake fluid drive system due to dent or clog through the hydraulic system ging Insufficient brake pedal travel or Adjust clearance space between piston and piston the pedal strikes against cab wall follower of main cylinder as indicated in subsection 3 9 3 Service brake adjustment Increased operating stroke of Disassemble brakes replace worn out disks Ad brake pedals which can not
78. grease acc to GOST 3333 80 or similar D VA A D IL 4 ieee aN Figure 6 4 30 Oiling of spline joints of the front PTO shaft scheme 6 4 4 12 Task 46 Replacement of an exchangeable filter cartridge of HLL The first and second replacement of exchangeable filter cartridges of HLL is carried out in every 500 hours of tractor operation Further replacement shall be carried out in every 1000 hours of operation simultaneously with change of oil To replace exchangeable filter cartridge of HLL perform the following actions unscrew bolts 2 Figure 6 4 31 fastening caps 4 and remove the cap 4 assem bled with plug 3 and valve 1 withdraw the filter cartridge 5 disconnect sleeve 7 clean internal space of the bowl 6 insert a new filter cartridge 5 put the cap 4 back in its place assembled tightening bolts 3 check level of oil in HLL tank as specified in clause 6 4 1 3 refill the oil if neces sary connect sleeve 7 1 valve 2 bolt 3 plug 4 cap 5 filter cartridge 6 bowl 7 sleeve Figure 6 4 31 Replacement of an exchangeable filter cartridge of HLL 256 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 4 13 Task 47 Replacement of an exchangeable filter cartridge of HSC tank The first and second replacement of exchangeable filter cartridges of HSC tank is carried out in every 500 hours of tractor operation Further replacement shall be carried out in every 1000 hours of operation simulta
79. have channels in the inner race for lubrication of friction surfaces through the oiler in the pin are installed In the cover 6 a seal 9 wiper seal rod guides 13 that exclude fric tion of the rod and the cover and rod packings 10 are installed An integrated seal 14 that excludes friction of the piston and cylinder liner is mounted on the piston i foi GFYE f EE E A ki Roa T ee tn ce EEEE TIET TEE E Erara l eee ESS te Si 14 ee ages l so F s t 13 Aw of AB 1 piston 2 12 sealing ring 3 body 4 rod 5 lock screw 6 front cover 7 spherical bearing 8 cap nut 9 rod seal 10 rod packings 11 safety ring 13 rod guide 14 piston packing 15 piston nut Figure 3 15 4 Steering hydraulic cylinder 129 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 15 4 HSC oil tank The oil tank of a welded design with a 6L capacity is mounted behind the storage batteries It has an in built drain filter 2 with a replaceable paper filtering element of 25 mi cron fineness Oil is filled through a filler neck with a plug 3 The oil filter is equipped with a safety valve 5 Oil lever is checked by means of a dipstick 4 For oil drain there is a drain plug 1 1 drain plug 2 filter 3 filler neck 4 oil dipstick 5 safety valve Figure 3 15 5 HSC oil tank 130 2022 5 0000010 OM
80. housing 6 to ensure free play S1 it is necessary to measure a dimension H1 and to put a re quired quantity of shim washers 5 as per table 3 6 put a ground wire 2 of the sensor 1 under any of bolts 3 seal the bolts 3 with sealing paste and tighten with a torque of 10 15 Nm 6 rear PTO housing 7 toothed washer Figure 3 22 3 Installation of rear PTO RPM sensor Table 3 6 Installation of rear PTO RPM sensor Q ty of shim washers 5 62 50 63 40 6 1 50 2 40 C S 63 5 65 00 5 1 50 2 00 65 10 66 00 2 10 3 00 149 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 23 Cab air conditioning and heating system The cab air conditioning and heating system is intended for creating and keeping a normal microclimate in the tractor cab The air conditioning system consists of two circuits heating and cooling The system diagram is shown in figure 3 23 1 The cooling circuit includes a compressor a condenser a filter drain with a pres sure sensor a monoblock unit of evaporator and heater radiator heater cooler a heater cooler fan connecting hoses with quick couplings set electric cables air filters a cold air regulator and a fan switch The heating circuit is supplemented with hoses con nected with the engine cooling system of the tractor and with a shut off valve Chuck coupling on hoses between cab and filter draim ee a 4 Hose Din Filter drain To engine cooling system Heating section
81. hub short end facing the flywheel 1 mount the center plate 3 in the slots of the flywheel mount the second driven disk 2 on the workholder with the hub short end facing the flywheel mount the clutch plate assembly the back plate 7 with the pressure plate 4 on the flywheel pins with the bushings 14 fix with the nuts and unscrew the manufacturing bolts adjust the position of the release levers 6 3 3 2 4 Adjustment of clutch release levers screwing the adjusting nuts 9 in or out adjust the position of the release levers for the dimension of 14 0 5 from the lever mounting surfaces to the face of the back plate hub The dimensional difference for some levers shall not exceed 0 3 mm after adjustment mount the lock plates 10 remove the workholder 3 3 3 Clutch drive The clutch drive is intended to control the coupling clutch The clutch drive type is hydrostatic with a suspended pedal with a hydraulic booster The drive consists of a main cylinder 11 figure 3 3 4 a tank 1 a suspended pedal 7 an angle piece 18 an operating cylinder 24 a hydraulic booster 27 a lever 34 connect ing pipelines and hoses The hydraulic booster 27 of a non circulation type is intended to reduce force applied to pedals 7 in the course of clutch engagement The hydraulic booster is connected with a transmis sion hydraulic system pump by means of a hose 15 r and by means of a hose 12 with a drain group When pressing the peda
82. in shift time basis and in spring and summer period in every 125 hours of the tractor operation In order to drainage the condensate water from the radiator tank of the diesel CAC it is necessary to perform the following actions turn off two plugs 1 Figure 6 4 8 in the bottom of the CAC radiator 2 let the condensate drain away screw the plug 1 1 plug 2 charged air cooler Figure 6 4 8 Drainage of the condensate water from the radiator tanks of diesel CAC 242 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 2 Maintenance services in every 125 hours of operation 6 4 2 1 General guidelines Perform the following operations and the operations listed in this subsection 6 4 2 6 4 2 2 Task 16 Check of threaded joint torqueing of wheels mounting Check threaded joint torqueing of wheels mounting shall be carried out one time along with first MS on a shift basis in 8 10 hours of operation which is carried out by a customer and then in every 125 hours of operation Check the torqueing of torqueing wheel nuts and hub bolts and if necessary tighten them up tightening torque of nuts 3 Figure 6 4 9 for rear wheels shall be from 550 to 600 N M tightening torque of nuts 2 for rear wheels mounting on hubs shall be from 700 to 750 N m tightening torque of nuts 1 for front wheels mounting on reducing gear flanges of FDA shall be from 280 to 320 N m tightening torque of nuts 4 for front wheels disks mounting on the ri
83. index of wheel hub drive ratio Parameter R R is a rear wheel rolling radius mm In case of reprogramming this parameter may be changed with resolution of 5 mm Parameter KV2 KV2 is a PTO ratio Parameter ZV ZV is a number of teeth of a washer of PTO speed sensor Parameter V V is a fuel tank volume I Also if the button Parameter is pressed in the programming mode an independent parameter T of the revised content of the counter of total apparent time of engine operation is displayed in the list of programmable parameters This parameter is not available for alteration it represents a precise value up to 1 10 of an hour of en gine operation time 910 is a value for tyres 580 70R42 If other types of tyres are mounted it is neces sary to set a value of the parameter R corresponding to the rolling radius of the tyres mounted On tractors BELARUS 2022 5 rear PTO speed is calculated basing on the signal from PTO speed sensor In this connection any value except figure 000 is set in pa rameter KV2 In tractors BELARUS 2022 5 only a value of a side tank 175 liters is entered so information about the operation time with remaining fuel etc is formed without regard to fuel volume in the tank which is situated under the tractor cab its volume is 130 liters Besides recently produced tractors BELARUS 2022 5 may have a side tank with in
84. is built in the gauge scale which lights up when fuel volume in the tank drops below 1 8 of the total tank volume ATTENTION DO NOT LET THE TANK BECOME EMPTY THE GAUGE POINTER IS IN THE ZONE OF ORANGE COLOR 2 5 5 The gauge of engine coolant temperature 9 reads data from the engine control unit ECU The gauge scale has three zones working from 70 to 105 C green color informational from 40 to 70 C yellow color emergency from 105 to 120 C red color An emergency temperature lamp red color 8 is built in the scale which operates in two modes a lights up and operates in a flashing mode with coolant values from 109 up to and including 112 C b glows in a continuous mode with coolant temperature values from 113 C and higher 2 5 6 The oil pressure gauge in the engine lubricating system 10 reads data from the engine control unit ECU The gauge scale has three zones working from 100 to 500 kPa green color emergency two 0 to 100 kPa and from 500 to 600 kPa red color A signal lamp of emergency oil pressure drop 11 red color is built in the gauge scale which lights up when the pressure drops below 100 kPa ATTENTION WHEN THE COLD ENGINE IS STARTED THE PRESSURE CAN BE 600 kPa and HIGHER ATTENTION IF THE EMERGENCY PRESSURE LAMP IS ON WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING IMMEDIATELY STOP THE ENGINE AND ELIMINATE THE FAILURE 29 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 6 Pilot lamps unit The p
85. it is required to pull the handle 2 up move the seat and then release the handle The seat will automatically get fixed in a required position adjustment of the backrest tilt angle The backrest tilt angle is adjusted by means of a handwheel 3 within the range from minus 15 to plus 20 To increase the backrest tilt angle it is necessary to turn the handwheel clockwise to decrease it contraclockwise height adjustment It is carried out within the range of 30 mm from the middle posi tion The seat has three height positions lower middle and upper To move the seat from the lower position to the middle position or from the middle position to the upper one it is required to lift the seat up smoothly till the arresting stop goes off a specific click is heard To move the seat from the upper position into the lower one it is necessary to lift the seat up against the stop with an abrupt movement and let it down It is impossible to move the seat from the middle position to the lower one 64 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 21 Controlling drive of transmission hydraulic system pump The drive of the transmission hydraulic system pump is located on the left side of the gearbox body A shaft 1 activating the drive of the transmission hydraulic system pump figure 2 21 1 has two positions pump on the shaft is turned contraclockwise against the stop and is set on the
86. joint 4 Lubricant Lithol 24 GOST 21150 87 Lubricant Lithol 24 GOST 21150 87 Lubricant Lithol 24 GOST 21150 87 Lubricant Lithol 24 GOST 21150 87 Lubricant Lithol 24 GOST 21150 87 Lubricant Lithol 24 GOST 21150 87 Lubricant Nel 58M TY 38 301 40 25 94 BECHEM Not available LCP GM BECHEM Not available LCP GM BECHEM Lubricant Solid oil C GOST 4366 76 or Lubricant Solid oil 2K GOST 1033 79 LCP GM BECHEM Lubricant LCP GM Solid oil C GOST 4366 76 or Lubricant Solid oil XK GOST 1033 79 BECHEM Lubricant LCP GM Solid oil C GOST 4366 76 or Lubricant Solid oil XK GOST 1033 79 BECHEM Lubricant LCP GM Solid oil C GOST 4366 76 or Lubricant Solid oil 2K GOST 1033 79 Lubricant AZMOL Ne158 TU U 00152365 118 2000 274 2022 5 0000010 OM BECHEM 0 05 250 LCP GM 0 003 BECHEM 0 02 1000 LCP GM 0 001 BECHEM 0 02 500 LCP GM 0 001 Mobil Grease MP ISO L XDCIB2 BECHEM 0 02 250 LCP GM 0 001 BECHEM 0 02 1000 LCP GM 0 005 Mobil Grease MP BECHEM 0 08 125 LCP GM 0 004 ne Not available 0 0112 O Filled by the 0 00 time manufacturer and refill during the operation is not required 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 6 4 continued ptf a 4 E Sg Oo 7 8 9 100 Lubricant Ne158M TY 38 301 40 25 94 FDA drive universal joint bearing Lubricant 0 056 One Filled by the AZMOL a 0 00 time manufacturer of Ne158 TU U cardan shaft
87. lights of tractor left side lamp replace It when necessary d Check in SU operability of fuse element FU25 15A supplying power to marker lights of tractor right side lamp and of instruments highlighting replace It when necessary 310 2022 5 0000010 OM e Check in SU operability of relay K18 when the key SA7 is switched in position I replace It when necessary f If after replacement of relay K18 the failure still remains circuits coming from relay K18 key SA7 fuse elements FU24 FU25 and power supply to lamps for instruments highlighting front lamps marker lights and number plate light should be checked for operability If circuits are properly operating replace nonworking lamps 7 14 4 2 Passing light does not work when key SA7 is switched in position II Check in SU operability of fuse elements FU2 and FU3 7 5A power supply of headlamp bulb of tractor right and left passing lights replace faulty fuses or lamps if nec essary b Check in SU operability of relay K16 when key SA7 is switched in position I replace it when necessary c If relay K16 is properly operating replace faulty lamps EL1 or EL2 of road head lights E1 or E2 7 14 4 3 Distance lights do not work when key SA7 is switched in position Il and un der wheel switch SA11 is on a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU4 15A of power supply of distance light bulb of tractor replace it when necessary b Check in SU operabilit
88. load transported maximum permissible speed of the implements coupled road and meteorological conditions with regard to capabilities and restrictions imposed by Traffic regulation rules Maximum permissible traveling speed of the tractor in structure of MTU specified in Table 5 13 Table 5 13 Maximum permissible travelling speed of the tractor in structure of MTU Traffic conditions Description of the technical means coupled Travelling speed km h not more Public roads Tractor general purpose trailers and semitrailers special purpose vehicles fertilizer distributors and transporters semitrailed spraying machines with brake system 40 Trailed semitrailed and semimounted implements with brake system Trailed semitrailed and semimounted implements without brake system mounted implements compound mounted units Travelling off the public General and special purpose vehicles trailers logic traveling from one field to another delivery of the implements to the working Mounted implements compound mounted units place 222 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 14 Finding of total weight loads on the front and rear axles tires holding Capacity and required minimum ballast Amount of load on the tractor axles in structure of MTU may be found by means of proximate weighting on truck scales of the corresponding carrying capacity Tractor weighting allows possibility to consider weight distribution of MTU masses along the tractor axles comple
89. lock with a range engaged LY 2 6 1 rear axle DL and FDA drive control panel 2 fuse block 3 lever for shifting speeds and reduction passes 4 connecting cables 5 sensor of gearbox neutral posi tion 6 gearbox reduction unit valve group 7 pressure sensor of the higher reduction pass engaged state 8 pressure sensor of the lower reduction pass engaged state 9 carrier sockets 10 button to engage the lower pass 11 button to engage the higher pass 12 led lamp to indicate the higher pass 13 led lamp to indicate the lower pass 14 15 pilot lamps Figure 3 5 2 Gearbox reduction electro hydraulic control 94 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 6 Rear axle 3 6 1 General information The rear axle consists of the following elements main drive differential differential lock dog clutch rear axle drives located in the rear axle body final drives located in the rear axle tubes The cross sectional cut of the rear axle of BELARUS 2022 5 is introduced in figure 3 6 1 10 1 in le fo 8 amp h Li hG Wi 16 d L Tee i eet 3 J O T akpi IREA ail eae ESE ee a cH TH am 4d a as i 24 d 4 tes jii nia nay 3 T AA ll ee aag ree ee H BoE PSO TH i i fn f h Eigi i J pie it H f i i meat as F E of Hi 43 A 1 d
90. multimeter check operability of pressure sensors unit sensors unit outputs red and pink wires should be rung out among them selves Check up operability of electric circuits con nections from compressor coupling to air condi tioner control console according to the electrical equipment diagram in Annex C Coolant leakage took place Detect leak path Only specially trained personnel is allowed to de tection of leak path replacement of hoses and air conditioner components with use of special equip ment after sales service and repair should be car ried out by CJSC Belvneshinvest Minsk tel fax 8 017 262 40 75 8 029 662 97 69 8 029 628 6 98 A eee Electric equipment failure Check up operability of the corresponding fuse element located in the switching unit Replace if it is faulty If the safety lock is properly operating check by means of indicating lamp power supply presence on the electric motor of air conditioner fan M2 Appendix C when the switch is on and ground is available in electric motor If electric circuits are properly operating but there is lack of power sup ply to M2 replace the switch When air conditioner operated in cooling mode warm air is supplied into cab Valve PO 11 seal element break Replace valve PO 11 age Ce Disruption of heating unit tubes Replace conditioner climatic unit heating unit defrosting due to incomplete drain during cool weather period operation
91. of RLL and guidelines for trou SS FOO WIG asec serps tens ejecta ea cnet en tee ene E E eames aeotaee 297 7 13 Possible failures of the hydraulic lift linkage and guidelines for troubleshooting 303 C Generaliniai E AA A ERA 303 7 13 2 guidelines for troubleshooting in HLL c cece eee eee cence cnet eeeeeeneeenaes 303 7 13 3 Section EHR 23LS lowering valve disassembly procedure 0ce0eeeee 305 7 14 Possible failures in the electrical equipment and guidelines for troubleshooting 307 t141 General MIOMMAUON aroa a er a a a diae ttn Dates oa 307 7 14 2 Search and elimination of failures in electrics power supply system 307 7 14 3 Search and elimination of failures in engine start up system 008 309 7 14 4 Search and elimination of failures in lighting facilities c cece cece ee eee 310 7 14 5 Search and elimination of failures in air conditioner electrics 006 312 7 14 6 Search and elimination of failures in operation of front and rear wiper wind screen washer ACOUSTIC AlAMM ccc cc cccccccccccccccuceceeecccuccueeeeeeeeuuuunteteteeuuuaas 313 7 14 7 Search and elimination of failures in operation of heating plugs 313 7 14 8 Search and elimination of failures in engine management system 313 7 14 9 Search and elimination of failures in test instruments located in INNSIFUIMERL DOAN desirier aa eccedu da
92. of the buttons 5 and hold it depressed For safety s sake the control with the remote buttons is performed with interruption of work Pressing the uplift button 4 lowering button 5 and holding it depressed lifts up lowers the RLL for 5 sec then it stops For further uplifting lowering it is necessary to press the corresponding button once again and hold it depressed Then after the implement has been attached activation and work with HLL is per formed in accordance with subsection 2 15 2 WARNING WHEN USING THE REMOTE BUTTONS OF RLL CONTROL DO NOT STAND BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND ATTACHED IMPLEMENT TO PREVENT AC CIDENTS IT IS FORBIDDEN TO USE BUTTONS OF MECHANICAL SHIFTING OF ELECTRIC VALVES OF REGULATOR EHR23 L3 D a a ary i f a a 1 la ter ot je Il i i i to cae 1 RLL remote control console 2 shield on safety regulations 3 shield on RLL control diagram 4 RLL uplift button 5 RLL lowering button Figure 2 15 3 RLL controlled with remote buttons 2 15 4 Troubleshooting of RLL electronic control system The electronic control system installed on your tractor has an option of self testing and whenever failures are detected it provides the operator with code information by means of a troubleshooting annunciator 9 figure 2 15 1 on RLL control console After en gine start as specified in subsection 2 14 2 the annunciator 9 is burning continuously if no failures are detected in RLL control system
93. openings unscrew the plugs 1 of the filler openings of the accumulator batteries and check 1 electrolyte level if necessary refill the distilled water in order to increase the electrolyte level by 10 15 mm above the protective grid or up to the level of mark on the battery case 2 degree of battery discharge by the electrolyte density recharge the battery if necessary Degree of battery discharge shall not be lower than 50 in summer and 25 in winter 1 terminal of output pin connector 2 filler plug Figure 6 4 17 Maintenance of accumulator battery 6 4 3 3 Task 29 Check of oil level in FP TO reducing gear To check the oil level in FP TO reducing gear perform the following place the tractor at the level horizontal ground engage the parking brake and lock the wheels against movement fore and aft by anti recoil limit stops excluding tractor self movement The engine must be stopped unscrew the level check plug 1 Figure 6 4 18 oil level must reach the lower edges of the threaded opening of the plug 1 if it is necessary unscrew the hook and three bolts for cap 3 fastening remove the cap 3 and refill a new oil up to the lower edge of the level check plug 1 insert plug 1 and mount cap 3 in its place 248 2022 5 0000010 OM VAN zii AN 3 4 aT aan aaa 7 ANAS u i aton T Fil Gyr PH ht gt ret ff amp ii woul Am N TK tec Epari Ke q leg qm iN 1 level c
94. pipelines At linear movement the cavities of the cylinder 1 are locked by spool lands of the dosing pump 2 and oil from feed pump 5 arriving to the dosing pump 2 comes back into the oil tank 5 As you rotate the steering wheel the spool of the dosing pump 2 displaces ensuring oil supply into one of the cavities of the hydraulic cylinder of the turn 1 in the volume that corresponds to the turning angle of steering wheel Oil from the other cavity of the hydraulic cylinder 1 comes back through dosing pump 2 into the oil tank 5 3 15 2 Dosing pump The dosing pumps for forward and reverse motion are gerotor type pumps with open center and with no reaction to steering wheel The dosing pump includes a tilting unit figure 3 15 2 a valve group II a return valve 9 two anti shock valves 7 a safety valve 6 and two air inlet valves 8 if 1 stator 2 rotor 3 spool 4 driving shaft 5 sleeve 6 safety valve 7 anti shock valves 8 air inlet valves 9 return valve 10 casing tilting unit Il valve group Figure 3 15 2 Dosing pump The gerotor tilting unit figure 3 15 2 consists of stator 1 which is attached to the casing 10 and of a rotating rotor 2 connected with spool 3 through the driving shaft 4 The valve group II consists of a casing 10 a sleeve 5 and a spool 3 having a splined connec tion with the driving shaft end extension of the steering column The safety valve 6 li
95. position and also the general information about the de sign of FLL are set forth in subsection 3 20 Front lift linkage Upper link i ae i j S PTO ee Py H a Lower links 28 3 s 5 shaft c L 13 gg Zone S pasi _ hey ae i T 425 M s Figure 5 3 4 Front lift linkage diagram Table 5 2 Basic parameters n coupling dimensions of FLL Standard size configuration of the device 1 Category acc to ISO 730 1 Category 2 2 Design features Device consisting of three links upper one and two lower ones articulated by the rear ends with the tractor and by front ends with coupling elements of the implement during operation 3 Purpose To connect mount or coupling of mounted and semimounted implements and quick detachable linkage mounted loads 4 Lower links Solid with FC and changeable hinge joints 5 Length of lower links mm T15 6 Width of free front hinged joints for upper lower 51 45 link mm link mm link mm Hii E suspension axis mm 10 Column height 1 mMm ess aiesi lt lt i stsSiS 11 Length of the suspension axis along the shoulders E 1 mm 12 Lifting power of the device KH a on the suspension axis b at overhang of 610 mm from the suspension axis Dimension refers to the implement coupling 191 2022 5 0000010 OM scheme of installation of linkage mounted ballast weights to FLL assembled with linkage mounted supporting brack
96. ranges 5 button to engage the lower L pass of the gearbox reduction unit 6 button to engage the higher H pass of the gearbox reduction unit 7 annunciator of the lower pass of the gearbox reduction unit green color 8 annunciator of the higher pass of the gearbox reduction unit red color Figure 2 13 1 Gearbox control The required gear is set by means of the lever shifting gears and passes of the gearbox reduction unit 2 figure 2 13 1 as per the scheme 3 The required range is set by means of the range shifting lever 1 as per the scheme 4 Pressing the button 5 or 6 on the handle for shifting gears and passes of the reduc tion unit 2 engages the lower or the upper pass of the gearbox reduction unit respectively The annunciators 7 and 8 perform indication of the engaged pass of the reduction unit Engaging of passes L and H of the reduction unit is possible only when the gear shifting lever 2 is set into neutral position 4 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 13 2 Tractor velocity diagram The table of 2022 5 tractor velocity diagram figure 2 13 2 on tyres of basic configuration is attached to the cab right window BELARUS weep A OOj9A 1021 G ZZOT SNUV1FE Z EL Z nbiJ rTerteerREeReReEeeRerHRrAE eee Heo A E F EE a T ANTEC __JENSNANANNN I ewm E a T EO foe T CECE fewer CCT etme TTT SS PE EE set i PCC foo 7 PCCP ee PCCP foot St eet s jre o CCPC
97. required for the specific crop It is necessary for load on the tractor PTO shaft reduction and reduction of fuel con sumption during the tractor operation Particularly it is important to consider it at the tractor operation with multiple purpose tilt plant units 214 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 12 Ways of changing of drawbar features and passing ability of the tractors 5 12 1 General information Most of the technical processes in agricultural industry are carried out by tractors BELARUS 2022 5 in running order by the direct drafting of the implements and instru ment due to the adhesion of pneumatic tyres with surface Estimated figures of the towing performance are drawbar power at operation range speeds rated drawbar power at stan dard operating weight and permissible sliding Tractive effort generated on a tyre rim is directly proportional to the tractor adhesive weight Therefore in certain conditions drawbar indexes and passing ability increases to gether with increase of the tractor operating weight Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 is designed for operation with definite values of weight loads on the tractor body and chassis Compliance with the recommendations on additional ballasting according to operational environment ensures safe and proper opera tion without extreme loads on the tractor through not less than the specified service life Tire capacity depending on tires standard size and internal pressure practically serves
98. required running After carrying out repair operations ad just the clearance of 1 5 to 2 0 mm between the ends of the jaws of the half clutches 4 and 5 proceeding as follows arrange the jaws of the half clutch 4 against the jaws of the half clutch 5 with the bracket 8 removed mount and fasten the bracket and loosen the lock screw 9 undoing the screw 10 bring the shifting half clutch 5 until is stops against the jaw end of the stationary half clutch 4 and then do the screw in by 1 1 25 rev to provide a required clearance tighten the screw 9 1 7 driven gear 2 6 splined bushing 3 pin 4 5 half clutch 8 bracket 9 lock screw 10 adjusting screw 11 piston 12 spring 13 fork 14 rear axle upper cover Figure 3 6 3 Differential lock mechanism 98 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 Rear power takeoff shaft 3 7 1 General information The rear PTO has a four speed separate drive that provides two speed modes standard and economy by reduction switching in the coupling body and two rotation speeds of the PTO end extension by replacing the end extension 16 figure 3 7 1 in the rear PTO reduction unit The PTO is driven by the engine through two pairs of spur con stant mesh gears in the coupling body through the gearbox inner shaft the friction clutch and the PTO reduction unit The PTO drive is engaged and disengaged by a splined clutch 1 The power takeoff shaft is installed in
99. right and the left doors are opened from outside by push ing the button 2 of the handle If the right door lock is blocked from inside the right door could not be opened from outside The lock of the cab left door can be opened and closed from outside To close it from outside do the following insert a key 1 into the hole of the cylinder mechanism which is located in the button 2 without pushing the button 2 turn the key into position closed To open the left door lock outside the cab it is necessary to insert the key 1 into the hole of the cylinder mechanism which is located in the button 2 and without pushing the but ton 2 turn the key into position opened then press the button 5 1 key 2 button 3 detent 4 lock 5 lever Figure 2 19 1 Cab door lock 61 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 19 2 Side glass opening To open the side glass 1 figure 2 19 2 right and left rotate the handle 2 up and push it Then fix the glass in an opened condition for this it is necessary to push the han dle 2 down To close the side glass 1 press the handle 2 up then pull the handle 2 then rotate it down until the side glass is fixed in a closed position 7 a side glass closed b side glass opened 1 side glass 2 handle Figure 2 19 2 Side glass opening 2 19 3 Rear screen opening To open the rear screen rotate a handle 1 figure 2 19 3 to the left along tractor movemen
100. ring out the terminals 10 and 12 for a short circuit by testing apparatus Figures 7 12 1 7 12 2 Check the remote control buttons cables for mechani cal damage by lift of RLL Disable each button for lift one by one until the failure is gone Stop the engine when you disable the buttons If the failure is still not eliminated disconnect the socket from the electronic unit and ring out the terminals 20 and 12 for a short circuit by testing apparatus Figures 7 12 1 7 12 2 298 Continuation of Table 7 12 Eror eode Description anticipated problem Failure in electronic unit Stabilized power supply voltage powering the control panel is lower than the required level 16 Short circuit may occur in the force and position sensors sockets of RLL Figure 3 19 1 caused by water entering the sockets 2022 5 0000010 OM Failure inspection method Disconnect the main control panel from the common cable Measure stabilized power supply voltage of the terminals 6 minus and 4 plus of the control panel socket which shall make 9 5 10 V with the engine running If the supply voltage is low or in absence of it check the reliability of electronic unit socket connec tion Disconnect the force sensor and the position sen sor of RLL one by one Figures 3 19 1 7 12 2 Moderate defects Failure of the position sensor 8 Figure 3 19 1 Break of the sensor wire the sensor was not con nected or adjusted 22 1 Fa
101. rotation direction coincides with an arrow direction on a tire side ATTENTION AFTER YOU HAVE MOUNTED THE WHEELS CHECK NUTS FOR TIGHT ENING AFTER THE FIRST OPERATION HOUR AFTER 10 OPERATION HOURS AND EVERY 125 HOURS OF OPERATION ATTENTION AFTER YOU HAVE CHANGED THE FRONT WHEEL TRACK CARRY OUT CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT WHEEL TOE IN BEFORE CHECKING THE TOE IN MAKE SURE TO CHECK AND IF NECESSARY ADJUST PLAY IN STEERING JOINTS 176 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 3 Safety measures to be taken when operating the tractor 4 3 1 General safety measures to be taken when operating the tractor Do not operate the tractor in a closed room without required ventilation Exhaust gas may result in lethal outcome Tractor start up and operation with the hood opened is not allowed It is forbidden to open the hood when the engine is running Do not start the engine when staying outside the operator s seat Starting the en gine and manipulating the controls always stay inside the cab in the operator s seat Do not start the engine by way of towing Before starting the engine engage the parking brake the front and the rear PTOs shall be engaged the range shifting lever shall be in Neutral position During tractor start there shall be no people under the tractor in front of it or behind as well as between the tractor and the coupled implement or trailer Before setting on the move warn people around including those operating the cou pled imp
102. sealing 6 between a new filter cartridge and catch water bowl with engine oil screw catch water bowl in a new filter cartridge screw a new filter cartridge in by hand until sealing between a new filter cartridge 4 and filter case 2 is bottomed to facing of filter case then continue screwing on of filter cartridge by hand by 3 4 turn fill fuel system with fuel discharging air from it as indicated in the engine operation manual check all fuel line connections for tightness there must be no fuel dribbling 1 air bleeder plug 2 filter case 3 hand operated pump 4 filter cartridge 5 catch water bowl 6 sealing Figure 6 4 37 Replace filter cartridge of coarse fuel filter 6 4 7 2 Task 62 Replacement of filter drier of the air conditioning system Replacement of filter drier shall be carried out in every 800 hours of operation or once in a year whichever comes first ATTENTION TO REPLACE A FILTER DRIER CONTACT SPECIAL SERVICE STATION REPLACEMENT SHALL BE CARRIED OUT USING SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT 265 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 8 General maintenance services 6 4 8 1 General guidelines Carry out maintenance service operations listed in subsection 6 4 8 as may be necessary i e when level sensor or dirtiness sensor responds 6 4 8 2 Task 63 Adjustment of valves of GB driven centrifuge Valve 2 maintains oil pressure in hydraulic system within the range 0 9 to 1 1 MPa In case pressure falls
103. small concentrations act as weak drug large concentration may result in poisoning Anticorrosion paper contains corrosion inhibitors causing irritation and inflammation of skin mucous of nose and eyes Before starting work put on cotton overalls robe or apron prepare individual protection means depending on work conditions and toxicity of substances used Grease hands with protection paste cream and put on cotton and rubber gloves Before starting work safe conditions of which are not known claim for safety inductions 324 2022 5 0000010 OM 9 TRACTOR TRANSPORTATION AND TOWING 9 1 Tractor transportation Tractors are transported by railroad motor vehicles or under its own power Engage the parking break and the first gear of the gearbox for tractor transportation Fasten the tractor to the rail platform with four sling ropes Fasten one sling rope on each side to a nut located on rear wheel hub by one end and to binder bracket by another end Also fasten one sling rope on each side of the trac tor to the FLL supporting bracket by one rope end and to binder bracket by another end During tractor loading unloading use lifting mechanisms with load carrying capacity of at least 10 ton force Tie steel ropes down to front axle beam and rear wheels semiaxle as shown in the scheme roping diagram in Figure 9 1 1 For tractor roping the following accessories are loops on the rope or on other accessory shall be put on semiaxles wi
104. take off in any gear transmission hydraulic system operates prop erl Wear problem of spline joint of clutch Disconnect tractor disassemble clutch case and gear shaft primary shaft or coupling bushing box casing replace worn out parts A gear can not be engaged Disconnect tractor dismount gearbox and replace plate or bushing worn out parts Disconnect tractor dismount gearbox and replace worn out parts L H pass of GB reducing gear can not be engaged Sticking or failure of hydraulic cylinder Rinse valve spool Replace valve if necessary valve for control of switching of GB re ducing gear pass Increased noise Not enough oil in transmission Refill oil up to oil level mark Wear problem or damage of bearings Replace worn out bearings and other damaged parts and other transmission components The engine can not be started when range selector lever is in neutral position or can be started when a range is selected Faulty switch for engine start up lock Replace switch for engine start up lock with range en with range engaged gaged Switch for engine start up lock with Adjust switch for engine start up lock with range en range engaged is not adjusted gaged as indicated in subsection 3 4 2 Mechanism of engine start up lock with range engaged and mecha bkd nism of FDA disengagement when reversina A range can not be engaged or becomes self disengaged Wear problem of yoke plate or clutch Disconnect
105. the handle 2 contraclockwise against the stop increase engine speed and let it run for one two minutes until the heater radiator is filled up with the fluid Make sure the fluid circulates through the heater The heater radia tor must warm up Herewith the cooling fluid level in the cooling system radiator will de crease refill the cooling fluid through the filler of the expansion tank Refill till the cooling fluid level in the expansion tank reaches 50 60 mm below the upper edge of the filler to warm up the cab quickly switch on the heater fan and open recirculation shut ters ATTENTION WHEN OPERATING IN THE HEATING MODE THE SWITCH 2 FIGURE 2 4 1 SHALL BE COMPLETELY OFF TO PREVENT THE COOLING SYSTEM AND THE HEATING SYSTEM FROM SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION 1 sun visor 2 handle of heater control valve 3 upper shield unit of button switches Figure 2 4 2 Installation of heater control valve 21 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 4 3 Cab ventilation During the conditioner operation in the cooling and heating modes the cab ventila tion is executed simultaneously To make the conditioner operate only in the ventilation mode it is necessary to close the heater control valve set the switch 2 figure 2 4 1 in po sition 0 and the switch 1 in any of three marked positions 2 5 Instrument board The instrument board 13 figure 2 1 1 includes six gauges with five signal lamps as shown in figure 2 5 1 Variant 1
106. the dealer Rinse of dosing pump compo perhaps due to dirt accumulation nents is required Assembly and check of operability should be is performed only by maintenance depart ment in accordance with manufacturer s instruction Spool recentering springs of dos Contact the dealer Replacement of springs assembly ing pump have lost spring power or and check of operability should be is performed only are broken by maintenance department in accordance with manu facturer s instruction Permanent adjustment of steering wheel is required steering wheel does not follow selected direction Spool recentering springs of dos Contact the dealer Replacement of springs assembly ing pump have lost spring power or and check of operability should be is performed only are broken by maintenance department in accordance with manu facturer s instruction One of anti shock valves setting Contact the dealer Replacement of faulty compo springs is broken or gerotor twin is nents assembly and check of operability should be is worn out performed only by maintenance department in accor dance with manufacturer s instruction Worn out sealing of hydraulic cyl Replace faulty components of cylinder inder piston 294 2022 5 0000010 OM Continuation of Table 7 11 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Increased clearance of steering wheel Cone shaped pins of HSC hy Tighten pin nuts as indicated in sectio
107. the following order 1 Adjusting a clearance gap B figure 3 3 4 between the piston 10 and the pusher 9 of the main cylinder 11 set the pedal 7 so as to observe D dimension by means of the bolt 3 tighten the nut 4 screw the pusher 9 into the fork 5 screwing the fork 5 in and out achieve the dimension T defined as moving of the pedal 7 from the initial position to touch the pusher 9 to the piston 10 measured at the center of pedal casing tighten the nut 8 and forelock the pin 6 2 Adjusting a clearance gap E between the rod 25 of the operating cylinder 24 and the pusher 26 of the hydraulic booster 27 remove the operating cylinder off the plate 13 having taken the pin 14 out in the cylinder 24 set the rod 25 into the right extreme position until stops against the cover set the operating cylinder 24 so that the rod 25 touches the pusher 26 of the hydraulic booster 27 turning the rest 20 in or out bring the orifices of the rest and the plate 13 in coincidence screw the rest 20 into the cover by half turn tighten the nut 21 mount the pin 14 and forelock 3 Adjusting a clearance gap between the release bearing and the release levers of the clutch detach the pull bar 29 from the lever 34 having taken the pin 33 out unlock the fork 32 turn the lever 34 contraclockwise until the release bearing stops against the re lease levers and turning the fork 32 bring the orifi
108. the handle and then open the screen completely If it is not possible to open the emergency exits break the screen of one of the emergency exits with a heavy subject at hand and leave the tractor cab Note Emergency exit allocation is given in subsection 2 19 Cab locks and han dles 4 5 4 In case the engine crankshaft speeds up excessively kill the engine and brake the tractor immediately 4 5 5 In case a fire bed occurs stop the engine brake the tractor turn off the accu mulator battery switch Pour some sand onto the fire bed cover with canvas cloth sack cloth or other dense texture Use a carbon dioxide fire extinguisher Do not pour water over burning fuel and oil 183 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 COUPLING OF IMPLEMENTS 5 1 General information In section 5 Coupling of implements necessary instructions and data on features of application of an agricultural tractor BELARUS 2022 5 are given Permitted field of application of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 includes places with un restricted air exchange sufficient flotation and overall passing ability Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are designed for performance of the mechanized works in plant growing and fodder production Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are packaged with necessary work equipment for cou pling of implements i e lift linkage and drawbar hitches RLL FLL DM PTO hydraulic feed outs pneumatic heads and electrical outlet receptacles The tractor implemen
109. the implement is lifted to the transport position when moving on the sharp climb and sharp descent Do not engage PTO shaft in the following cases when the tractor engine is disengaged the implement coupled to the tractor is in transport position when the working attachments are sunken into the soil if a process material overlays the implement working attachments or if the working attachments are clogged or wedged if the slope angle refraction angle in any plane of cardan shaft hinged joint is a considerable During operation of the rotation tilling machine with the active working attachments comply with the following guidelines do not engage the PTO shaft when the implement is grounded The PTO shaft shall be engaged only when the ready to operate implement is lowered down with the working attachments staying off the ground with clearance making not less than 20 35 mm lowering down of the implement with rotating working attachments shall be carried out in a smooth manner when the tractor is moving forward prevent the tractor from moving in the direction not corresponding the implement working travel during operation when the working attachments are sunken with engaged and disengaged PTO shaft during operation on strong soils at first carry out processing of cross ranges for moving in the disclosure and than the lengthwise tillage can be started it is recommended to work at minimum processing depth
110. the rear axle body and consists of a driven 22 and drive 23 gears located coaxially and interconnected by means of three equally located intermediate gears 9 fitted on the centers 7 pressed into the reduction housing 10 The drive and driven gears have splined holes by means of which they can be con nected with splined journals of the respective end extensions depending on the shaft end extension turning speed required 540 rpm with gear 22 1000 rpm with gear 23 The shaft end extensions have marks on their ends 540 and 1000 accord ingly The shaft end extensions are mounted on tapered roller bearings 18 and locked against axial movement with a thrust washer 13 secured by four bolts Changing the ex tension remove the washer 13 change the extension 16 and fix the thrust washer 13 The PTO is engaged and disengaged by the multi disk friction clutch and the PTO brake On the outer splines of the friction clutch drive shaft 2 disks 3 with metal ceramic linings are mounted and in slots of a drum 5 connected with the reduction drive gear 23 by means of splines steel disks 4 are mounted As the PTO is engaged a piston 26 com presses the disks under oil pressure thus joining the PTO reduction unit with the drive shaft 2 As the friction clutch is disengaged the piston 26 returns to its initial position under the pressure of the springs 27 The PTO end extension is stopped by the PTO brake The brake is mounted in the
111. the rear one the upper link shall be shortened 2 Modification of length of left or right crossbeam The modification is carried out in the following cases to ensure the implement is in the horizontal plane to ensure the even depth processing with operative parts of tractor mounted ma chine across the width of cut 3 Modification of length of both crossbeams upper link for transport position of the implement The modification is carried out in the following cases to ensure the road clearance is not less than 300 mm to ensure the sufficient safe clearance between the elements of the tractor and the implement excluding the contact of parts of the tractor implements clearance is not less than 100 mm 4 Modification of length of both tension rods The modification is carried out in the following cases during transportation of the implement tension rods shall be blocked for the limita tion of the implement rocking at run for the avoidance of the tractor elements damaging in case of an incidence during operation of mounted semimounted tilling machines with passively oper ated parts for the full processing share and chisel ploughs shallow ploughs rippers and other implements free movement in horizontal plane rocking shall be ensured and the fasteners shall be unblocked as indicated in subsection 3 18 2 Tension rods IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OFFSET THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE IMPLEMENT CONCERNING THE LONG
112. thoroughly In case the hydraulic system is operated with hydraulically operated implements filled with oil origin of which is unknown the oil in the implement must be replaced by the oil primed into the tractor hydraulic lift system Purity of the hydraulic system oil ensures its fail safe operation Types of scheduled maintenance service are shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Types of scheduled maintenance service Types of maintenance service Intervals h Maintenance service during operating run in MS before during and after run in after 30 hours of operation Shikime STWS First maintenance service MS 1 Additional maintenance service 2MS 1 500 second maintenance service MS 2 231 2022 5 0000010 OM Third maintenance service MS 3 1000 Special maintenance service 2000 as it may be required In course of transfer to autumn and winter operation MS AW and spring and summer MS SS Seasonal maintenance service MS SS and MS AW Maintenance service not corresponding to the set intervals with MS 1 2MS 1 MS 2 MS 3 and special MS Maintenance service in special operating condi During preparation of the tractor tions operation in special conditions Maintenance service or storage In case of long term storage Data on the maintenance services carried out by the operator before during and after the tractor run in are shown in subsection 4 4 Further assembly and run in of tractor Data
113. tires Faulty toe in Adjust toe in as indicated in section 6 Maintenance service Noncompliance of pressure in tires Adjust pressure in tires as indicated in subsection to the recommended standards 4 2 8 Choice of optimal inflation pressure of tire depending on operating conditions and tractor axle load and tires operating rules Pp Pen Pp NC Drive clutch does not transmit torque Pressure loss in clutch booster Disassemble distribution valve rinse case and Spool Failure of system electrics Detect and correct trouble in ECS of FDA E a Insufficient value of torque transferred Low pressure in transmission hy Adjust pressure in transmission hydraulic system draulic system up to the value 0 9 to 1 0 MPa Increased leakage in drive control hydraulic system wear of O rings of piston and Replace O rings drum wear of mating surfaces sleeve Replace worn out parts drum hub drum piston wear of disk packs Replace worn out parts a NON SN SOR Drive does not operate in automated mode In automated mode FDA drive can Detect and correct trouble in ECS of FDA not be engaged when guide wheels are in forward position FDA drive is permanently en Detect and correct trouble in ECS of FDA gaged in automated mode can not be disengaged when guide wheels are turned Disconnect switch of FDA drive Adjust disconnect switch of FDA drive automatic automatic switching on sensor sw
114. tools 1 Figure 6 4 6 of the RLL and FLL in case it is installed are located In case of dirt accu mulation clear the internal pockets and rinse it with water 1 link 2 gripper tool Figure 6 4 6 Gripper tool of RLL FLL 6 4 1 14 Task 13 Check breaks functioning in running order the engine steering light alarm devices operability The following tractor operating parameters shall be ensured the engine must operate properly in all modes control elements light warning and acoustic alarm devices must operate properly simultaneous engagement of the right and left service brake In case the abovementioned conditions were not observed adjust as required or perform repair of the required tractor systems 241 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 1 15 Task 14 Drainage of the condensate water from the pneumatic system balloons To condensate drainage from the both balloons 2 Figure 6 4 7 of the pneumatic system pull the ring drain valve ring 1 installed on each balloon towards the horizontal di rection of any side and hold it until full drainage of condensate es _ 1 ring 2 pneumatic system balloon Figure 6 4 7 Drainage of the condensate water from the pneumatic system balloon 6 4 1 16 Task 15 Drainage of the condensate water from the radiator tanks of diesel CAC Operation shall be carried out during the autumn and spring period in every 8 10 hours of the tractor operation or
115. track for the other wheel by analogy check and tighten the tie bolts after the first operation hour then after the first eight ten operation hours and after every consecutive 125 hours of operation If the wheels were removed during changing the rear wheel track mounting them back tighten the securing nuts with a torque of 700 to 750 N m and check the wheel securing nuts for tightening after the first operation hour after the first eight ten operation hours and every subsequent 125 hours of operation ATTENTION AFTER TIGHTENING THE BOLTS MAKE SURE THE END SURFACES OF THE UPPER AND LOWER INSERTS DON T JUT OUT WITH RESPECT TO EACH OTHER BY A VALUE OF 1 2 MM DIAGRAM 2 Figure 4 2 3 Rear wheel track setting Table 4 5 Rear wheel track setting The installation dimen Trece Diagram No K track dimen sion from the end sur figure 4 2 3 sions mm face of the hub insert to the axle shaft end L mm 1800 2010 105 0 SSAU RAA 2230 2500 202 67 ATTENTION EX WORKS DELIVERED REAR WHEELS ARE SET TO A TRACK UNDER THE DIAGRAM 1 FIGURE 4 2 3 ATTENTION TO RECEIVE INFORMATION ON THE RULES OF REAR WHELL TRACK SETTING WITH TIRES 11 2R42 PLEASE CONTACT YOUR DEALER 173 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 10 Rear wheel twinning With an aim to improve gripping properties of the tractor when coupled with heavy agricultural implements on soils with low bearing capacity rear wheel twinning with use of spacers
116. tractor dismount gearbox and replace worn out parts T Noisy gear shiftino clutch grabs and shudders surfaces E Se Ee See ee Oil leakage in dry compartment of clutch coupling case Oil leakage through connection bowl Disconnect tractor in order to detach engine from clutch cover case or through connection clutch coupling case and stop the leakage release yoke bracket shaft clutch coupling case see Figure 3 3 6 Oil leakage through cups Disconnect tractor in order to detach from clutch cou pling case and replace cups 279 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 3 Possible failures in the electronic control system for rear axle differential lock front driving axle drive front power take off shaft GB reducing gear and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures in the electronic system for rear axle DL FDA drive FPTO GB reducing gear and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Failure l Troubleshooting external manifestations cause FDA drive or rear axle drive can not be engaged in forced mode or GB reducing gear can not be shifted to the higher pass FPTO drive can not be engaged Power supply voltage is not conveyed Check according to electric circuit diagram Annex C if to the respective distribution valve so the power supply voltage is conveyed to the respective lenoid distribution valve solenoid Jamming of the respective distribution Rinse the distributio
117. tractor after sales service warranty is no longer valid 6 6 2 Safety precautions for exclusion of hazardous situations related to an accu mulator battery and a fuel tank During maintenance of the accumulator battery perform the following avoid skin contact with electrolyte clean the batteries with wiping material moistened with aqua ammonia solution ammonium hydroxide during examination of electrolyte level use distilled water only do not check the battery charge condition by means of the terminal short circuit do not connect the accumulator battery with reversed polarity In order to avoid damaging of the electronic units of the electrical facilities and elec trical control systems adhere to the following safety precaution do not connect the AB outputs with the engine running It will cause the peak volt age in charging circuit and will result in inevitable failure of the diodes and transistors do not disconnect the electric wires when the engine is running and electric switches are on do not cause short circuit by incorrect wires connection Short circuit or incorrect polarity will result in failure of the diodes and transistors do not connect the AB in the electrical facilities systems until the outputs inputs polarity and voltage are checked do not check the electric current by spark test as it can result in immediate break down of the transistors Repair operations associated with applicati
118. 0 Disassemble the lowering valve assembled 7 11 Rinse all the components withdrawn from the section housing 10 and rinse the section housing with the diesel fuel or petroleum also 12 Assemble all components in reverse sequence ensuring the dimension A value Measured before disassembly procedure ATTENTION SECTION EHR 23LS LOWERING VALVE DISASSEMBLY PROCE DURE SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY DEALERS 306 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 14 Possible failures in the electrical equipment and guidelines for trouble shooting 7 14 1 General information Marking of all electrical equipment components GB1 FU1 K1 QS1 SA1 and etc corresponds to electric circuit diagram for BELARUS 2022 5 that is enclosed to the pre sent operation manual Annex D Blowing of a fuse elements FU in switching unit SU is indicated by red led lamps upon switching of any load When faulty fuse element is replaced install properly operating fuse element of the same specific power otherwise switching unit and tractor electrics can be damaged Purpose of any fuse element and switching unit relay is specified in labels put on plastic cover of the SU and in subsection 2 18 Switching unit 7 14 2 Search and elimination of failures in electrics power supply system 7 14 2 1 Absence of power supply to the whole system power green led lamp 12V in SU doesn t light up a Test fuse element 80A on a fuse block F1 located in a battery compartment for o
119. 0 OM 6 4 1 4 Task 3 Check of oil level in the HSC tank Before checking the oil level in HSC tank 3 Figure 6 4 3 set the tractor on the flat horizontal ground Stop the engine and put the parking brakes on Check oil level by oil dipstick 1 Level shall be between upper and lower marks of the oil dipstick When necessary turn off plug 2 of oil filler and refill oil up to the upper mark of the oil dipstick Place plug 2 back in its place 1 oil dipstick 2 plug 3 HSC tank Figure 6 4 3 Check of oil level in the HSC tank 6 4 1 5 Task 4 Check hydraulic brake fluid level in tanks of master cylinders of hy draulic drive of clutch and breaks operating control Carry out visual inspection of the fluid level in the tank 4 Figure 6 4 4 of the main clutch coupling cylinder and tanks 1 2 of the main break cylinders Level shall be between min and max marks made on the tanks housing If necessary add the hydraulic brake fluid up to the max mark having turned off the tank caps 3 1 2 tank of the main brake cylinder 3 tank cap 4 tank of the main clutch cou pling cylinder Figure 6 4 4 Check hydraulic brake fluid level in tanks of master cylinders of hy draulic drive of clutch and breaks operating control 238 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 1 6 Task 5 Check of cooling liquid level in the engine cooling system Remove plug 10 Figure 3 1 3 of expansion chamber 9 and check level of cool
120. 00152365 118 2000 3 9 FDA reduc 4 Lubricant BECHEM Lubri BECHEM 0 12 ing gear Lithol 24 LCP GM cantSolid LCP GM 0 006 pivot axle GOST 21150 87 oil C bearing GOST 4366 76 VIM CMa3ka COMO 2K GOST 1033 7 3 Graphite grease Not available Not Not 0 01 500 GOST 3333 80 available available 0 001 3 10 Spline joints of FPTO a o 4 Special purpose liquids 4 1 Clutch cou 1 Hydraulic brake fluid Not available Not pling hy Neva M available DOT4 draulic drive TY 2451 053 reservoir 36732629 2003 and cylin ders i Engine 1 According to the engine operation manual 40 0 5 i Break hy Hydraulic brake Not available Not fluid Neva M available DOT4 TY 2451 053 36732629 2003 cooling draulic drive system reservoir and cylinders 0 According to Directive 2004 26 EC and Regulations of EEC of UN Ne 96 02 stage IHA fuel wit sulfur content up to 0 3 g kg 0 03 2 The volume of fuel tanks in tractors BALARUS 2022 5 that were produced later might be in creased 3 The volume of fuel tanks for chemical agent AdBlue in the tractors BALARUS 2022 5 that were produced later might be changed 275 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 POSSIBLE FAILURES AND GUIDELINES FOR TROUBLESHOOT ING 7 1 Possible failures in clutch coupling and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures in clutch coupling and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown i
121. 0a X 310 x H SP1 SP2 Pressure sensor ACAM M TR RB 0751321 004 94 A A PN re SQ1 FDA 25 VD6 awake F SQ1 SQ2 Contactless position sensor S02 DL 13 AA a VD1 VD4 Diode KA 206A TT 3 362 141 TR a aa if 3 S Light emitting diode AN307KM aA0 336 076 TR Me muy 8a xxm 3105 X VOY go beoga aaa g VO Light emitting diode AN307HM aA0 336 076 TR QS ag8eSi ADR a SK Z x mu o 2 oO LI toa d a a x lt aa 1 ae nomo osz 4 134 0 lt _ SP1 me ARAA NANNA n 151 T gt 302 C XS3 2 SP2 150a X gt gt _ 303 XS3 1 n 126 4 1228 K 1225 K SB1 123 123a 123a e 126 4 ae 124 3 1240 3 1 150p T 1501 1 XS2 3 XS2 1 SB2 XS2 2 Figure b1 Electrical circuit diagram of the DL 128 P lt e gt 150m SB4 J 304 Ky lt 9 gt 150c 150c 15010 329 150m Reverse relay Right brake relay 160 P 160 P 120 4 141 0 142 K 300 C Table 1 continued Denomination Receptacles OCT 37 003 032 88 XP6 Male receptacle 502606 XS5 1 X85 10 Female receptacle60 7605 XS6 Female receptacle 602606 Dm ta wo gt q a i gt lt n oc 1 XS8 3 Female receptacle 605608 Connectors CPC of AMP company catalogue catalogue D E 3 5 C 05 93 Cable plug 0 0182649 1 Instrument socket 0 0182641 1 XP14 XS4 Connectors SS of AMP company c
122. 1 or the following for mula can be used P M F949 where M is torque Nm P is PRS takeoff power kW n is PTO shaft rotation speed rom ATTENTION NOMINAL ROTATION SPEED OF PRS END OF THE IMPLEMENT COUPLED SHALL NOT EXCEED 1000 RPM If there is a need to improve the PRS rotation speed or rotation speed of working at tachments for the implements coupled the following formula can be used Npic UNs where Npc IS PRS rotation speed min ns is working attachments rotation speed min u is gear transmission ratio of the implement drive To avoid failures of PTO shaft and PRS in several implements with active working attachments tilling rotary implements combine harvester mowers cattle feeders pickup balers and etc mechanical safety clutches are used Functional purpose of the safety clutch is automated gear deactivation or limitation of the torque value transmitted from the PTO shaft to PRS under overloads caused by large starting moment overload of locks the working attachments and loads fluctuations on the PRS drive Response time of the implement cardan shaft safety clutch can be by the following formula Me k M lt Mpto where Mpto is maximum permissible PTO shaft torque Nm Me is response time of the safety clutch after which the implement shall not operate Nm M4 is nominal operating torque permissible for the implement drive in the specified operating conditions Nm k 1 25 1 5 is design factor sma
123. 1 and 3 Figure 6 4 26 mounted in the upper cover of rear axle from accumulated dirt and consolidated lubricant squirt lubricating boxes 1 and 3 with a lubricant until the lubricant appears from the holes 1 3 lubricating boxes 2 electrohydraulic unit Figure 6 4 26 Oiling of the RLL turning shaft bushings 6 4 4 8 Task 42 Check adjust wheel hub drive bearings of FDA Clearance between bearings 1 9 Figure 6 4 27 of driving gear 2 must not exceed 0 05 mm If necessary make adjustment by changing quantity of slitted gaskets 4 between bowl 3 and housing Bearings 8 10 of pivot axle 6 11 must have standoff If necessary adjust as follows unscrew four bolts 5 and screw two of them in disassembly holes in axle 6 in order to put the axle forward and release gaskets 7 remove required number of gaskets and mount the axle 6 back in its place tightening bolts 5 Bearings standoff must ensure that effort for cam turning applied to flange 12 was within the range from 60 to 80 N A En pi la fo WS SS a WA y W AN BILAB HLA ML IOs HHH JHH SAS RSA fee N x Y X l ees Ea He HH 1 bearing 2 driving gear 3 bowl 4 slitted gaskets 5 bolt 6 pivot axle 7 gaskets 8 9 10 bearing 11 pivot axle 12 flange Figure 6 4 27 Check adjustment of wheel hub drive bearings of FDA 254 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 4 9
124. 13 and 16 the brake levers 14 and 17 thus moving the service brake pressure disks Turning towards each other and running with tapered surfaces of profile grooves on the balls the pressure disks move apart compressing the brake disk packs and braking the pinion gears of the rear axle drives As the handle 9 together with the rod 3 turns by an angle of 35 40 around its axis the toothed bar of the rod comes out of meshing with the latch 8 and the rod moves freely down unbraking the pinion gears of the rear wheel drives 108 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 stop plate 2 lever 3 rod 4 adjusting bolt 5 drawing mechanism 6 axle 7 latch pin 8 latch 9 handle 10 brake shaft 11 20 lever 12 19 21 23 pin 13 16 link 14 17 brake lever 15 right working cylinder 18 left working cylinder 22 24 fork Figure 3 9 6 Parking brake 3 9 5 Parking brake adjustment ATTENTION PRIOR TO ADJUSTMENT OF PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR AD JUST THE SERVICE BRAKES To adjust the control of the manual mechanical brake actuator parking brake pro ceed as follows push the handle 9 figure 3 9 6 with the rod 3 to the lowermost position adjust the length of the left brake link 16 and the length of the right brake link 13 so that the clearance between the pin 21 and the fork 22 of the left brake makes 3 4 mm and the pin 23 touches face of the right brake fork 24 oval groove as the h
125. 2 steering cylinders pins 13 ball pins of steering link 14 locking nuts of the steering link tube 1 Check and tighten up if necessary two bolts M16 by one bolt on each side fastening en gine to semi frame with torque of 160 to 200 N m 2 Check and tighten up if necessary six accessible bolts M16 fastening semi frame to clutch case with torque of 160 to 200 N m 3 Check and tighten up if necessary four bolts M12 fastening rear plate to clutch casing with torque from 70 to 80 N m 44 Check and tighten up if necessary nine bolts M20 and one nut at the joint of gearbox casing and the clutch casing with torque of 300 to 400 N m 5 Check and tighten up if necessary nine accessible bolts M18 and three nuts at the joint of gearbox casingu and rear axle body with torque of 315 to 400 N m 6 Check and tighten up if necessary thirty six bolts M16 at both joints of rear axle body and semi axle tube by eighteen bolts on each side with torque of 160 to 200 N m 7 Check and tighten up if necessary eight bolts M20 by four bolts on each side fastening RLL brace brackets to rear semi axle tubes with torque of 250 to 300 N m 8 Check and tighten up if necessary two castle nuts M27 by one nut on each link fastening eye ring to lower link for which perform the following actions unfasten cotter pins holding castle nuts tighten up two castle nuts with torque of 30 to 50 N m then turn castle nut further till the nuts nearest slot match
126. 24x1 5 0 At standard engine rom ATTENTION INSTALLATION OF ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS AND CHANGE OF HYDRAULIK LIFT LINKAGE PIPELINES ROUTE IS ALLOWED ONLY AFTER CON SULTATION WITH THE PLANT OR THE DEALER Note Scheme of connection of hydraulic lift linkage outputs to an external con suming system is shown in Figure 2 16 3 200 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 6 Selection of implements for coupling 5 6 1 General instructions ATTENTION IMPLEMENTS WITH OF IDENTICAL APPLICATION BUT OF VARI OUS MANUFACTURERS MAY DIFFER IN COUPLING CHARACTERISTICS HAVE VARIOUS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND REGULATIONS WHEN SELECTING AN IMPLEMENT PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO VARIABLE CHARACTERISTICS OF WORKING CONDITIONS OF THE IMPLEMENTS IN FIELD CONDITIONS In the operation documentation of the implements made by reputable manufactur ers not only matters of accurate application of the implements for the purpose specified are considered but also guidelines about selection and coupling of the tractor implements are made Anyway the manufacturer seller of the implement shall give on your request the information on the minimum basic characteristics of the tractor which shall ensure pos sibility of the implements coupling To make the machine and tractor unit MTU on the basis of a tractor means to de fine how many machines and with what performance characteristics are required for cou pling with your tractor what type of hitch should be applied when requir
127. 3 15 17 12 14 16 18 Pie is eee ae es tas ee gt a gt Law 9 10 173 100 140 85 105 60 B1 JE WN ow oe 6 8 210 et 350 lee os RS 13 2 4 A1 Pal eal PAL eal eal on Fragment of hole with bushing tt Ww m un MA mim mi mi M A1 bracket B1 front beam C1 right longeron C2 right longeron D1 right plate D2 left plate E1 left rear axle tube E2 right rear axle tube K rear axle body Figure 5 15 2 Tractor mounting holes arrangement scheme 230 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 MAINTENANCE 6 1 General instructions ATTENTION ALL ENGINE MAINTENANCE SERVICES INCLUDING DAILY MAINTENANCE SERVICES ARE SET FORTH IN THE ENGINE D260 S3B Operation manual 0000100 ATTACHED TO YOUR TRACTOR IN THE PRESENT SECTION OF THE OPERATION MANUAL ONLY MAINTENANCE SERVICES FOR EXTERIOR PARTS OF WATER COOLING SUPERCHARGED AIR COOLING ENGINE AIR CLEANING SYSTEMS DEVELOPED AT MTW Maintenance services MS is needed to maintain the tractor in operable state dur ing operation Non compliance with the specified intervals and bad quality of MS may re sult in reduction of tractor life increase of failure number engine power loss and increase in expenses for tractor operation Operator must carry out daily inspection of the tractor excluding fasteners torque retention loss fuel liquid and oil leakage dirt and other depos its accumulation which can cause operating tr
128. 4 8 2 On multifunction display of Il a message C BUS is displayed II and instru ment cluster are not displaying engine operational parameters and data displaying moni tor on the right side cab post and IEP display engine operational parameters Note In is recommended to perform voltage measurement of CAN cable wires in the point specified in Figure 7 14 1 For the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting perform the following 1 Check CAN cable electric connection integrity for which purpose disconnect in struments cut off switch should be in position 0 and perform the following a Check reliability of coupling of cable carrier sockets with carrier sockets of test in struments along the board reconnect when necessary b Check continuity of wires CAN_high CAN_low for cable break along instrument board resistance R should tend to 0 Ohm Reconnect when necessary c Check couple of wires CAN_high and CAN _ GND CAN _ low and CAN_GND for short circuit Resistance R between them should tend to infinity Find and stop short circuit when necessary d Check couple of wires CAN_high and CAN _ low for short circuit Resistance R between them should in any point of cable be equal to 60 3 Ohm If resistance R is 0 Ohm correct points where the short circuit has been detected A short circuit is likely to occur in points where wires unbrazing from CAN cable body occurs Note Resistance between wires CAN_high and CAN_
129. 50 hours of operation ccceeeee eee ees 248 6 4 4 Maintenance services in every 500 hours of operatiOn ccccceeeeeeee eee 203 6 4 5 Maintenance service in every 1000 hours of operatiOn cccceeeee eens 208 6 4 6 Maintenance service in every 2000 hours of operatiOn cccceeeeee eee 264 6 4 7 Maintenance service that is inconsistent with intervals of MS 1 2MS 1 MS 2 MS 3 and special MS cccc cece cece eee eee e eee e tees ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeteeeeeeggaaeneees 265 6 4 8 General MAINTENANCE SEPVICES 0 cece cece eee e cece ene eee tees tena eeeeeeeeeenaaeaes 266 6 5 Seasonal Maintenance SEPViCeS 20 ccc ce cece eee eee e sence eeeeeeeneeeenaeeenneeeges 268 6 6 Safety measures during maintenance and repair operations ceeeee eee 269 6 6 1 General safety requireMents 0 cece ccc cce eee e cece eee e eee eeeeesaeeeeeeasaeeeeeeaaes 269 6 6 2 Safety precautions for exclusion of hazardous situations related to an accumulator battery and a fuel tank cc cece cece eee ee ee ee eee eeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenens 269 6 6 3 Guidelines for safe use of leveling jacks and statement of places where they Shiai Oe In SlalllCasssyansaowssacnatenoias se asauisas yaueiwuset cabo ulaniieaguaneeuaebiek 2 0 6 7 Filling and lubrication of the tractor with fuel and lubrication materials 2 2 7 POSSIBLE FAILURES AND GUIDELINES FO
130. 503 E E E 1508 i 145 3 pe e Zz 145 3 C i a a a E Goan sl na E a a TT i T E E a E pE aes e eer ine ea T i E _ 1260 4 a a E 128a P b O a ES aa E 130a Ky EEE ee 1 a E O E J E ee oo ae E a E 142 K 206a k S N AEE LE pes Ema z 300 C 3020 0 300a C YW Lo x ie l l 8 3 S 885 3 G M ieee eee in Fil lee VD4 VD2 AREO ad EL4 t estes Teel ol N rs K7 VD3 QP et E x eee FL5 Lower pass rela FDA drive rela N t Xp i eee ell 7 Prey ee 120 ay E 141 0 142 K xa emITI Q b a s S 300 C nma N p o HES P Say Ge a ae SP Table 1 to horn 16m 0 ngae A F 2 o SIS Hin to DL lam 1312 X AAMAR E ee we a He gt To instrument cluster 12V before engine star 160 P Designation Denomination T Note g 5 to left brake sensor 135 to Pon brake sensor 136 3 A1 A3 Electromagnet of hydraulic valve group A pA ae 12V after engine start 120 4 XP9 FA ie i o 4 EL3 EL4 Pilot lamp of orange color f2 ELS Pilot lamp of red color he Seat saat eRe EO Cl K4 K6 K7 K9 20A cut out relay fe jis SA6 7 gt SAS SA7 Disconnect switch 12 1 MKC 642241001 TR 2 7 SBT FDA automatic actuati x eG SB1 SB2 Open switch with ball See n 3 a ae XP6 XS6 Disconnect switch 12 41 TR RB 37334210 004 97 eS fuer 305 0 a 3050 0 Sensor of temperature annunciator TM111 12 PF fo 306 K __ 306a K _ TR 37 003 569 90 Sensor caf emergency 3040 K4 OO 304a K4 31
131. 5W 40 winter 2 GOST 8581 78 winter 212 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 6 4 continued ea a ee ee a ee ee ee ee E ee ee ee E a Transmission HESSOL 4 5 0 04 1000 oil TAn 15B BECHEM GOST 23652 HYPOID i 79 SAE 80W 90 API cal solid l GL5 GL4 beam 58 305 2002 Transmission Transmis 4 0 0 04 1000 hub drive oil sion oil casing of TAn 15B TAN 17u FDA GOST 23652 TCm 19K 79 j 25 FPTO Transmission Transmis Engine oil 2 140 2 1000 reducing oil sion oil M 10r gear TAn 15B GOST T9On 15 TAN 17u 8581 78 GOST 23652 TCn 15K 79 GOST 23652 79 T9y 15M TY 38 401 58 305 2002 2 6 HLL tank All weather oils Not Not Not 35 0 0 5 1000 hydraulic BE available available available l CHEM i Staroil No32 ADDINOL Hydraulikol HLP 32 THK Hydraulic HLP 32 HYDROL HLP 32 2d All weather oils Not Not Not 7 5 0 35 1000 hydraulic BE available available available l CHEM i Staroil No32 ADDINOL Hydraulikol HLP 32 THK luapapimk HLP 32 HYDROL HLP 32 213 Table 6 4 continued a o ae ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee 3 Lubricants o O O 3 Lubricants 3 1 Hinged joint of the steer ing hydraulic cylinder Hinged joint of the steer ing link turning shaft of the rear lift linkage 3 4 Clutch release yoke bearing Oscillating pin bushing of the front link of the FLL Oscillating pin bearing of FDA Front drive shaft spider bearing of the twin hinged
132. 7 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 10 Determination of PTO shaft and cardan shaft applicability Critical parameters for determination of possibility of application of rear or front PTO shaft of the tractor and cardan shaft and safety clutch performances also in the course of the implements selection for coupling with the tractor are the following coupling method distance from a connection point to PTO shaft end butt and PRS shaft end PTO shaft ro tational speed PRS torque and power consumption of the implement Horsepower Rotation Torque Capacity speed Nm kW hp rom io 600 300 400 30 209 300 200 50 60 100 ae 80 1100 100 60 80 00 60 3000 40 3 50 2000 200 30 40 1000 30 300 20 540 500 an 20 300 500 200 600 10 g 100 800 10 1000 68 50 me T 30 4 25 20 2000 3 4 5 10 3000 2 4000 5000 Figure 5 10 1 Nomographic chart for torque test on PRS Manufacturers of the implements with active working attachments designed for till age and grass cutting rotary tooling mulchers mowing machines and other implements usually present data on the implement coupling method PRS rotation speed gear trans mission ratio of the implement mechanical drive minimum take off value and maximum required tractor horsepower ensuring the implement operation 208 2022 5 0000010 OM For the purpose of torque test on PRS and in case you know PTO shaft rotation speed and PRS takeoff power nomographic chart Figure 5 10
133. 7 2 Fuses of electronic Control SyYStEMS cc cece cece cece ee enna eee eeeaeeee enna 55 2 1 7 3 Fuses of engine electronic Control SySteM 00 ccc cece cece eee eee eeeeeee eens 56 210 SWUCKING UNIE sesser EASAN 57 2 19 Cablocksand DANG eS amp css cect chvacttetersceicnciciens a eenesSiaatees 61 2 19 1 Cav GOOlr IOCKSsscc0s4 cee ceteusdsedevossteueed sharseisuvedilewseianiedisiussdeoueidivedaiansedey 61 219 2 SINC Class ODCNING arsar rint a E eevee tats 62 219 eal Screen OPENING ines E E a 62 2 19 4 Cab hatch Opening cccccce cece cee cence eee eeesaeeeeeeagaeeeeeegaeeeeteggaseeneas 62 2 20 Seat and its AC USUMENIS oso cows ccrc nw se asd ound aevedann pel Obawedendssaneordedeaspeioawscander 64 220 1 General INfORMAUON ssccaviasccestarsananssasdieinacaseraansennsarsuaanrsaamnanaarsaaaonranads 64 2202 Se At Adusien S te ysectuseensccusmesrenecesust cremsdsasuuceentesecuoenseusesesgeeceeouanesunee 64 2 21 Controlling drive of transmission hydraulic system PUMD 0cceeeee eee 65 2 22 Controlling pneumatic system COMPIeSSOl cccce cece e eee e eee eeeeeaeeeeeenaas 65 2 23 Connector elements of the electrical equipMent c ccc eeee eee eens eee eee eees 66 2 23 1 Socket to connect coupled agricultural equipment ccc cece cece eee e eee eeeeeees 66 2 23 2 Connection of additional electrical equipment of coupled machines 66 66 3 DESCRIPTION AND OPE
134. 90 C t __ 21 40 21 40 a 10 K EL3 2a X 1 3X g 425 X res J iii n Y SB4 A a 1 n aks x 716 3 ay a aS kee XPI2A XS12 2 co 2 Z a tL IL p us a 160 4 HL31 ELS XP2 2XS2 3 FT or 37a X 51a F Lha 55e f 55e 585 K z pa PRE pr nae O 95 Ky lof yon eS 100740 Hte J l eal aK rr fak T c e o CO Bk Pr 24 6 vay HL32 EL6 2 og Ean 59e 3 O mn 59e 3 in lt 1 59x 3 o mm 59x 3 HL33 ELT lo L pl ale dd FLIM i Li C errre i A eree PR DERGE i Z TAD YRT x lt zo Y C C 20 4 ee ee 20 9 paaga ys Ror 322 E E lag XS84 PFA as LS a ats j l 7 h N BN C TOKE GG a ea es E Seg P Ta C e UR S000 one q eo Tee EL4 pe 4 aa Eee rel Care opS eps f dane faleds defe io on eee tH 425 4 E SA3 H34 oo cae COC eee pee n TT orangia an pra 25 EL alc ASE 2 ae A eb PETTITT EEE EE ge qT oe T E S sga 0 et 8x WAI a c 7 gt aa EL10 XS1 2 XP1 1 810 Bact piz 2X3 Tes i i E6 81x C gt 8 te C ee F XS15 4 i ad E m gaacaadaaadaodd PEED ED ls ERDEDER BEEBE aw i X2 X4 m Sz ELN ISH sua se s Ks ay H AAAAY AAA 15 S iaa quae SA7 BAZ E7 PETN a a a a a E ES ST 32 93 3 E 59m 3 2 an HHHH EJ 10a K TD EL12 E CES vo R uage g XP1 5_ XS1 6 K4 2 18 105 K i o ENNER Pe ae HT 2 0 TU 3 m B16 c f5 gt 818 E ee e a E 5 HY a H35 __XSLT_XPL6 b ae eT es ae ss mxi o 3 81a C z o el H n HHT 290 04 i E EL13 1 C spog KTZ o eaa e H BHH XS2 8_XP2 4 i lt Pr a eh ee TE a
135. AGE GOES UP ABOVE 19V THE INTEGRATED INDICATOR FULLY GOES OUT AND RECOVERES WHEN THE ON BOARD VOLTAGE FALLS BELOW 17V ATTENTION PILOT SIGNALLING LAMS ARE ACTIVATED AND DEACTIVATED SYNCHRONOUSLY WITH CHANGING THE STATE OF SYSTEM SENSORS 2 4 Description of testing the integrated indicator performance Each time the power supply is on performance testing of needle pointers and scale elements of the rear PTO indicator is carried out in the integrated indicator Herewith the indicator needle pointers move away from zero marks for one second or the pointers flut ter for not more than one second on indicator zero marks and also both annunciators of the rear PTO scale range 6 and 10 get actuated figure 2 7 1 as well as all segments of the rear PTO scale 2 8 Information display 2 8 1 General information The information display 21 figure 2 1 1 is designed to display engine actual pa rameters and indication of the engine electronic control system EECS faults When the key of starter and instrument switch is set into I position figure 2 2 2 supply voltage is delivered to the engine electronic control system After the supply voltage is delivered the EECS constantly performs self testing If there are no faults in the EECS operation the information display functions in a working mode it displays actual parame ters of engine operation When the error is defined the information display produces an acoustic signal and a brief d
136. AT YOU CARRY OUT TRACTOR RUN IN FOR 30 HOURS LOAD THE TRACTOR UP TO 80 OF ITS RATED POWER BEFORE THE FIRST TECHNICAL MAINTENANCE TM 1 125 HOURS 181 2022 5 0000010 OM Carrying out the 30 hour run in follow the below instructions constantly inspect gauge indications operation of lubrication system cooling sys tem and power supply system Control levels of oil and fluids in refill capacities check outer fastening links for tightness and tighten them do not overload the engine avoid engine smoking and speed decrease The fea tures of overload are sharp decrease of speed smoking and absence of engine reaction to increase of fuel feed Operation at high gear under load results in excessive wear of fric tion parts of the engine tractor operation at lower gear under small load and with increased speed of the engine will result in fuel overconsumption Right selection of the gear for each specific condition of operation ensures fuel economy and reduces engine wear out avoid prolonged engine operation without load in a mode of max or min speed of the engine for correct break in of the clutch friction parts during the run in process engage the clutch more often and more smoothly 4 4 4 Technical maintenance during tractor run in After the first operation hour check tightening of nuts attaching rear wheels to the hub nuts attaching front wheels to FDA gear group flanges and nuts attaching the front wheel disks to t
137. BELARUS 2022 0 2022 5 0000010 PD OPERATOR S MANUAL The operator s manual was composed by an engineer of the first Department of Construc tive and Experimental Work A V Runov with participation of key specialists of DOEW 1 of RUE Minsk Tractor Works Publication responsible person Y M Korotky head of engineering office of design docu mentation of the DCEW 1 Executive editor A G Stasilevich design manager of tractor production of PA MTW Editor in chief I N Uss PA MTW chief designer Operator s manual contains brief description and specifications of tractors Belarus 2022 5 produced by Minsk Tractor Works The main tractors operating rules are set forth the in formation about their adjustments and maintenance is provided Operator s manual is meant for tractor study operation rules and servicing of tractors BELARUS 2022 5 In view of P A MTW policy directed to constant upgrading of produced goods the con struction of some units and parts of Belarus tractor may undergo changes which are not reflected in present edition The detailed information may be obtained from BELARUS dealer RUE Minsk Tractor Works 2009 All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced in any form without written permission of RUE MTW 2022 5 0000010 OM CONTENTS 1 TRACTOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 0 ccc ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 13 Nek TRACIOR
138. CTURAL COMPONENTS FOR EXAMPLE BY LIFTING DEVICE GUIDING RODS OR TRACTOR WHEELS DUE TO MUTUAL TOUCH DOWN OF THE CARDAN SHAFT AND OTHER STRACTURAL COMPONENTS SOME BREACKAGE OF THE IMPLEMENT TRAILING APPLIANCE CAN OCCURE OR FOR EXAMPLE TRAC TOR TIRES OR THE CARDAN SHAFT DAMAGE 211 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION WHEN THE IMPLEMENT IS OPERATED WITH THE CARDAN SHAFT THERE IS A HAZARD OF PROCESS MATERIAL OR THE IMPLEMENT COM PONENTS RELEASE THEREFORE IT IS NESESSARY TO OBSERVE SAFE DIS TANCE When the implement cardan shaft is coupled to the PTO shaft end extension the fol lowing rules and requirements shall be observed 1 Check the engaged PTO shaft speed mode 540 or 1000 for compliance according to tractor PTO shaft end extension type and implement PRS installed 2 Before engagement detach the cardan shaft into two parts 3 Inspect the cardan shaft PTO shaft and PRS for absence of mechanical damage and for completeness of the set Clear the PTO shaft end extensions of dirt when needed and lubricate it according to the lubrication chart specified in the implement operation manual 4 The cardan shaft part having the icon of Tractor on it shall be coupled to the PTO shaft end extension and the second part to the implement PRS accordingly Do not forget to fasten contactor splined bushings on the PTO and PRS shaft ends properly fastening method shall be specified by the cardan shaft manufacturer 5 The imp
139. D OPERATE ONLY WITH THE ENGINE ON To switch on the conditioner it is required to do the following o turn the cut out switch 2 figure 2 4 1 clockwise to 180 until a blue scale be gins o then turn the switch 1 to one of three marked positions the fan rotor has three kinds of rotation speed After 3 5 minutes adjust a required temperature in the cab with the switch 2 o it is possible to adjust a mixture of outer air and recirculation air with recircula tion shutters 7 figure 2 1 1 if available To switch off the conditioner it is required to turn both switches 1 and 2 figure 2 4 1 contraclockwise into 0 position ATTENTION MAKE SURE THE CONDITIONER IS SWITCHED OFF BEFORE STOPPING THE ENGINE ATTENTION WHEN THE CONDITIONER OPERATES IN THE COOLING MODE MAKE SURE THAT THE HEATER CONTROL VALVE IS SHUT OFF IN ORDER TO PREVENT THE SYSTEMS OF HEATING AND COOLING FROM SIMULTANEOUS OP ERATION 2 4 2 Conditioner control in heating mode ATTENTION REFILLING THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY WITH LOW FREEZING LIQUID SPECIFIED IN THE ENGINE OPERATIONAL MANUAL To set the conditioner into the heating mode do the following after refilling the cooling system with the cooling fluid start the engine and let the en gine run at medium idle without opening the heater control valve to reach 70 80 C of cooling system temperature then open the heater control valve with a handle 2 figure 2 4 2 to do this turn
140. E SUBSTANCES RESULT IN SWELL OF THE RUBBER GASKETS 1 Drain hydraulic brake fluid from the hydraulic system performing the following actions unscrew the cap Figure 3 3 4 of the reservoir 1 of the forward drive master cylinder 11 dismount the safety cap 22 from the bypass valve 23 pivot the rubber hose on the bypass valve dipping its loose end into an empty container release the bypass valve 23 30 by one turn press clutch pedal 7 down several times until the hydraulic brake fluid is fully extracted from the hydraulic system screw the bypass valve 23 dismount the hose put on the safety cap 22 back in its place 2 Fill main cylinder 11 tank 1 with hydraulic brake fluid up to mark Max on the tank 3 Circulate fluid through the clutch operation control hydraulic system as it is required in clause 3 3 4 2 of subsection 3 3 4 Clutch control adjustment 4 Place the reservoir cap 1 back in its places 6 4 5 8 Task 54 Change of hydraulic brake fluid in break control drive Change of hydraulic brake fluid in break control hydraulic system on forward drive and on reverse is required WARNING EXCLUDE CONTACT OF HYDRAULIC BRAKE FLUID WITH EYES AND UNCOVERED SKIN AREAS ATENTION EXCLUDE INGRESS OF THE MINERAL OIL PETROLEUM KEROSINE AND DIESEL FUEL AS THESE SUBSTANCES CAUSE THE SWELL OF THE RUBBER GAS KETS To change hydraulic brake fluid in break control hydraulic system perform the following 1 Drain hydr
141. ED WITH BRAKE SHOES PUT UNDER THE WHEELS WHICH EXCLUDE SPONTANEOUS MOVEMENT OF THE TRACTOR 3 10 2 Single line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes The single line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes provides controlling brakes of trail ers and agricultural machines equipped with a single line pneumatic drive as well as tire inflation A diagram for the single line pneumatic drive is shown in figure 3 10 1 4e ii a ii fp te ta 5 are A k a f oe i i i Me e Cai PES u SH BIDDER jii a pate a a kai A Be ends i fi i aN i i a a 1 compressor 2 line from engine inlet manifold 3 pressure regulator 4 air bleed valve 5 brake valve 6 control line 7 connecting head 8 air pressure indica tor 9 emergency air pressure lamp 10 pressure sensor 11 emergency pressure sensor 12 tank 13 condensate drain valve Figure 3 10 1 Single line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes 110 2022 5 0000010 OM Air is fed to the compressor 1 figure 3 10 1 from the engine intake manifold through the line 2 The air is compressed in the compressor 1 and delivered to the tank 12 from which the compressed air is fed to the brake valve 5 With the brake pedals not pressed air goes to the connecting head 7 through the brake valve 5 and the control line and further to the trailer brake pneumatic drive The pressure regulator 3 has an air ble
142. EFUL WHEN PTO SHAFT IS ACTIVATED AND THE CARDAN SHAFT OF THE IMPLEMENT COUPLED IS ROTATING IN CASE THER ARE PEOPLE IN AREA OF OPERATION OF PTO SHAFT THEY OR THEIR CLOTH CAN BE CLAMPED BE TWEEN THE IMPLEMENT ROTATING PARTS AND OTHER MOVING MACHINERY THAT CAN RESULT IN PERMANENT INJURY INCLUDING WITH FATAL OUTCOME THERE FORE BEFORE STARTING THE PTO SHAFT ENSURE THERE IS NO PEOPLE IN DAN GEROUS AREA BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND THE IMPLEMENT WORKS ASSOSIATED WITH MAINTENANCE SERVICES ADJUSTMENT GREASING AND ETC MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING OF THE CARDAN SHAFT SHALL BE CARRIED OUT WHEN THE TRACTOR PTO SHAFT AND ENGINE ARE DISABLED BEFORE STARTING THE CARDAN SHAFT MOUNTING STOP THE ENGINE GET THE IGNITION KEY OUT OF STARTER SWITCH AND THE DEVICES AND SET THE PARKING BRAKE ATTENTION TRACTOR MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE IMPLEMENTS COUPLED CARDAN SHAFTS FAILURES CARDAN SHAFTS SPECIFI CATIONS AND DESIGN ARE IN SPHERE OF RESPONSIBILITY OF THE IMPLEMENTS AND CARDAN SHAFT MANUFACTURERS ATTENTION CARDAN SHAFT OF IMPLEMENT COUPLED MUST ENSURE TRANSFER OF RATED LOAD TORQUE WHEN ROTATION FREQUENCY IS NOT LESS THAN 540 RPM OR 1000 RPM DEPENDING ON THE SET MODE ATTENTION DO NOT USE THE CARDAN SHAFTS WITHOUT THE APPROPRI ATE PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND IF THEY ARE SELF MANUFACTURED OR DAM AGED ATTENTION BE CAREFUL WHEN COUPLING OF THE IMPLEMENTS WITH THE CARDAN DRIVE DEFLECTION ANGLES OF THE CARDAN SHAFT ARE LIMITED BY THE TRACTOR STRA
143. EMENT OF FDA DRIVE IRRESPECTIVE OF THE SET MODE INCLUDING THE MODE FDA DISENGAGED TAKES PLACE WHEN PRESSING THE INTERCONNECTED BRAKE PEDALS ATTENTION WHEN OPERATING ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE IT IS NECESSARY TO DISENGAGE THE FDA DRIVE IN ORDER TO PREVENT INCREASED WEAR OF FRONT WHEEL TYRES ATTENTION IN CASE WIRES IN CIRCUIT OF FDA DRIVE CONTROL ARE BROKEN AUTOMATIC ENGAGEMENT OF THE FRONT DRIVING AXLE TAKES PLACE ATTENTION VIOLATION OF RULES FOR USING FDA DRIVE OPERATION MODES MAY RESULT IN BREAKDOWN OF FDA PARTS AND OTHER PARTS OF TRANSMISSION IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR WITH FDA DRIVE ENGAGED WHEN THE SPEED OF MOVEMENT IS ABOVE 13 KM H 2 14 5 Rear axle differential lock control The rear axle differential lock DL is controlled with a switch 5 figure 2 14 1 Indi cation of rear axle DL operation is performed by an annunciator 4 The switch 5 has three positions DL disengaged middle non fixed DL automatic control upper fixed DL engaged positively lower non fixed To avoid increased wear of the rear wheel tyres and the rear axle differential use the mode DL engaged when traveling on roads with hard surface with the travel speed above 13 km h The mode DL automatic control with guide wheel position corresponding to linear movement engages the rear axle DL and the annunciator 4 go off The real axle DL is disengaged automatically when the guide wheels turn to
144. EN TO BLOW OFF WITH EXHAUST GASES RINSE AND DUST OFF MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE ATTENTION AFTER AIR DUCT CLEANER IT IS NECESSARY TO CHECK ALL INTAKE DUCT CONNECTIONS FOR TIGHTNESS DAMAGED COUPLING MEMBER SHOULD BE REPLACED 267 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION TRACTOR OPERATION WITH UNSEALED INTAKE DUCT IS FOR BIDDEN Depressurizing circuit for air supply to turbocompressor can have adverse effect on reliability of clogging indicator readings which can cause entering of some volume of un purified air with heavy concentration of dust into cylinders via the turbocompressor result ing in accelerated depreciation of engine cylinder piston group in case it enters the oil 6 5 Seasonal maintenance services Carrying out of seasonal maintenance service combine with performance of opera tions of the ordinary maintenance services Scope of work which should be carried out dur ing seasonal maintenance service is listed in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Seasonal maintenance services Scope of work When changing into autumn winter period When changing into spring summer pe with fixed daily average temperature 5C riod with fixed daily average temperature above 5C Replace in accordance with Table 6 4 Replace in accordance with Table 6 4 summer oil grades by winter in transmission summer oil grades by winter in transmission Perform seasonal maintenance opera Perform seasonal maintenance opera tions for engine when changing to au
145. F THE IMPLEMENT DEPENDS ON THE CENTROID OVERHANGING LENGTH AGAINST THE SUSPENSION AXIS AND IT IS LIMITED BY PERMISSIBLE LOADS ON THE TRACTOR AND BY CONTROLLABILITY CRITERION 5 3 2 Three point rear lift linkage Three point rear lift linkage of BEARUS 2022 5 is made according to State Stan dard GOST 10677 and ISO 730 Basic parameters of RLL specified in Table 5 1 and in Figures 5 3 1 5 3 2 are given with standard rear tires 580 70R42 both single and dou bled mounted to the tractor and with standard static radius specified by the manufac turer Rear lift linkage as defined by subsection 3 18 Rear lift linkage consists of three links upper one and two lower links with front ends articulated via hinged joint with the tractor and with rear ends articulated with free hinged joint for the purpose of connection to the attachment pins of the implements coupled RLL is designed for connection of im plements for tail positioning to a tractor for link power transfer during operation and ad justment of their position during operation or run at transport position RLL provides for coupling of the following types of implements and instruments mounted implement fixed in three points upper one and lower links semimounted lower links semimounted with a cross arm to the suspension axis of lower links ATTENTION MOUNTING OF A CROSS ARM OR TRAILING SUSPENSION AXIS BEING THE PART OF IMPLEMENTS SET FOR COUPLING OF SEMIMOUNTED
146. FPTO control system 125 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 14 Undercarriage and tractor wheels The tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are equipped with front and rear wheels with low pressure pneumatic tires 580 70R42 main rear ties doubled 11 2R42 doubled rear tires installed against order used only in a doubled set completed with front tires 11 2R24 420 70R24 main front tires 480 65R24 front tires installed against order 11 2R24 front tires installed against order only in a set with rear tires 11 2R24 Parameters of tires used with tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are shown in table 3 2 Table 3 2 Tire parameters 11 2R42 284 740 11 2R24 1 In present section rolling radiuses are given only for rear tires which are necessary for programming speed of integrated indicator as it is specified in subsection 3 22 3 Programming order of the integrated indicator The front wheels of the tractor are mounted on flanges of FDA wheel reduction units Rear wheels of the tractor are mounted on hubs which consist of split tapered in serts 3 and 4 figure 3 14 1 and a hub body 2 The inserts are tightened in the hub body with eight bolts 1 M20 with a torque of 550 to 600 N m and thus they clench the axle shaft 1 tie bolts 2 hub body 3 upper insert 4 lower insert 5 dismantling holes Figure 3 14 1 Rear wheel hub Tire operating rules selection of best internal pressure in t
147. Figure 6 6 3 Scheme of leveling jacks installation for lifting of the front elements of the tractor 270 2022 5 0000010 OM When using leveling jacks comply with the following safety requirements in the course of tractors BELARUS 2022 5 lifting use properly operating leveling jacks with lifting capacity of 10 ton forces only before tractor jacking kill the engine and engage the parking break in course of the front elements jacking put scotches under the rear wheels in course of the rear elements jacking engage the gear and put scotches under the front wheels do not put the jack on soft or slippery surface as it may cause the tractor fall off the jack When needed use steady and relatively large foot after the tractor is lifted insert the limit stops under the front axle beam rear wheels semi axles or base components of the tractor frame to exclude tractor fall or rolling movement IT IS FORBIDDEN TO START THE ENGINE WHEN THE TRACTOR IS JACKED ATTENTION ONLY PERSONNEL PROPERLY INSTRUCTED ON SAFE USE OF LEVELING JACKS AND HAVING LEARNED METHODS OF LEVELING JACK SAFE OP ERATION ARE ALLOWED ZEN 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 7 Filling and lubrication of the tractor with fuel and lubrication materials In Table 6 4 titles and trademarks of fuel and lubrication materials FLM used dur ing the tractor operation and maintenance are listed their quantity and change intervals are also specified Table 6 4 Li
148. G WITH ELECTRIC UNITS ON LOAD ATTENTION TERMINALS IN THE CABLE SOCKETS ARE NUMBERED ON THE SOCKETS SHELLS ATTENTION REPAIR OPERATIONS OF THE REAR LIFT LINKAGE AND FRONT LIFT LINKAGE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY DEALERS OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY FOR THE REAR LIFT LINKAGE AND FRONT LIFT LINKAGE CONTROL SYSTEM BECOMES INVALID 297 Table 7 12 2022 5 0000010 OM Error Description anticipated Failure inspection method code problem Failure in the electro magnetic lift valve control circuit 9 Figure 3 19 1 Break in the solenoid coil or in solenoid control ca ble Failure in the electro magnetic lowering valve control circuit Break in the solenoid coil 7 Figure 3 19 1 or in solenoid control cable Failure in the electro magnetic lowering valve or lift valve control circuit Short circuit in one of the solenoids or short circuit of the solenoids control wires in the cable Figure 3 19 1 11 12 13 Failure in remote control buttons for lift 4 Figure 2 15 3 Short circuit of 14 wires or sticking of a re mote control buttons for lift 5 Failure in remote control buttons for lowering 5 Figure 2 15 3 Short cir 1 cuit of wires or sticking of a remote control buttons for lowering Complex defects Disconnect the cable from the solenoid and test the solenoid with a testing apparatus to detect a break So lenoid resistance shall not exceed 2 4 Ohm In case the solenoid
149. General information The front driving axle is intended for torque transfer from the engine to front driving wheels of the tractor The front driving axle consists of one piece cast axle beam 3 figure 3 12 1 a cen tral reduction unit 4 with a main drive and a differential attached to the FDA beam with the bolts final drive reduction units 1 7 connected with the axle beam by means of kingpin spindles 2 Turn ing of the wheel hub drives is controlled by a steering rod 5 linked with the cases of the final drive reduction units by means levers 6 A A me Age i E J 1 7 left final drive reduction unit 2 kingpin spindle 3 frond driving axle beam 4 central reduction unit 5 steering rod 6 lever Figure 3 12 1 Front driving axle 3 12 2 Central reduction unit A housing 5 figure 3 12 2 of the central reduction unit is attached to the FDA beam with bolts The housing includes bevel gears 12 25 of the main drive and a limited slip self locking differential including axle shaft gears 23 differential cages 15 disks 16 17 pinions 21 pinion shafts 20 mounted in cases 13 14 braced with bolts 11 The self locking differential connects automatically both axle shafts 9 22 into one piece at separated skidding of the front wheels Under the influence of axial forces the cages 15 compress the disks 16 17 bringing the axle shaft gears in contact with the differential cases The differential gets locked at li
150. HAVING FIXED THE STEERING COLUMN IN THE EXTREME FRONT POSITION SET THE GEAR SWITCH LEVER OF THE GEARBOX TO A NEU TRAL POSITION DISENGAGE GEARS OF THE GEARBOX SET 0 GEAR START THE ENGINE AND WITH THE TRACTOR NOT MOVING MAKE SURE THE STEERING CONTROL OPERATES WELL 2 11 Parking brake control Upper position of the lever 23 figure 2 1 1 parking brake On Lower position of the lever 23 parking brake Off 40 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 12 Pedals and handle for fuel feed manual control 2 12 1 Pressing the pedal 24 figure 2 1 1 disengages the clutch 2 12 2 Pressing the pedal 26 figure 2 1 1 brakes the rear left wheel 2 12 3 Pressing the pedal 27 figure 2 1 1 brakes the rear right wheel A joint plate of the brake pedals is intended for simultaneous braking with the right and left brakes 2 12 4 Pressing the pedal 28 figure 2 1 1 increases the engine speed 2 12 5 When the handle 36 figure 2 1 1 is moved to the extreme front position fuel is fed to the max when the handle is moved to the extreme rear position fuel is fed to the min in ac cordance with the minimum idle speed 2 13 Switching of ranges gears and passes of the gearbox reduction unit 2 13 1 General information 1 lever to switch ranges of gearbox 2 lever to switch gears and passes of the gear box reduction unit 3 diagram of switching gears and passes of the gearbox reduction unit 4 diagram of switching gearbox
151. IN POSITION 0 7 14 4 9 Flashing light HL38 does not work a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU9 7 5A of power supply of flashing light replace it when necessary b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on flashing light termi nals when switch SA12 is on and with ground in the flashing light If power is not supplied replace the switch If power is supplied replace flashing light 7 14 4 10 Tractor trailer lights do not operate HL31 HL32 HL33 a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU8 7 5A of power supply of tractor trailer lights replace it when necessary b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on tractor trailer light terminals when switch SA1 is on and with ground in the tractor trailer lights If power is not supplied replace the switch If power is supplied replace lamps EL5 EL6 or EL of the corresponding tractor trailer light 7 14 5 Search and elimination of failures in air conditioner electrics WARNING AIR CONDITIONER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN STARTERS AND INSTRUMENTS SWITCH KEY SA9 IS IN POSITION 0 7 14 5 1 Air conditioner motor does not operate M2 a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU7 25A of power supply of air condi tioner motor M2 in case of malfunction replace the motor b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on electric motor M2 when switch S1 is on and ground availability on electric motor M2
152. IPE WITH TORQUE OF 100 TO 140 H M 292 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 11 Possible failures of hydrostatic steering control and guidelines for trou bleshooting List of possible failures of hydrostatic power steering and guidelines for trouble shooting are shown in Table 7 11 Table 7 11 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Pressure loss or insufficient pres sure in steering control hydraulic system it must be from 14 0 to14 5 MPa steering wheel is turned up to the stop due to the following rea sons HSC wasn t bled Bleed air from the HSC hydraulic system by turning steering wheel with movement of guide wheels from left most to the right most position stop stop to stop position for 2 3 times faulty adjustment of dosing pump Contact the dealer Adjust pressure relief valve for pressure relief valve low pressure the required pressure Operation is performed only by maintenance department Contact the dealer Pump does not generate pump due to low efficiency coefficient loosen upper nut lubricate friction surfaces of plastic bushings eliminate contact of universal joint fork with steering column bracket walls Increased torque of FDA reducing Make repair of FDA gear turn Fe A the tank with oil up to the required level and bleed air from the hydraulic system of HSC Disadjustment of dosing pump Contact the dealer Adjust pressure relief valve and valves Adjusting pressure of pr
153. ITUDINAL AXIS OF THE TRACTOR BY MEANS OF ADJUST MENT OF TENSION RODS Note Rules on adjustment of the crossbeams and tension rods are specified in subsection 3 18 Rear lift linkage ATTENTION LENGTH OF THE LEFT CROSSBEAM OF THE REAR LIFT LINK AGE MAKES 770 MM WHICH SHALL NOT BE CHANGED WITHOUT PARTICULAR NEED IT IS USUALLY THE RIGHT CROSSBEAM THAT IS LENGH ADJUSTABLE WHEN THE CROSSBEAM IS USED ON THE SUSPENSION AXIS AND WHEN RE VERSIBLE PLOUGH IS USED THE LENGH OF CROSSBEAMS SHALL BE ALL THE SAME ATTENTION NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS FOR ADJUST MENT OF FASTENERS AND CROSSBEAMS MAY RESULT IN FASTENERS OR SUP PORT BRACKET BREAK OR OTHER BREAKAGE ATTENTION ESSENTIAL FEATURES AND WAYS OF ADJUSTMENT OF POSI TION OF THE IMPLEMENT COUPLED WITH MOUNTED DEVICES ACCORDING TO THE PECULIARITIES OF TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS EXECUTION AND AGRO TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED IN OPERATIONAL DOCUMENTATION OF SUCH IMPLEMENTS IF THERE IS NO INFORMATION IN OPERATIONAL DOCU MENTATION YOU SHALL OBTAIL IT FROM THE MANUFACTURER OR SELLER OF THE IMPLEMENT 188 2022 5 0000010 OM During operation of wide cut implements in order to facilitate crossover contour fol lowing planting cultivator and etc and reduction of load on the RLL free movement in vertical plane of one lower link relative to another is to be ensured To achieve this you have to adjust the crossbeams in order to make one lower link move freely in vertical p
154. Lever A D E H i A Ranges I and I of forward travel B Ranges II and IV R Ranges I and I of the reverse H Higher pass of the reduction unit L Lower pass of the reduction unit Figure 3 4 7 Diagrams of shifting speeds and ranges of the gearbox 92 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 5 Reduction unit electro hydraulic control The electro hydraulic control of the gearbox reduction unit consists of the following basic elements annunciators 15 and 14 figure 3 5 2 on a control panel 1 located in the tractor cab a lever 3 for shifting the speeds and the passes of the gearbox reduction unit a sensor of GB neutral position 5 sensors and 8 installed in the hydraulic cylinder switching the gearbox reduction unit a valve group 6 located at the top on the GB cover connecting cables 4 with sockets 9 The system is powered from on board electrical line through a fuse located in the fuse block 2 The power supply voltage is delivered to the system after the starter and in strument switch has been turned into position I Instruments on but it is possible to shift the reduction passes only after the engine is started with the hydraulic system pump on On the lever 3 handle there are buttons 10 and 11 and annunciators led lamps 13 and 12 of lower and higher reduction pass engagement accordingly On the panel 1 there are duplicate annunciators 15 and 14 of lower and higher reduction pass and reductio
155. N ies nsin a aea IE 43 2 14 2 Indication of the engaged pass of the reduction unit c cece cece e eee 43 2 14 3 Front power take off shaft control 0 ce cece cece eee cece ee ee ee eeeteenaeeeeeeeees 44 2AA FDA AINE CONIO lessen E A E E EN 44 2 14 5 Rear axle differential lock CONIOI cccc cece cece e ee ee eee ee eee eeeenneeeeteeeeeeaes 45 2 14 6 Annunciation of oil emergency temperature in the hydraulic lift linkage 46 2 AAT Rea PTO CONTON lt snaacteanannaianiastsedwanadeeusennadararenndasaieeedee ania eeneninade 46 2 15 Lift linkage controls ioc A ETE A 2 15 1 General information o on a rules of r rear r lift linkage control EE E E E 47 215 ZRELO AMC karsisi e OE 47 2 15 3 Remote buttons of RLL control system cece cece eee e cece eee eeaeeeaeeeneees 50 2 15 4 Troubleshooting of RLL electronic control SysteM ccc cece cece eee enna anes 50 21S FONU KAGE CONT Ols ri nasaceeasjeteaeestend aun ee veecatnesasiee 51 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 16 Controlling sections of the HLL valve group remote cylinders 068 52 ZIO T ALE PUMP COMMU Oliveinussteviedeiereslineintauteudei ouimueio tr ieenancuieeeleeeauemeeeideens 52 2 16 2 HLL valve group section control nnaanunannnnannnanennnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnn 52 Z CUO ES OS aE E eae re ates 53 2 17 1 Fuses for electrical equipment SYStEM 0 cc cece cece cece eee e ee eneeeeeeee eens 54 2 1
156. ON OF QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLER DISCONNECTION SHOULD BE PERFORMED BY UN SCREWING OF CAP NUT B FIGURE 7 15 1 WITH HEXAGON SCREW KEY SIZE 30MM FROM VALVE A WITH HEXAGON SCREW KEY SIZE 29 MM WHILE CON NECTING THE DUCT IT IS NECESSARY TO PUT SILICONE SEALANT ON THE THREAD AFTER THREE OR FIVE DISCONNECTIONS A LEAKAGE CAN OCCUR IN JUNCTION POINT REPLACE IT IN THIS CASE WARNING WHILE DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF DUCTS WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND GLASSES WARNING ANY OPERATIONS RELATED TO DISCONNECTION OF AIR CON DITIONING SYSTEM COMPONENTS SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY TRAINED PERSONNEL WITH USE OF SPECIAL EQUIPMENTS FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYS TEM MAINTENANCE HIGH PRESSURE IS MAINTAINED EVEN IN SHUT DOWN SYS TEM WARNING COOLING AGENT R134A NON TOXIC NON COMBUSTIBLE NOT FORMING EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES COOLING AGENT BOILING TEMPERATURES IN NORMAL CONDITIONS IS MINUS 27 C IN CASE OF SKIN CONTACT WITH LIQUID COOLING AGENT IT FLASHES AND CAN CAUSE OVERCOOLING OF SKIN AREAS WARNING ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONNEL IS ALLOWED TO PER FORM REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE SERVICES OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS 319 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 7 15b Possible failures of air conditioning and guidelines for troubleshooting Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting Compressor electromagnetic coupling will not respond no metallic click while turning temperature regulator Electric equipment failure By means of tester or
157. Part list of electrical circuit diagram of electrical equipment of BELARUS 2022 5 tractor Stereo recorder SSCS Heating plugs Regulator of outcoming air temperature see ed ing Npumeyanue Included into engine set Fan modes switch Condensing unit Compressor electromagnetic clutch Integrated indicator control panel BA1 BA2 Loud speaker pki Heating plugs sensor ent Fuet volume sensor S Included into conditioner set 0 4 MPa Included into engine set Included into stereo recorder set Sensor of oil pressure in gearbox 1 Air pressure sensor O 478 48 48a 485 486 50y 500 54a 545 546 542 540 55a 550 556 552 550 55e 55x 56a 565 566 562 560 56e 56x 57 57a 578 572 579 58 58a 580 586 582 589 58e 58x 59e 59x 59u 593 63 63a 633 65 65a 655 656 652 67 67a 675 672 68 68a 69 69a 695 696 692 699 69e 69x 70e 70x 71 71a 718 716 72a 725 722 79a 81 81a 815 810 812 810 Ble 81x with section 1 0 MM Wires 1a 5e 5x 65 66 62 60 6e 6x 63 10 102 14 14a 16 16a 165 166 163 206 202 27a 30x 35 36a 365 360 38 38a 385 386 500 50e 50x 50m 50x 59 595 596 592 60 60a 61 2 Wire coloring F blue K yellow 3 green K red Ku brown P pink C grey O orange violet 4 black XK4H yellow black KOK red yellow 3 green yellow OU orange black C3 grey green Figure C1
158. Pn70 8 0 M Pniv0 8 0 M O B Pn70 8 0 M i F zf oll ell ct T ele an T 32 E amp Q a n 1290 rpm z 7 J Q 60 1min 1 Hydraulic urut PIIFO 1523 with electric regulator EHFHC 1 0 2 Hydraulic cylinders US0x250 3 Pump HMS 4 3 4 Dil tank 5 Drain filter Figure 3 16 3 Hydraulic circuit diagram of HLL for tractors with hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 133 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 16 2 Oil tank The tractor has an oil tank 2 installed figure 3 16 1 with a capacity of 35 0 5 liters which is equipped with a breather 16 and oil an oil level gage 3 Oil is filled through a filler neck 1 For oil drain there is a plug on the tank lower surface Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 manu factured since 2012 may have an emergency oil temperature indicator in the HLL tank in stalled as specified in subsection 3 17 HLL emergency state indication 3 16 3 HLL pump drive The HLL oil pump is gear type with right side rotation The pump drive is disen gageable coupling clutch independent mounted on the left side of the coupling clutch body The HLL pump drive consists of a housing 1 figure 3 16 4 a gear 2 mounted on splines of a shaft 3 rotating on two roller bearings Balls 4 placed in the hole of the shaft 3 close or open the shaft and a splined bushing 5 by means of a sleeve 6 The sleeve 6 is controlled by a yoke through a tetrahedron of a shaft 7 The gear 2 is permanently meshed with the PTO driv
159. Power supply to consumers staying on when the FU23 starter and instrument switch is in position instru 25A ments are on FU27 Test instruments sensors of speed PTO and fuel volume FU28 Annunciation of tractor and trailer turning FU29 Remote disconnect switch of accumulator battery FU30 Power supply to coil of instrument illumination and 20A parking lights relay 59 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 2 7 Relay assignment Relay desig nation Relay assignament Radioset stereo recorder Rear working lights a pair of inner lights Conditioner S O K Conditioner Tractor turning indication and emergency indication Signal from terminal D of the alternator to systems of RLL control K14 Power supply to consumers staying on when the starter and instru ment switch is in position instruments are on Note Fuse and relay designation on the switching unit corresponds to fuse and re lay designation on tractor electrical diagram in annex C A set of spare fuses 5 figure 2 18 2 installed on the front panel of the switching unit includes spare fuses 2 figure 2 18 4 with 7 5A 15A 20A 25A 30A ratings and for BKA 7 3722 a fuse removal tool 1 BK 1 is not completed with the fuse removal tool 1 fuse removal tool 2 spare fuses 3 switching unit Figure 2 18 4 Set of spare fuses for the switching unit BKA 7 3722 60 2022 5 0000010 OM Electrical connection of equipment harnesses to th
160. R TROUBLESHOOTING 276 7 1 Possible failures in clutch coupling and guidelines for troubleshooting 2 6 7 2 Possible failures in gearbox and guidelines for troubleshooting 00ceeeee 279 7 3 Possible failures in the electronic control system for rear axle differential lock front driving axle drive front power take off shaft GB reducing gear and guidelines Tor troubleshooting sca is exscencsdscovincesaanceendeuacexececenweugeesepeexsaceonshnateenersedscexsbendes 280 7 4 Possible failures in rear axle and guidelines for troubleshooting 55 282 7 5 Possible failures in rear power take off shaft and guidelines for troubleshooting 283 7 6 Possible failures in front power take off shaft and guidelines for troubleshooting 284 7 f Possible failures of brakes and guidelines for troubleshooting 00008 285 7 8 Possible failures in pneumatic system and guidelines for troubleshooting 287 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 9 Possible failures of transmission hydraulic system and guidelines for trouble SHIOOIIN GO sezscduntnciesteutu weds es anacioudentiesheuburteas AT cena ae aie somaaaaenes 290 7 10 Possible failures of FDA and guidelines for troubleshooting 0ce0eee 291 7 11 Possible failures of hydrostatic steering control and guidelines for TOUTE SHO WIG ssis ai a saan ucascan nan wane EE REER 293 7 12 Possible failures in the electronic control system
161. RATION OF TRACTOR CONSTITUENTS 68 3 1 Engine and its SY SUSI IS gy eicinisacteusit cine ealianfeastiledn ams ea Saaneisn ge E T 68 Ore dh a a EAE EIE N AEE AEAT A T TAAT TTT 68 IEZ System or ENGINE Air CIEANING iivcicciiacbcissdecdsorseiverteasecmarineesdneerebereesaimelonens 68 3 1 9 System of Cnalged all COOUMO fue te rasats na EEE OELE 69 3 1 4 Engine cooling SYSIOM oviicesiceck onien cesses eeon dieeaite ee ovedenesesieaidecee voce vedeeoxe reste 70 3 1 9 EXMAUSU SY SICIM ernir aiee EEE EE E EEEE EEEE 11 3 2 Engine electronic Control SYStEM cccc cece cece eee cence eee e eee ee eneaeeeeeeeeenaaees 73 ESAO o 1c pare eee re E E ee ee ee ee S E eee 18 3 3 COUDIING CIO a Martawaacaon a E ANR 18 3 3 2 Peculiarities of clutch installation dismantling and adjustment 19 3 0 25 ENG Fal INIOMMAUOM 243 oite a teal Oee 2 Gimme tien ale ads 19 3 9 2 2 GIULE i GISIali Giotto hate scent heticaded tees baicntwe a 80 3 322 0 CIUOICHINStallatlOn casacasseiernsancsncnaeonvenainiancaneeaeaannennvanersemaaaeneiraansennn 80 3 3 2 4 Adjustment of clutch release leVers c cece cece cece cece eee e ents eeeeeeeneeeans 80 29 o CUC AIVE raae danas Mamie danas eE OER DRETTEN CANES 80 3 34 Clute COMEO AGJUSIMEN acssicwessachacsccenieannsone sews seeteransesesennaess seanserserserss 82 39 4 GIUtGh COMLFOL AG USIMEN kassissa EEA 82 3 3 4 2 Bleeding of the hydraulic system of clutch control
162. RBIDDEN TO START MOVEMENT WITH BIG TRACTION LOAD IT IS FORBIDDEN TO MOVE THE TRACTOR WITH THE DOOR OPEN ATTENTION SHIFT RANGES REDUCTION PASSES AND SPEEDS ONLY WITH THE TRACTOR STOPPED AND THE CLUTCH PEDAL FULLY DEPRESSED PER FORMING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS IT IS PERMITTED TO SHIFT SPEEDS WITHIN A RANGE THE SHIFTING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT AS THE TRACTOR COASTS AND THE CLUTCH PEDAL FULLY DEPRESSED ATTENTION THE REDUCTION PASSES L AND H CAN BE ENGAGED ONLY AFTER THE SPEED SHIFTING LEVER IS SET INTO NEUTRAL POSITION ATTENTION DON T HOLD THE FOOT ON THE CLUTCH PEDAL DURING TRAC TOR OPERATION BECAUSE IT CAN LEAD TO CLUTCH SLIPPING ITS OVERHEATING AND FAILURE ATTENTION TO ENGAGE THE SPEED SMOOTHLY WITHOUT SHARP PUSHES MOVE THE SPEED AND PASS SHIFTING LEVER ACCORDING TO THE DI GRAM AND HOLD IT PRESSED UNTIL THE SPEED IS FULLY ENGAGED ATTENTION STARTING TO MOVE MAKE SURE THE PARKING BRAKE IS DISENGAGED ATTENTION WITH THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK ENGAGED THE TRACTOR MOVEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED 13 KM H ATTENTION OPERATING ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE IT IS NECES SARY TO SWITCH THE FDA DRIVE OFF TO AVOID INCREASE WEAR OF FRONT WHEELS ATTENTION TRACTOR OPERATION WITH EMPTY ADBLUE UREA TANK IS NOT ALLOWED WHEN INFORMATION ABOUT CRITICAL LEVEL OF ADBLUE AGENT UREA IN THE TANK APPEARS ON MONITOR IT IS NECESSARY TO FILL THE TANK WITH ADBLUE AGENT 164 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 4 Tractor stop To stop the tractor d
163. RS TYPE COMPLETED WITH DOUBLE WHEELS WITH TIRES FILLED WITH WATER SOLUTION AND WITH HINGED BALLAST LOADS USE OF INDIVIDUAL BRAKES DURING OPERATION ON DOUBLED REAR WHEELES IS FORBIDDEN Accumulated carrying capacity of dual tires shall not be 1 7 times larger than carry ing capacity of a single tire ATTENTION DOUBLING OF FRONT WHEELS SHALL BE USED ONLY IN EX CEPTIONAL CASES IN CASE IF DOUBLING OF FRONT WHEELS IS CONSULT YOUR DEALER Note Instructions on wheels doubling are set forth in subparagraph 4 2 10 Wheels doubling 220 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 13 Features of the tractor application in special conditions 5 13 1 Tractor operation in areas with rugged topography Possibility of the tractor application for haylage allocation for reserve Operator working in the fields and roads with a slope coming downwards or up wards shall be very careful Technical characteristics of the general purpose implement coupled in the structure of MTU ensure its safe and proper operation on working field spaces with a slope not ex ceeding 9 degrees ATTENTION TRACTORS BELARUS 2022 5 ARE UNAPPROPRIATED FOR OP ERATION WITH THE GENERAL PURPOSE IMPLEMENTS AT UPLAND ENVIRON MENT INCLUDING ON SHARP INCLINES THEREFORE TRACTORS ARE NOT COM PLETED WITH SPECIAL PURPOSE DEVICES FOR EXAMPLE INCLINATION OF THE FRONT PART SIGNALLING DEVICE ATTENTION APPLICATION OF TRACTORS BELARUS 2022 5 FOR GRASS STACKING SILAGE OR HAYLAGE IN
164. SS E S eaters v o Table 1 continued Female receptacle DT06 12SA 1 Display connector a s w 1 S gt Pesanston Denomination ttl _ a 1 3 E e E woe S a a ii Wire coloring 6 white F blue X yellow 2 a G BOSCH 7 sS S is hbase ae eID ae ON a if egret Ped GAGE oranGenh Spek a gt i el cl da C grey violet 1 black 3XK green yellow KX red yellow v K x i i KS22 xS28 Female receptacle 1928 404 655 FL YO black orange 8 i 103a K xS31 Female receptacle 1928 406 6568 LO D 200 K i l 200a K pee ee ee momo ooo i oe 102a F I I I Feeding module Figure A1 Electric circuit diagram of engine electronic control system of Belarus 2022 5 tractor 328 Annex B compulsory Electrical circuit diagram of the DL FDA and gearbox reduction unit control Higher pass relay system of Belarus 2022 5 tractor DL FDA and reduction unit control board Left brake relay EL1 EL2 EL3 E XP Ke is Ve 7 29 Imal ImaN maS ii E nin gs il oti iL So iL St amp mm T TT Beee Bpr eey pr eey XS3 1 XS5 2 Y ae ll ll 3002 C 302a C LT 3055 0 ft a me ee 310 X 300e C 1310 E 13215 A a es l mH Ea ee ee ee ee fl 1390 4 1390 4 Es ES 1390 4 Es 146 C Aoo o 146 C e n e a cae TTT 1248 3 gt i T no ot E gt 1290 0 1290 0 cal ae SE ee E 1 1509 H E ee j e 50y T 1
165. Sample of displaying Parameter description parameter on the mul tifunctional display 7 f The counter accumulates information on Total elapsed the total elapsed engine time with uploading engine time h a message engine speed from the engine i control unit and stores it when the power supply is off The range of engine time indi cations is from 0 to 99999 hours Instant fuel flow l h On board volt age V Remaining fuel volume in the tank Time of run ning on remain ing fuel h Rear PTO speed rom In this mode a current value of the instant fuel flow with a resolution of 0 1 I h is dis played In this mode a current value of on board voltage with an accuracy of 0 1 V is dis played in a digital form In this mode a current fuel volume remain ing in the tank is displayed in liters This mode is available only when the trac tor is stopped i e when there are no signals from the speed sensors In this mode assessed engine time calcu lated for current values of the instant fuel flow and remaining fuel volume is displayed In this mode a precise speed of the rear PTO shaft end extension depending on the signal from the rear PTO speed sensor is displayed 34 2022 5 0000010 OM Samples of displaying fault messages on the multifunctional display and a short de scription of the tractor fault displayed are given in table 2 4 Table 2 4 Samples of displaying messages on tractor faults
166. TH IS CHANGED BEFORE CHECKING THE FRONT WHEELS TOE IN CHECK AND ADJUST IF NECESSARY THE STEER ING JOINTS PLAYS To make adjustments perform the following 1 Ensure that there is no clearance space in the steering joints centre bearings and wheels 2 Set the front wheels in straight position by way of running the tractor straight ahead for not less than 3 meters along the horizontal level ground Engage the parking break to avoid tractor movement 3 Measure distance A Figure 6 4 22 between rim edges of front wheels 1 and 5 Figure 6 4 22 on wheel centre level at the front and make visible marks in locations of measurements 4 Disengage the parking break drive the tractor ahead in such a way that the front wheels turn by half revolution and measure distance B between rim edges on wheel cen tre level from behind in the point determined and marked before 5 If the value B A ranges within O to 8 mm that means that the toe in is cor rectly adjusted If the value B A is lower O or more than 8 mm perform the following a leaving the tractor position unchanged unscrew nuts 2 and 4 b rotating steering link tube 3 try to get value B A ranging within O to 8 mm c repeat operations described in subclauses 4 and 5 d if value B A falls within the limits of O to 8 mm tighten steering link nuts 2 and 4 with torque of 100 to 140 N m leaving steering link length unchan
167. TO brake replace to PTO brake due to excessive in friction coupling O rings if necessary ternal leakage Brake operating trouble due to pis Rinse brake components in pure diesel fuel re ton deadlock or wear and tear of place frictional disks if necessary frictional disks fe a ee ee en ee ee ee on Bent fracture of PTO shaft end extension Heavy bending load on shaft end exten Eliminate break of coupling requirements Correct sion from the implement coupled drive troubles in the machine replace PTO shaft end ex out of limit angles of cardan shaft and tension ea a a eg Twisting of splines teeth of PTO shaft end extension Shock stress generated by imple Check availability and operability of safety ele ment coupled that is transmitted to ments of the implement coupled torque limiting the PTO shaft end extension clutch shear bolt and correct the trouble replace PTO shaft end extension Application of PTO shaft end type coordi Install PTO shaft end of horsepower capacity required nated by horsepower capacity with im by the implement drive from the set supplied with plement coupled drive SPTA 283 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 6 Possible failures in front power take off shaft and guidelines for trouble shooting List of possible failures of front power take off shaft and guidelines for troubleshoot ing are shown in Table 7 6 Table 7 6 Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting Front
168. TURNING TORQUES AT FIELD WORKS AND OTHER CONDITIONS OF CONTINUOUS USE WITH HIGH TURNING TORQUES THE VALUES CORRE SPONDING TO THE SPEED OF 30 KM H ARE USED ATTENTION AT TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE INCREASE THE PRESSURE BY 30 KPA BUT NOT MORE THAN TO 200 KPA Note The pressure is chosen with due account for the following principles tractor operation with twinned tires is allowed only at the speed up to 20 km h total loading capacity of twinned tires shall not exceed the loading capacity of a single tire by more than 1 7 times when twinning make sure the pressure of outer tires is 1 2 1 25 times lower than the pressure of inner tires 170 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 8 2 Instructions for tire use To prevent premature wear of tires and tractor breakdown due to wrong use of tires follow the below instructions for tire use carry out operations in technical maintenance of tires and wheels in due time keep tires away from fuel oil and other oil products data on loads for 10 km h in table 4 1 are used only in conditions requiring low traction force when coupling seeder and harvesting units For operations requiring large turning torque tillage etc use instructions for speed of 30 km h do not operate the tractor with tire inner pressure not corresponding to a regulation rate for each specific case of its use keep to the established rates of tire inner pressure in accordance wit
169. Task 43 Check clearance spaces in reducing gear flange bearing of FDA Hang out front wheel and swinging it back and forth ensure that it is no axial clear ance in bearings 1 and 3 Figure 6 4 28 of flange 4 In case axial clearance is detected carry out adjustment of bearings by tightening nut 2 with torque of 180 to 200 N m with further turning it through 15 to 20 Nut collar 2 should be center punched into flange groove 4 ba a SIZ D ji e g 9 OFZ CLES SLIPA L LA k Pili eri i kacai A i PF EIN hill i AAE VAR Mis p i m AANS N PK y P hs D 1 3 bearings 2 nut 4 flange Figure 6 4 28 Check of clearance spaces in reducing gear flange bearing of FDA 6 4 4 10 Task 44 Rinse HLL oil tank breather Perform the following actions clean place of breather installation on HLL oil tank 4 Figure 6 4 29 disassemble breather by turning plug 2 withdraw washers 1 and filter 3 rinse the abovementioned parts in pure diesel fuel blow off plug and washers squeeze and dry filter put the parts back in their place tighten plug with torque from 25 to 35 N m SIII EA MEETA L AVAVAVA 44444 4N OSORNO mM ISEK Figure 6 4 29 Rinse of HLL oil tank breather 255 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 4 11 Task 45 Cleaning and oiling of sline joints of the front PTO shaft Lubricate spline joints A B and C Figure 6 4 30 with some graphite
170. UST NOT BE IN STALLED ON THE TRACTOR Depending on INSTALLED replaceable operating equipment two modes of loader operation Loader and Bulldozer are possible ATTENTION PROVIDING CONSUMER WITH ALL KINDS OF NECESSARY TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INCLUDING CONFIRMATION OF POSSIBILITY OF COUPLING OF LOADER WITH TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 COME WITHIN DUTIES OF THE MANUFACTURER OF THE LOADER 5 15 2 Safety measures at tractor BELARUS 2022 5 operation with loader installed During loader operation it is necessary to check on shift time basis tightening of fasteners of mounting frame of loader and wheeled tractor and pressure in tires During loader operation observe safety requirements listed in subsection 4 3 Safety measures to be taken when operating the tractor Additionally during loader operation it is forbidden to carry load with weights exceeding those specified in loader OM fill loader bucket amain to work on soft soils place bucket outside slope crest when throwing off soil aslope in order to avoid tractor slipping transport load in bucket at maximum boom length work with cracks on rims and with tires damaged up to the cord or perforation damage to leave a tractor with lifted load to make all types of turns and reverse movements with working attachments bur ied work with faulty light signalling system steering and brakes carry out operations at night with faulty electrical equip
171. Y TO PRESS IN THE KEY WHEN IN 0 POSITION AND TURN IT CONTRACLOCKWISE The left multifunctional underwheel switch 2 fig 2 2 1 provides for activation of turn blinkers switching between upper and lower beam of headlights upper beam blinking au dible beep Turn blinkers are activated by moving a lever of the underwheel switch 2 from the middle position forward a is a right turn or backward 0 is a left turn as in fig 2 2 3 As the tractor has made a turn the lever automatically returns to the initial position To switch on the road headlights set a central light switch 5 fig 2 2 1 into III posi tion as indicated below and the lever of the underwheel switch into the middle position B lower beam according to fig 2 2 3 Upper beam is switched on by pushing the switch lever against the stop r position The lever positions lower beam Upper beam are fixed When pulling the lever against the stop a position fig 2 2 3 from the position of the lower beam the lever is set into a non fixed position activating the upper beam called upper beam blinking irrespective of the position of the central light switch The audible beep is activated by pressing the lever in axial direction axis of the switch ing lever The beep can be activated in any position of the switching lever The right multifunctional underwheel switch 3 fig 2 2 1 provides for activation of a dual spee
172. a proper manner after end of operation and before leaving the cab Mounting and dismounting of loader should be carried out on a lever ground hard pad Driver operating tractor with loader housing of which is fell under load must lower working attachment in a lowermost position stop the engine switch AB off and leave the cab urgently avoiding touching loader housing metal parts Before starting loading and unloading operations operator should carry out prepara tory inspection of place of work and take a look at rules and methods of operation de pending on specific conditions It is forbidden to let other person to drive tractor with loader Before starting to drive or engage reverse it is necessary to set the signal and en sure there are no people in the area of loader operation Take special care while traveling in the enterprise territory maximum speed should be determined by enterprise standards When driving tractor with loader keep watch over obstacles located over head wires pipelines archs and etc When loader bucket is full avoid striking against obstacle behind load Taking of bulk materials should be carried out by slow cutting in stock pile and si multaneous turn of loader bucket Operator is not allowed to start operation on loads handling in the following cases load weight is unknown poor light in the area of operation loads can hardly bee seen loader is not operated on solid hard and smooth surface a
173. achines to the following elements of trac tor electrical equipment 1 Seven pin socket type 12N GOST 9200 figure 2 23 1 permissible input cur rent is not higher than 10A the electrical circuit is protected by a fuse in tractor electrical equipment to terminal No5 of the socket to terminal No3 of the socket it is possible to connect the coupled machine electrical consumer with the parking lights of this machine on 2 Two pin socket ISO 4165 2001 located on the body of the seven pin socket figure 2 23 1 terminal No8 permissible input current is not higher than 12A the electrical cir cuit is protected by a fuse in tractor electrical equipment 3 Tractor alternator to terminal B of the alternator terminal diameter 8mm to engine housing 66 2022 5 0000010 OM The following total value of electrical power takeoff to supply coupled machines with engine speed not less than 1 500 rpm is stipulated by the tractor design 1 In dark time with all lighting on not more than 30A with continuous running duty not more than 45A with repeated short time running duty with running duration be low 15 of total time of tractor running 2 It is assumed to increase the input power to the following values in day time with lighting off not more than 50A with continuous running duty not more than 70A with repeated short time running duty with running dura
174. ader assembly weight kg not more than 1760 Push force in cutting mode kN not more than 27 overloading protection while in cutting mode Automated protection in loader design Speed of tractor movement with loader in stalled km h not more than operation speed with load operation speed without load traveling speed for rear axle 12 N Tractor ballasting with loader installed when 1 Ballast weight on rear lift linkage necessa 2 Water solution in rear tires Places of loaders fastening to a tractor loader mounting frame Front beam longeron clutch case loader push rods Semi axle tubes GB casings and rear axle Shift time control testing parameters in addition to STMS op 1 Tightness of fasteners of loader mounting frame and tractor wheels 2 Tractor tire pressure erations listed in tractor and loader operation Connection of loader hydraulic system Tractor hydraulic outputs Pressure relief valve adjustment pressure if any of loader hydraulic system MPa 20 2 ATTENTION FORK LOAD DEPENDS ON OVERHANG AND DESIGN OF LOADER WORKING ATTACHMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF LIFTED LOAD IT IS FORBIDDEN TO USE WITH LOADER A TRACTOR HAVING NO CAB OR CANOPY TENT NO NOTWILLED MOVEMENT LIMITING SYSTEM SEAT BELT AND ALSO IN CONFIGURATION WITH FRONT AND REAR TIRES OF IRREGULAR CON FIGURATION 225 2022 5 0000010 OM For installation of the complete set of the loading equipment bor
175. ae Se E T E ep 2 z Y XS2 1Y 1S0 K line B_D COMI K59 159 3 eee z pee EE A e Y mat S Starter and instrument switch terminal 15 _S_ 715 K88 188 K pS ia 4S of battery power suppl G_G_BAT 1 102 f eee S of batt 1G G BAT 2 104 f Hil NI of battery power suppl G_G_ ee of battery power suppl G G BAT 3 106 T of battery power suppl V_V_BAT 1 101 K XP39 1 XS39 1 of battery power suppl V_V_BAT 2 K03 103 K gt of battery power suppl V_V_BAT 3 105 K UX QX S a 1686 P 1685 P CAN B D CANLI 153 Ky A E x KL Table A1 ee es Re 1762 Ky 176a Ky CAN B D CANHT 175 5 h AB Rte SS Was QA 1542 5 Signal of sensor of water presence in filter _S_WFS 117 C Outer view of XS94 1 SEQ Designation Denomination Note 1020 0 V power supply of sensor of water presence in filter G_R_WFS 121 F a 218a Signal of sensor of coolant temperature before catalyst A CATTSI 1 XP10 1 Cau Urea dosing valve o pP 6 0 V power supply of sensor of coolant temperature before catalystG_R CATTS2 S araga v 9 181a Signal of urea dosing valve O_T_RAMVH See TR S S a2 Urea heating valve i heating valve i O 110a 3 2 V power supply of urea heating valve in the tank O_V_RH32 737 C QO00000000000000onnnoD 94 oe S a Pioimpotorangecoor r Tesk rma 109a X Signal of sensor of urea level in the tank _A_RALS EL ilot lamp of orange color g lamp T ser oF es en oS nes ee dao a memamen pa R oF
176. aft is packaged with PTO shaft end extension of type 2 Rear PTO shaft is packaged with PTO shaft end extension of type 3 mounted on tractor when it is delivered Changing shaft ends of RPTO of type 1c and 2 shall be put into the SPTA kit of the tractor ATTENTION APPLICATION OF THE CORRESPONDING SHAFT ENDS DURING COUPLING OF TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 WITH IMPLEMENTS DESIGNED FOR TRANSMITTING POWER EXCEEDING THE VALUE SPECIFIED IN THE TABLE 5 9 IS NOT ALLOWED Figure 5 9 1 Power take off shaft end Table 5 9 FPTO shaft and RPTO shaft Power take off shaft end type end extensions and drives pa Type Type 2 Type 3 1 Splines lengths L mm External diameter Dy mm Spline quantity n 4 Rear PTO shaft end exten 540 sion rotation frequency rpm 590 2 1000 1100 1000 1100 standard mode 5 Rear PTO shaft end exten 540 sion rotation frequency rpm 770 2 1000 1460 1000 1460 economy mode 6 Power transmitted by RPTO shaft end extension kW not 92 185 more than Type of drive 8 Direction of PTO shaft end extension rotation see the butt Clockwise 0 Package against order 2 PTO shaft end extension rotation frequency when the rated frequency of the engine crankshaft is 2100 rpm 3 For front PTO shaft at 2050 rpm of the engine crankshaft 1000 1025 rpm when the rated frequency of the engine crankshaft the power transmitted by the front PTO shaft end extension kW not exceeding 44 kW 20
177. aged at forward motion as well as at reverse irrespective of the front wheel turning angle and skidding ATTENTION PRESSING THE INTERCONNECTED BRAKE PEDALS ENGAGES THE FDA DRIVE IRRESPECTIVE OF THE SWITCH 2 POSITION ATTENTION DRIVING ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE THE FDA SHALL BE DISENGAGED TO AVOID INCREASED WEAR OF FRONT TYRES AND PARTS OF THE DRIVE ATTENTION IT IS FORBIDDEN TO ENGAGE THE FDA POSITIVELY WHEN TRACTOR SPEED EXCEEDS 13 KM H ATTENTION IN CASE A BREAKAGE OF WIRES IN THE CIRCUIT TO THE ELECTOMAGNET OF THE FDA DRIVE CONTROL DITRIBUTOR OCCURS THE FRONT DRIVING AXLE IS AUTOMATICALLY ENGAGED THIS FAILURE SHALL BE ELIMINATED 3 13 3 Front PTO control The FPTO is mounted on BELARUS 2022 5 tractor against order Elements of the electrical part of PTO control are introduced in subsection 2 14 Control panel for rear axle DL FDA and FPTO drives Rear power takeoff control An electric circuit diagram of the FPTO control system is introduced in figure 3 13 3 Elements of the hydraulic part of FPTO control are introduced in subsection 3 8 Front power takeoff shaft a l Control panel for DL FDA and FETO Wire coloring I blue amp yelllow Ku brown C grew L 1 FPTO switch 2 two position FPTO switch 3 FPTO on annunciator 4 relay 5 diode 6 electromagnet of FPTO valve group 7 junction block Figure 3 13 3 Electric circuit diagram of the
178. air if the fuel tank cock is closed open it set the fuel feed control handle into the middle position make sure that the electronic pedal of fuel feed control is in its initial position and it is not affected by physical influence Do not press the fuel feed control pedal when starting the engine set the rear PTO drive handle into position PTO drive off and the rear PTO con trol lever into position off the handles of the hydraulic system valve group control shall stay in neutral posi tion the rear lift linkage control handles shall stay in the middle position the switches of the rear axle DL FDA drive FPTO drive if installed shall stay in off position set the levers shifting the GB ranges and speeds into a neutral position turn on the accumulator battery switch turn the key of the starter and instruments switch from 0 position into position Herewith 1 On the integrated indicator both RPTO scale range annunciators as well as all RPTO scale segments will turn on for not more than one second and the needles of engine speed and rpm indicators deviate from their initial positions or the needles shake on indi cator zero marks for not more than one second thus confirming workability of LED annun ciators and needle indicators 2 The engine control system panel carries out a self check If there are no errors in the system operation the fault testing annunciator on the engi
179. ance it shall be used inside the tractor cabin 5 13 3 Operation in a forest It is forbidden to use tractor BELARUS 2022 5 for performance of any work in a forest including coupling with clamshell loader trailing equipment special purpose for estry machinery designed for gathering loading and transport of trees and their unload ing sorting and warehousing ATTENTION ACCORDING TO THE PURPOSE THE TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 IS DESIGNED FOR SPECIAL OPERATOR POSITION PROTECTION DEVICE OPS IS NOT PROVIDED IN ITS DESIGN INCLUSIVE OF SPECIAL ATTACHING POINT FOR THE DEVICE THEREFORE THE TRACTOR SHALL NOT BE OPERATED IN CONDITIONS WHEN THERE IS A HAZARD OF TREES ITS BRANCHES AND SINGLE PARTS OF THE EQUIPMENT COUPLED PENETRATION INTO THE OPERATOR S CABIN 221 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 13 4 Driving on public roads and selection of speed ATTENTION WHEN DRIVING ON PUBLIC ROADS THE OPERATOR SHALL OBEY NATIONAL TRAFFIC REGULATIONS RULES Before the tractor starts moving in structure of MTA on public roads transfer in transport position all corresponding structural components including working attachments of the implement coupled RLL FLL and etc The agricultural implements coupled with the tractor shall not be applied for hauling of goods and people Hauling of goods shall be carried out by means of trailers semitrail ers and other analogous vehicles Implements with width exceeding tractor dimensions shall be equipped with i
180. and choose between dis played parameters 5 button to enter exit the mode of adjustment of sharpness bright ness and configuration menu 6 changeable display of buttons functional purpose 7 screen 2 8 1 Information display Table 2 5 Lift of parameters of four segment and graphic indication of engine op eration Electric voltage directly on terminals of 4 i i information monitor connection V Voltage on the terminals of the ac cumulator battery measured by the engine electronic control unit V Engine oil temperature Htr Fuel temperature t Temperature of coolant in the en if L gine Accelerator position z a Engine speed rpm speed rpm 37 2022 5 0000010 OM The monitor buttons 1 2 3 4 5 figure 2 8 1 are of multifunctional purpose When pushing any of the buttons 2 3 4 during the monitor operation an image of the button panel 6 appears on the screen the icons denoting the current functions of each button Pressing the button 1 on the monitor activates the main three segment image on the screen Hereby an engine speed scale is displayed in the upper left corner and a scale of oil pressure in the engine lubrication system in the upper right corner cooling fluid tem perature in the lower right corner current fuel flow per hour in the lower left corner When the three segment imaging is indicated the displayed parameters in the lower left corner are chosen between with the b
181. andle 9 of the brake is put into the lowermost position all the pins shall freely turn in connections fork lever head and move in the fork grooves without seizure carry out the final check and adjustment of the mechanical brake control with the tractor assembled The tractor shall stop on 18 slope when the force of up to 400 N is applied to the control handle if necessary correct the adjustment by changing the length of the links 13 and 16 ATTENTION ADJUSTING LINK LENGTH AVOID DECREASING OF LENGTH OF THE LINK PART THAT IS SCREWED INTO THE FORK BELOW 12 MM TIGHTEN THE LINK FORK LOCKNUTS WITH A TORQUE OF 40 TO 45 N M 109 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 10 Pneumatic system 3 10 1 General information Upon order your tractor may be equipped with the following type of the trailer brake drive single line pneumatic drive double line pneumatic drive combined pneumatic drive of trailer brakes Technical specifications and adjustments carried out during operation for each type of the trailer brake drives are given below ATTENTION BEFORE CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING TRACTOR AND TRAILER PNEUMATIC LINES ENGAGE PARKING BRAKE IT IS ALLOWED TO CON NECT TRACTOR AND TRAILER PNEUMATIC LINES WHEN THERE IS NO PRESSURE IN TRACTOR PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ATTENTION PERFORM ADJUSTMENT OR TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE TRACTOR TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM AND BRAKE DRIVE ONLY WHEN THE ENGINE IS SHUT OFF AND THE TRACTOR IS ON AN EVEN SURFACE BLOCK
182. anel of the rear axle DL FDA drive and FPTO drive if installed the annuncitor of a lower pass of the gearbox reduction units informing that a lower pass of the reduction unit is engaged the pilot lamp of additional battery charging with 24V shall go out after the engine is started indicating that the additional battery is being charged with 24V through a voltage converter If the pilot lamp of charging stays on after the engine is started this means that the additional battery is not being charged this failure is to be eliminated IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR IN CLOSED ROOMS WITHOUT A REQUIRED VENTILATION AIR EXCHANGE EXHAUST GASES MAY LEAD TO A LETHAL OUTCOME IT IS FORBIDDEN TO RUN THE ENGINE WITH THE SYSTEMS OF COOLING AND ENGINE LUBRICATION UNFILLED ATTENTION THE TRACTOR CAB IS EQUIPPED WITH A SINGLE OCCUPANCY SEAT AND THE OPERATOR IS THE ONLY PERSON TO STAY IN ATTENTION START THE ENGINE AND INSPECT GAUGES ONLY WHEN STAY ING IN THE OPERATOR S SEAT ATTENTION KEEP IN MIND THAT THE ENGINE START IS POSSIBLE ONLY WHEN THE RANGE SHIFTING LEVER IS SET INTO A NEUTRAL POSITION IT IS FORBIDDEN TO START THE ENGINE TAKING THE TRACTOR IN TOW AS IT MAY RESULT IN ENGINE BREAKDOWN START THE ENGINE ONLY WHEN YOU STAY IN THE OPERATOR S SEAT 4 2 3 Tractor motion start GB shifting ATTENTION YOUR TRACTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH TURBOCHARGED ENGINE HIGH SPEED OF THE TURBOCHARGER REQUIRES GOOD LUBRICATION AT EN GINE START
183. arging hose Drain hose l SNO7 Pema rar 3 Signal l 4 OV K2 i F lnput of idle switch DAMH i he are X Output of idle switch a2 X29 2 y XS5 7 T Input of idle switch 5 P PELEA Y X toutput of idle switch eshiag seme z syaa 5 i LAXA UDNNVO isda S8a88 eR N st 0 lore SHR T SEES Bey za l Z3 SS i esting connector i n qS Button XS16 1 AC m to call up g y C j EB s testing uh JITU i 2 i 1685 P cdo SA gt ve 5SGS ee m SPSS in 1026 1 T H Hl a aD 4 x ro a es a toll ed ere desesng Urea dosing valve injector i 134a b x Al XS94 1 5 0 Engine control electronic unit EOC17 gt x s CD 2L ae Se 5 V power supply of pedal V_V_5VAPP1 145 K ue Ja gt lt T x cs Pedal signal 0 5 V1_APPI 161 3 ze SS F s S 2 ee t 0 V Power supply of pedal G_R_APP1 162 9 T TA a a S Sa Digital minus G_R_DIG 187 1 Z S 7 7 e Po Pa x xX aera Signal of idle switch of pedal I1_S_LIS1 116 X l l x xz me 5 V power supply of manual fuel feed 14 4 KX qd D gt a a S a d i Signal of manual fuel feed 163 3 a a gY amp 5 0 V power supply of manual fuel feed 184 4 z a 5 Signal of idle switch of manual fuel feed K86 186 XK i i u q ST1 r Signal of testing lamp Q_S_DIA 170 3 S S X x N pignet on resting temp OKO ae St lt aS S S w i Input of testing button S DIAREQ 166 C 2 lt f S S Se oo e
184. aring Ll 35 Ll 35 Clean rotor wheel of centrifugal oil filter of GB 36 Clean filter cartridge of air pressure regulating filter X in the pneumatic system X XIX XK X X lt X lt 37 Adjust service brake control a XI 38 Adjust parking brake control a ao Coe i Check pneumatic system line proofness 40 Check adjust pneumatic system brake valve ac X tuator Lubricate RLL turning shaft bushings Check adjust wheel hub drive bearings of FDA Px i 43 Check clearance spaces in reducing gear flange X bearing of FDA Rinse HLL oil tank breather a ee 45 Clean and lubricate spline joints of FPTO shaft x 46 Replace exchangeable filter cartridge of HLL oa exchangeable filter cartridge of HSC Sf tank 48 ChangeoilinHLLtank X 49 ChangeoilinHSCtank XT 50 Changeoilintransmissionline 1 x obec mere TTT hub drive casing of the FDA 52 Change oilinFPTOreducinggear x 5 Eager enews TT Tx control drive S Ames Dacre fue in broak coro f fx drive bal el e of the front link of FLL 235 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 6 2 finished Opera Operation description CAOCCA tion No j j 8 10 125 250 500 1000 gt ee LT steering joints components Te ee of tractor external threaded Pf ff YX joints tem tion e a rain air heating systems tion tion or once in a year In case of abnormity of oil 63 Adjust valves of GB driven centrifu
185. arrier assembly 12 on the axle shaft splines mount the washer 5 without the shim pack and tighten the bolt 4 with torque 500 to 550 N m release the bolt and tighten it again manually measure a distance from the axle shaft end to the outer surface of the washer 5 through its hole using a caliper deduct the washer thickness 12 mm from the measured value and find out the clearance value between the washer and the axle shaft end untighten the bolt 4 remove the washer and fill the clearance with the shim pack Mount the washer and tighten the bolt with a torque 500 to 550 N m check the axle shaft turning torque It shall make 16 to 21 N m If it exceeds the limits specified above increase the shim pack and vice versa The adjustment shall be carried out before mounting the crown wheel 2 and the cover 8 with sealing lock the bolt with the lock plate 3 having previously lubricated the plate surface joining the washer with grease Lithol 24 The plate nibs shall enter the notches of the car rier 12 If necessary turn the bolt more to make the nib and the notch coincide IT IS NOT PERMITTED TO UNTIGHTEN THE BOLT mount the crown wheel 2 mount the sun gear 13 assembled with the shaft 1 into the planetary drive carrier and check the drive assembly for easiness of rotation mount the cover 8 assembled with the seal having previously lubricated the seal and the rubber ring with grease Lithol 24 Tighten the bolt attaching the cove
186. as the limit of adhesive weight increase The manufacturer shall specify the per missible maximum loads on the two speed drive axles at the maximum traveling speed Note Pneumatic pressure rate in the front and rear tires of the tractors BELARUS 2022 5 under upon actual load is shown in subsection 4 2 8 Selection of the optimal in flation pressure of tire depending on operating environment and load on the tractor axles and depending on tires operation rules Drawbar features and passing ability of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 in the spe cific operating environment depend on the following factors tractor adhesive weight and ballast used in a specific set tractor ballast and implement weight distribution along the axles in structure of the unit standard size and pressure of the tires used technical condition and operability of the tractor chassis adequate and timely application of recommendations of the manufacturing works on improvement of the tractor drawbar features status and features of the supporting surface wheels tires adhesion to the supporting surface coefficient A distinction is made between flotation and cross section passing ability of an agri cultural tractor Basic flotation defines possibility to move on soils with various structure and firmness usually in road conditions in the early spring or in the autumn on peat bog soils a snowy virgin soil Cross sectional passing abilit
187. atalogue 65481 10 98 Male receptacle 0 0282106 1 Female receptacle 0 0282088 1 Male receptacle of AMP company catalogue D E 10 A 03 93 XP2 1 Male receptacle 0 0106462 ei N N 89 1 4 Female receptacle 0 0282189 2 Female receptacle 0 0282189 4 Female receptacle 0 0282189 7 Black two pin bag m 3 D m a m a m u w a m 5 X 25 Grey two pin Green two pi XS2 6 Yellow two pin XS2 4 Oo N N 91 1 w Black three pin mn m 3 o m a m a m u w a m Female receptacle 0 0282191 2 Grey three pin XS3 4 E Ei eet en e e ial EZE s O Li x2 xs2s_ sss s23 xs34_ er XP9 Male receptacle 1 4806 73 0 AMP company catalogue 82181 7 97 Wire coloring blue X yellow 3 green 2022 5 0000010 P3 C grey K red K4 brown O orange P pink violet 4 black FDA and gearbox reduction unit control system of Belarus 2022 5 tractor Annex L compulsory Electrical circuit diagram of electrical equipment of BELARUS 2022 5 tractor 2022 5 0000010 P3 5 T 5 fF 5 F 5 T 5 5 SS a 6a C 6a C 6a C Oe a A S 4 0 8 7a Ta Ta O A 1 29 TUAT 68 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 88 0 E3 690 C
188. ated indicator programming Choosing a fixed value of a parameter when programming of the Integrated Indicator shall be done in the following way first pushing of the button Parameter figure 3 22 1 switches the multifunctional In dicator 17 figure 2 7 1 into the mode of viewing a designation of a programmable parameter and its numeric value Repeated pushings of the button Parameter changes parameters in a cyclic way sequential pushing of the button Value changes a numeric value of a preset pro grammable parameter the programming mode is exited automatically when the buttons Parameter and Value are not pushed within seven seconds When the programming mode is exited the last parameter values chosen with the but ton Value are stored To choose a non fixed value of a parameter of the Integrated Indicator programming the following shall be done with the button Parameter figure 3 22 1 choose a parameter the value of which is to be set push the button Mode twice after that on the multi functional indicator 17 figure 2 1 the least significant digit of a numeric value will start flashing the flashing digit of a parameter is changed by pushing the button Value transit to the more significant digit is carried out by pushing the button Parameter the mode of programming a non fixed value of any parameter is exited by double pressing the button Mode
189. ater radiator 8 feeding tube 9 expansion tank 10 expansion tank plug 11 drain plug 12 pipe from water radiator to engine 13 fan Figure 3 1 3 Installation of elements of engine cooling system 70 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 1 5 Exhaust system 2 Figure 3 1 4 Exhaust system 71 2022 5 0000010 OM To figure 3 1 4 Exhaust system 1 intermediate connector of SCR system 2 tank with urea 3 catalyst 4 metal hose 5 NOx sensor onitrogen oxides 6 urea warming up valve 7 clamp to fix a cata lyst 8 dosing module urea injector 9 sensor of exhaust gas temperature before cata lyst 10 mixing pipe 11 feeding module pump 12 bracket to fix a catalyst 13 damper 14 bracket to fix exhaust pipe 15 exhaust pipe 16 exhaust pipe guard 17 catalyst guard 18 pipeline of urea delivery from feeding module to dosing module 19 20 cooling pipelines of dosing module 21 pipeline to deliver urea from the tank to the feed ing module 22 pipeline to take urea away from the feeding module to the tank 23 24 pipelines for warming up urea in the tank 25 coupling clutch body 26 pipeline to deliver coolant from the engine cooling system to SCR system Note The urea warming up valve and the feeding module are located between the catalyst and the coupling clutch body The BELARUS 2022 5 exhaust system consi
190. ating plugs operation functioning algo rithm of the pilot lamp indicating heating plugs operation is provided in subsection 3 22 2 Heating plugs operational principle of this manual 30 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 Integrated indicator and integrated indicator control panel 2 1 General information The integrated indicator 15 figure 2 1 1 hereinafter Il and the integrated indicator control panel 16 figure 2 1 1 hereinafter IICP display information on operational pa rameters of systems and units of the tractor and provide operator with data on violation of work or breakdown of any system The Il includes gauges and signal lamps as per figure 2 7 1 ag 30 AO fof Wildiayys a BS 3 p ae 4 S CEEI 6 T _ 1 velocity gauge needle indicator 2 engine speed gauge needle indicator 3 rear PTO speed gauge light indicator 4 9 segments of rear PTO speed scale yel low color 5 7 8 segments of rear PTO speed scale green color 6 annunciator of 540 min of rear PTO speed scale range yellow color 10 annunciator of 1000 min 1 of rear PTO speed scale range yellow color 11 pilot lamp to indicate headlights up per beam switching blue color 12 pilot lamp to indicate switching of trailer turn blinkers green color 13 pilot lamp to indicate switching of tractor turn blinkers green color 14 pilot lamp to indicate parking brake engag
191. aulic brake fluid from hydraulic system performing the following actions unscrew the reservoir caps 3 4 Figure 3 9 5 of the main brake cylinders 1 and 2 remove the safety caps from the fittings of the left and right wheel brake cylinders 1 and 9 Figure 3 9 2 pivot the hoses on the both fittings one by one beginning from the left or synchronously dipping their loose ends into an empty container unscrew both fittings by 1 2 of a turn press the pedals 5 and 6 Figure 3 9 5 synchronously until the fluid is fully extracted from the hydraulic system screw in the both fittings dismount the hoses put on the safety caps back in their places 2 Fill the tanks 3 4 of the main brake cylinders 1 and 2 the hydraulic brake fluid up to the Max level marked on the tanks 3 Circulate fluid through the break control hydraulic system in compliance with the task No4 in subsection 3 9 3 Service brake adjustment 4 Place the reservoir caps of the main brake cylinders back in their places 261 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 5 9 Task 55 Lubrication of bushings serving for swinging motion of a front link of FLL To oil bushings serving for swinging motion of the front link of FLL perform the fol lowing clean two lubricating boxes 1 Figure 6 4 36 located on an oscillating pin of the FLL front links 2 from accumulated dirt and consolidated lubricant squirt lubricating boxes 1 with a lubricant until the lubr
192. ayy UG Py YUN Iya By pa aps aeehey ayy oy paden QR parama 2g oye op ayy payed TAURS wy carpe aep ayy upd yoyo UH ii a sis a mai Mas RR RIE d m saat E fet jou lz e a EEA _ os HUN JU0JJ2317 302 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 13 Possible failures of the hydraulic lift linkage and guidelines for trouble shooting 7 13 1 General information IT IS FORBIDDEN TO DISASSEMBLE THE SECTION OF THE DISTRIBUTION VALVE AND THE INTEGRAL UNIT DURING PERIOD OF WARRANTY OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY FOR DISTRIBUTION VALVE SECTION AND THE INTEGRAL UNIT BE COMES INVALID ATTENTION REPAIRMENT OF EHS DISTRIBUTION VALVE AND EHS DISTRIBU TION VALVE SECTIONS ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY DEALERS OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY FOR DISTRIBUTION VALVE SEC TION AND THE INTEGRAL UNIT BECOMES INVALID IT IS FORBIDDEN TO ROTATE THE SPOOL ABOUT ITS AXES SUCH ROTATION CAN RESULT IN BREAKDOWN OF THE HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS IN THE DISTRIBU TION VALVE SECTION 7 13 2 guidelines for troubleshooting in HLL Possible failures in HLL and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 13 Table 7 13 Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting LL hydraulic system pressure loss RLL can not be lifted pressure loss or no pressure of pressure at external outputs overheating and or foaming of hydraulic oil takes place Air inflow in the hydraulic system Check and tighten the suction line clamps if neces suc
193. basis of the available operation documentation standardized and reference data and also by taking into account accumulated experience in the field of units composition directly in the given economy or the enterprise Reference data for selection of implements for coupling with tractors BELARUS 2022 5 is the following type and characteristics of processed soil and cultivated crops fields sizes and relief agrotechnical requirement for work being done operational speed agrotechnical clear ance track tires width advance direction operating weight coupling method vertical load on the device attached drawbar resistance and power requirements of machine tool haulage capacity and tractor power When coupling of machine and tractor unit it is extremely important to select a right gear which the tractor should work in Certainly it is beneficial to work at high speed with wide grasp of and deep proc essing by working attachment of the implements mounted But unfortunately it is impos sible to increase the speed of movement of the unit simultaneously with enhancement of width and depth The higher the operating speed the worse tractive effort of the tractor hence it is necessary to diminish grasp width and depth of processing and on the con trary Do not forget that operating speed and depth of processing of the implements are restricted to agrotechnical requirements Definition and assessment of possibility of co
194. be ad just clearance space in friction couple and pedal justed wear problem of break operating stroke disks 285 2022 5 0000010 OM Continuation of the Table 7 7 Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting Sticking of brakes Pedal free travel is nil clearance Adjust pedal free travel as indicated in subsection between piston and piston follower 3 9 3 Service brake adjustment of main cylinder is nil Sticking of main cylinder pistons Rinse hydraulic drive system with hydraulic brake does not go back in its initial posi fluid Replace damaged cups and O ring in the tion due to piston cup and O ring main and operating cylinders Replace hydraulic expansion resulting in closure of brake fluid Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through compensating port by reason of the hydraulic system use of incorrect hydraulic brake fluid or ingress of mineral oil pe troleum kerosene diesel fuel into hydraulic brake Sticking of main cylinder pistons Rinse hydraulic drive system with hydraulic brake due to piston cups expansion fluid Replace damaged cups and O ring in the main and operating cylinders Replace hydraulic brake fluid Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hydraulic system Clogging of compensating port of Unclog the compensating port of main cylinder and main cylinder deaerate the system aa Uneven braking of left and right wheels Faulty adjustment o
195. bracket to attach fuse block Figure 2 17 1 Installation of fuses located in the battery compartment on the front hood frame Fuse of voltage converter VC 3 figure 2 17 2 is built in the VC body 1 voltage converter fixture 2 voltage converter 3 20 A fuse of voltage con verter Figure 2 17 2 Installation of fuse of voltage converter Location of voltage converter is provided in figure 3 17 3 are tt amp p ae ee Ei m2 bec wa 1 voltage converter 2 AB manual disconnect switch 3 accumulator battery Figure 2 17 3 Voltage converter installation ha 54 2022 5 0000010 OM The other fuses of electrical equipment system are mounted in the switching unit Assignment places of location and ratings of fuses included into the switching unit are given in subsection 2 18 Switching unit 2 17 2 Fuses of electronic control systems To get access to cutout fuses of electronic control systems ECS remove a screw 3 figure 2 17 4 on a cover 2 of the side console 1 and open the cover l 2 3 1 side console 2 cover 3 screw Figure 2 1 7 4 Location of fuses of ECS Fuses of electronic systems controlling DL FDA gearbox reduction unit FPTO if available and RLL are provided in figure 2 17 5 A Connecting strip between fuses FPTO ing sirip GE reduction unit ___ DL E if FDA Ue see V We 12Y of power supply after j eng
196. built in the button Pressing the button non fixed position of the accumulator battery remote discon nect switch 7 fig 2 2 1 the accumulator batteries are powered the repeated pressing de activates the accumulator batteries It is possible to activate and deactivate the accumulator battery by means of the ac cumulator battery manual switch 2 figure 2 2 5 located in the area of the accumulator bat tery installation To activate and deactivate the accumulator battery it is necessary to press the button 1 1 button 2 AB manual disconnect switch 3 accumulator battery Figure 2 2 5 Installation of the accumulator battery manual disconnect switch 25 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 3 Upper shield unit of button switches Pressing the cut out button 1 fig 2 3 1 activates a flash beacon if available Pressing the cut out button 2 activates two front working lights mounted on the cab roof and an indicating lamp built in the button Pressing the cut out button 3 activates two rear working lights inner and an indi cating lamp built in the button Pressing the cut out button 4 activates two rear working lights outer and an indi cating lamp built in the button Pressing the cut out button 5 activates the rear screen wiper or the wiper and the washer of the rear screen simultaneously The cut out button 5 has three positions position I off position Il rear screen wiper is on
197. c drive 2 Start the engine and fill the tank with air to reach pressure of 0 77 0 8 MPa as per the pneumatic system air pressure indicator located on the dashboard Stop the en gine 3 Air pressure according to the pressure gage connected to the connecting head shall not be lower than 0 77 MPa If the pressure is lower perform the following opera tions check length of the rod 2 assembly figure 3 10 4 the rod length shall ensure its free without tension connection to the lever 6 by means of the pin 5 If it is necessary adjust its length by turning the fork 4 Lock the fork 4 with the lock nut 3 4 If air pressure according to the pressure gage connected to the connecting head has not reached the required value replace the brake valve 1 ATTENTION IF THE BRAKE VALVE 1 FIGURE 3 10 4 AND ITS ACTUATOR ARE ADJUSTED CORRECTLY THE PRESSURE ACCORDING TO THE PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTED TO THE CONNECTING HEAD WITH THE BLACK COVER SHALL FALL TO ZERO AS THE INTERCONNECTED BRAKE PEDALS ARE FULLY DE PRESSED OR THE PARKING BRAKE FULLY ENGAGED 114 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 10 4 2 3 Check and adjustment of the double line brake valve actuator of the pneumatic system 1 brake valve 2 rod 3 lock nut 4 fork 5 pin 6 lever Figure 3 10 5 Adjustment of the double line brake valve of the pneumatic system Check and if necessary adjustment of the brake valve actuator of double line pneumatic drive shall b
198. ce brakes when the tractor moves on a dry hard surface road with the clutch disengaged When pressing the interconnected brake pedals with force of 590 600N the stopping distance shall not exceed 6 4 m at tractor speed of 20 km h Unstraightness of tractor movement during braking shall not exceed 0 5 m If necessary adjust simultaneity of breaking beginning using the length of one of the break working cylinders as indicated above 3 9 4 Parking brake As a parking brake the service brakes with independent manual rear wheel drive are used The actuator consists of a drawing mechanism 5 figure 3 9 6 mounted an axle 6 fixed on the side wall of the cab to the left of the operator s seat and of a mechanical gear that includes a lever 2 which is free fitted on a brake shaft 10 with its hub levers 11 and 20 keyed with the shaft A plate 1 is welded to the lever 2 an adjusting bolt 4 screwed in the lever 20 of the left brake is stopped against the plate Levers 11 and 20 are connected by means of links 13 and 16 with double arm lev ers fixed on splined ends of the left and right brake shafts the lower arms of this levers are connected with working cylinder 15 18 rods When drawing the rod 3 with the handle 9 of the drawing mechanism the force is transferred to the lever 2 and from its stop member to the bolt 4 hereby turning the lever 20 and the shaft 10 with the lever 1 interconnected with the lever 20 by means of a key the links
199. ce eee eeeeeeenaeeeees 149 3 23 Cab air conditioning and heating SySteM 0c cccc ccc cce cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeaaeees 150 Sa Gc Cen ene E eet ee es Eee men ee ee Re ee eee re eee 153 S241 GENE Fal MO MM ALON te scnanscanvtiin ds coca cuesusaiesendamstndecasauaaeleassasesaiesaradeanoda 153 S242 CAD INS tall AUOMsysssassvasaasesedseaeessntoacabeGach EEE 153 HLAS DOOS viickusebxents coun rn eA E E Oa 154 3 244 Side SCC CNS as sites ata eatasateoa ea a eieiei 155 AROS 21 2 Re ane Te eee a en Or ee on ee ere se ee en ee ee ner eee 156 ILA D CUTSIGS Mill Ol Se said tinue aie enlace ainaad ciaamemies oa aa aaa sue aieueaie da ceat goinaedauee paw 157 3 24 7 ROOF WIM OPENING NAG excite nae msndctanctndusems eiceamneinaeddtendeaned padeeamaaennee 157 3 25 Marking of tractor COMPONENMS 0 ccc cece cece eee eee ee eee EOE ESEAS TSi 159 Z IINTENDED USE OF TRACTOR orsina aN a E E A 161 4 1 Safety measures to be taken preparing tractor for OperatiOn ccceeeeeeees 161 BAC OMe USC ce tes tera hes ete te ate nan eases se aaa fee ada eed ee se oes 162 A A BOAFOING PG UW ACION erne be wana eed aw a e EASE 162 4 2 2 Preparing for start and starting the Engine ccc cece eee cece eee e eee enaeens 162 4 2 3 Tractor motion start GB SNMING lt 20 2 c00cc cccacedeeetewtiww ei eereesiearncevetterdianeloren 163 A ZA VW GACLON SOD pcamaincntaauicsaainGstaieaisennsasactaauidncadaeatabaseina Sustain Rese eines aa 165
200. ces are recommended for dealer centers 2 10 Steering 2 10 1 General information BELARUS 2022 5 tractors are equipped with hydrostatic steering control HSC When the engine is stopped the HSC feed pump driven by the engine crankshaft does not feed the hydraulic system of the HSC and it is automatically shifted to a manual mode which requires application of a greater effort on the steering wheel in order to turn the trac tor 39 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 10 2 Steering wheel adjustments 1 steering wheel 2 chuck 3 handle to fix tilt of the steering column Figure 2 10 1 Steering wheel adjustment The steering wheel has the following adjustments horizon tilt angle adjustment height adjustment along steering shaft axis To change height positioning of the steering wheel proceed as follows unscrew the chuck 2 figure 2 10 1 by 3 5 revolutions set the wheel 1 to a position comfortable for work screw in the chuck 2 with max possible force of hand fingers The range of the steering wheel height adjustment is 100 mm stepless To change the steering column tilt angle do the following pull the handle 3 tilt the steering column to reach the position comfortable for work and releasing the handle 3 swing the steering column smoothly in longitudinal direction until fixed firmly The steering column can be tilted and fixed in four positions from 25 to 40 with 5 interval ATTENTION
201. ces of the lever and the fork into coinci dence after that screw the fork in by 5 5 5 rev dimension gt K and connect with the lever by means of the pin 33 tighten the nut 31 forelock the pin 33 4 Bleeding of the hydraulic system of clutch control in accordance with clause 3 3 4 2 of this manual 3 3 4 2 Bleeding of the hydraulic system of clutch control Bleeding the hydraulic system of clutch control is carried out in the following order fill the tank 1 figure 3 3 4 of the main cylinder 11 with braking fluid up to MAX mark remove the protective cap 22 off the operating cylinder 24 and put a rubber hose on the head of the overflow valve 23 immersing it in a container with braking fluid depress the clutch pedal for several times holding it depressed unscrew the overflow valve 23 by a quarter of a turn reliev ing the braking fluid surplus with air bubbles to the container with the braking fluid screw the overflow valve 23 in and release the clutch pedal bleed the system until air bubbles fully disappear in the braking fluid relieved remove the hose and put on the protective cap 22 check the braking fluid level in the tank 1 and add if necessary ATTENTION BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OF CLUTCH CONTROL WATCH THE BRAKING FLUID LEVEL IN THE TANK 1 TO STAY BETWEEN MIN AND MAX MARKS 82 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 3 4 3 Clutch check for purity of disengagement After the above stat
202. chanizing of technological process in the agricultural sector trailed implement is usually fixed in one point by means of tractor drawbar clevis to the DH It is also possible to use a two point connection with lift linkage upper draft arm is not used The chassis can carry weight of an implement in full hitch mechanism DH or LL is loaded only by weight of implement connector While changing the implement position from operating to transport position of the point in which the implement is connected to the tractor remains unchanged Semitrailed implements include various vehicles for general and special pur poses general purpose semitrailers tank semitrailers and dampers and special purpose semi trailed vehicles for mechanizing of technological process in the agricultural sector 186 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 3 Lift linkage 5 3 1 General information While operating front and rear lift linkage via the ground control console the opera tor shall stay beyond the reach of three point lift linkage and take to the account the exter nal dimensions of projecting parts of the lifted implement ATTENTION BEFORE LEAVING THE TRACTOR FOR ANY TIME PERIOD THE LINKED IMPLEMENT SHALL BE PUT ON THE GROUNG INDISPENSABLY ATTENTION MAXIMUM LIFTING POWER VALUE OF A HINGE MECHANISM FLL OR RLL AT THE SUSPENSION AXIS DETERMINATES TECHNICAL OPERABILITY OF THE LIFT LINKAGE BUT NOT PERMISSIBLE MASS OF THE IMPLEMENT COUPLED THROUGH IT PERMISSIBLE MASS O
203. ching unit The switching unit 3 figure 2 18 1 is intended for current supply its distribution be tween tractor power consumers and for protection of electrical lines against short circuit and current load excess Your tractor may be equipped with two types of switching units BKA 7 3722 or BK 1 which are interchangeable Place of the switching unit installation is in the cab on a metal beam of plastic shell fixation between a dashboard 4 and a windscreen To access relay and fuses of the unit 3 it is needed to unscrew two quick detach able screws 1 then remove a plastic cover 2 The unit also has a plastic protective cover intended for dust protection a 4 1 screw 2 cover 3 switching unit 4 dashboard Figure 2 18 1 Switching unit installation The unit consists of thirty cutout fuses 1 figure 2 18 2 FU1 FU30 and nineteen electromagnetic relays 4 K1 K19 commutating current supply for consumers a set of spare fuses 5 Signal led lamps of red color 2 located on the front board near each fuse are intended for indication of a corresponding fuse blow out A signal led lamp of green color 3 indicates turning on of the switching unit hth S ie a fan aa is ua Wa s amt a BKA 7 3722 57 2022 5 0000010 OM b BK 1 1 cutout fuse 2 signal led lamp of red color 3 signal led lamp of green color 4 electromagnetic relay 5 set of spare fuses Figur
204. ciency in local conditions ability to cross ups and downs with the implement mounted with process material ability to move on a slope ground Assess the road clearance and tractor controllability in structure of the assembly unit Front wheels of the tractor shall not be detached from the road surface when the trac tor is moving In any case of application the load on the front tractor axis shall be at least 20 of the load of its own operating weight 9 Ninth step Carrying out of control shifts for the purpose of determination of op erational and technical data labor coefficient for composition of MTU average operation speed productivity per one hour of basic shift and exploitation time activity consumption quantity for the control period of time fuel flow per hour specific 204 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 7 Test of correctness of composition of the machine and tractor unit It is not recommended to allow tractor operation with the implements coupled both with over and underload In the first instance wear and tear of tractor parts and excess fuel flow will be increased and productivity of the units will be decreased in the second instance de crease in economic indicators and particularly in productivity and increase of fuel consump tion Therefore the operator shall first of all ensure that the unit is composed correctly and its recommended driving speed is optimal In course of the tractor operation two ba
205. ck the valve group 5 turns on it directs oil flow under pressure to the clutch working cavity and the rear axle DL is locked The differ ential is unlocked automatically when the front wheels are turned to the angle of more than 13 to any direction from the straight line position or when one or both service brakes are engaged 123 2022 5 0000010 OM If it is necessary to lock the rear wheel for short time irrespective of any conditions including turning set the switch 2 into position Positive lock and hold it down in this posi tion As the rear axle DL is on the annunciator 3 lights up Releasing the switch unlocks the DL Lock off the annunciator 3 goes out ATTENTION TRACTOR TRAVEL SPEED WITH DL LOCK ON SHALL NOT EX CEED 13 KM H IT IS FORBIDDEN TO RUN THE TRACTOR WITH DL LOCK CONSTANTLY EN GAGED WHEN MOVING ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE 3 13 2 FDA drive control The FDA drive control system consists of the following elements a button switch 2 figure 3 13 2 of FDA control and FDA drive on annunciator 3 lo cated on the control panel 1 a sensor of guide wheel turning angle 7 mounted on the FDA at its left two sensors of service brakes on state located in the cab over the brake pedals a sensor 6 of FDA drive automatic engagement a valve group 5 located on the GB cover to its right connecting cables 1 control panel 2 FDA drive control switch 3 FDA drive
206. cluding conflicting mo tions of gears overloads and breakages in operation on excess of admissible pressure values in hydraulic system nominal load capacity or drawbar power In mode of ground cutting it is necessary to provide protection of tractor and loader chassis and from overload Loader working attachment overturning bucket and etc due to special valve actuation integrated in loader system In order to avoid breakages for the purpose of loader lowering speed limitation the loader should be equipped with slowing down valves in lifting cavity of loader hydraulic cyl inders 226 2022 5 0000010 OM Loader design is to provide possibility of fixing working attachments in transport po sition To exclude contact and or tractor and loader damages the minimum distances between fixed members of tractor and loader components attached to it should be not less than 0 1 m and in case of moving member not less than 0 15 m On a loader should bear marks Maximum speed limitation and also necessary warning labels for example to Fix On loader operating equipment limit values of load carrying capacity should be specified on the fore ATTENTION INSTALLATION ON THE TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 OF MOUNTED FRONT LOADERS OF VARIOUS MANUFACTURERS IS ALLOWED IN CASE IT IS PROVIDED FOR IN LOADERS TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ATTENTION FRONT LOADERS WHICH ARE NOT DESIGNED FOR USE TO GETHER WITH TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 THEREFORE THEY M
207. connected to the tractor is forcedly displaced to the new point along the full vertical extent semimounted implement is fixed in three points to the upper and lower draft arms of LL or just in two points to the upper and lower draft arms of LL only The tractor can carry weight of an implement in part and mostly by its traveling wheels usually by one or two wheels While changing the implement position from operating to transport the point in which the im plement is connected to the tractor is forcedly displaced to the new point along the full vertical extent Two point articulated linkage is effected by way of connection of Suspension axis link pin to the lower draft arms hinges of LL upper draft arm is not used It is also possible to use a cross arm from the tractor or implement kit semitrailed implement is usually fixed in one point by means of tractor drawbar clevis to the DH It is also possible to use a two point connection with lift linkage upper draft arm is not used The tractor can carry weight of an implement in part and mostly by its traveling wheels usually not less than by two While changing the implement position from operating to trans port position of the point in which the implement is connected to the tractor remains un changed Semitrailed implements include various vehicles for general and special purposes gen eral purpose semitrailers tank semitrailers and dampers and special purpose semitrailed vehicles for me
208. creased volume During operation it is permitted to vary the values of the parameter wheel rolling radius R which is determined on the basis of tyres fitted on the tractor wheels by measur ing the distance from the wheel centre to the bearing surface IT IS PROHIBITED TO CHANGE THE ENTERED VALUES OF THE OTHER PA RAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS 148 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 22 4 Installation and adjustment of speed sensors and RPM sensor of rear PTO 3 22 4 1 Speed sensor installation For installation of speed sensor either right or left the following shall be done put a driven gear 7 figure 3 22 2 with tooth against a hole in the rear axle cover 6 to ensure free play S it is required to measure a dimension H and to put a neces sary quantity of shim washers 1 as per table 3 5 put a ground wire 3 of the sensor 2 under any of bolts 4 seal the bolts 4 with sealing paste and tighten with a torque of 10 15 Nm k A 1 1 shim washer 2 speed sensor 3 ground wire 4 bolt M8 5 spring washer 6 rear axle cover 7 driven gear Figure 3 22 2 Installation of speed sensor Table 3 5 Speed sensor installation Q ty of shim washers 1 65 50 66 60 1 50 2 60 66 70 67 65 1 70 2 65 3 22 4 2 Installation of rear PTO RPM sensor For installation of rear PTO RPM sensor the following shall be done put a toothed washer 7 figure 3 22 3 with a tooth against the hole in the rear PTO
209. ctor is carried out through the cab left door except for emergency situations Rules on getting off the tractor at emergency situations are given in clause 4 5 3 of subsection 4 5 Emergency actions Getting off the tractor make sure that all actions listed in subsection 4 2 5 Engine stop have been performed lift linkages of the tractor and of coupled implements have been lowered 4 2 7 PTO use The rules on engagement and disengagement of front in installed and rear power take off shafts are described in subsection 2 14 Control panel for rear axle DL FDA and FPTO drives Rear power takeoff control The rear power take off shaft operation is controlled by means of the integrated in dicator as described in subsection 2 7 2 Assignment and operation principle of integrated indicator gauges The rules of FPTO and RPTO coupling with different types of agricultural machines and implements are described in section 5 Coupling of implements ATTENTION OPERATING WITH FPTO AND RPTO OBSERVE ALL SAFETY MEAS URES OF PTO OPERATION WHICH ARE LISTED IN THE THIS OPERATION MANUAL ATTENTION POWER TAKE OFF THROUGH THE REAR PTO AT SPEED MODE OF 540 RPM SHALL NOT EXCEED 60 kW 165 2022 5 0000010 OM To exclude impact loads engage the rear PTO at engine speed close to minimum between 1000 and 1100 rpm then engine speed should be increased There are 6 exchangeable shat end extensions of RPTO One shaft end extension t
210. cylindrical drive The drive gear is mounted on tapered roller bearings 10 A toothed ring of the gear 27 is in constant mesh with a sun gear 2 of the planetary drive which drives a front wheel flange 30 through pinions 4 a shaft 3 a carrier 29 and a crown ring 5 The flange is installed in roller bearings 1 and 25 adjusted with a nut 32 The pivot connection is created by upper and lower pins 14 24 and tapered roller bearings 16 23 installed in bores of a knuckle housing 26 and an axle beam 18 Preload in the bearings 16 23 is adjusted by shims 15 Clearance in bearings 10 of the drive gear shall not exceed 0 05 mm it is adjusted by shims 22 WW BL D T a 1 25 tapered roller bearing 2 sun gear 3 shaft 4 pinion 5 crown ring 6 plate 7 breather 8 bolt 9 drive gear 10 tapered roller bearing 11 cage 12 oiler 13 bolt 14 upper pivot pin 15 shim 16 23 tapered roller bearing 17 axle shaft 18 axle beam 19 cage 20 collar 21 doubled joint 22 shim 24 lower pivot pin 26 housing 27 gear 28 drain plug 29 carrier 30 flange 31 nut 32 nut Figure 3 12 3 Wheel gear group 120 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 12 4 Front driving axle drive 3 12 4 1 General information 1 ic 3 h 5 6 a g Wy i ete zZ Wi TURE it E E APS aiaa Eni a he Sh ie ioe ees mi ile SOSA aT Se cera cate Ze
211. d If it is essential to use water solution it is recommended to fill in all tires up to equal levels not exceeding 40 Water solution volume per one tire for 40 and 75 fillup are shown in Table 5 11 ATTENTION FILLING IN THE TIRES WITH WATER SOLUTION FOR MORE THAN 40 SHALL BE APPLIED AS AN ULTIMATE ALTERNATIVE Table 5 11 Water solution volume per one tire Tire Water solution volume Water volume solution at a at 40 fillup In cool spell when the temperature is below plus 5 C to avoid water freezing risk it is necessary to make solution by means of adding calcium chloride into the water accord ing to Table 5 12 Table 5 12 Calcium chloride volume is necessary for production of solution needed for filling in the tires when the ambient temperature is below plus 5 C Calcium chloride volume Ambient temperature gram per liter of water From plus 5 to minus 15 C 200 00 0 From minus 15 to minus 25 C E From minus 25 to minus 35 C 435 0 WARNING MAKING THE SOLUTION OF LIQUID BALLAST YOU SHOULD AL WAYS ADD CALCIUM CHLORIDE INTO THE WATER AND MIX UNTILL THE CALCIUM CHLORIDE IS DISSOLVED NEVER ADD WATER INTO THE CALCIUM CHLORIDE MAKING THE SOLUTION WEAR PROTECTIVE GLASSES IN CASE THE SOLUTION CONTACT WITH EYES RINSE WITH PURE COLD WATER DURING FIVE MINUTES SEEK MEDICAL HELP AS SOON AS POSSIBLE 217 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 12 5 Procedure of filling with water or water solution
212. d for force transfer when braking from actuating de vices pedals to executing mechanisms brake cylinders by means of brake fluid supply The type of the service brake actuator is hydrostatic with suspended pedals The brake control provides independent service brake control by means of pedals 5 6 figure 3 9 2 and consists of two main cylinders 7 the rods of which are jointed with brake pedals of two working cylinders 1 and 9 connected by means of pipelines 3 4 10 13 and hoses 11 12 with the main cylinders 7 The rods of working cylinders are jointed with the levers 2 8 of service brakes respectively When pressing the pedal 5 6 the brake fluid comes from the main cylinders 7 through the pipelines 3 4 flexible hoses 11 12 and pipelines 10 13 to the working cylin ders 1 9 moving cylinder pistons that influence the levers 2 8 through the rods The lev ers turn and influence the brakes through the shafts 7 figure 3 9 1 Brake fluid is used in the system of hydraulic brake actuator as working fluid 105 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 9 3 Service brake adjustment 1 2 main cylinder 3 fork 4 nut 5 bolt 6 pin 7 lock nut 8 9 pedal 10 pipe line from main cylinder to working cylinder Figure 3 9 3 Adjustment of pedal free play and brake pedal position To adjust the service brakes of the tractor proceed as follows 1 Set pads of the pedals 8 9 figure 3 9 3 in one plane with a help of t
213. d provides 1000 rpm of shaft end extension speed under 2100 rpm of the engine crankshaft speed with 44 kW of power implementa tion The front power take off shaft is executed as an independent unit and is a planetary reduction unit with band brakes mated with a parallel shaft reduction gear unit The torque to FPTO is transferred from a pulley 1 figure 3 8 1 of the engine crank shaft to PTO reduction unit 9 through a spacer 2 secured on the crankshaft an expansion clutch 3 installed in the spacer 2 and a splined shaft 4 secured in a clutch 5 which can be fixedly displaced in axial direction and which is mounted on the input shaft 8 of the PTO reduction unit The power in the FPTO reduction unit 9 is transferred from the input shaft 8 to the end extension 12 by means of cylindrical meshing and planetary drive The PTO planetary reduction unit 9 is controlled by a hydraulic cylinder 11 fastened on the reduction body and linked to a turn shaft 10 affecting band brake levers 2 4 TEA 6 Sa Se r E IE ad i a lt a a a Hes E La E m a aa J Eaa severe 3 A m TIT in th TT ial ote a A a F Se PH iim TIT T 1 engine crankshaft pulley 2 spacer 3 expansion clutch 4 splined shaft 5 clutch 6 spring 7 bushing 8 input shaft 9 PTO reduction unit 10 turning shaft 11 hydraulic cylinder 12 shaft end exte
214. d to the rear joint face of a rear axis body The device is meant for mounting of drawbar hitches and allows height adjustment of DH 2V DH 2R and DH 3V Installation variants scheme of DH 2V is shown in Figure 5 4 1 Installation variants scheme of DH 3V is shown in Figure 5 4 2 Installation variants scheme of DH 2R is shown in Figure 5 4 3 Installation scheme of DH 1M 01 is shown in Figure 5 4 4 Installation scheme of DH 1 is shown in Figure 5 4 5 Basic parameters of drawbar hitches shown in Tables 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 and in Figures 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 5 are given with standard rear tires 580 70R42 both single and dual mounted to the tractor and with standard static radius specified by the manufacturer Note General information about DH is set forth in subsection 3 21 All purpose drawbar hitch 193 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 4 2 Drawbar hitch DH 2V 110 160 LI Ah we iz lZ F Ah G A H G ANA A fi Q B i Figure 5 4 1 Installation variants scheme of DH 2V Table 5 3 Basic parameters n coupling dimensions of DH 2V Standard size configuration of the device DH 2V Towing yoke Yoke acc to ISO Yoke acc to GOST 2 Mounting location Rear lifting device 3 Design features Nonrotational hight adjustable 4 Purpose For connection and coupling of trailed semitrailed implements with traveling wheels including of tractor semitrailer type 5 DH yoke dimensions mm
215. d wiper and a washer of the windscreen 24 2022 5 0000010 OM The windscreen wiper is activated by means of moving the underwheel switch lever 3 fig 2 2 1 from off position 0 position according to fig 2 2 4 into a position first speed or second speed All positions are fixed The windscreen washer is activated in a non fixed position by moving the switch lever upward from any of three positions of the switch Figure 2 2 4 Operational scheme of the right multifunctional underwheel switch Pressing the emergency flashing button 4 fig 2 2 1 activates the emergency flash ing A pilot lamp built in the button flashes simultaneously with the emergency flashing lights Repeated pressing the button 4 deactivates the emergency flashing The central light switch 5 fig 2 2 1 has three positions position I off the upper part of the button is pressed as in fig 2 2 1 position II front and rear parking lights license plate lights lighting of instruments on the dashboard and also parking lights on a trailed machine are on middle position position Ill all consumers of II position and road headlights are on lower part of the button is pressed against the stop as in fig 2 2 1 When pressing the button of front working lights switch 6 fig 2 2 1 two front work ing lights located on front light brackets are actuated together with a light indicator
216. dentifi cation signs according to traffic regulation rules The implements which are coupled with the tractor hide light alarms shall be equipped with their own light alarms ATTENTION DO NOT TRANSPORT TRAILERS SEMITRAILERS SEMIMOUNTED SEMITRAILED AND TRAILED IMPLEMENTS WITH TECHNOLOGICAL LOAD FERTIL IZER DISTRIBUTORS SEEDERS TRACTOR DRAWN COMBINED HARVESTER AND OTHER NOT EQUIPPED WITH BREACKS ACTUAL WEIGHT OF WHICH ISN T EXCEED 3500 KG For more complete use of the tractor power during hauling operations several vehi cles can be used simultaneously number of which is conditioned by the tractor technical capabilities Such structure is called tractor trailer train and is placed special demand on Tractor coupling in structure of a train is permitted only on dry roads with hard surface with very small slope On an ice slick and slippery roads the tractor shall be stopped Usually tractor trailer train is formed as follows a tractor semitrailer trailer Semitrailer is connected directly to the tractor Other procedure of a semitrailer usage in a tractor trailer train is not provided ATTENTION DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE TRANSPORTATION SPEED OF THE IMPLEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT TRACTORS BELARUS 2022 5 CAN MAKE MORE SPEED THAN IT IS PERMISSIBLE FOR MOST IMPLEMENTS COU PLED Selecting a speed the operator shall consider the intensity of traffic features and state of the implements coupled and the
217. dicating lamp should be on in both cases Check operability of circuit from a starter relay K9 to solenoid starter switch WARNING SET THE TRANSMISSION RANGE SELECTOR LEVER INTO NEU TRAL POSITION OPERATOR MUST BE IN CAB place a bridge between power terminals K9 1 30 and 87 starter relay K9 using auxiliary wire as a connector Start up of starter and diesel engine start up should be initi ated at the moment by passing control and start up lock circuits check operability on starter relay K9 turn starter switch key into position II Starter relay actuation and engine start up should be initiated at the moment During check of operability of circuit from interlock switch to starter relay K9 it is necessary to assure oneself of starter start up interlock relay K19 properly operating re lay has constantly closed circuit power contact K19 1 30 and 88 7 14 4 Search and elimination of failures in lighting facilities 7 14 4 1 Test instruments highlighting does not operate and marker lights does not switch on when the key SA7 is in position I a Check operability of fuse element 80A in fuse block F1 located in AB case re place when necessary b Check operability of fuse element FU30 20A of SU in power circuit K18 1 of tractor marker lights and instruments board highlighting relay K18 replace It when neces sary c Check in SU operability of fuse element FU24 7 5A supplying power to marker
218. dicator segments light up successively from bottom upward in the following order 8 7 5 4 then in the process of the rear PTO operation the rear PTO speed is displayed on the indicator 3 in accordance with the upper lighting segment as per table 2 2 The working order of the rear PTO speed indicator 6 when switching the mode 1000 rpm efficient is the same as for the mode 1000 rpm Note A precise value for the RPTO speed can be checked on the multifunctional display 17 figure 2 7 1 Table 2 2 Correspondence of parameters of the indicator 3 figure 2 7 1 to the speed of the rear PTO end extension Upper as per fig 2 7 1 Annunciator 6 figure 2 7 1 Annunciator 10 figure 2 7 1 active segment of the 540 rpm 1000 rpm rear PTO speed scale po 50 TO S A po 880 1050 800 HD S ee ee ee 1 the annunciator of the range of 540 rpm of the rear PTO speed scale is actu ated only if there is a signal from the sensor and switches off when the annunciator of the range of 1000 rpm of the rear PTO speed scale turns on or when the signal from the sensor is missing for more than 3 sec speed value whereby the annunciator of the range of 1000 rpm of the rear PTO speed scale turns on 2 2 4 The multifunctional display 17 figure 2 7 1 is a liquid crystal display that shows information in two fields 1 and 2 simultaneously figure 2 7 3 1 digital symbol of the gear engaged 2
219. displayed on multifunction display of II a Check continuity of circuits from PTO sensor BV2 to integrated indicator P1 re set the circuit when necessary b In case of circuit continuity replace sensor BV2 Guidelines for PTO shaft speed sensors installation are specified in subsection 3 22 4 Installation and adjustment of speed sensors and rear PTO rpm sensor Note In case if wrong rear PTO shaft speed data are displayed it is necessary to check the set speed programming parameter values of rear PTO in II Correct parameter value for tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are shown in subsection 3 22 3 Order of integrated indicator programming In case of mismatch set parameters listed in Table 3 4 7 14 9 9 Il and instrument cluster get off with actuation of alarm of high voltage in on board circuit located in Il It usually happens in case of generator voltage control relay malfunction and in crease of voltage in on board circuit up to the value that exceeds nominal circuit voltage Contact your dealer for repair or replacement of generator 317 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 14 9 10 No data from fuel volume indicator error message FUEL is displayed in instrument cluster and multifunction display of II Frequency fuel volume sensor FFVS operation principle is as follows A frequency signal is arrived from FFVS to fuel volume indicator within the range from 500 Hz empty tank to 1500 Hz full tank If frequency makes 625 Hz a s
220. e indicating lamp is off Disconnect the wire from engine air pressure emergency sensor SP3 and connect to tractor ground for a short period If air pressure emergency indicating lamp lights up replace sensor SP2 If air pressure emergency indicating lamp does not light up check circuit continuity from instrument cluster P2 to the sensor SP3 If circuit operates properly replace instrument cluster P2 7 14 9 5 With instruments engaged and the motor not running transmission hydrau lic system oil pressure gauge pointer goes off the scale in instrument cluster P2 Check circuit continuity from transmission hydraulic system oil pressure gauge to the sensor BP1 for which purpose disconnect socket carrier from sensor BP1 and connect socket carrier wires by means of plug wire for a short period If oil pressure gauge pointer is pointing at O circuit is faultless replace sensor BP1 If oil pressure gauge pointer is still goes off the scale find and correct circuit brake along section from transmission hydraulic system oil pressure gauge pointer to sensor BP1 If circuit operates properly replace instrument cluster P2 316 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 14 9 6 With instruments engaged and the motor not running air pressure gauge pointer goes off the scale in instrument cluster P2 Check circuit continuity from air pressure gauge to the sensor BP1 for which purpose disconnect socket carrier from sensor BP1 and connect socket carrier wires by
221. e 2 18 2 Switching unit Note The signal led lamp of green color 4 may not be installed in the switching unit BK 1 Diagram of fuses and relay location in the switching unit is introduced in figure 2 18 3 1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K8 K K12 K3 K144 BI P ala K6 Ki K10 K11 FAME UPAR EBPBMAA MAHE HAEE H E HH T g Gl a g m i a FU2 FU3 FU FU9 FUS TET ATTI T a Rone Gini Faz We ibe A Flin Fle PRES Fs Caos Fea Rv ne DDT mM Os A SS 8 Ble PAO Bm PIEL A Oea a Diagram of fuses and relay location in BKA 7 3722 Jeee 2 A E Er Ald Rii Au AS AIS Fur Ar futo Puls PUI Fuld ARS Fule PUI EREE vegeae HEBEL E abst UGH AU DLEDER P SIT 52 8 Site BO PH AZ b Diagram of fuses and relay location in BK 1 Figure 2 18 3 Diagram of fuses and relay location in the switching unit 58 2022 5 0000010 OM Tables of fuses and relay assignment presented in figure 2 18 3 are stuck from inside to the upper plastic cover 2 figure 2 18 1 from the windscreen side Information on fuses and relay assignment as well as fuse ratings is given in tables 2 6 and 2 7 Table 2 6 Assignment of switching unit fuses tion protected electric circuit Road train lights and cab light FU19 socket to connect trailed agricultural equipment and 15A a portable lamp FU20 Signal from terminal D of the alternator to RLL 30A control system FU21 Front screen washer and wiper FU22 Warning indication
222. e Ah 2 Pa Lubrication valve OQ 20 0 25 MPa KI13 Filter valve 1 0 77 0 83 MPa Rotor with center 0 025 mm D O E S U O L Sensor of transmission oil pressure 0 2 0 MPa T a A KP Cocek SS I O a Damping device ee fe a a a ee ee a P__ Valve group RH06101 012 00GAM a ee eS ae FDA engaging clutch DL clutch at M3 Brake I Friction clutch a e e LU Hydraulic cylinder 1 117 2022 5 0000010 OM ducti it trol FDA engaging clutch DL clutch a of PTO with kydraulically pressed Fange reduction wut contro Mp2 MDI se Nos ee a er fms Kik XI MWAL dT jar A A3 Rests of FDA Cn ae 1 2 T i ie rae gt fl i of lett planetary reduction urut of the rear axle ee EPR a Ad of right planetary reduction unit of the rear axle a Bee aa edt 3 A hob eee es owe shat z r OK A ti Es l lt gt ER GE primary shaft _ GB secondary shaft 51 AE OAOT AON Figure 3 11 1 Transmission hydraulic system circuit diagram without FPTO The hydraulic system is meant for controlling the GB reduction unit FDA drive rear PTO FPTO if installed rear axle DL and also for lubrication of transmission bearings cooling of transmission components and cleaning of transmission oil The gear oil pump H1 figure 3 11 1 with a disengageable drive mechanism is mounted on the left side of the clutch body The pump sucks oil from the transmission case B1 through the mesh suction
223. e by 50 60 mm refill the LC if necessary cork the expansion chamber 10 with plug 9 WARNING COOLING SYSTEM OPERATES UNDER PRESSURE WHICH IS MAINTAINED BY THE VALVE IN THE EXPANSION CHAMBER PLUG IT IS DANGER OUS TO REMOVE THE PLUG WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT LET THE ENGINE COOL DOWN COVER THE PLUG WITH THICK FABRIC AND TURN IT SLOW TO REDUCE PRESSURE IN A SMOOTH MANNER BEFORE THE PLUG IS FULLY UNSCREWED BE CAREFUL IN ORDER TO AVOID CONTACT WITH HOT OIL 6 4 6 3 Task 60 Replacement of filter cartridge in the cab ventilation and air heating systems Replace filter cartridges of the ventilation system filters and cab heating Method of removing and installation of the filter cartridge on the tractor is specified in clause 6 4 2 9 Task 23 Cleaning of filter cartridges of ventilation and air heating systems 264 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 7 Maintenance service that is inconsistent with intervals of MS 1 2MS 1 MS 2 MS 3 and special MS 6 4 7 1 Task 61 Replace filter cartridge of coarse fuel filter According to section Maintenance service of the engine operation manual re placement of coarse fuel filter is to be carried out according to the requirements of the pre sent manual To replace coarse fuel filter cartridge perform the following actions screw spent coarse fuel filter cartridge 4 out Figure 6 4 37 in case catch water bowl 5 is going to be reused unscrew it from the spent filter cartridge then lubricate
224. e carried out in the following order 1 Connect a pressure gage with scale division of not less than 1 MPa to the con necting head with yellow cover of the tractor pneumatic drive 2 Start the engine and fill the tank with air to reach pressure of 0 77 0 8 MPa as per the pneumatic system air pressure indicator located on the dashboard Stop the en gine 3 Air pressure according to the pressure gage connected to the connecting head with yellow cover of the control line shall equal to zero Shift the interconnected brake pedals to the max travel The pressure shall rise to 0 65 0 8 MPa Release the brake pedals Engage the parking brake moving its handle to the max value The pressure shall rise to 0 65 0 8 MPa If the pressure per the pressure gage connected to the connecting head of the control line does not correspond to the stated above perform the following op erations check length of the rod 2 assembly figure 3 10 5 the rod length shall ensure its free without tension connection to the lever 6 by means of the pin 5 If it is necessary adjust its length by turning the fork 4 Lock the fork 4 with the lock nut 3 4 If air pressure according to the pressure gage connected to the connecting head has not reached the required value replace the brake valve 1 ATTENTION IF THE BRAKE VALVE AND ITS ACTUATOR ARE ADJUSTED CORRECTLY THE PRESSURE ACCORDING TO THE PRESSURE GAGE CON NECTED TO THE CONNECTING HEAD WITH
225. e casing screw plugs 2 and 5 WARNING BE CAREFUL IN ORDER TO AVOID CONTACT WITH HOT OIL 6 4 5 6 Task 52 Change oil in FP TO reducing gear Before changing oil ensure that FPTO reducing gear is connected to the engine crankshaft Warm up the oil in FPTO reducing gear up to the normal operating tempera ture by means of starting the engine and warming it up to the standard operating tempera ture To change the oil in the FPTO reducing gear perform the following actions place the tractor on level horizontal ground engage the parking brake and lock the wheels against movement fore and aft by anti recoil limit stops excluding tractor self movement The engine must be stopped unscrew the plugs 1 and 2 Figure 6 4 18 remove cap 3 by unscrewing four bolts then drain the oil from the FPTO reducing gear screw the drain plug 2 fill in a new oil through the hole in the plug 3 up to the lower edge of the level check plug hole 1 screw the level check plug 1 and the put cap back in its place 3 WARNING BE CAREFUL IN ORDER TO AVOID CONTACT WITH HOT OIL 260 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 5 7 Task 53 Change of hydraulic brake fluid in clutch operating control drive Change of hydraulic brake fluid in clutch operating control hydraulic system is required WARNING EXCLUDE CONTACT OF HYDRAULIC BRAKE FLUID WITH EYES AND UNCOVERED SKIN AREAS ATENTION EXCLUDE INGRESS OF MINERAL OIL PETROLEUM KEROSINE AND DIESEL FUEL AS THES
226. e detected eliminate them by means of threaded joints retorque 6 4 1 10 Task 9 Inspect clean air conditioner drainage pipes from the condensate water Light blue drain pipes are placed to the right and to the left of the heating and cool ing device under the under ceiling panel To avoid clogging the drain pipes shall be checked and cleared when necessary Cleanness of a drain pipe is indicated by water dripping when the work air conditioner is used in hot weather 239 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 1 11 Task 10 Inspect clean air conditioner condenser Check cleanness of air conditioner condenser core If it is clogged it is necessary to clean the condenser with a compressed air Open the hood and direct an air flow perpen dicular to the condenser plane from top downward Jammed finning must be planished by means of special comb or plastic wooden plate In case of severe condenser clogging rinse it with hot water under pressure not more than 0 2 MPa and blow it off by com pressed air Condenser cores must be cleaned both from the hood mask side and from the engine fan side To clean the condenser from the engine fan side perform the following unscrew four nuts 1 Figure 6 4 5 open condenser 2 carefully with supporting brackets 3 and 4 installed on it and with filter drain 5 preventing fittings 6 from rotating perform cleaning of condenser as stated above carry out the CAC radiator cleaning according to paragraph 6 4 1 12 when n
227. e feed line 6 When pressing brake pedals or engaging parking brake compressed air comes to the trailer through the brake valve 11 and the con trol line 10 The air valve group in the trailer will be actuated delivering compressed air from the trailer tanks to the brake chambers and the trailer brakes The direct brake control is effected at the cost of pressure rise in the control line 10 to 0 65 0 8 MPa as the tractor brakes Hereby the feed line 6 remains under pressure and delivery of compressed air to the system is retained Automatic brake control automatic braking happens in case of coupling break and trailer disconnection because of pressure loss in the trailer feed line The connecting heads 7 8 9 of valve type are mounted at the connecting line ends The valves of the connecting heads prevent compressed air outlet if the pneumatic drive is used without a trailer for example for tire inflation As the trailer brake lines are connected with the tractor brake lines 5 6 10 the valves of the connecting heads open providing pas sage of the compressed air from the tractor pneumatic drive to the trailer In this case it is allowed to connect the pneumatic lines of the tractor and the trailer if there is no pressure in the tank 12 of the tractor Air pressure in the tanks 12 is controlled by the air pressure indicator and by the emergency air pressure lamp of red color located in the instrument cluster by the air pres sure senso
228. e gear In a disengaged posi tion the sleeve 6 is displaced to the extreme right position the balls 4 come out of meshing with the bushing 5 under the influence of centrifugal forces and the shaft 3 and the gear 2 are freely rotating on the bearings In engaged position the sleeve is displaced into the extreme left position the balls 4 are driven into the holes of the bushing 5 by cone part of the sleeve 6 and rotation is transferred to the pump shaft from the gear 2 through the shaft 3 and the splined bushing 5 The drive provides 1890 rpm of the pump 10 shaft at engine rated speed and the ball type clutch members 3 4 5 6 allows to turn the pump on off with the engine running at min idle speed Rules of turning the HLL pump on off are given in clause 2 16 1 Hill a r j J F T n 5 i TT a 1 drive housing 2 gear 3 shaft 4 balls 5 pump shaft bushing 6 sleeve 7 shifting shaft 8 lock plate 9 bolt 10 HLL pump Figure 3 16 4 Pump drive 134 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 16 4 Valve group The HLL valve group in its basic configuration is an integrated unit of BOSCH com pany The integrated unit BOSCH consists of a spool hydraulic valve 3 figure 3 16 5 and a regulator 2 with lift linkage electromagnetic control The hydraulic valve 3 is three section four position open centre of BOSCH company The second and third section spools can be fixed in positions neutral
229. e intended to be used with your tractor To prevent the tractor from turning over keep up with the following precaution measures when operating the tractor choose safe speed corresponding to road conditions especially when moving cross country when crossing ditches slopes and by sharp turns turn round corners with a speed not higher than 5 km h on a slippery road not higher than 3 km h move down the hill with first or second gear engaged Note This list of precaution measures is not exhaustive To avoid turning over be always careful when operating the tractor 178 2022 5 0000010 OM Do not operate the tractor with gauges out of order It is not admitted to inflate tires without pressure control Coupling the tractor with agricultural implements comply additionally with safety measures concerning use of these implements Before coupling the tractor with agricultural implements make sure the automatic grips of the lower and upper links of the RLL are clean and faultless It is forbidden to op erate with the automatic grips out of order their inner cavities stuffed with dirt and foreign particles If the tractor front part rises off the ground when heavy implements are hinged on the mechanism of the rear lift linkage mount front ballast weights Do not work under raised agricultural implements Do not leave implements uplifted when stopping for a long time Before lifting and lowering a hinged agricultural imple
230. e mode FDA automatic control shall be used at various field works ATTENTION IN THE MODE OF FDA AUTOMATIC CONTROL WITH REAR WHEELS SKIDDING PREVENT FRONT WHEELS FROM TURNING AT ANGLES CLOSE TO 25 AS IN THIS CONDITION A CONSTANT ANTOMATIC ENGAGEMENT AND DISENGAGEMENT OF FDA WILL TAKE PLACE AND THIS CAN CREATE ABRUPT DYNAMIC LOADS IN TRANSMISSION AND FDA DRIVE The mode of FDA automatic control is disengaged by setting the switch 3 into position FDA disengaged Herewith the annunciator 2 will go out If there is a necessity of FDAD positive engagement irrespective of rear wheel skidding front wheel turning angle it is required to set the switch 3 into position FDA en gaged positively The FDA drive is hereby permanently engaged and the annunciator 2 is on To disengage the positive mode set the switch 3 into position FDA disengaged the annunciator 2 will go out ATTENTION OPERATING ON REVERSE USE ONLY POSITIVE ENGAGEMENT OF FDA 44 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION USE ONLY POSITIVE ENGAGEMENT OF FDA WHEN OPERATING THE TRACTOR UNDER BAD TYRE GRIPPING CONDITONS WHEN REAR WHEELS SKID INCLUDING TRACTOR TURNING TO INSURE SMOOTH ENGAGEMENT OF FDA FOR THIS DO THE FOLLOWING STOP THE TRACTOR HAVING DEPRESSED THE CLUTCH PEDAL ENGAGE THE FDA IN THE MODE FDA DRIVE ENGAGED POSITIVELY HOLDING THE BUTTON 25 IN DEPRESSED CONDITION SMOOTHLY RELEASE THE CLUTCH PEDAL ATTENTION AUTOMATIC ENGAG
231. e roof hatch is fixed in opened and closed position by a detent 2 figure 3 24 13 mounted on the hatch 1 1 hatch 2 detent Figure 3 24 13 Roof hatch fixation second modification in opened and closed position 158 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 25 Marking of tractor components 3 25 1 Number of engine and its parts The number of the engine and its parts is given in the engine operating manual 3 25 2 Cab number A metal plate with cab designation and cab number is attached to the cab rear wall at its right under the name plate with tractor number as shown in figure 3 25 1 _ MIHSA TRACTOR WORKS PROTEDINE STRIE TIRE 2022 6700005 FOR BELARUS TRACTOR TYPES 2022 2022 3 2022 4 2025 2025 3 BERIAL Ha MADE IN BELARUS Figure 3 25 1 Location of cab marking plate 3 25 3 Front driving axle number The FDA number is stamped on a pad at the back of the FDA beam as shown in figure 3 25 2 Figure 3 25 2 Location of FDA number 3 25 4 Clutch housing number Location of the coupling clutch housing number is shown in figure 3 25 3 Figure 3 25 3 Location of coupling clutch housing number 159 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 25 5 Gear box number Location of the gear box number is shown in figure 3 25 4 Figure 3 25 4 Location of gear box number 3 29 6 Transmission number The transmission serial number is stamped on a lower pad of the rear axle hosing at its right as shown in figure
232. e swithing unit is presented in figure 2 18 5 Power supply harness Orange wire Green wire to starter coil to starter coil Dashboard harness Harness of engine electrical n Ep equipment AS i a E 5 ns i E E T A E f Cif b ms Harness of roof electrical EE Ground wire Harness of EE on handgrip Harness of cab EE a connection of electrical harnesses to BKA 7 3722 Green wire to starter coil Orange wire to starter coil j Power supply harness Harness of EE on handgrip Dashboard harness Dashboard harness AA Sas d iT H j T Ea S f Sy mM i A 2B i ie a E LAM eo ow SP Sz i Y PES PET HG GND 12B iias LASS Harness of roof lo i an o electrical EE Ground wire Harness of cab EE b connection of electrical harnesses to BK 1 Figure 2 18 5 Diagram of equipment harnesses connection to the switching unit 2 19 Cab locks and handles 2 19 1 Cab door locks Left and right doors of tractor cab are secured with locks 4 figure 2 19 1 The lever 5 serves to open the left and right cab doors from inside the cab Moving the lever 5 backward unlocks the door The locks of the right and left doors can be blocked from inside the cab To block the lock from inside the cab it is needed to shift the detent 3 into the upper extreme posi tion To unblock the lock it is needed to shift the detent 3 into the lower extreme position re spectively With the lock 4 unblocked the
233. e top extreme position and gets automatically deactivated push the button dampening 10 hereby the RLL moves form the top extreme position down by 3 of the full RLL stroke and the annunciator of dampening activation 11 turns on then to prevent accidental shifting of the handle 7 during transportation move the blocking retainer 8 to the rotation axis of the handle 7 Hereby the handle 7 will be me chanically blocked in the upper position uplift 48 2022 5 0000010 OM To turn off the dampening mode press the button 10 The annunciator of dampen ing deactivation will go out and the RLL will return to its top position Move the retainer 8 to its initial position ATTENTION THE DAMPENING MODE IS ACTIVE ONLY WHEN THE HANDLE 71S IN THE UPLIFT POSITION ATTENTION DURING FIELD WORKS TILLAGE CULTIVATION THE DAMPEN ING MODE SHALL BE TURNED OFF Your tractor can be equipped with the RLL control console 1Y 03 manufactured by Izmeritel plant and introduced in figure 2 15 2 6 511 7 418 l4 15 2 3 4 B 9 l 10 1 handle to control the lift linkage position 2 uplift position 3 disengaged po sition 4 lowering in operation automatic control position 5 mode of implement deep ening in case it raises non fixed 6 detent to lock the lift linkage control handle 7 handle to adjust depth of soil tillage 8 handle to adjust height limit
234. e valve failure Replace brake valve Failure of trailer brake system Correct trouble in trailer brake system ee Trailer brake are slowly released Brake valve actuator got out of ad Adjust brake valve actuator as indicated in clause justment 3 10 4 2 Check and adjustment of single line and double line pneumatic system brake valves Brake valve failure Replace brake valve Failure of trailer brake system Correct trouble in trailer brake system ATTENTION WHILE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING ALL SELF MAINTAINED OPERATIONS RELATED TO PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE ADJUST MENT AND REPAIR ARE ALLOWED AFTER THE TRACTOR GUARANTEE PERIOD TERMINATION OTHERWISE PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE WILL BE WITHDRAWN FROM AFTER SALES SERVICE TO REPAIR OR ADJUST YOUR PRESSURE CON TROL VALVE INCLUDING MS3 DURING TRACTOR GUARANTEE PERIOD CONTACT YOUR DEALER Troubleshooting 289 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 9 Possible failures of transmission hydraulic system and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures in transmission hydraulic system and guidelines for trouble shooting are shown in Table 7 9 Table 7 9 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Low oil pressure in transmission hydraulic system Insufficient oil level in transmission Check oil level in transmission as indicated in sec tion 6 Maintenance service Refill oil up to the re quired level if necessary Clogging of distributor filter bypass Rinse d
235. e vibration dampers 9 mounted on the heavy duty shaft 7 Nine springs 22 provide for a required compression force of friction surfaces of driving and driven clutch parts An elastic element is installed between a bushing 8 linked with a shaft to drive PTO 4 and a back plate 12 The center plate 2 has leverage mechanisms 11 providing for positioning the plate 2 on the equal distance from the friction surfaces of the flywheel 1 and the pressure plate 3 as the clutch is engaged The release levers 10 rest on the forks 13 fixed on the back plate by means of adjusting nuts 15 locked by the washers 14 The coupling is engaged and disengaged by a shifter 17 with a throw out bearing 16 moving on the bracket 18 A fork 19 of the shifter with a shaft 20 are linked with a clutch pedal through a hydrostatic drive The throw out bearing is lubricated through a compression grease cup screwed into shifter pin The grease cup is located on the clutch body left side To have access to it screw out the plug ra 1 q 5 i JS i i i a i T ie a I i 15 TH me t i ig l TA Nean H l sat r m Y i San s 7 af tt Oy a 1 7 it ID e ili a s ri F ee Pees fay EH l i ET an a paii pa J x tks a eo i ata Fi ea j Jr i AH i ty if 4 i H i i i iz i Wa ms e u P f k m i A i k 3 p re P E es i its ac ww 5 rt a8 eh ci i l 1 T a E i L i i 4 aan 1 flywheel 2 center plate 3 pressure plate 4
236. e when removing from storage includes taking off supporting blocks cleaning and if required depreservation of tractor its components re moval of packoff reinstallation of dismounted components tools check of operation and adjustments of tractor and its components 322 2022 5 0000010 OM 8 5 Preservation Preservation provides provisional anticorrosion protection of tractor assemblies and systems from ambient exposure in the process of tractor transportation and storage Engine its systems and fuel tank preservation instructions are listed in the engine operation manual Clean tractor surfaces subject to preservation from mechanical staining degreased and dried up Cover unpainted inside and outside galvanized surfaces specific assemblies of tractor and cabin with corrosion proof oil RUST BAN 397 SUMIDERA 397 Preservation of units radiator and fuel tank filler breathers cylinder rods is carried out by polyethylene film Materials used provide protection of tractor and its assemblies for the period of storage and transportation within one year Outside tractor and its assemblies preservation is made by lubrication of surfaces using brush or sputtering by means of paint sprayer Inside tractor preservation is carried out by filling cavities with preservation mixture and subsequent engine operation During tractor inter shift short term and long term storage the enterprise operating the tractor is liable for compliance with pr
237. eater Figure 3 23 2 Allocation of main components of cab air conditioning and heating system 151 2022 5 0000010 OM The climatic unit starts to operate in a conditioning mode with running engine when required fan speed is set with a switch 1 figure 2 4 1 and the switch 2 is set in the begin ning of a blue scale Hereby power is supplied to the electromagnetic clutch of the compressor 7 through the control circuit figure 3 23 2 The clutch engages and transmits rotation from the engine crankshaft pulley to the compressor shaft The compressor pumps coolant through the components of the conditioning system Herewith the coolant absorbs heat of air passing through the heater cooler 8 then giving up heat to the atmosphere through the condenser 6 The conditioning system can automatically maintain a preset temperature that is set by turning the switch 2 figure 2 4 1 which controls the thermostat Clockwise turning decreases the temperature and contraclockwise turning increases it The protection against critical conditions is ensured by the pressure sensor 4 figure 3 23 2 and by the thermostat The pressure sensor 4 cuts the system off at excessive more than 2 6 0 2MPa or insufficient less than 0 214 0 03 MPa pressure The thermostat cuts the system off at excessive temperature fall in the freon radiator of the cooler heater 8 The system performance is adjusted by fan roms and by the thermostat The compressor 7 can operate
238. eceptacte 601203 dl T ti CSCsSC idCY X532 Receptacle 30 6 06571 COBO ty S XS4 1 Socket WC32NK4T MT O WC32NK4r MT oo o o o y XS42XSHA Receptacle 602604 wli Table C1 finished xsi Receptacle 602606 Receptacle 602207 Cable socket 0 0967650 1 yer avenig Receptacle 605608 Receptacle 610608 Receptacle 1 480672 0 XS92 Receptacle 1 967621 1 Receptacle 602209 XS10 1 XS10 2 Receptacle 1 0967240 1 XS121 Receptacle 1 967622 1 xS122 Socket WC32YK12r MT 7 Po Prsmins62 Receplace zs E CCSCSC SY Pasttns62 Receptacle t9e7ezs1 SSCS Ger smsa Recepta 9676251 So S e erm X53541 Socket 7812226 a Schlemmer Germany O S y r tr m Denomination MpumesanHnue AMP Germany MP Germany AMP Germany A m EA Ea EA EA 1 eane ES a a pone EA 2 AMP EE Ea EL25
239. eces sary put the air conditioner condenser back 1 bolt 2 condenser 3 4 supporting brackets 5 filter drain 6 fitting Figure 6 4 5 Hefting of air conditioner condenser CORROSIVE DETERGENT COMPOSITION MUST NOT BE USED 240 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 1 12 Task 11 Inspect clean the engine water radiator and the engine CAC radiator Check cleanness of the engine CAC radiator core and engine water radiator In case it is clogged perform the following actions heft air conditioner condenser as indicated in paragraph 6 4 1 11 carry out the CAC radiator cleaning with the compressed air Direct an air flow perpendicular to the CAC radiator plane from top downward In case of severe CAC radiator clogging rinse it with hot water under pressure not more than 0 2 MPa and blow it off by a compressed air put the air conditioner condenser back carry out the water radiator cleaning with the compressed air Direct an air flow perpendicular to the water radiator plane from top downward In case of severe water ra diator clogging rinse it with hot water under pressure not more than 0 2 MPa and blow it off by a compressed air radiator cores must be cleaned both from the hood mask side and from the engine fan side ALKALINE SOLUTIONS AND CORROSIVE DETERGENT COMPOSITION MUST NOT BE USED 6 4 1 13 Task 12 Check rinse of gripper tools of FLL and RLL Check the pockets where the hinged joint locking mechanism in the gripper
240. ed valve 4 which is used for tire inflation Air pressure in the tanks 12 is controlled by the air pressure indicator 8 with an emer gency air pressure lamp 9 red color in the instrument cluster as well as by pressure sensors 10 and emergency pressure sensors 11 To remove the condensate from the tank 12 there is a valve 13 The connecting head 7 is valve type The valve prevents compressed air from going out when using the pneumatic drive without a trailer attached when inflating tires The trailer brakes are controlled in two modes direct and automatic The direct control of the brakes is performed by means of pressure drop in the connecting line 6 when the tractor decelerates In such case delivery of compressed air to the trailer pneumatic system stops The automatic control of the trailer brakes is performed in case of emergency dis connection of the trailer and the tractor due to pressure drop to zero in the trailer connect ing line Note Rules on checking and adjustment of the brake valve of the single line pneumatic drive are given in clause 3 10 4 2 2 3 10 3 Double line pneumatic drive of trailer brakes The double line pneumatic drive provides controlling brakes of trailers and agricul tural machines equipped with double line pneumatic brake drives as well as tire inflation A diagram for the double line pneumatic drive is shown in figure 3 10 2 Sh j ii Ula All A i 13 12 11 610 9 8
241. ed what additional working attachments should be used what adjustments and customizations should be made and what gear it should work in But for this purpose you need to buy implements at first An order of units assembly based on a tractor and features of operation are specified in manuals on equipment coupled In all cases it is necessary to check up conformity ac cording to connecting components lifting capacity of lift linkages and tires a permissible load on DH and tractor axles Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 works with tilling machine with average resistance of working attachment of 30 0 KN Unit grasp width and processing depth basically depend on unit drafts of soils determining a range of working speeds with regard to agricultural re quirements The more soil is heavy textured the higher the resistance Change of speed by 1 km h result in unit draft change by 1 2 ATTENTION IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO RECEIVE FROM THE MANUFAC TURER SELLER OF THE IMPLEMENT THE SUFFICIENT INFORMATION ON TRAC TOR PERFORMANCE WHICH WILL ENSURE OPERATION OF THE IMPLEMENT IF SUCH INFORMATION WAS NOT PRESENTED IT IS RECOMMENDED NOT TO OP ERATE NOT TO BUY SUCH IMPLEMENT TO AVOID POSSIBLE SERIOUS PROB LEMS DURING OPERATION WHICH MAY RESALT TO TRACTOR FAILURE 5 6 2 Methods of selection of the implements for coupling There are the following methods of selection of the implements for coupling calculating method experimental method 201
242. ed adjustments on clutch control have been carried out it is re quired to check the clutch for purity of disengagement for this purpose do the following engage the parking brake start the engine and set the engine speed to 1400 100 rpm fully depress the clutch pedal and not earlier than after five seconds engage the GB gears which shall be pure i e without additional sounds and rasp In case there are additional sounds and rasp it is needed to carry out a check and if necessary make repeated adjustments listed in clause 3 3 4 1 With the clutch pedal 7 fully depressed figure 3 3 4 the lever 34 movement with the radius 105 mm shall make not less than the dimension W 3 3 5 Clutch case In the clutch case 10 figure 3 3 6 a drive of a dual speed continuous rear PTO as well as a drive of oil pumps for HLL and hydraulic system transmission are located A driving shaft 7 of the continuous PTO drive has a toothed rim which is in constant mesh with a gear 24 and splines on which a gear 12 is mounted This gear engages a gear 20 of oil pump drive and a lock ring prevents it from axial movement The driving shaft rotates in a roller bearing 6 mounted by means of a gasket 5 and a collar in a shifter bracket 2 which is attached to the clutch case 10 by way of cotter pins 3 through a gasket 4 Inside the shaft 7 there is a heavy duty a shaft 1 which transfers torque to the gearbox input shaft through a splined bushing
243. ed end and on the other side with the parts of the PTO reduction unit On the needle bearings 13 of the secondary shaft 12 the welded gears 6 8 are mounted as well as the double cone synchronizer 14 which provides for engagement of the higher lower pass of the gearbox reduction unit H L Also the driving gear of the FDA drive is mounted on the shaft splines The whole set of the shaft parts is tightened with the nut 31 The secondary shaft is mounted in the bore of the cone bearings 10 29 that are adjusted with adjusting washers and the offset of the tapered toothed head of the shaft 19 4 13 mm is assured by matching the adjusting washers 11 On the splines of the shaft 16 in the gear train the gears 23 25 the distance bush ing 24 are mounted and the FDA drive gear 22 is mounted on the needle bearings On the shaft of low speeds and reverse travel the gears 83 101 of the first and the second range of the forward and reverse travel are mounted on the bushing 103 the clutch 84 is located which is shifted through the system of carrier fork lever from the tractor cab On the bushing 100 the gear 88 is mounted which engages the creeper drive gear 98 which in its turn is connected with the toothed rim of the intermediate shaft 42 The gear 88 on the bushing 100 is prevented form axial movement by mounting the lock ring 87 The shaft 78 is mounted in the block of the roller bearings 81 86 and is secured by mounting the lock ring
244. ed in clause actuator 3 10 4 2 Check and adjustment of single line and double line pneumatic system brake valves impaired performance of pres Dismount pressure control valve from tractor and sure control valve send it to repair workshop pressure control valve filter is Rinse pressure control valve filter clogged faulty pneumatic compressor Contact your dealer SS ee eee eee ee eee Increase of pressure in balloon is slow Faulty pneumatic compressor Contact your dealer Ce Rapid decrease of pressure in balloon when the engine is stopped Air leakage through coupling Stop the leakage member of pneumatic system 287 2022 5 0000010 OM Continuation of the Table 7 8 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Rapid decrease of pressure in balloon when break pedal is depressed Faulty break valve Replace break valve Increased oil slobbering into pneumatic system by pneumatic compressor Faulty pneumatic compressor Contact your dealer insufficient air pressure in balloon Faulty location of pressure control Adjust pressure control valve as specified in sub valve adjusting cap section 3 10 5 Check and adjustment of pneumatic system pressure control valve Faulty pneumatic compressor Contact your dealer es Pressure control valve engages compressor for idle stroke when pressure is below 0 77 0 80 MPa and for operating stroke when pressure is below 0 65 MPa and over 0 70 MPa Dirt
245. ed on the other side of the cabin 1 3 cap 2 4 6 bolt 5 protection grid 7 filter cartridge 8 frame Figure 6 4 12 Cleaning of the filter cartridges of ventilation and air heating systems ATTENTION DURING THE TRACTOR OPERATION IN HEAVY DUSTING CON DITIONS CLEAN THE FILTER IN EVERY 8 10 HOURS OF OPERATION I E ON A SHIFT BASIS ATTENTION DO NOT SWITCH THE FAN ON BEFORE CLEANING THE FILTERS AT HIGH HUMIDITY OF THE ENVIRONMENT AS IT IS HARD TO REMOVE DUST FROM A WET PAPER FILTER CARTRIGE 245 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 2 10 Task 24 Check of oil level in the main gear housing and wheel hub drive of the FDA To check oil level in the housings of the main gear and FDA wheel hub drives per form the following place the tractor at the level horizontal ground engage the parking brake and lock the wheels against movement fore and aft by anti recoil limit stops excluding tractor self movement The engine must be stopped unscrew the level check fill plugs 2 Figure 6 4 13 in the wheel hub drives casings 3 and a level check fill plug 5 in the main gear housing oil level in the wheel hub drives and the main gear casings shall reach the lower edges of threaded openings in the plugs 2 and 5 accordingly if it is necessary refill the oil up to the lower edges of threaded openings in the plugs 2 and 5 insert the plugs 2 and 5 in their places 1 6 drain plug 2 5 level c
246. eee e ee eeee tees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaens 112 3 10 4 2 Check and adjustment of single line and double line brake valves of the pneu MaAlIG SV SICIM iste coo caudate wae teds hha caetnais anes Seen E an tee osu cade hae aera 114 3 1 0 4 2 1 GENElal IMMOMMN AON sesse a E E 114 3 10 4 2 2 Check and adjustment of the single line brake valve actuator of the DNCUMATLIG S YSIS IN ens venue suuonsndeduvenusiiutecsteuveuindansdolberiahudsieuueuemeosegeuwteabedsdacuuss 114 3 10 4 2 3 Check and adjustment of the double line brake valve actuator of the DNEUIMALIC SVSIG IM drernen enade aeaaee dE Rae rR ESET 115 3 10 5 Check and adjustment of pneumatic system pressure regulator 116 3 11 Transmission hydraulic SYStOM cc cece cece eee cece e eee cess eeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeees 117 B12 Frontar ving Ax 6 asosini a NE ar AEEA 119 312 1 Generalin orma UO Neena eE TESE EEEo 119 3 12 2 Cental FEGUCTION UNM iscsssciuveseseenoidaussaaenersiaanneeeusnd E ETTEN DEORE 119 223d VV NCCI GCal OlOUD nia gactty ww saber r A ANOA 120 32 12 4 PRON ANVING aXe CMVGsxc 0sc0 ciscewsajevdasdeoudsbesyedsaue nice el ETE ETETE 121 3212 4 1 Generali onna seira EARE ANTARE ES 121 3 12 4 2 Adjustment of FDA drive automatic SWitCh cccccccc ee eee ee eeeeee eee ees 122 3 13 Electronic system for rear axle differential lock control front driving axle drive control front and power take off shaft Control 0 0 0 ccc ccccc cece cece cece eee eee
247. eeneees 222 5 14 Finding of total weight loads on the front and rear axles tires holding capacity and requires MINIMUM DallaSt kis eosassaekedicapevhaodeavaurvcevadecdsebondasededaneencerdeerineenna 223 5 15 Choice and installation of front loader ccc cece cece e eee eee e nena teen eeenneeeeeens 225 510 1 Generall INMOl MANO MixacsneadscecanaaatanGascacnnenneess dasaduunyendarkaseontasaaeedaunaatiaeens 225 5 15 2 Safety measures at tractor BELARUS 2022 5 operation with loader TES eye EEEE E nee eee eer See ene ee nn N ee ee ene me TE eer 22 5 15 3 Information about Mounting NOleS 0 cece cece cece ee eee eee eee e eee eenneaeeeeees 229 6 WAINTENANG Ease eaeretinsiredeanccsesncedecuestosedeesiaveenersdeuiedesadeuasyemmenesetayreeneees 231 6 1 General insStructions cc ccc cece cece ec ee cece eee eeeeee teat eeeee eget eeaeeegeeegateegee eens 231 6 2 Providing access to the components for maintenance SEIVICES cece cee cee ee eee e eee es 233 6 3 Maintenance DroCed Ul Cic c a cs2caagsmanaaansegcans AA 234 6 4 Scheduled maintenance Servicing OperatiOnS cccc cece eee ee eee eeeeeneeeeaeenes 237 6 4 1 Maintenance on a shift basis SBMS in every 8 10 hours of operation ONS FSi lis aaa aeaa cca aa Gaon ue nace nane ee ean eae aneae ena nene 237 6 4 2 Maintenance services in every 125 hours of operation cccceee eee eeeee es 243 6 4 3 Maintenance services in every 2
248. ef valve 9 figure 3 9 4 of the left working cylinder and put its free end into a transparent reservoir with a capacity of at least 0 5 filled with brake fluid to half of its volume press the interlocked brake pedals for 4 5 times and while holding them down turn out the relief valve 9 of the left working cylinder by 1 2 3 4 revolution and when after a full pedal travel as a part of the fluid with air is bled from the system turn the valve in and release the brake pedals Press the pedal quickly release smoothly Repeat this operation several times until air is completely bled from the system Remove the tube from the valve and put the protective cap bleed air from the hydraulic actuator of the right brake in the same order top up fluid in both tanks 3 4 figure 3 9 5 to the Max mark 107 2022 5 0000010 OM check the full travel of unlatched pedals under a force of 300430 N applied It shall be within 100 120 mm If the full travel of the pedals falls outside these limits read just them proceeding as follows a turn out the locknut 2 figure 3 9 4 on cylinder rod by several turns b turning rod 1 of working cylinder adjust cylinder length and pin stroke of the working cylinder fork within the necessary limits c tighten the locknut 2 1 2 main cylinder 3 4 tank 5 6 pedal Figure 3 9 5 Bleeding of brakes and adjustment of full pedal travel 5 Check the efficiency of the servi
249. ement red color 15 pilot lamp to indicate enhanced voltage in on board system red color 16 pilot lamp to indicate low level of coolant yellow color 17 multifunction display Figure 2 7 1 Integrated indicator Note The pilot lamp indicating coolant low level is not used on BELARUS 2022 5 tractors 31 2022 5 0000010 OM The II control panel is presented in figure 2 7 2 aH4 4EHRE NAPAMETP Figure 2 7 2 The integrated indicator control panel The control panel 16 figure 2 1 1 allows to carry out manual programming with but tons lapametp Parameter and SHayeHne Value see figure 2 7 2 and also to change the mode of showing data entered on the multifunctional display with Pexum Mode button The Pexnm Mode button is also used to enter a non fixed parameter value when programming the device Rules on use of the IICP in the mode of displaying operational parameters and failure messages on the multifunctional display are given below in subsection 2 7 2 Assignment and operation principle of II indicators Rules on use of IICP in the II programming mode are given in subsection 3 22 3 In tegrated Indicator programming order 2 7 2 Assignment and operation principle of integrated indicator gauges 2 2 1 Velocity gauge 1 figure 2 7 1 indicates a design speed of the tractor on a needle indicator The design speed exceeds the actual
250. ension axis sec not more than 6 5 d front lift linkage against order In section 5 Coupling of implements e drawbar hitch In section 5 Coupling of implements Engine parameters not specified in the table 1 1 shall meet 260 S3B 0000100 PO document For referential use When operating in traction drive mode and speed limit to 15 km h Specified depending on the configuration At 2100 rpm of engine crankshaft speed 17 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 3 Tractor composition Tractor framework semi frame Undercarriage front and rear driving wheels with pneumatic tyres of low pressure Steering wheels are front wheels The wheels are twinned by means of spacers The tractor is equipped with 4 stroke piston six cylinder inner combustion engine with in line vertical arrangement of cylinders with direct injection of diesel fuel and compression ignition corresponding to environmental requirements of Stage 3B System of engine lubrication is combined some parts are lubricated under pres sure some by spattering The lubrication system consists of an oil Sump oil pump liq uid oil heat exchanger centrifugal oil filter and oil filter with paper filtering element The engine fuel supply system consists of the following parts accumulator system of fuel supply Common RAIL including a high pressure fuel pump injectors fuel accumulator under high pressure sensors of engine working envi ronment condi
251. ension into spline opening having greased a center pilot 6 with grease lubricant mount the thrust washer 2 and fix it with four bolts 2 put the PTO cap 4 back secure it with the bolts1 ee Z i 7 SS Or cae em EA a J T ie ee 7 a i 4 T a T EnA H af Goes a wi Se LI J crs 1 bolt 2 thrust washer 3 protective cap 4 exchangeable shaft end exten sion 5 bolt 6 center pilot 7 bushing Figure 4 2 1 Protective cap removal and exchange of RPTO shaft end extension For operation with front PTO in installed remove the protective cap 7 figure 3 8 3 for this it is necessary to squeeze the protective cap at its bottom and pull down After fin ishing to operate with FPTO it is obligatory that you put the protective cap back to do this it is required to put the cap on the shaft end extension and to press it lengthway till the cap is securely fixed in the aperture of the safeguard Detailed description of FPTO operation principle is given in subsection 3 8 Front power takeoff shaft 166 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 8 Selection of optimal inner pressure in tires depending on operational conditions and load on tractor axles instructions for tire use 4 2 8 1 Selection of optimal inner pressure in tires depending on operational conditions and load on tractor axles Selection of optimal air pressure in tires of wheeled tractors and rate of its influence on grip
252. ensitivity to impacts and cuts Extra duty operation resulting in excess of max load capacity for given pressure and speed of tires and tractor axles is a reason for failures and damages not only to the undercarriage tire carcass rupture etc but also to other units and parts of the tractor which can lead to accidents and decrease of the tractor life span in general ATTENTION ALWAYS SET TIRE PRESSURE WITH DUE ACCOUNT FOR LOADS AND SPEEDS EFFECTIVE FOR THE KIND OF PERATION BEING CARRIED OUT Correct choosing tire pressure as well as identifying if it is necessary to mount ballast weights their mass and type is possible only after defining a load value on tractor axles The exact load value for a specific case of tractor use which is applied to front and rear wheels of the tractor can be determined only by way of practical weighing the tractor with the implement coupled The method of identifying load on front and rear wheels of the tractor by way of weighing is presented in section 5 Coupling of implements To check tire pressure use properly functioning devices with scale interval not more than 10 kPa This will ensure adequacy of measurements The permissible limit deviations for tire pressure are 10 kPa according to pressure gage readings 167 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 4 1 Rates of loads on tractor single tires for selection of operational modes at various speeds and tire inner pressures Load on a single tire kg
253. ents connected via RLL and FLL In course of the implements coupling via DH 1M 01 DH 1 or DH 3V Figure 5 10 3 where PTO shaft and PRS axles are parallel and not shifted relative to each other in fore and aft plane right and left distances A and B from the connection point to PTO shaft and to PRS are approximately equal and maximum length of cardan shaft L is determined when the implement turns around maximum angle turn relative to the tractor an extensible cardan shaft with gimbal joint with guard housing can be used A B Figure 5 10 3 Cardan shaft length finding scheme in course of the implements coupling via DH 1M 01 DH 1 or DH 3V 210 2022 5 0000010 OM In course of the implements coupling via DH 2V DH 2 or DH 2R Figure 5 10 4 when distance equality from the implement connection point to PTO shaft and PRS is not maintained PTO shaft and PRS axles are shifted relative to each other in fore and aft plane right and left when the implement turns the cardan shaft length is varied lengthwise an ex tensible cardan shaft with gimbal joint and constant velocity universal joint with guard hous ing shall be used Meanwhile the constant velocity universal joint shall be located on the part of PTO shaft Figure 5 10 4 Shaft length finding scheme in course of the tractor coupling with the implements connected via DH 2V DH 2 or DH 2R 5 11 Features of application of PTO shafts and cardan shafts WARNING BE CAR
254. er and consists of L H range controlling cylinder 11 figure 3 4 6 mounted on the center 10 a double end 14 a lever 18 mounted on the a shaft 5 A fork 16 is connected with the lever 18 by means of a pin 17 The lever of the shaft 5 engages the carrier of the fork 3 figure 3 4 2 and as the shaft turns it moves the clutch of the synchronizer 14 The position of the shaft 18 figure 3 4 6 is adjusted by changing the length of the double end bolt 14 with further locking with the nut 13 The cylinder 11 is connected to the hydraulic system by means of the valve of the hydraulic valve group 7 The switch 6 connects the valve of the hydraulic valve group 7 to the electric circuit only when the speed shifting lever is in neutral position A retracted posi tion of the cylinder 11 rod corresponds to the lower L pass of the gearbox reduction unit The pressure sensors serve to index the engagement of the reduction unit passes ATTENTION IF DURING OPERATION MALADJUSTMENT OF THE CYLINDER CONTROL ELEMENTS OCCUR OR THE SYNCHRONIZER ON THE SECONDARY SHAFT IS TURNED ON IMPROPERLY HIGHER OR LOWER PASSES L H OF THE REDUCTION UNIT THEN IT IS REQUIRED TO CARRY OUT CYLINDER ADJUST MENT To adjust the cylinder 11 figure 3 4 6 proceed as follows move the piston inside the cylinder until it stops turn the shaft 18 contraclockwise having engaged the step down range of the gearbox reduction unit turn the double end bolt 14 by 8 9 revo
255. er nut 8 washer 9 stud bolt Figure 6 4 19 Rinsing of mesh filter of transmission hydraulic system 249 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 3 6 Task 32 Check adjustment of clearances in steering joints To check the backlash and clearances in steering joints 1 Figure 6 4 21 of the steering link 4 it is necessary to turn the steering wheel either side when the engine is running In case the steering wheel angular play is more than 25 as indicated in Figure 6 4 20 remove the steering joints play by performing the following actions stop the engine remove locking wire 3 Figure 6 4 21 screw threaded plug 2 to remove the steering joints play locknut plug 2 with wire 3 If the steering joints play can not be eliminated by tightening of threaded joints take the hinge joint to pieces and replace worn out parts Besides weak tightening of castle nuts of cone shaped pins may be a reason for increased steering wheel play angle of HSC hydraulic cylinders 1 hinged joint 2 plug 3 locking wire 4 steering link Figure 6 4 21 Maintenance of steering joints 250 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 3 7 Task 35 Check and adjustment of wheels toe in Adjustment of front wheels toe in is carried out to prevent the front tires from prema ture breakdown ATTENTION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT WHEELS TOE IN SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN EVERY 250 HOURS OF TRACTOR OPERATION AND AFTER EACH TIME THE FRONT WHEELS TRACK WID
256. eral Int On AUON necrereect dapat eee 215 5 12 2 Ways of changing of drawbar features and passing ability of the tractors 216 5 12 3 Application of hinge mounted quick detachable ballast 216 5 12 4 Filling up the tires with water solution for the purpose of adhesive weight VCO AS NC AEE AEE A EE encsatie etna ura A E AEA 216 5 12 5 Procedure of filling with water or water SOIUtION cc ccc eee cece eee ee eee e ees 218 5 12 6 Order of partial water or water solution drain from the wheels tires 218 5 12 7 Order of full water or water solution drain from the wheels tires 00 219 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 12 8 Selection of the tires internal PreSSUre c cece eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 219 5 12 9 Application of rear axis differential DIOCKING c ccccec cee cee eee eee eee eee eee ees 220 5 12 10 DOUN OF WNC S oirro ri err E E OE 220 5 13 Features of the tractor application in special CONdItIONS cc cece eee eee es 221 5 13 1 Tractor operation in areas with rugged topography Possibility of the tractor application for haylage allocation for reServe cc cece cece eee e eee ee eee e ee eeaes 221 5 13 2 Application of substances for the purpose of chemical treatment 221 5 10 0 OPelratlon Ica TES areae beeen has tice danse ae seein eaei 221 5 13 4 Driving on public roads and selection of SP ed cece cece seca e eee ee
257. eranen ee AY YY 2 2 poo griz ee ee ee ee e ed memene iee gt AA S I DDD EIS A ES 36 35x2 OCT 6033 80 m 9 000GB 1 flywheel 2 driven disk 3 center plate release lever 7 back plate 8 fork pressure spring 13 insulating washer s00 92D Figure 3 3 3 Workholder 79 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 3 2 2 Clutch dismantling Clutch is dismantled after the engine has been detached from the transmission in the following order mount three manufacturing bolts M12x40 having screwed them into the pressure disk 4 figure 3 3 2 through the manufacturing orifices of the back plate 7 unscrew the nuts attaching the back plate to the flywheel and remove the clutch plate as sembly the back plate 7 together with the pressure plate 4 remove the driven disk 2 remove the center plate 3 remove the second driven disk 2 ATTENTION BEFORE STARTING TO DISMANTLE THE CLUTCH IT IS RECOM MENDED THAT YOU MAKE MARKS IDENTIFYING MUTUAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE FLYWHEEL 1 THE CENTER PLATE 3 AND THE CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLY THE BACK PLATE 7 TOGETHER WITH THE PRESSURE PLATE 4 ASSEMBLE THE CLUTCH IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MARKS 3 3 2 3 Clutch installation The clutch is installed in the following order mount a splined workholder in the bearing of the flywheel mount the first driven disk 2 figure 3 3 2 on the workholder with the
258. eraredtonpewnewnautaupdennnreadiomeanaueansentarsavenaeens 181 4 4 2 Technical maintenance before tractor rUN IN ccc cece eee eee ee en eeeee teen eeenes 181 AAS actor rUn enaa anes cate badeacna aie bs Gude EATA 181 4 4 4 Technical maintenance during tractor rUN IN ccc cece cece ee eee eee eee eee eee eees 182 4 4 5 Technical maintenance after tractor PUN IN cc cece cece cece ee eee eee eee tense euees 182 4 5 Actions in extreme CONMITIONS 0 cece ccc cece ence eee cent eee e eee eeeeeegaaaaeeeeeess 183 gt COUPLING OF IMPLEMENT So sncccscinusouaassnsaitacesecasaenngrngacwnieaananentaeeeawneacy 184 Se Gee ral MOM MAU ON tg 42cauhesenat a nnair 184 5 2 Types of implements coupled with tractor BELARUS 2022 5 0 0 ccc cec cece 186 5 EUML MDRAG Ci aeaa nce teeta evamung aaa xiadte Da etanistute gh daiaaislany dae aiedaes aa A 187 Oro sh GONE al IMFOMMONON situetoetei secs ies A A 187 5 3 2 Three point rear lift iNKAGe 0 cece ec ccc eee ee eee ee eects eee eaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneneeas 187 5 3 3 Three point front lift linkKage 00 ccc ccc ccc cece ence cence AA 191 94 Drawpar NICHES 15 sesciannrevedndiudedssunansliwancaysaniawdedesinaesetecunewrestaydedeeusueseiees 193 54 GONeral INIOKMaAll ON ncicoctteeciuvenacasne seed tee cave dieteoesae aa aT 193 94 2 Diawbak NONDA 2V cnitsenansinuetecvesecataa yee raden yeeoaciaseiarean sevmateweoncwanaies 194 54 3 Drawbpar Niteh lo citi eG be
259. eration has been carried out the handle 1 shall be returned to the neutral position manually 52 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 2 3 handles to control HLL valve group sections 4 instruction shield with dia gram of HLL valve group section control Figure 2 16 2 HLL valve group section control Instruction shield with a diagram of HLL valve group outlets connection to outer consumers is attached to the tractor valve group as per figure 2 16 3 The valve group out lets are equipped with fast couplings with color protective covers red uplift green low ering Figure 2 16 3 Diagram of HLL valve group outlets connection to outer consumers 2 17 Cutout fuses WARNING TO AVOID BURNING OF TRACTOR WIRING NEVER USE FUSES WITH CURRENT RATING HIGHER THAN RATING SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION IF A FUSE OFTEN BURNS OUT FIND OUT THE CAUSE AND ELIMINATE THE FAULT 53 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 17 1 Fuses for electrical equipment system Cutout fuses are intended for protection of electrical lines against overloads and short circuit Fuses located in the battery compartment on the front hood frame to the right as viewed along tractor movement before the radiator unit are introduced in fig 2 17 1 1 2 3 4 COCO e5 ZS NONN TA D OSI A o TN D 6 1 accumulator battery 2 front hood frame 3 fuse block Onok 4 80 A fuse of trac tor board power supply 5 60 A fuse of EECS power supply 6
260. es anti shock valves up to the required pressure Op sure relief valve exceeds pressure eration is performed only by maintenance department of anti shock valves 0 Worn out sealing of hydraulic cylin Repair or replace hydraulic cylinder der piston Fe When steering wheel ts rotated the steerable wheels turn right about Incorrect high pressure hose connec Connect high pressure hoses to the pocket corre tion to the corresponding pocket of sponding to direction of steering wheel turning dosing pump or hydraulic steering cylinder 293 2022 5 0000010 OM Continuation of Table 7 11 Failure i Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Steering if too slow and too hard in course of quick turning of steering wheel due to low efficiency coefficient Disadjustment of dosing pump Contact the dealer Adjust pressure relief valve for the pressure relief valve set to law required pressure Operation is performed only by pressure or stuck in open position maintenance department due to dirt accumulation Steering wheel will not recenter Hard abrasion or blocking up in Stop abrasion in steering column for which perform steering column mechanical com the following ponents loosen upper nut lubricate friction surfaces of plastic bushings eliminate contact of universal joint fork with steering column bracket walls Steering wheel continue to rotate after turning Gripping of sleeve with spool Contact
261. es on a front beam longerons and a tractor clutch coupling case are used For the purpose of unloading of a semiframe and a tractor clutch coupling case use adjustable bars or other constructive elements connected to rear semi axles tubes of rear axle transferring a part of push force to tractor rear axle For rigidity maintenance it is desirable that the right and left parts of loader mounting frame have been rigidly connected among themselves Loader installation scheme is shown in Figure 5 15 1 1 loading equipment kit for tractor 2 crossed linkage of loader frame 3 tapped rod 4 loader bucket 5 rear ballast weight Figure 5 15 1 Loader installation scheme To ensure sufficient drawbar power generated by tractor rear wheels it is necessary to create adequate load on rear axle equal or exceeding 60 of tractor operational weight with regard to installed loader weight Right proportion of loads on axles can be achieved by rear axle ballasting by means of loads solution filled in wheel tires rear counterweight hook on bucket with ballast load attached to rear lift linkage ATTENTION IN LOADER OPERATION MANUAL DESIGNED FOR CONSUMER LOADER MOUNTING ORDER SHALL BE SET FORTH WITH PICTURES INCLUSIVE OF DATA ON SHIFTING AND DISMOUNTING OF TRACTOR COMPONENTS In a loader design safety and interlocking devices fast coupling clutches slowing down valves overload limiter and another should be provided ex
262. es the pin bore and then fasten it with cotter pin 9 Check and tighten up if necessary the accessory fastening the cab mounting supports front and rear to the tractor frame Sixteen bolts M16 shall be tightened with torque from 160 to 200 N m by four bolts per each supporting bracket Inspect the reliability of locking by a locking pin of the castle nut M20 fastening the bottom vibration isolator four places 10 Check and tighten up if necessary twenty bolts M12 fastening FDA body to central re ducing gear with torque of 60 to 75 N m 11 Check and tighten up if necessary sixteen bolts M16 by eight bolts on each side fastening the pivot axle and wheel hub drive axle with torque from 110 to 140 N m 12 Check and tighten up if necessary four castle nuts M27x1 5 of cone shaped pins of the hydraulic steering cylinder for which perform the following actions unfasten the cotter pin holding the castle nuts tighten up four castle nuts with torque from 180 to 200 N m then make castle nut further to the moment when the nut s nearest slot matches the pin bore and fasten it with cotter pin then 13 heck and tighten up if necessary two castle nuts M20x1 5 ball pins of steering link for which perform the following actions unfasten the cotter pin holding the castle nuts tighten up four castle nuts with torque of 100 to 140 N m then make castle nut further to the moment when the nut s nearest slot matches the pin bore and fasten i
263. escription of the identified errors appears on the screen also a fault testing annun ciator lights up or flashes on the engine control panel 33 figure 2 1 1 Interpretation of er ror codes as well as recommended actions to be taken to eliminate the identified faults are given in the engine operation book attached to your tractor ATTENTION THE ERRORS IDENTIFIED ARE TO BE ELIMINATED TO ELIMATE THE ERRORS CONTACT YOUR DEALER 2 8 2 Adjustment of brightness and sharpness of the information display To enter the mode of adjustment of screen brightness and sharpness 7 figure 2 8 2 press button 5 In the screen lower part images of buttons are given Pressing but ton 1 decreases brightness pressing button 2 increases brightness pressing button 3 de creases sharpness pressing button 4 increases sharpness and pressing buttons 1 2 3 4 simultaneously adjusts to an average value of sharpness and max brightness Repeated pressing button 5 exits the mode of brightness and sharpness adjustment 36 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 8 3 Call up of changeable images and parameters on the screen of the in formation display l 2 2 3 1 button to activate the main three segment image and choose between dis played parameters 2 button to activate four section image and choose between dis played parameters 3 button to activate graphic display and choose between displayed parameters 4 button to activate indication of error fault list
264. eservation methods and storage conditions speci fied in GOST 7751 85 Inside tractor surfaces preservation is carried out by preservation grease KC Y according to TU RB 600125053 019 2004 When a tractor is stored outside specific surfaces must be preserved with grease BELA COR of type A according to TU RB 600125053 020 2004 8 6 Depreservation and represervation Depreservation method is chosen depending on preservation materials used Sur faces under preservation have to be wiped with cleaning cloth soaked with low viscous oils solvents or washed away with washing water soluble detergents Sealed assembles should be stripped off insulation materials film paper Inside surfaces under preservation need no depreservation Tractor represervation is carried out in case conservation defects are detected in the process of storage or upon expiration of protection life 8 7 Putting tractor into operation after long term storage Perform depreservation of an engine according to the engine operation manual Remove grease off external surfaces under preservation Dismount protective cov ers plugs special accessories and mount the parts which were removed earlier back in their places Before mounting parts clean them off grease and dust Drain sediment out of all vessels fill them with operation fluids and if necessary top up to control level Lubricate all tractor mechanisms according to clause 3 of Table 6 3 of the present operati
265. essing in a prescribed manner Drain electrolyte from tractor AB put it special storage reservoir and send for re processing in a prescribed manner Drain sediment from fuel coarse and fine filters Drain diesel fuel from fuel tank and put it in special storage reservoirs Disassemble the tractor into parts having sorted them out into non metal steel cast iron non ferrous and precious metals and send them for reprocessing in a prescribed manner Dismounting of parts and assembly units maintenance of air conditioning system should be carried out by specially trained personnel using equipment for servicing freon refrigerating machines During maintenance and regular repair services fuel and lubricants subject to change and if necessary parts and assembly units being sorted out into groups of mate rials should be sent for reprocessing 326 2022 5 0000010 OM SERVICE BULLETINS 321 Annex A 2022 5 0000010 P3 compulsory Electric circuit diagram of engine electronic control system of Belarus 2022 5 tractor SCR system Control board Ie ee ee ee ee ee eee ee Bee eS Sensor of fuel feed manual control ae re e or Ste ee see ns ss Ao cet te ee ee Se a Pedal XS6 2 SR2 Actuation relay for heaters of i I U NOx sensor before catalyst NOx sensor after catalyst SRI lt LCD k 5y a A Common heating relay Ch
266. et is shown in Figure 5 3 4 Figure 5 3 4 Scheme of installation of linkage mounted ballast weights to FLL Table 5 2a Information about installation of linkage mounted ballast weights to FLL 1 Equipment title Linkage mounted ballast weights kit assembled with mounted bracket 2 Primary purpose Additional loading of front driving axis facilitat ing the tractor weight dis tribution by coupling to a tractor lift linkage 3 Design features It consists of Linkage mounted ballast weights kit assembled with mounted bracket 8 Weight of bracket without ballast weights kg 105 Refers to the coupling dimensions of mounted bracket 192 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 4 Drawbar hitches 5 4 1 General information Drawbar hitches of BELARUS 2022 5 can be packaged with drawbar hitches DH 2B DH 3V DH 2R DH 2 and DH 1M 01 ensuring coupling and transporting of trailed and semitrailed implements coupling devices of which correspond to the following requirements compatibility according to the coupling dimensions implements are equipped with rigid drawbar hitch draft poles are equipped with a device making the procedure of cou pling uncoupling with drawbar hitch of a tractor easier drawbar hitches of semitrailers have an adjustable support Tractor BELARUS 2022 5 has special purpose rear mounting device of lift type in the form of guide plates with several borings fixe
267. et the switch 11 into position Disengaged hereby the annunciator 10 will go out To engage the FPTO repeatedly first it is required to set the switch 11 into position Engaged then press the button 9 ATTENTION AS THE ENGINE IS KILLED THE FRONT POWER TAKEOFF SHAFT IS AUTOMATICALLY DISENGAGED TO ENGAGE THE FPTO AFTER THE ENGINE IS STARTED FOLLOW PROCEDURES ON THE FPTO ENGAGEMENT Note Additional information on the FPTO operation rules is given in subsection 4 2 PTO use 2 14 4 FDA drive control The FDA drive is controlled with a switch 3 figure 2 14 1 Indication of the FDA drive operation is performed by an annunciator 2 The switch 3 has three fixed positions FDA disengaged middle position FDA controlled automatically upper position FDA engaged positively lower position The mode FDA disengaged is used for traveling when moving on roads with hard surface when the traveling speed is above 13 km h in order to avoid increased wear of front wheels In position FDA automatic control the FDA drive is automatically engaged when the rear wheel skidding limit is exceeded and the tractor moves straightforward The FDA drive is disengaged automatically as the rear wheel skidding drops below the limit or the guide wheels turn by more than 25 degrees to any side The annunciator 2 burns with the FDA drive engaged and it goes out with the FDA drive disengaged Th
268. evi tesadd crease ae deni stiddataasubdbatiieaesadaas 139 aco e TAUCK E ea en Or se ee 139 IAS a a ea eC a 140 3 19 Rear lift linkage electronic Control SYStEM c cece cece eee eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeees 141 3 20 Front IimtWKAGS 25 gnc cet ast i ccceet a E R ERRIN 143 3 20 1 General INfOrMatiOn ccc cece cece eee cece eee e teen eee eeeeeteeeeeesnaaeeeeeeeeeggaanes 143 3 20 2 Rules of shifting FLL from operating position to transport position 143 3 20 3 Rules for coupling agricultural machines with FLL cccee cesses ee eee ees 144 3 21 All purpose drawbar NNMGMs ivivincisatin asauiscloiicn Nansen vnnnaite os aulslciprecnadeaaicnnaheds wwe 145 3 22 Electrical SGQUIDING Al essre aT NEEESE 146 222 VAS ileral IMPOMMANON esc a A aSa 146 3 22 2 Heating plug operation PrinCiple 0 cece cece eee cece ee ee eee eaeeeeeeeeenateenas 146 3 22 3 Order of integrated indicator prograMmMing c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenees 147 3 22 3 1 Control panel of integrated INdICAtOM ccc ccc cece cee cece eee ea seen eeeeeeees 147 3 22 3 2 Algorithm of integrated indicator programMmMing cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 3 22 4 Installation and adjustment of soeed sensors and RPM sensor of rear PTO 149 3 22 4 1 Speed sensor installation ccccccscevecucsseuseuucuserecuacsenteuueuserseuacuaes 149 3 22 4 2 Installation of rear PTO RPM S NSOF cccceceeee cen
269. ew the plug of the oil filler 2 Figure 6 4 33 and drain plug 1 of the oil tank drain the oil into a special tank for an exhaust oil insert the drain plug back in its place 1 and fill the system with a new oil to the re quired mark IT according to the oil level gauge 3 insert the oil filler plug 2 back in its place 2 3 l 1 plug 2 cover 3 4 bolt 5 HLL tank Figure 6 4 33 Change of oil in HLL tank If tractor is operated assembled with implements with increased oil consumption fill the oil up to mark C of oil level gauge with implement coupled cylinder rods retracted ATTENTION OIL CHANGE OPERATION IN THE HLL SYSTEM TANK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY WITH RLL CYLINDER RODS RETRACTED AND THE IMPLE MENTS COUPLED WITH THE TRACTOR WARNING BE CAREFUL IN ORDER TO AVOID CONTACT WITH HOT OIL 258 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 5 3 Task 49 Change of oil in HSC tank Before changing oil in order to warm up the oil in HSC system set the steering wheel into the extreme position with the motor running and keep it this position until the oil is warmed up to the temperature not less than 45 C To change the oil in HSC tank perform the following actions position the tractor on level surface set the RLL links into the lowermost position FLL links into the uppermost position put the parking brakes on and stop the engine unscrew filler plug 2 Figure 6 4 34 and drain plug 4 of oil tank drain the oil
270. ewe om COC oot ate TTY CCC et ios Te CCPC ove Tees TTT CC owe fee TTT TTT TT jem j g gee fe eee eee p jae 1 i fe tt r fore TT tt oe er L O Zro riun y E z E g HHH ttt ttt em zam je a Lt 42 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 14 Control panel for rear axle DL FDA and FPTO drives Rear power takeoff control 2 14 1 General information Elements of control panel of rear axle DL FDA and FPTO drives if available against order are introduced in figure 2 14 1 2 TO ee A Eee FE pee PPI OETA ee OPRLA Ta E ECTE THA TPE HE REM EFETIGD LEP Firik EENH TRETTI MTAA ET A E MRA Vin Wi a mie Ea A ee ee Oe Te 11 10 5 b Control panel for DL FDA and FPTO if mounted against order 1 acoustic signal button 2 annunciator of FDA drive activation 3 switch of FDA drive control 4 annunciator of rear axle DL engagement 5 switch of rear axle DL con trol 6 annunciator of engagement of the reduction unit higher pass 7 annunciator of en gagement of the reduction unit lower pass 8 blank cover or annunciator of oil emergency temperature in the tank of the hydraulic lift linkage 9 button to engage front PTO 10 an nunciator of FPTO engagement 11 FP TO control switch Figure 2 14 1 Control panel for rear axle DL FDA and FPTO drives 2 14 2 Indication of the engaged pass of the reduction unit Af
271. f service Make adjustments as indicated in subsection 3 9 3 brakes Service brake adjustment Malfunctioning of leveling valves of Disconnect tube connecting two main brake cylin main brake cylinders ders turn back fittings and dismount leveling valves Replace worn out parts Circulate hydrau lic brake fluid through the hydraulic system Clogging or crumpling of brake Clean or replace pipelines Circulate hydraulic control pipelines in one of the cir brake fluid through the hydraulic system cuits or pipelines of main brake cylinders leveling valves 286 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 8 Possible failures in pneumatic system and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures in pneumatic system and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 8 Table 7 8 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Increase of pressure in balloon is slow Air leakage from pneumatic system by the following reasons undertightened or damaged pipe Detect leakages and correct them by retorque of line fittings nuts and coupling junctions or replacement of damaged parts band damaged rubber gasket of cou Replace damaged gasket pling head coupling head O ring nut torque Draw up the nut got loose dirt entry under coupling head Clean valve contact of dust cover with cou Correct pling head valve plug faulty adjustment of brake valve Adjust brake valve actuator as indicat
272. f the hydraulic clutch with friction disk pack the disks are pressed by the piston 2 under oil pressure The drum and the jaw half clutch 4 of the free wheel mechanism are mounted on splines of the shaft 6 hereby the splined connection allows the drum to turn in respect of the shaft by 45 The half clutch is constantly pressed to the drum jaws by the spring 5 and can displace in axial direction influencing the pusher 12 which in its turn in fluences the ball of FDA drive automatic switch The torsion member 8 connects the shaft 6 with the cardan shaft sliding fork through the splined bushing 7 As the tractor moves forward without skidding the shaft 6 connected with the FDA wheels has a bigger speed than the gear 1 and the drum turns in respect of the shaft The drum 3 jaws move the half clutch on the shaft splines in axial direction compressing the spring 5 Hereby contacts of the FDA drive automatic switch 13 are opened and the electromagnet of the hydraulic valve group 11 is de energized there is no pressure in the friction clutch booster As the rear wheel skidding exceeds the preset value the shaft 6 speed decreases to such extent that the drum 3 turns in an opposite direction and the spring 5 returns the half clutch 4 into its initial position The half clutch displaces the pusher 12 with its tapered 121 2022 5 0000010 OM part the switch 13 closes the electrical circuit of the hydraulic valve group 11 electromag net oil is sup
273. f the implement coupled L2 Figure 5 11 4 Choice of the cardan shaft length 10 If the tractor and the implement coupled are positioned linearly when the cardan shaft is pushed in full check if there is a sufficient clearance L4 Figure 5 11 4 view C be tween tube face and universal joint yoke end butt Minimum permissible clearance L shall make not less than 50 mm 11 After the cardan shaft coupling regularize all the protective devices meanwhile fix the guard shaft housing from rotation with the chains as indicated in Figure 5 11 3 12 Limit the RLL or FLL lifting to the uppermost position along with the implement lifting when needed It is essential for slope angle decrease for exclusion of possibility of contact and damage of the cardan shaft and for providing of safety clearance between the tractor and the implement 13 Maximum permissible slope angles and steering angle Figure 5 11 5 of the cardan shaft hinged joints are shown d E D ni Amax Ma a A Amin Figure 5 11 5 Maximum permissible slope angles and steering angle of the cardan shaft hinged joints Table 5 10 Tractor power take off shaft Maximum permissible slope angles steering angle position Omax in degrees Cardan shaft hinged joints type Universal Equivalent angular rates I Q min On position under load nodoad 50 50 Off position Other variations are possible see the cardan shafts and the implement
274. failure is not detected check the solenoid control cable for mechanical damage and check the wire with the testing apparatus to detect if there is a break between the solenoid socket terminal and the terminal 2 of 25 pole socket of the electronic unit Fig ures 7 12 1 7 12 2 Disconnect the cable from the solenoid and test the solenoid with a testing apparatus to detect a break So lenoid resistance shall not exceed 2 4 Ohm In case the solenoid failure is not detected check the solenoid control cable for mechanical damage and check the wire with the testing apparatus to detect if there is a break between the solenoid socket terminal and the terminal 14 of 25 pole socket of the electronic unit Figures 7 12 1 7 12 2 Disconnect the cable from the solenoid and test the solenoid with a testing apparatus to detect a short cir cuit Solenoid resistance shall not exceed 2 4 Ohm Or measure the solenoid useful current applying the current of 6 V The current shall not exceed 3 2A Dis connect the socket from the electronic unit check the terminals 2 and 14 for a short circuit the solenoids shall be disconnected during this procedure Figures 7 12 1 7 12 2 Check the remote control buttons cables for mechani cal damage by lift of RLL Disable each button for lift one by one until the failure is gone Stop the engine when you disable the buttons If the failure is still not eliminated disconnect the socket from the electronic unit and
275. fety distance shall be It is forbidden to drive the tractor with twinned wheels on public roads Hauling people inside trailers is forbidden Before getting down to work with a trailer turn the compressor on check the condi tion of the trailer brake pneumatic drive and air pressure in the system Remove the fail ures detected Make sure to connect the trailer brake pneumatic drive Carry out connec tion of the trailer connecting head to the tractor connecting head with the parking brake engaged 177 2022 5 0000010 OM Trailers attached to the tractor shall have a braking system ensuring trailer brake on movement brake engagement in case of trailer detachment from the tractor holding the trailer when staying on slopes prevention of trailer from pushing the tractor when the travel speed is changed abruptly The trailer shall be linked to the tractor by means of a safety chain It is required to check operation of the braking system of tractor trailer train at a speed of 3 to 5 km h The travel speed at access ways and at passways shall not exceed 10 km h It is forbidden to drive on reverse to public roads Loading unloading the trailer engage the parking brake of the tractor The tractor which is used with the trailer on public roads shall operate with a road train sign on in accordance with Traffic regulations Driving on public roads turn on a flashing beacon if available Do not stop the tractor on s
276. g and Lowering solenoids If the failure is still displayed eliminate the failure in the RLL hydraulic system 300 2022 5 0000010 OM s jqe WealSAS OJJUOD DIUOIIDEJ9 JY 17172 eunbis Hopauuoa Aah popauuoa Aad S JOSUES a340 Ya ay OL JOSUSE BIO PYG ayy oy m pe Es obs eau ezl Bel sJoJIauUuad J0 y IZE R SS sped padeys aseo UOUMEIp ale i J a p jaued aypa aniJ ay Ul UMOS JOU jm pig jaued ayouias CS AS de WGA a4 OL s1opauuoa uid jo Jagun te Hal 34 OL L Hoppauuo3 y3 jq CA HL AS pe iy E i d ray as 2 PPPE LPL P E p k D Eim SUES WOSOd 71 OL i Et iN p Eee fe rl i i L Fa z aE Se SEs A a j Whe Pa H tales hah ln Se pn ae ae a hl Ep O S y l aA LEL E I oe E UOISSIMSUEI GED Gpe eee ZAU TAAOd sor Agl Ha Cees i tae EnH e el poyauuoa yaejg yog area pajeado pouas UWA 7 asr ol Fart i Hopauuoa ojas ajosuod SABA payevado prouaypos y7 OUD WIL ay al 301 2022 5 0000010 OM T dn jJ0js Jat Ag U JOtUaS pf wosuas 6SUdS 7 LLE i W91SAS JOJ JUOD 77 JO Wesbelp yno 911 79943 7 ZZ aunbi4 era ar Pi Ao a Sus a2 aay Udita VAAL bh mj p es i 7 H H Kir a AE j a i 0 OURA apt dey obau Ayddes saand jo padsas q PASO ag POS tangoa adoppa Jay yO ayy TO d o
277. g to clause 3 3 4 1 inder rod 24 Figure 3 3 4 and hy Adjustment of clutch control draulic amplifier push rod 27 is nil Sticking of main cylinder piston Use of incorrect hydraulic brake fluid or ingress of does not go back in its initial posi mineral oil petroleum kerosene diesel fuel into tion due to piston cup and O ring hydraulic brake Rinse hydraulic drive system with expansion resulting in closure of hydraulic brake fluid Replace damaged cups and compensating port A Figure O ring in the main and operating cylinders Re 3 3 5 place hydraulic brake fluid Circulate hydraulic Blocking of main cylinder piston brake fluid through the hydraulic system due to piston cup expansion Hydraulic cylinder piston strokes Establish and eliminate the reasons for hard are carried out with difficulty movement of hydraulic amplifier piston Hydraulic amplifier piston starting and movement force shall not exceed 120 N inder and lever 34 Figure 3 3 4 cylinder and lever 34 by shifting plate 13 before are out of alignment tightening of bracket 28 bolts main cylinder deaerate the system Figure 3 3 4 Pedal strikes against skirt of Exclude striking by means of bolt 3 Figure 3 3 4 dashboard Ce Full clutch lever 34 stroke can not be achieved Figure 3 3 4 when the clutch pedal is depressed Clearance between main cylinder Adjust clearance space according to clause 3 3 4 1 piston and piston follower is nil
278. ge nonoperability of voltage converter UZ1 of auxiliary accumula tor battery GB2 can show through low frequency of engine cranking by starter while other tractor systems and units are properly operating Other types of failures and troubleshooting methods are possible 307 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 Indicating lamp red led lamp on value indicating scale in on board circuit in in strument cluster P2 does not light up after engine start It indicates failure of charging rate in auxiliary AB GB2 Perform the following ac tions assure oneself of generator G1 operability as indicated in cl 7 14 2 2 assure oneself of ground on the converter housing UZ1 test fuse element FU34 operability with specific power of 20A in the converter housing UZ1 test voltage on terminals Q and B2 UZ1 in reference to the converter housing with the motor running and generator properly operating G1 Voltage shall be from 13 5 to 15 V if voltage is below the specified value restore corresponding circuits Q and B2 from generator to voltage converter measured voltage on terminals of auxiliary AB GB2 in 5 minutes after engine start up the voltage should be within the range from 13 5 to 15 V If it is below the required value check circuit continuity from terminal B2 of the converter to terminal 30 of the starter If the circuit does not operate properly replace the converter UZ1 Note Test charging rate fro
279. ge pressure value in transmis sion hydraulic system 64 Carry out maintenance of engine air cleaner As it becomes dirty 1 Operations shall be carried out if FLL and FPTO were installed on request Operations shall be carried out once during the first maintenance on a shift basis in every 8 10 hours which is carried out by the customer and hereinafter in 125 hours of tractor operation 3 Control and bringing to the internal pressure norm in the tractor tires is car ried out each time when one mode of the tractor operation is changed in another operation mode and when the implements and tools coupled with the tractor are replaced AB inspection and maintenance shall be carried out once per 3 months and not less First and second change is carried out in 500 hours of tractor operation Then the change shall be carried out in every 1000 hours of operation simultaneously with oil change 236 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 Scheduled maintenance servicing operations 6 4 1 Maintenance on a shift basis SBMS in every 8 10 hours of operation or per shift 6 4 1 1 General guidelines Every 8 10 hours of the tractor operation or at the end of a shift whichever comes first perform the following operations 6 4 1 2 Task 1 Check of oil level in the transmission line Check oil level in the transmission line according to oil level gauge 1 Figure 6 4 1 which is located on the right side of transmission line Oil level
280. ged A 1 5 front wheel rim edge 2 4 lock nut 3 adjusting pipe Figure 6 4 22 Front wheels toe in adjustment scheme 251 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 3 8 Task 34 Lubricate clutch release yoke bearing To lubricate clutch release yoke bearing perform the following unscrew plug 1 Figure 6 4 23 of the left side of clutch case 2 insert a tip of grease gun into the hole via lubrication box screwed into body of clutch release for lubrication of clutch re lease bearing perform from 4 to 6 injections of grease specified in section 6 Maintenance service TIL 5 LJ aj a A ESO 1 plug 2 clutch case Figure 6 4 23 Lubrication of clutch release yoke bearing ATTENTION DO NOT INJECT TOO MUCH GREASE AS EXCESSIVE GREASE WILL ACCUMULATE INSIDE THE CLUTCH CASE AND MAY GET INTO FRICTION SURFACE OF DRIVEN DISK FRICTION FACINGS 6 4 3 9 Task 35 Cleaning of rotor wheel of centrifugal oil filter of GB Unscrew nut 1 Figure 6 4 24 and remove cap 2 By screw key 4 and screwdriver 5 remove rotor bowl 3 Remove cover 6 propeller 7 and mesh filter 8 Rinse mesh filter 8 with diesel fuel Remove sediment layer from inner walls of rotor bowl 3 Lubricate rubber O ring with engine oil During assembly match index line and rotor body Tighten nut 1 with torque from 35 to 50 N m 1 nut 2 cap 3 rotor bowl 4 key 5 screwdriver 6 cover 7 propeller 8 mesh filte
281. h a hydrau lic unit PI170 1523 1 introduced in figure 3 16 6 If the tractor is equipped with the hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 the first section spool that can be fixed in positions uplift neutral and floating doesn t have the option of automatic return from the position uplift to the position neutral as the preset pressure is achieved With the hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 installed it is required to return the lever to the neutral position manually after the uplift operation has been carried out Oo OOF HOO T a Ma mk Peles S t N f T oy 1 regulator EHPHC1 OC 2 sections of the valve group PI1 70 8 0 M 3 cover PI170 20 Figure 3 16 6 Hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 3 16 5 Installation and adjustments of position and force sensors of RLL ECS 3 16 5 1 General information A position sensor 8 figure 3 19 1 and force sensors 10 and 11 serve to ensure posi tion draft and combined control of the RLL as specified in subsection 3 19 Rear lift linkage electronic control system 3 16 5 2 Installation and adjustment of the position sensor The BELARUS 2022 5 tractor may be equipped with position sensors of BOSCH company or with position sensors OI1 01 manufactured by Izmeritel plant The position sensor 6 figure 3 16 7 and 3 16 8 be it BOSCH or QI1 01 of Izmer itel plant is screwed into a hole in a cover 4 of
282. h control clearance Insufficient clutch lever stroke 34 Ensure full stroke of clutch lever and hydraulic am Figure 3 3 4 when the clutch plifier piston stroke accordingly when the clutch pedal is fully depressed pedal is fully depressed for not less then size W as indicated in Table 7 1b Possible failures in clutch coupling control and guidelines for trouble shooting Misalignment of release levers Adjust position of release levers according to clause 3 3 2 4 Adjustment of clutch coupling re lease levers Excessive warping of driven disks Check butt beats of driven disk facings against hub spline external diameter shall not exceed 0 8 mm on 165 mm radius If the failure can not be eliminated replace the disks transmission shaft splines ing free movement of disks on transmission shaft port bearing in flywheel 276 2022 5 0000010 OM List of possible failures in clutch coupling control and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 1b Table 7 1b Failure external manifestations cause Clutch lever 34 Figure 3 3 4 does not go back to its initial position when the Troubleshooting clutch pedal is released Clearance between main cylinder Adjust clearance space between main cylinder pis piston and piston follower is nil ton and piston follower according to clause 3 3 4 1 Adjustment of clutch control Clearance between operating cyl Adjust clearance space accordin
283. h the instruc tions of this manual when it is necessary to check and inflate tires during operation do not do it straight after the tractor is stopped time gap is required to let tires cool off control air pressure in tires in cold condition with tire gage which is to be periodi cally tested for precision of indications at stations or centers of service for any mechanical vehicles if air pressure drop is constantly observed in tires be sure to find out the fault and eliminate it check pressure in tires filled with a solution with the valve staying in the extreme upper position when rear twinned wheels are mounted inner pressure shall be provided in accor dance with the instructions of the table 4 3 use of tire sizes not specified in the manual is only possible upon agreement with the plant choosing and buying new tires follow the instructions of this manual Wrong mounting and dismounting of tires results in damage to elements of tire structure In household conditions tires are mounted and dismounted in a specially allo cated area or in a room As a rule tires are mounted dismounted on a special stand but manual mounting dismounting of tires is also possible by means of tire levers and other fixtures Mount tires of the same size model and design on one axis Periodical wheel re arrangement precludes their uneven wear Do not mount wheels with various wear rates on one axis Use of old tubes for new tires
284. he middle range within 4 to 6 mm with force of 39 2 2 0 N applied In case the condition is not observed it is necessary to adjust air conditioner compressor drive belt tension 2 Adjustment of air conditioner compressor drive belt tension Adjustment of air conditioner compressor 3 belt 2 Figure 6 4 16 tension is carried out by turning adjusting lever 1 on rotational axis A and threaded joint clamp B in slot C of plate D Belt bending deflection in response to force of 39 2 2 0 N applied at right angle to the center of belt side must range within 4 to 6 mm 1 adjusting lever 2 belt 3 compressor Figure 6 4 16 Adjustment of air conditioner compressor drive belt tension 247 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 3 Maintenance services in every 250 hours of operation 6 4 3 1 General guidelines Perform the following operations and the operations listed in the subsections 6 4 3 6 4 3 2 Task 28 Maintenance of accumulator batteries Maintenance shall be carried out in every 250 hours of tractor operation but not less than once in three months To carry out AB maintenance perform the following actions open tractor hood clean the battery from dirt and dust check state of terminals 2 Figure 6 4 17 of the output pin connectors placed un der the protecting cover A Figure 6 4 17 and ventilating openings in plugs 1 When necessary grease the terminals with technical petroleum jelly and purge the ventilating
285. he output 1 minus When the rod core of the sensor is shifting in full the voltage at the sensor output shall be measured within the limits from 0 2 to 0 75 of the value of voltage supplied to the sensor 3 Failure break in the cable in the sensor circuit Check the cable according to the diagram Figure 7 12 2 299 2022 5 0000010 OM End of Table 7 12 Error code AEPA N ARIE Failure inspection method problem Failure of the control Check the reliability of the control panel sockets and 2 panel Potentiometer of electronic unit connection and check the cable for 3 the depth control lever is mechanical damage Check the voltage output ac damaged cording to the electrical connections diagram Figure 7 12 2 Failure of the control Check the reliability of the control panel sockets and panel The RLL upper jelectronic unit connection and check the cable for 24 most end position leverjmechanical damage Check the voltage output ac is damaged cording to the electrical connections diagram Figure 7 12 2 Failure of the control Check the reliability of the control panel sockets and panel The RLL operation jelectronic unit connection and check the cable for 2 lever 7 Figure 2 15 1 is mechanical damage Check the voltage output ac damaged cording to the electrical connections diagram Figure 7 12 2 To check if it is failure of the sensor or the cable in sere o A 7 wae circu
286. he pres sure in the pneumatic system drops below 500 kPa 2 0 3 The voltage gauge 5 figure 2 5 1 indicates accumulator batteries voltage with the engine stopped when the key of starter and instruments switch figure 2 2 2 is set in position l With the engine running the voltage gauge indicates voltage on generator terminals A pilot lamp 4 of red color is built in the scale of voltage gauge It is used only with 24V starting system It indicates the process of the additional battery charge with 24V it checks the workability of the voltage converter 28 2022 5 0000010 OM The states of the power supply system depending on the position of the gauge pointer on the scale are given in table 2 1 Table 2 1 The states of the power supply system Zone on the voltage gauge scale 5 figure 2 5 1 color with the engine running with the engine stopped __ 13 0 15 0 V green 10 0 12 0 V the generator is out of or accumulator battery red der discharged normal mode of charge 12 0 13 0 V No AB charge yellow low charging voltage 15 0 16 0 V ne AB recharge white line in the yellow Rated AB electromotive zone force is 12 7 V ATTENTION IF THE VOLTAGE GAUGE INDICATES ABSENSE OF AB CHARGE CHECK THE STATE AND TENSION OF THE GENERATOR DRIVE BELT AB has a normal charge 2 5 4 The scale of the gauge indicating fuel volume in the tank 7 has the divisions 0 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 A signal lamp 6 orange color
287. he rim brackets Then inspect the wheel tightening every eight hours during the run in In the run in process regularly carry out operations in shift time technical mainte nance according to the instructions set forth in section 6 Maintenance services of this manual 4 4 5 Technical maintenance after tractor run in After the tractor run in do the following inspect and wash the tractor listen to the operation of all tractor constituents check tightening of nuts attaching rear wheels to the hub nuts attaching front wheels to FDA gear group flanges and nuts attaching the front wheel disks to the rim brackets tighten two lock nuts M27x1 5 with left and right thread of the steering link tube with a torque of 100 to 140 N m and two crown nuts M20x1 5 of the steering link ball pins To tighten the crown nuts remove the cotter pin first tighten each crown nut with a torque of 100 to 140 N m then turn each crown nut until the nearest notch on the nut coincides with a hole in the ball pin and then fasten with a cotter pin Check and if necessary tighten outer threaded links drain condensate from the pneumatic system receivers drain sediment from fuel tanks and the engine coarse filter check the state of accumulator batteries clean terminal connections and ventila tion holes check and if required adjust free movement of the clutch pedal of the brake pedal and the pneumatic drive drain oil from the transmiss
288. he stop ad justing bolts 5 screwing them in to 20 3 mm Lock the nuts 4 2 Adjust free play of the pedals 8 9 within 4 8 mm To do this proceed as fol lows unsplint and remove the pins 6 and disconnect the forks 3 from the stems of the pedals 8 9 turn the lock nuts 7 off by several revolutions and by screwing the forks 3 in or out shorten or lengthen the hydraulic cylinders 1 2 rods to meet the required free play of the pedals lock the nuts 7 fit the pins 6 and cotter pin them The pedal free play of 4 8 mm corresponds to 0 6 1 38 mm clearance between the piston and the pusher in each main cylinder the pedals should not be in contact with whatever components of the cab The height position of the pedal pads can be adjusted if required with the bolts 5 and by changing the length of the hydraulic cylinder rods providing the pedal free play within 4 8 MM 3 Set the length of working cylinder 8 figure 3 9 4 of the left brake to 205 213 mm if measured from the cylinder end face to the axis of the pin 4 which connects the lever 5 with the fork 3 with the cylinder piston fully drawn in The pin 4 stroke should be in this case within the limits of 10 12 mm when applying force from 350 to 400 N on 60 mm arm to the lever 5 Carry out the adjustment by means of a fork 3 having performed the following op erations disconnect the link 7 of the parking brake actuator from the lever 5 loosen the lock nu
289. heck fill plug 3 wheel hub drive casing 4 FDA beam Figure 6 4 13 Check of oil level and change of oil in at FDA reduction gear casing 6 4 2 11 Task 25 Oiling of holding down clip bearings of FDA To oil FDA holding down clip bearings 2 perform the following clean lubricating box 1 from accumulated dirt and consolidated lubricant squirt lubricating box 1 with lubricant until the lubrication appears from the clear ance spaces between holding down clip and trunnion 1 lubricating box 2 bearings 3 FDA holding down clip Figure 6 4 14 Oiling of holding down clip bearings of FDA 246 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 2 12 Task 26 Lubricate pivot axis bearing of FDA To oil pivot axis bearing 3 perform the following remove the caps 1 Figure 6 4 15 from four lubricating boxes 2 and bearings 3 clean lubricating boxes 2 from accumulated dirt and consolidated lubricant squirt lubricating boxes 2 with lubricant performing from 2 to 4 injections 12 3 ag e MIR e a Bi ee 1 2 1 cap 2 lubricating boxes 3 cardan shaft Figure 6 4 15 Lubricating pivot axis bearing of FDA 6 4 2 13 Task 27 Check adjust air conditioner compressor drive belt tension 1 Check of air conditioner compressor drive belt tension Belt tension 2 Figure 6 4 16 is considered to be normal if bending deflection of its side tensioning pulley compressor pulley measured in t
290. heck na 2 i plug 3 cap 4 FPTO reducing gear Figure 6 4 18 Check of oil level and oil change in FPTO reducing gear 6 4 3 4 Task 30 Oiling of HSC hydraulic cylinders hinged joints To oil HSC hydraulic cylinders hinged joints perform the following clean four lubricating boxes 5 Figure 3 15 3 mounted on hydraulic cylinders hinged joints 3 from an accumulated dirt and consolidated lubricant squirt lubricating boxes 5 with lubricant until the lubricant appears from the holes 6 4 3 5 Task 31 Rinsing of mesh filter of transmission hydraulic system Place of mesh filter of transmission hydraulic system is shown in Figure 3 4 1 To rinse the mesh filter perform the following actions unscrew cap 1 Figure 6 4 19 of the mesh filter and withdraw the filter assembly pulling the bracket 6 disassemble the filter by wrenching the counter nut 7 and the bracket 6 one by one off the stud bolt 9 Remove the washer 8 spring 4 piston 5 O ring 2 filter cartridges 3 and O ring 2 rinse components with diesel fuel until they become clean assemble the filter in reverse sequence paying attention to obligatory installation of O rings 2 on either sides of filter cartridges set ATTENTION SCREW THE BRAKET 6 FIGURE 6 4 19 ON THE STUD BOLT 9 UNTIL THE WASHER 8 FULLY FITS THE PISTON 5 END a ile ALLLLLLLLI 1 cap 2 O ring 3 filter cartridges 4 spring 5 piston 6 bracket 7 count
291. hifted in independent drive posi tion Improper adjustment of valve con Adjust valve control trol Oil pressure loss at valve input or Check pressure at control valve input in case there is no at valve output to PTO friction pressure correct the trouble of transmission hydraulic sys coupling tem In case there is no pressure at valve output to PTO friction coupling replace the control valve Rear PTO shaft does not transmit full torque skidding trol Low oil pressure in transmission Adjust pressure reducing valve of transmission hy draulic system or correct other troubles in the transmission hydraulic system Low oil pressure at valve output to Check pressure of oil running in PTO friction cou PTO friction coupling due to ex pling replace friction coupling O rings if necessary cessive internal leakage Friction coupling operating trouble Rinse friction coupling components in pure diesel due to piston deadlock or wear and fuel replace frictional disks if necessary tear of frictional disks When PTO brake is engaged the end extension is still rotatine Oil pressure loss at valve input or Check pressure at control valve input in case there is at output leading to PTO brake no pressure correct the trouble of transmission hydraulic system In case there is no pressure at valve output to PTO brake replace the control valve Low oil pressure at output leading Check pressure of oil running in P
292. horizontal axis by 180 The yoke TSU 2V is intended for operation with heavy duty two wheel and four wheel trailers and semi trailers It consists of a yoke body 7 and a kingpin 6 The yoke position can be changed up down by way of moving it in the slits of the bracket 1 The yoke is secured by the pin 3 with the key in one of the bracket 1 grooves The draw bar TSU 1M 01 is intended for coupling the tractor with agricultural trailed and semi trailed machines It consists of a bracket 18 located at the bottom of the rear axle body a link 16 and a kingpin 8 with a key 9 The front end of the link is fixed in the bracket 18 with a pin 17 and its middle part rests against a crossbar 12 The link is secured against lat eral movements in the crossbar by means of a brace 11 The link 16 can be adjusted for the dimension of 400 and 500 mm from the PTO end to the trailer attachment place by means of re mounting the pin 17 in the link grooves The Python unit TSU 2R is used for tractor coupling with agricultural semi trailed machines and two wheel trailers The unit 15 is mounted in the bracket 1 guides and is se cured with bolts 14 To attach a trailer it is necessary to take a pin 13 out put the trailer hitch iron on the abutment 10 and mount the pin 13 back it prevents trailer brace from detaching As a tule the Python unit TSU 2R is mounted to the places of draw bar installation Therefore before mounting the TSU 2R it is required to
293. iants scheme of DH 3V Table 5 4 Basic parameters n coupling dimensions of DH 3V Standard size configuration DH 3V yoke 1 Mounting location Rear lifting device 2 Design features Rotational height adjustable 3 Purpose For connection and coupling of trailed implements including of tractor trailers equipped with drawbar clevises 4 DH yoke dimensions mm a connecting pin diameter b yoke position for the implements driven by Lowermost position as it is shown in rear PTO shaft Figure 5 4 2 c distance between PTO shaft end exten sion and connection pin axis 5 Trailing appliance for connection to DH a type Rigid with tractor drawbar clevis b vertical load in hitch point KN not more 50 than c trailing appliance steering angle in hori 60 zontal plane degrees not less than T d protective mean type Safety chain rope e connection point of a protective mean to the tractor Lifting device bores 1 Recommended Implement accessories ATTENTION IT IS FORBIDDEN TO PUT DH 3V YOKE TO A POSITION WHERE ITS BODY OVERHANGS THE DH SUPPORTING BRACKET END FOR MORE THAN 15 MM 195 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 4 4 Drawbar hitch DH 2R Figure 5 4 3 Installation variants scheme of DH 2R Table 5 5 Basic parameters n coupling dimensions of DH 2R Standard size configuration DH 2R python 1 Mounting location Rear lifting device 2 Design features Cantilever fitted connection pin verti call
294. icated in subsec tions 3 9 3 Adjustment of brake controls at forward motion and 3 9 8 Adjustment of brake controls on reverse 6 4 4 4 Task 38 Adjustment of parking brake control Check and adjust if necessary parking brake control as specified in subsection 3 9 5 Adjustment of parking brake actuator 6 4 4 5 Task 39 Check of the pneumatic system line proofness To check the pneumatic system line proofness perform the following adjust pressure in the pneumatic system up to the value of 0 6 to 0 65 MPa ac cording to the air pressure gauge mounted on the gauge board and stop the engine if double line or combined actuator is installed connect a manometer scaled not less than 1 MPa to a coupling head with red cap if single line actuator is installed connect a manometer scaled not less than 1 MPa to a coupling head with black cap check according to the manometer that the air pressure drop does not exceed 0 2 MPa during 30 min Otherwise detect air leakage and correct the trouble 6 4 4 6 Task 40 Adjustment of pneumatic system brake valve actuator Check and adjust if necessary brake valve actuators as specified in subsection 3 10 4 2 Check and adjustment of single line and double line pneumatic system brake valve actuators 253 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 4 7 Task 41 Oiling of the RLL turning shaft bushings To oil the RLL turning shaft bushings perform the following actions clean lubricating boxes
295. ication appears from the holes ak a a i e 1 lubricating box 2 oscillating pin of the FLL front links Figure 6 4 36 Lubrication of RLL turning shaft bushing 6 4 5 10 Task 56 Change of grease in steering joints To change grease in steering joints perform the following actions remove locking wire 3 Figure 6 4 21 unscrew threaded plug 2 clean joints 1 from grease being inside of them fill steering joints with new grease specified in Table 6 4 screw threaded plug 2 to ensure that there is no clearance in steering joint center punch the plug 2 with wire 3 6 4 5 11 Task 57 Check and adjustment of pneumatic pressure regulator Check and adjust if necessary pneumatic pressure regulator as indicated in sub section 3 10 5 Check and adjustment of pneumatic system pressure regulator 202 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 5 12 Task 58 Check retorque of tractor external threaded joints Check and tighten up if necessary the following most important threaded joints 1 engine semi frame 2 semi frame clutch case 3 rear plate clutch case 4 clutch case gearbox casing 5 gearbox casing rear axle body 6 rear axle body semi axle tubes 7 brace brackets of RLL rear semi axle tubes 8 eye ring fastening the RLL lower drawbars 9 front and rear cab mounting supports 10 FDA body central reducing gear 11 pivot axle wheel hub drive 1
296. ifferential The differential is a closed type taper it consists of three bodies 10 11a and 12a figure 3 6 1 joined by the bolts 2 the cross 11 four satellite gears 12 with spherical washers The differential body assembly is installed in the rear axle body 36 on two ta pered roller bearings 14 The rear axle differential is locked by electrohydraulically controlled dog clutch 34 35 installed on the bushings 33 and 39 of the drive pinions 9 and 15 which locks the axle shaft gears of the differential through the shafts 6 19 The tapered roller bearings 14 shall be adjusted with preload Force applied to the driven gear 1 tooth outer face to turn the differential in the bearings shall make 30 to 50 N The adjustment shall be carried out by changing the amount of gaskets the flanges of the cages and 16 3 6 4 Rear axle drive The rear axle drive consists of two pairs of spur gears 9 38 figure 3 6 1 and 15 23 The drive pinions 9 15 are fitted on the splined shafts 6 19 which are mounted on the roller bearings 8 in the cages 7 16 The splined joints of the pinion drive shafts 6 19 con nect the differential side gears with the pinions of the axle shaft drive and disks of the brakes 4 17 The driven gears 23 and 38 are fitted on the splined bushings 33 and 39 mounted on the roller bearings in the rear axle body 36 and the cages 41 and 44 accord ingly Between the flanges of the cages 7 16 and the rear axle body 36 adjusting sh
297. ift linkage in transport position 5230 50 b width on rear wheel axle shaft ends 2400 30 c width on rear twinned wheels on tyres of basic configuration with the preset recommended track 1800 mm 3790 50 d height to the top of cab 3120 30 19 Tyres basic configuration a front wheels 420 70R24 b rear wheels 580 70R42 16 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 1 1 finished Parameter Parameter value for the tractor characteristics title BELARUS 2022 5 20 Electrical equipment as per GOST 3940 a rated supply voltage in on board power system V 12 b rated ignition voltage V 24 21 Hydraulic system a pump displacement under crankshaft rated speed l min 53 b safety valve operation pressure MPa c conventional volume factor not less than 0 75 22 Working equipment a rear power take off shaft rated speed of PTO shaft end exten sion in the following modes rpm stage 540 5409 under 1929 1475 rom of engine crankshaft speed respectively 540 590 770 Il stage 1000 10009 under 1909 1460 rom of engine crankshaft speed respec tively 1000 1100 1460 b front power takeoff shaft rated speed of PTO shaft end extension under 2050 rpm of engine crankshaft rom 1000 1025 c rear lift linkage 1 loading capacity of rear lift linkage on suspension axis kg not less than 6500 2 time for raising rear lift linkage from lowermost position into uppermost position with test load on susp
298. ignal lamp of fuel reserve in the tank lights up in the instrument cluster Correction of troubles in FFVS operation should be performed as follows a Check circuits continuity in cable in transmission starting from twelve contact cylin drical socket to triple circuit junction socket for connection of wires to FFVS BN1 reset cir cuit when necessary Diagram for connection of FFVS to triple circuit junction socket of the cable is shown in Figure 7 14 3 Socket contacts are used for the purposes listed in Table 7 14 Electric circuits of FFVS are considered faultless if in position I of starter and in struments switch SA9 the following conditions are observed on a wire of contact No3 of cable with FFVS junction socket a voltage of 12 V is required a wire of contact N22 of socket should have ground frequency signal on a wire socket contact Ne1 should vary within the range of 500 to 1500 Hz with FFVS and instrument cluster connected depending on the tank filling b If electric circuits are faultless dismount FFVS from the tank Check sediment availability in the tank if there is any sediment drain it as FFVS tubes may get clogged because of excessive sediment layer at the tank bottom Perform visual inspection of FFVS to assure yourself of absence of dirt between sensing tubes Clear FFVS if it is dirty c If after fulfillment of abovementioned actions readings of fuel volume indicator in instruments cluster
299. ility of cardan shaft type length availability and type of protection clutch Consult the seller manufacturer as may be required Require missing data on the implement when required 2 Second step Assemblability check Perform assessment of design retrieval of coupling components of tractors drawbar hitch tree point lift linkages hydraulic electrical junctions pneumatic head PTO shaft end extension with corresponding components of the implement including conformance of track and wheels standard sizes with requirements of the carried out work technology lo cation of PTO shaft PRS and cardan shaft of the machine and ability of mounting of automated control for technological process maintenance and control board installation in the cabine of the implement set Check for availability of the required equipment for the implements coupling at com pleting units of the tractor the required type of drawbar hitch pneumatic heads appliance receptacles the required type of the PTO shaft end extension wheel tires of the standard size required for doubling front or rear LL spacers or wheels doubling mechanism coupling hose availability fast cutoff clutches availability Missing equipment can be purchased additionally After availability check and addi tional installation of necessary operating equipment if it is required compose and prepare MTU taking into account requirements and instructions of the opera
300. ilot lamps unit 14 figure 2 1 1 includes five lamps The allocation scheme is presented in figure 2 6 1 1 pilot lamp to indicate that the air cleaner filter is clogged to the max orange color 2 pilot lamp to indicate emergency oil pressure drop in the system of hydrostatic power steering red color 3 pilot lamp to indicate rear axle differential lock orange color 4 pilot lamp to indicate operation of heating plugs orange color 5 pilot lamp to indicate emergency brake fluid level orange color Figure 2 6 1 Pilot lamps unit The operating principle of the pilot lamps of CLU is the following pilot lamp 1 to indicate that the air filter is clogged to the max figure 2 6 1 lights up when the max permissible level of filter dirtiness is exceeded and the filter requires cleaning pilot lamp 2 to indicate emergency oil pressure drop in the system of hydrostatic power steering lights up when the oil pressure in the system of hydrostatic power steering drops below 0 08 MPa periodic lighting up of the lamp 2 with engine minimal speed is as sumed when revolutions are increased the lamp will go out pilot lamp 3 to indicate rear axle differential lock lights up when activating rear axle differential lock pilot lamp 4 to indicate emergency brake fluid lights up when brake fluid level in the tanks of master brake cylinders is below the permissible level pilot lamp of the heating plugs indicates he
301. ims with a thickness of 0 2 mm and 0 5 mm are mounted changing their amount it is possible to adjust the axial clearance in the roller bearings 14 as well as the backlash of the main drive gears 3 6 5 Final drive The final drive consists of two spur planetary drives located in the tubes 5 25 fig ure 3 5 1 and the splined shafts 43 40 joining the driven gears with the planetary drives The planetary drive consists of a stationary crown wheel 32 fitted on the teeth of the cage 44 the carrier 31 the sun gear 30 four satellite gears 20 rotating on the satellite gear centers 22 on the roller bearings 21 The tapered roller bearings 45 of the semi axles 24 42 are adjusted by matching a set of gaskets 27 with a thickness of 0 2 mm and 0 5 mm mounted between the semi axle end and the washer 26 96 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 6 6 Rear axle final drive adjustment If it is required to replace the parts and assembly units of the final drives carry out the further assembly and adjusting operations in the following order press the inner ring of the outer bearing 10 on the axle shaft 9 figure 3 6 2 hav ing previously heated it in oil until it stops against the bushing 7 press the outer rings of the bearings 10 11 in the tube 6 until they stop against the tube collar mount the axle shaft assembled with the inner ring of the outer bearing into the tube and fit the inner ring of the inner bearing 11 on the axle shaft fit the c
302. in gear according to gagement of main gear according to through tooth contact pattern through tooth contact pattern and side adjust side clearance in engagement of main pair clearance 0 25 0 55 mm Improper adjustment of conical bear Adjust bearing preload ings of main gear Not enough oil in transmission Refill oil up to oil level mark Gear teeth damage Check the condition of gear tooth ring There shall not be any chippage and damage Gears with damaged teeth shall be replaced in pairs aires ee Differential lock does not work Low pressure of oil running in work Check oil pressure In case it is below 900 kPa find space of hydraulic cylinder piston of and correct the trouble in transmission hydraulic system lock up clutch operation Electrical hydraulic distribution valve Check differential lock ECS ease of spool movement for lockout control doesn t operate correct the trouble Hydraulic system pressure loss Hydraulic system pump actuator is off Start the pump 282 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 5 Possible failures in rear power take off shaft and guidelines for trouble shooting List of possible failures of rear power take off shaft and guidelines for troubleshoot ing are shown in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Failure external manifestations cause Troubleshooting Rear PTO shaft end extension does not rotate upon start up PTO mode selection handle is not Check and shift the handle in up position s
303. in on for some time then they go out The heating plug operation time after the engine start up depends on the engine tempera ture at the moment of the heating plug activation see table 3 3 The heating plug operation algorithm has the following emergency modes as the key of starter and instrument switch is turned from position 0 Off into position I Instruments on the heating plug pilot lamp starts to flash continuously with 2 Hz frequency This means that there is a failure in the heating plug operation all heating plugs are closed circuit or their connection is disturbed disconnected from the heating plug control unit the heating plug control unit is not powered or the power supply wire is damaged Herewith in case of short circuit the heating plug control unit cuts power supply 12V to the heating plugs after the engine start up the heating plug pilot lamp 4 starts flashing for one minute with 3 sec of cycle duration and 0 25 sec of flash duration The number of flashes can be different The start up procedure runs in an ordinary way This means that one or mote but not all heating plugs are faulty The number of flashes within one cycle equals to the number of faulty heating plugs If the specified trouble is not eliminated it might be difficult to start the engine at low temperature during the pre start heating before engine start up the pilot lamp 4 flashes with 1 Hz frequency This points at short circ
304. in this case either constantly or periodically Main parameters and specifications of the cab air conditioning and heating system are given in the table 3 7 Table 3 7 Parameter specification description Cooling performance kW 6 4 Heating performance KW Operating voltage V Electrical power consumption W Mechanical power consuption kW 1 4 8 0 R134a ozone friendly At irregular operation it is recommended to switch on the system in the cooling mode when the outside temperature is above 15 C for 15 20 min once in fifteen days for keeping the air conditioning system in operating condition Irrespective of operating conditions it is necessary to check the air conditioning sys tem operation once a year at a service station using special equipment When putting the tractor for short time storage no preparatory works are needed for the conditioning system During the short term storage it is necessary to switch on the conditioner for 15 20 min once in fifteen days with the engine running Hereby air tem perature in the tractor cab should be below 20 C When putting the tractor for a long time storage it is necessary to check the air con ditioning system operation using special equipment If it is necessary top up the coolant During storage no service works are to be carried out After long term storage it is necessary to carry out maintenance of the conditioning system in a specialized service station using diag
305. indicates heating plug operation will light up 162 2022 5 0000010 OM after the heating plug pilot lamp goes out start the engine to do this it is required to depress the clutch pedal and turn the key of starter and instruments switch from I posi tion instruments on into position Il engine start hold the key of the starter switch turned until the engine is started but not longer than 15 20 seconds if the engine has not started a repeated start up shall be carried out not earlier than after one minute after the engine is started release the clutch pedal check function of all signal lamps and gauge indications coolant temperature oil pressure in the engine on board circuit voltage etc Let the engine run at low rom until pressure stabilizes within gauge operation range Actually measured parameters and operation states of tractor systems and units are displayed on the integrated indicator on the dashboard on the pilot lamp unit on the control panel of the rear axle DL of FDA drive of FPTO drive if installed on the engine control system panel and on the information screen On RLL control panel the annunciator of testing electronic systems controlling RLL lights up thus indicating the workability and blocking of the RLL control system after the engine is started a LED lamp of green color lights up on the handle of the lever shifting speeds and passes of the reduction unit and on the control p
306. ine control system 6 electronic handle to control fuel feed 3 a heater fuse block 7 as well as a sensor of water presence in fuel 10 installed in the coarse fuel filter a fuse of tractor EECS power supply 11 installed in the battery compart ment and electronic part of the selective catalytic reduction system SCR The electronic unit of engine control 9 is connected with the engine sensor part by means of a harness 11 The system of selective catalytic reduction SCR is located on the right side of the transmission and the engine and includes a tank with urea 2 figure 3 2 2 a catalyst 3 a dosing module 5 which is an atomizer to inject urea a sensor of exhaust gas temperature in front of the catalyst 6 NOx sensor after the catalyst 4 a feeding module 8 urea warm up valve in the tank 7 Also the system includes an ambient temperature sensor 8 figure 3 2 1 mounted behind under the cab The urea tank the feeding module and the dosing module are interconnected by means of urea supply pipes with inbuilt heaters figures 3 2 8 A sensor of area temperature in the tank 2 figure 3 2 3 and a sensor of urea level in the tank 3 are mounted on the urea tank The NOx nitrogen oxides sensor 2 figure 3 2 4 after the catalyst is mounted on the catalyst outlet flange the sensor module 1 is mounted on the bracket 1 behind the cab The heater fuse block 2 figure 3 2 6 is mounted in the cab under the right side console in the location area of the e
307. ine control system board 1 4 Vibration level at operator s working place of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 The vibration level at the operator s seat complies with the Council Directive 78 764 EEC Values of the vibration level are given in the EU type approval for each type of a seat 1 5 Noise level at operator s working place of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 Noise level at the operator s workplace conforms to the Directive 2009 76 EC Ap pendix 2 and does not exceed the value of 86 dB A External noise level conforms to Di rective 2009 63 EC and does not exceed the value of 89 dB A 20 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 6 Tractor marking Metal nameplate is fixed at the rear of the cab on the right side as shown in fig 1 6 1 Additionally the tractor serial number is applied by means of percussion on the right side member and duplicated on the right plate of the front ballast weight O MINSK TRACTOR WORKS os BELARUS lyp EC murmiHr NAHCEH TFAETOPHHhI JARGO kinikan mamis Toim permissible rm gkg Nameplate on tractors sup MADE IN BELARUS plied to the countries not Nameplate on tractors being members of the EU supplied to EU countries Figure 1 6 1 Place of application the tractor nameplate 1 7 Packing The tractor is dispatched to a consumer without packing 21 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS 2 1 Layout of controls and instruments of the tractor Controls and instruments located i
308. ine start W Harness of systems controlling DL 12V of power supply after turning FDA and gearbox reduction unit the starter and instrument switch inte position Instrument powering Harness of RLL control system Wire coloring E red orange F pink H black 4K yellow C grey Figure 2 1 7 5 Fuses of electronic control systems Five cutout fuses figure 2 17 5 protect the following electrical circuits from over loads 1 FDA drive control 7 5 A 2 Rear axle DL control 7 5 A 3 FPTO control 7 5 A 4 RLL control 7 5 A 5 Gearbox reduction unit control 15 A 6 Reserve 7 5 A 55 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 17 3 Fuses of engine electronic control system Location of 60A fuse of EECS power supply is given in figure 2 17 1 Location of a fuse block of SCR system heaters is given in figure 3 2 6 A 30A fuse 5 figure 2 17 6 protects of electrical circuit of urea delivery drain intake and feed module pipes A 30A fuse 2 protects of electrical circuit of urea delivery drain intake and feed module pipes Fuses 3 and 4 are reserve currently not used 2 3 4 5 1 heater fuse block 2 fuse for of electrical circuit of urea and feed module pipes 3 4 reserve fuse 5 fuse for of electrical circuit of urea and feed module pipes Figure 2 17 6 Fuses of SCR system heaters 56 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 18 Swit
309. ing liquid which shall be 50 60 mm lower than top edge of filler neck Refill the coolant through the expansion chamber up to the required level when necessary WARNING ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM WORKS UNDER PRESSURE WHICH IS MAINTAINED BY A VALVE LOCATED IN EXPANSION CHAMBER PLUG IT IS DAN GEROUS TO REMOVE THE PLUG WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT LET THE ENGINE COOL DOWN COVER THE PLUG WITH DENSE TEXTURE AND TURN IT SLOWLY TO REDUCE PRESSURE IN A SMOOTH MANNER BEFORE REMOVING THE PLUG AVOID BURNS BY HOT FLUID 6 4 1 7 Task 6 Check of tires state Carry out inspection of outside appearance and conditions of the tires in order to detect faults or objects getting stuck in the tires tacks rocks and etc If necessary clear the tires of the foreign objects In case the tires have defects going up to the tire fabric or cracks going through the whole tire thickness dismount the tire and send it to the special repair workshop for retreading If the tires have defects is beyond repair replace the tire De fective tire shall be sent to recycling 6 4 1 8 Task 7 Check air conditioner hose fixtures Carry out visual inspection of air conditioner hose fixtures Air conditioner hoses shall be properly fixed with coupling bands The hoses shall not be in contact with moving parts of the tractor 6 4 1 9 Task 8 Inspection of hydraulic system components Carry out inspection of the tractor hydraulic system components when the conden sation and downflows ar
310. ing shall be carried out according to GOST 6572 91 With long term outdoor storage electrical equipment components made of rubber polymer and textile materials hydraulic circuit hoses etc are dismounted prepared for storage and sent to warehouse Fastening parts of dismounted tractor components shall 321 2022 5 0000010 OM be mounted back in their places Electrical equipment headlights generator starter ac cumulator batteries are cleaned blown with compressed air terminals are coated with protective grease When preparing a tractor for long term storage carry out internal and outside pres ervation procedures for the engine according to the engine operation manual Lubricate all tractor units according to clause 3 of Table 6 3 of the present operation manual Drain oil and fill fresh oil with the required amount of additives up to the control level on the trans mission body FDA and FPTO reducing gears HLL and HSC oil tank Run the tractor for 10 15 minutes Put accumulator batteries in long term storage after conducting control training cycle in accordance with GOST 9590 76 Projecting joints threaded connections of lift linkage mechanism steering geometry splined surfaces of PTO shaft end extension and of cardan shafts and projecting parts of cylinder rods and shock absorbers front and rear track adjusting mechanism should be preserved Cover carefully fuel tank filling neck diesel breathers openings transmission hyd
311. into a special tank for an exhaust oil insert the drain plug back in its place 4 and fill the system with a new oil up to the top mark according to the oil dipstick graduation line 1 insert the oil filler plug 2 1 oil dipstick 2 plug 3 HSC tank 4 drain plug Figure 6 4 34 Change of oil in HSC tank WARNING BE CAREFUL IN ORDER TO AVOID CONTACT WITH HOT OIL 6 4 5 4 Task 50 Change of oil in transmission line Note Change of oil in transmission line is carried out during seasonal maintenance service but not less than in 1000 hours of tractor operation Before changing oil warm up the transmission line up to the normal operating tem perature by means of driving the tractor To change the oil in the transmission line perform the following actions place the tractor on level horizontal ground engage the parking brake and lock the wheels against movement fore and aft by anti recoil limit stops excluding tractor self movement The engine must be stopped remove cover 3 of filler neck located on the right side of clutch case unscrew drain plugs of transmission 1 Figure 6 4 35 and drain plugs of semi axle tubes 2 drain oil from gear box casing rear axle and final drive tubes casings insert the drain plugs 1 and 2 back in their place fill the system with a new oil to the required mark Il according to the oil level gauge and place cover 3 back in its place warm up the transmis
312. ion Then clean the rotor of the gearbox centrifugal oil filter and the gearbox net filter Fill the transmission with new oil replace oil in the housing of the front PTO reduction unit if available replace oil in the housings of the wheel gear groups and in the FDA housing check lubrication in all assembly units according to clause 3 of table 6 4 Where required lubricate or replace the lubricant check and if necessary restore hermiticity of the air cleaner and inlet line control engine running steering brakes operation controls lighting and warning systems 182 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 5 Actions in extreme conditions 4 5 1 To stop the tractor immediately sharply depress clutch and brake pedals 4 5 2 For emergency stop of the engine turn the key of the starter and instrument switch from I position to 0 position according to the diagram provided in figure 2 2 2 4 5 3 In case of an accident immediately stop the engine brake the tractor deacti vate accumulator batteries and get off the tractor through one of emergency exits having opened left or right cab door depending on the tractor position or rear screen or one of lateral screens To open the lateral screens it is required to move the screen opening han dle to an operating condition operating condition screen opened then press this handle in the direction which is contrary to the tractor forward motion until the guide pin fully comes out from
313. ion of tem of RLL and guidelines for troubleshooting RLL ECS 7 13 3 Section EHR 23LS lowering valve disassembly procedure 1 counter nut 2 worm 3 worm gear wheel 4 washer 5 spring 6 lock nut 7 lowering valve assembled 8 solenoid 9 screw 10 section housing 11 cap 12 coil 13 solenoid 14 lift spool 15 spring Figure 7 13 1 Regulatory section EHR 23LS 305 2022 5 0000010 OM Lowering valve EHR 23LS disassembly is carried out according to the procedure stated below 1 Unscrew four screws 9 pucyHoK 7 13 1 by hexagon wrench 3 mm removing the coil 12 before by unscrewing the cap 11 withdraw the upper solenoid 8 from the section housingc 10 2 Measure the dimension A with accuracy of not less than 0 1 mm 3 Unscrew the counter nut 1 of the warm 2 locking screw the warm out hexagon wrenches with 6mm head 4 Screw the worm gear wheel 3 in up to the stop ensuring the reduction of spring pressing up force 5 by a hexagon wrench with 16mm head 5 Remove the lock ring 16 and the washer 4 from the valve spindle 7 6 Withdraw the spring from the valve 5 7 Screw out the worm gear wheel 3 from the section housing by hexagon wrench with 17 mm head 8 Screw out the lock nut 6 of the lowering valve assembled from the section hous ing 10 hexagon wrench with 17 mm head 9 Withdraw the lowering valve assembled 7 from the section housing 10 1
314. ion in front tires of tractor kg ATTENTION COUPLING OF THE IMPLEMENTS TO THE TRACTOR SHALL NOT RESULT IN EXCESS OF PERMISSIBLE AXIS LOADING AND LOADS ON THE TRAC TOR TIRES ATTENTION MINIMUM WEIGHT OF THE IMPLEMENTS COUPLED AND BAL LAST WEIGHTS USED SHALL ALWAYS MAKE NOT LESS THAN VALUES AT WHICH LOAD ON THE FRONT TRACTOR WHEELS IN STRUCTURE OF MTU SHOULD AL WAYS MAKE NOT LESS THAN 20 OF THE TRACTOR OPERATING WEIGHT AND THE CONTROLABILITY CRETERION SHOULD MAKE NOT LESS THAN 0 2 224 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 15 Choice and installation of front loader 5 15 1 General information When choosing buying and mounting of mounted front loaders hereinafter referred to as loaders pay attention to conditions specified in the present tractor operation manual and in Table 5 14 Table 5 14 Description characteristics Description characteristics Standard size of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 420 70R24 front 580 70R42 rear i e tires wheel tires to which installation of loader is of basic configuration or imported tires of the possible same type Tractor wheel tire pressure Internal tire pressure of rear wheels set as pres sure for 30km h speed Tractor wheel track m not less for front wheels Not less than 1890 20 Rear wheels track is set at maximum permissi for front wheels ble width Tractor axle weight limit with regard to trac tor and loader weights KN not more than for front axle 50 85 Lo
315. ion of exhaust gases under Tier llIB stage the system of selective catalytic reduction SCR is additionally installed in the ex haust system The coupling clutch is frictional dry two disk spring loaded The CC overlays are ceramic metal The coupling control drive is hydrostatic with a hydraulic booster The gearbox is 24F 12R mechanical fixed ratio with constant mesh gears Shift ing of 6 gears within each of four ranges of front motion and two ranges of reverse is exe cuted by means of synchro mesh units switching between ranges is executed by toothed clutches and synchro mesh units The rear axle with the main drive as a pair of bevel gears with circular teeth with final drives as a pair of cylindrical gears with hub drives of a planetary type with a differential with a mechanical lock with electrohydraulic control 18 2022 5 0000010 OM Brakes Working brakes are multidisk oil lubricated located on shafts of the driving gears of the final drives Working brakes control is interlocked with a pneumatic drive of trailer brakes The working brakes control drive is hydrostatic The parking brake is brought into coincidence with the working brakes it has an in dependent manual mechanical control The control is interlocked with the pneumatic drive of trailer brakes The trailer brakes control drive is either single wire pneumatic or double wire pneumatic or combined pneumatic interlocked with tractor bra
316. ioned at the bottom 218 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 12 7 Order of full water or water solution drain from the wheels tires For full liquid drain dismount the wheel from the tractor and perform the following deflate the tire and drain the liquid unbend both tire beads from rim seats into its cave from the side opposite to vent positioning insert two installation shoulder blades between a tire bead and a rim from the side of the vent at approx 100 mm to be from it pull over through a rim edge a part of the rim bead at first and than the bead in full withdraw the vent from the opening of the rim in a way ensuring the tube is undam aged and the vent is not torn off remove the tube from the tire drain the water from the tire twirling it with hands then perform the tire mounting on the wheel rim in compliance with assembly rules and with the required safety measures remove the cap and pump up a tire with air to achieve to normal pressure accord ing to the provisions of subsection 4 2 8 Choice of the tires optimal internal pressure ac cording to the operating conditions load on the tractor axles and instructions for tire use put the vent cap on and fix the wheel on the tractor 5 12 8 Selection of the tires internal pressure Internal air pressure in the tractor wheels tires depends on their design number of cord plies permissible vertical load on a wheel and permissible driving speed according to the
317. ir ee a lt eit ag Ped Cp fl BaP at 2 xs8 7 SAB l R FUT FU20 KBI as Ss 2 a A 5A 30A pN Ee T HL38 Q 1 eee 2 1 RT HUA Vor BAY dap SO E T ieee ET T H Lpo i i 41 0 i a ll HH x rg M Pa Ta J i oe tea H e T Lax ke a mel E a th xs toyegeae at 49 Hie g FUR F022 x6 i SRORRRES RF AM 92 3 TH KA P R30 HL30 VD30 5A f eLA F gt p a ira SS eee FUN i E FU24 H 2 505 0 aa a itp DD a 1 He see E Jew e gt s o K4 ee ee it Ltt P TSA O OA ee a E g ie Haia HH ___ ER EEDEN E mE Na aem E ge A 205 4 gt gt 200 4 T5 Fu23 KWA FU26 EEE Se ee E E ECO e a a E HAT oy EB o eee T ee D a E A A 1 E Eo re e ae TI we J Tm om fe A Ss CS Sete Gey il a Se eal aa 95 n 9 Jeni esl eS a NED N D O D NO REY TT E A H egg SP2 2 8 3 PERERA D FUB FU28 Pia s eS D T E E E E E E re 2 al io tell aE Tt ote 88 en a E EA R L ais e E oe a ee T T ii eA a E D SES lt 7 a a I NNN NE N N BK1 XS2 5 es A PR A a a E G ee 0 r o aay COCO S CT ae a ELI XP9 1 XS9 1 22 266 0 eee oe ES a TY WB SS CT dU SB5 XS3 1 o 1 XP DR E E E ey ST A E E A E E 592 3 lt M8 128 fu Duat tT 4 a i 8 SI fe EE E a E ss 2 ae 4e 4 1e 4 10 4 Q 16 K 8 12B as o FAU A E ee 93 rs FT soi EL2 71a 3X if M6 PE 3 GND Jao l Z9 ee oly A ae 2 z 8 RRS S3 2gS SS 7 x509_ san Zz a 78 40 78 40 CT nay R eee trl T Ei is CEO PA RE a f 0 40 a r 15 Ky 26 3
318. ires depending on work ing conditions and tractor axes loading and also methods of track adjustment and of wheel doubling are described in subsection 4 2 Tractor use 126 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 15 Hydrostatic steering control 3 15 1 General information The hydrostatic steering control HSC is intended for turning guide wheels for steering effort decrease as the tractor turns The HSC consists of a dosing pump 2 figure 3 15 1 two differential hydraulic cylinders 1 making a turn a feed pump 3 driven by the engine an oil tank 5 and hydraulic fittings The HSC hydraulic circuit diagram is shown in figure 3 15 1 b a kS MFE eT a 7 pe 1 if a ae pt E i nae A LEY N a mo 1 hydraulic cylinders 2 dosing pump 3 feed pump 4 filter 5 oil tank 6 valve P charging T drain L left turn R right turn Figure 3 15 1 HSC hydraulic circuit diagram 127 2022 5 0000010 OM The oil tank 5 with a 25 micron coarse filter 4 serve as an oil reservoir The valve 6 is installed in the system it ensures operation of the HSC emergency oil pressure sensor The dosing pump 2 is mounted on the steering column the hydraulic cylinders of the turn 1 are mounted on the front driving axle of the tractor the feed pump 3 is mounted on the engine The dosing pump 2 is linked with cavities of the hydraulic cylinders of the turn with the feed pump and the oil tank 5 by means of oil
319. is not recommended comply with a permitted axial load to reach max pulling force in particular opera tional conditions during tillage and also to reach least soil compaction when making a track it is obligatory to provide equal distances for counter wheels with relation to a vertical plane crossing the center of the tractor Mounting wheels re member of a correct direction of tire rotation and of a safe distance between the wheel and other elements of tractor design do not use twin tires to increase lifting power twin tires are used to improve grip ping parameters of the tractor when operating with heavy agricultural implements on soils having low bearing capacity do not operate the tractor with long wheel skidding and overload on the wheels with heavy implements having weight exceeding the values permitted for the tractor or with soil processing implements having resistance which is too much for the tractor in the given soil conditions avoid abrupt taking off hard braking sharp turns long wheel skidding as the trac tor gets trapped IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR AND TO PUT IT FOR LONG TERM PARKING WITH TIRES DAMAGED OR DEFLATED 171 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 8 3 Permissible combination of front and rear wheels ATTENTION A CORRECTLY CHOSEN COMBINATION OF FRONT AND REAR TIRES IS TO BE USED ON BELARUS 2022 5 THE CORRECT COMBINATION OF FRONT AND REAR TIRES WILL ENSURE MAX OPERATION PERFORMANCES OF THE
320. is provided The additional wheels are mounted one by one in the following way set a permissible track for the main rear wheels as specified in subsection 4 2 9 Rear wheel track formation put stops under the front and the rear wheels jack up the tractor rear part unscrew the nuts fastening the right and the left rear wheels to the hub and put them aside put washers 2 included into the spacer kit on bolts 1 figure 4 2 4 secure the inner wheel with special bolts 3 included into the spacer kit with a torque of 700 to 750 N m mount an additional outer wheel on the spacer and tighten nuts 5 which were previously used to fasten the main wheel with a torque of 700 to 750 N m mount the other supplementary wheel by analogy i A r JE Le ae ta fj whe 1 hub bolt 2 washer 3 special bolt 4 nut 5 wheel nut Figure 4 2 4 Diagram of rear wheel twinning Dimensions for recommended track of the rear twinned wheels are given in table 4 6 Table 4 6 Dimensions for recommended track of the rear twinned wheels Size of tires in a set 580 70R42 spacer 2522 3109030 580 70R42 1800 3214 11 2R42 spacer 2022 3109030 7 11 2R42 1 Referential dimensions The spacer 2022 3109030 is used only in a set with tires 11 2R42 for inter row width of 540 mm Information on choosing optimal inner pressure for tires when operating BELARUS 2022 5
321. ise against the stop Switching between the rear PTO speeds of 540 and 1000 rpm is carried out exclu sively by installing the corresponding PTO shaft end extensions that have respective markings of 540 and 1000 BELARUS 2022 5 tractors do not have a special switch between the speeds of 540 and 1000 rpm of the rear PTO Note The RPTO operation is controlled over the integrated indicator as specified in subsection 2 7 2 Assignment and operation principle of the integrated indicator gauges Note Additional information on the RPTO operation rules is given in subsections 4 2 PTO use and 5 9 Power takeoff shaft ends 46 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 15 Lift linkage controls 2 15 1 General information on rules of rear lift linkage control The RLL is controlled with the control panel 31 figure 2 1 1 and remote buttons 4 and 5 figure 2 15 3 If there are failures in RLL electronic hydraulic control system a di agnostics annunciator 9 figure 2 15 1 displays information on the failure and if neces sary operation of RLL control system is blocked 2 15 2 RLL control panel RLL control panel located on a side console in tractor cab is presented in figure ZNO T 5 A 2 1 handle to adjust speed of lowering 2 handle to select control method 3 handle to adjust height limit of linkage uplifting 4 handle to adjust depth of soil tillage 5 annunciator of linkage uplifting
322. istributor filter bypass valve valve Clogging of full flow mesh filter Rinse full flow mesh filter Clogging of distributor filter Remove cap and rinse distributor filter Oil leakage through pressure relief Replace pressure relief valve valve on pump actuator Shrinkage of distributor filter by Adjust pressure by means of adjusting washers If pass valve spring it is not possible replace the spring Oil pressure loss in transmission hydraulic system transmission hydraulic system system pump actuator tuator Damaged parts of transmission hy Replace damaged parts of transmission hydraulic draulic system pump actuator system pump actuator De Hugh oil pressure in transmission hydraulic system Oil does not corresponds to the Fill in corresponding seasonal oil current season ambient tempera ture Deadlock of distributor filter by Rinse distributor filter bypass valve pass valve Increased noise Insufficient oil level in transmission Check oil level in transmission as indicated in sec tion 6 Maintenance service Refill oil up to the re quired level if necessary other transmission components 290 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 10 Possible failures of FDA and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures of front driving axle and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 10 Table 7 10 Failure Troubleshooting external manifestations cause increased wear and delaminating of front
323. it to the sensor disconnect the sockets from the 1 cable to the sensors left and right and interchange E ae Sreang their positions the socket from the left sensor to the or the sensor short circuit right sensor channel and the socket from the right Failure of the left force Se So to the left sensor channel If after that the er ror code has changed 31 was replaced by 32 or 32 was replaced by 31 that means that the sensor is out of order if the error code is still the same that means that the cable is out of order Easy defects Failure of the control Check the reliability of the control panel sockets and panel Potentiometer of electronic unit connection and check the cable for the RLL speed conitrol mechanical damage Check the voltage output ac lever is damaged cording to the electrical connections diagram Figure 7 12 2 Failure of the control Check the reliability of the control panel sockets and panel Potentiometer of electronic unit connection and check the cable for 3 lever force mode point cording to the electrical connections diagram Figure to point operation mode 7 12 2 sensor 11 Figure 3 19 1 Cable breaking or the sensor short circuit 8 3 32 34 6 tilling modes combination mechanical damage Check the voltage output ac Code is Spontaneous lift of RLL Lift forward reverse spool was blocked abroach after the engine start Disconnect the cable sockets from the Liftin
324. itching on sensor got out of adjustment Pe O O Increased noise generated by main gear Increased clearance in driving gear Check and adjust if necessary conical bearing pre bearing of reducing gear and dif load of central gearbox and differential driving gear ferential as indicated in subsection 3 12 2 Central gearbox Lateral clearance space in main Adjust lateral clearance space in main twin of cen twin of central gearbox got out of tral gearbox adjustment Breaking of differential bearings Disassemble replace failed items 291 2022 5 0000010 OM End of Table 7 10 Failure l l i Troubleshooting external manifestations cause E Oil leakage through wheel hub drive drive flange sealings drive flange bearings nance service drive indicated in section 6 Maintenance service E Oil leakage through central gearbox Worn out or damages flange seal Replace sealing ings of driving gear of main gear E eer Oil leakage from FDA beam Worn out or damages double Replace sealing hinge pivot sealing ATENTION AFTER ANY DISMOUNTING OF STEERING LINK AND ITS SUBSE QUENT INSTALLATION HAVING MADE ALL NECESSARY ADJUSTMENTS TIGHTEN TWO CASTLE NUTS M20X1 5 OF BALL PINS WITH TORQUE FROM 100 TO 140 H M AND FASTEN THEM BY COTTER WITH MATCHING OF NUT SLOT AND OPENING OF BALL PIN TURNING OFF OF THE NUT IT IS NOT ALLOWED AND TWO LOCKING NUTS M27X1 5 WITH THE LEFT AND RIGHT HAND THREAD OF STEERING LINK P
325. iving speed size power take off value and operating weight of the implements coupled ATTENTION WHILE OPERATING TRACTOR IN STRUCTURE OF MTU IT IS RE QUIRED TO STUDY AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS SET FORTH IN THE OPERA TIONAL DOCUMENTATION OF IMPLEMENTS COUPLED WITH A TRACTOR CARE FULLY PERSONNEL NOT HAVING STUDIED DOCUMENTATION AND SAFE MA CHINE OPERATING PROCEDURES AND HAVING NO DOCUMENTS ON SITE IS NOT ALLOWED 184 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION WHEN COUPLING OF MOUNTED SEMIMOUNTED SEMITRAILED AND TRAILED IMPLEMENTS WITH TRACTORS BELARUS 2022 INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATED CONTROL SYSTEMS BEING THE PART OF THE MACHINE KIT FOR TRACING OF OPERATIONS SEQUENCE IN THE CABIN AND ITS CONNECTION TO THE BOARD NETWORK IS ALLOWED IF IT IS PROVIDED FOR IN THE OPERATIONAL DOCEMENTS FOR THE IMPLEMENTS Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 belong to the category of motor vehicles covered by traffic regulations proceedings and other regulatory documents on the operation of off track vehicles Tractor operator is personally liable for abidance by traffic regulations and safe op eration requirements and safety measures and correctness of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 operation set forth in this operation manual Service stuff qualification requirements for tractor BELARUS 2022 5 operation only qualified personnel that is aware of safety arrangement and precautions mat ters having license documents of due form determined by the legislation f
326. kes To do this it is required to remove the upper cover 3 figure 3 8 3 of the PTO reduction unit and to adjust a clearance between the turning shaft 1 and the levers 5 of the bands of the FPTO brake 6 For this reason loosen the nuts 2 turning them clockwise to choose a clearance between the bands and the brake drums do the screws 4 in with a torque of 5 Nm having retained horizontal position of the jaws of the shaft 1 After this release each screw 4 by 1 1 5 revolution and lock with nuts 2 Put the cover 3 back 1 shaft 2 nut 3 cover 4 screw 5 band levers 6 brake 7 protective cap Figure 3 8 3 Band brake adjustment If the FP TO brake band linings have significant wear when the above adjustment is not effective for the band brakes replace the PTO brake bands 103 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 9 Brakes 3 9 1 General information The BELARUS 2022 5 tractor is equipped with disk brakes operating in oil bath 1 friction disk 2 spring 3 gasket 4 cover 5 roller bearing 6 collar 7 shaft 8 ball 9 intermediate disk 10 pressure disk 11 cam 12 pusher 13 spring 14 bolt 15 washer A hole for oil delivery Figure 3 9 1 Service brakes The left and the right service multi disk brakes are installed on the pinion drive shafts of the rear axle drives Each brake consists of the following components six fric
327. kes control The rear power takeoff shaft is continuous four speed with soft start up it has two modes basic and economy The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the shaft end face The supply variant 1 The tractor is equipped with the PTO shaft end extension 3 20 splines as per GOST 3480 The tractor set of spare parts tools and accessories is completed with the PTO shaft end extension 1c 8 splines as per GOST 3480 and the PTO shaft end extension 2 21 splines as per GOST 3480 and ISO500 The supply variant 2 The tractor is equipped with the PTO shaft end extension 2 21 splines as per GOST 3480 and ISO500 The tractor set of spare parts tools and accessories is completed with the PTO shaft end extension 1 6 splines as per ISO500 and the PTO shaft end extension 3 20 splines as per ISO500 The front PTO against order is continuous single speed with a PTO shaft end exten sion of type 2 21 teeth under GOST 3480 The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the shaft end face The transmission hydraulic system provides for the following switching of gearbox reduction unit passes RPTO FPTO and FDA drives differen tial lock filtration of transmission oil pressure feed lubrication of gearbox bearings planetary gear groups of the rear axle FDA support clutch hydraulic booster operation Steering is hydrostatic The feed pump is gear type the direction of rotation is left
328. key SA9 is tined into position I a click should be heard If there is no audible click withdraw the relay K14 and test voltage of 12V on power contact K14 1 30 avail ability of ground on coil terminal K14 2 85 check continuity of circuit from coil contact K14 2 86 of the relay to contact 58 of switch SA9 Correct breaks in case they were detected d If fuse element FU27 relay K14 and its circuits are properly operating check continuity of circuits from fuse element FU27 to indicating lamp and instruments carrier sockets 7 14 9 2 With instruments engaged and the motor not running audible signaling alarm sound buzzer is missing a Check circuit continuity and connection of wires to signaling relay NA3 reset the circuit when necessary b If signaling relay circuits are properly operating replace signaling relay NA3 7 14 9 3 With instruments engaged and the motor not running engine oil pressure emergency indicating lamp in HSC is off Remove carrier sockets from emergency pressure sensor SP2 and connect to trac tor ground for a short period If oil pressure emergency indicating lamp in HSC lights up replace sensor SP2 If oil pressure emergency indicating lamp in HSC does not light up check circuit continuity from control indicator unit HG1 to the sensor SP2 If circuit oper ates properly replace the unit HG1 7 14 9 4 With instruments engaged and the motor not running engine air pressur
329. kward travel 12 7 Tractor travel speed design at crank shaft rated speed km h a for forward motion 1 least creeping 2 highest traveling b for backward motion 1 least 2 highest 8 Tractor weight kg a structural 6680 100 b operating 1220 100 c max operating 10000 11500 d ex works 6830 15 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 1 1 continued Parameter characteristics title Parameter value for the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 9 Distribution of operating weight on ax les kg a on front 2890 b on rear 4330 10 Permitted load on axles KN a on front 50 b on rear 85 11 Max weight of the trailer kg a without brakes b with independent brake c with overrunning brake d equipped with a brake system trailer brakes are interconnected with tractor brakes 12 Clearance mm on tyres of basic con figuration not less than a under the rear axle body b under drawbar hitch bracket 13 Track dimensions on tyres of basic configuration mm a for front wheels 1620 20 1725 20 1790 20 1890 20 1940 20 2040 20 2105 20 2205 20 b for rear wheels 1800 20 to 2010 20 and 2230 20 to 2500 20 14 Least radius of turning circle with braking m 5 3 15 Tractor base mm 2920 20 16 Crossed hindrances a angle of climb without trailer not less 20 than b angle of climb with trailer not less 12 than c max fordable depth m 0 85 18 Overall dimensions mm a length with rear l
330. l 7 the braking fluid is delivered from the main cylinder 11 through the pipeline 17 the angle piece 18 the flexible hose 19 to the operating cylinder 24 moving a rod The rod 25 works on a pusher 26 of the hydraulic booster 27 as a result the hydraulic booster 27 goes off and moves out a piston and a pull bar 29 rotating a lever 34 linked with a clutch shifter through a shaft resulting in engine detachment from the transmission 80 2022 5 0000010 OM a A E aa pegs h S E a m my T r aci AP au ki mone ne r i E perat e a UP Ae je LS ares cel meme malii tf i Loe r a pn PE a 8 m j ror 1 r i oe EL ar cata ae a d L zr i E gt 5 et e AT ee a e 4 Les i eT E _ 7 eek eid ao ee M re ee A a j e i a ai i a it w m 1 a oe yy se 31 29 2 see gn 2 Hi k 2i eM 1 tank 2 30 spring 3 bolt 4 8 21 31 nut 5 32 fork 6 14 33 pin 7 pedal 9 26 pusher 10 piston 11 main cylinder 12 15 hose 13 plate 16 rug 17 pipeline 18 angle piece 19 flexible hose 20 rest 22 protective cap 23 overflow valve 24 operating cylinder 25 rod 27 hydraulic booster 28 bracket 29 pull bar 34 lever Figure 3 3 4 Clutch control Figure 3 3 5 Main cylinder 81 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 3 4 Clutch control adjustment 3 3 4 1 Clutch control adjustment The clutch control is adjusted in
331. lane relative to another Such an adjustment is made by exchange of pins mounted on the fork as set forth in subsection 3 18 3 Crossbeam RLL is controlled by RLL control panel lo cated in the cabin and via the remote buttons on rear wheels panel ensuring positioning of lower links of rear LL at the required height Operator chooses the way to adjust the posi tion of the rear lift linkage in manual mode by turning the lever of adjustment on the control panel of RLL Remote RLL control buttons allow the operator to maintain prompt control of RLL during coupling of assembly unit Electronic system for the rear lift linkage control provides the following performance capabilities for RLL adjustment of lower links lifting and lowering speed limiting of lower links rising height choice of the required way of adjustment of lower links positions adjustment of soil processing depth possibility to work with implements with depth control of operated parts movements depth adjustment is carried out by an implement support wheel Note Rules on RLL control are specified in subsection 2 15 Lift linkage control RLL control system provides for the following ways of adjustment of mounted and semimounted implements and their operated parts 1 For the implements and aggregated units having no support wheels power operated adjustment depth adjustment is carried out according to link resistance of the implement positio
332. lculation and an experiment the total weight of the tractor together with the implement load on tractor axles and maximum permissible load on tires the re quired ballast and technological load weight Tractor weight in structure of MTU imposed on the tractor axis shall not exceed the permitted values In any case the load on the front and rear axis shall not exceed the maximum permitted accumulated lifting power of the tires cor responding to the permitted accumulated lifting power of rear and front wheels 5 Fifth step Test for possibility to driving the tractor coupled with the implement in cluding inspection of steering angle degree and maximum LL lifting hight until the imple ment components abut against the tractor components length sufficiency and the cardan shaft working clearance zones on turn and transfer into the transport position 6 Sixth step Assessment of accordance of tractor energy capacity and the imple ment demand drawbar resistance power consumption including via the PTO shaft It can be assessed by calculation if the reference data is available or according to the test report 7 Seventh step Test for possibility to operate the implement coupled with the trac tor Carry out a pilot coupling for performance of the technological operations according to the implement purpose with indispensable observance of the safety requirements 8 Eighth step Check for road passing ability aslope static stability breaks effi
333. lectronic unit to control the rear lift linkage 3 It is reached though the block of fuses for electronic systems to control tractor units located on the lateral console to the right of the driver The figure 3 2 7 shows connection to the sensor of water presence in the fuel filter The figure 3 2 8 shows connection of the EECS to the feeding module and the figure 3 2 9 shows connection of the EECS to the urea heating valve The control system is powered directly from the accumulator battery through a 60A fuse which is located in the fuse block of the battery compartment The electronic foot pedal for fuel feed and the handle for fuel feed manual control are units to control modes of engine operation according to the speed If two units are op erated simultaneously the pedal is pressed and the handle is shifted the preference is given to the unit with a bigger rate of displacement Information on exhaust gas temperature on the lever and temperature of urea on water presence in the coarse fuel filter is shown on the information display Element of the engine electronic control system are interconnected and powered from the accumulator battery as per connection diagram introduced in the annex A Description of operation of EECS elements included into the engine composition as well as SCR units is given in the Engine operation manual attached to your tractor i 2022 5 0000010 OM walsAs jo14 U09 D1U0J 0E 9 SulBUZ 1 7 anl
334. led implements towing yoke DH 3V for coupling with trailers and trailed implements hydraulic hook DH 2 for coupling with semi trailers and semi trailed machines against order pin DH 2R Pithon for coupling with semi trailers and semi trailed machines against order towing bar DH 1M 01 for coupling with semi trailed and trailed agricultural ma chines cross member DH 1 for coupling with trailed and semi trailed machines against order The cabin is a one seated with a protective rigid framework having thermal noise and vibration insulation with a system of heating air conditioning and ventilation equipped with a sprung seat adjustable for operator s height and weight with rear view mirrors with a sun visor with electrical wipers for front and rear screens with front and rear screen washers with a roof lamp and a place to install a radio set The cab doors have got locks there are keys for the left door Upon request the tractor can be equipped with an additional seat The electrical equipment complies with GOST 3940 The rated power supply volt age for on board network is 12V The rated voltage for the start up is 24V Instruments are a combination of devices these are an integrated indicator infor mational display pilot lamps glow lamps and light emitting diodes located on the block of pilot lamps on the control panel of the rear axle differential lock and FDA drive on the en g
335. lement cardan shaft end yoke from the side of PTO shaft and PRS shall be in the same plane as indicated in Figure 5 11 1 Figure 5 11 1 Cardan shaft mounting scheme 6 Safety clutch as indicated in Figure 5 11 2 shall be installed only from the side of PRS of the drive of the implement coupled other method of mounting will not ensure the excess of timely protection of the tractor PTO shaft from the maximum permissible torque Safety clutch Figure 5 11 2 Safety clutch mounting scheme 7 Mounting of the cardan shaft with guard housing together with PTO shaft and PRS protective devices with retaining chains both from the side of the PTO shaft and of the PRS as indicated in Figure 5 11 3 ensures cardan joint safety 8 When the cardan shaft is used for the first time it is necessary to check the car dan shaft length and to adjust it to the operating conditions with tractors BELARUS 2022 5 when needed For more detailed guidelines on cardan shafts see the technical documentation enclosed Contact the cardan shaft manufacturer when needed 212 2022 5 0000010 OM 9 The length of the cardan shaft maximum driven apart which is permitted for op eration shall be of such type when the one part of the cardan shaft enters another for not less than L2 150 mm If the value is below L2 150 mm Figure 5 8 4 view A the cardan shaft must not be operated Sufficiency of overlapping L2 can be checked by rotation or lifting o
336. lements using the horn make sure the parking brake is off and start moving slowly Use safety harnesses Supplied against order at hauling operations Passenger staying in the cab during tractor operation is strictly forbidden Passen ger may stay in the cab only when an additional seat is installed and hauling operations are carried out Do not leave the tractor on the move Performing hauling operations observe traffic regulations adopted in your country Hauling operations may be carried out by operators with not less than two years of tractor operation experience and those who have passed exams in traffic regulations Drive the tractor on slippery roads with automatic DL engaged only at a speed not higher than 10 km h Using the tractor for hauling operations do the following set a track 1940 20 mm for front and rear wheels check operation of brakes interlock brake pedals check and if necessary adjust the brakes for simultaneity of operation check operation of the parking brake check a condition of devices for light and sound annunciation hauling trailers shall have rigid hitches and be linked with a safety chain or a cable never move downhill with the gear disengaged Move uphill and downhill at the same gear It is forbidden to operate with a trailer without independent brakes if its weight ex ceeds a half of a total actual weight of the tractor The faster you move and the more weight you tow the bigger sa
337. ller values are taken for low duty conditions and the bigger ones for heavy conditions ATTENTION THE IMPLEMENT COUPLED SAFETY CLUTCH RESPONSE TIME SHALL EXCEED THE NOMINAL OPERATING TORQUE ACTING FOR A LONG TIME IN THE IMPLEMENT DRIVE BUT BE ALWAYS EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN THE MAXI MUM PERMISSIBLE PTO SHAFT TORQUE IF THE IMPLEMENT SAFETY CLUTCH RESPONSE TIME EXCEEDS THE PERMISSIBLE PTO SHAFT TORQUE SUCH IM PLEMENT MUST NOT BE COUPLED WITH THE TRACTOR Among safety clutches there are cam clutch frictional clutch disk clutch they can be subdivided to two basic types with destructible and indestructible working compo nents Clutches with a destructible component are used as unlikely overload control de vice ATTENTION IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE CARDAN SHAFTS WITH SAFETY CLUTCHES WITH A DESTRUCTIBLE COMPONENT FOR IMPLEMENTS COU PLING WITH TRACTORS BELARUS 2022 5 In several implements freewheeling clutches are used The freewheeling clutches sprag clutches are automatically closed if the rotating direction is straight and are un closed if the rotating direction is opposite The freewheeling clutches ensure operation of the implements with the increased inertia moment of the implement rotating masses to prevent it from the drive failure when the PTO shaft is switched off There are also combination safety clutches A combination safety clutch is the safety clutch which is structurally combined with a clutch of other type f
338. lopes If there is a necessity to stop the tractor engage the parking brake Working on the slopes increase the tractor track to the max Working on the slopes with an angle of more than 20 set the max rear wheel track Before exiting the cab disengage the front and rear PTOs stop the engine engage the parking brake and remove the key from the starter switch If the engine or the steering are broken down immediately stop the tractor Keep in mind that with the engine stopped it is required to apply much greater force to the steering wheel to operate the tractor In case a failure occurs immediately stop the tractor and eliminate the fault Avoid leakage of electrolyte coolant fuel oil and braking fluid Use summer and winter grades of fuel correctly Fill in the fuel tank at the end of each day to decrease night condensation of moisture Fill the tractor only with grades of oil and lubricants recommended by the manufacturer It is strictly forbidden to use other lubri cants It is forbidden to turn off the system of electrical equipment by means of the battery disconnect switch with the engine running Operate the tractor at night time with lighting devices on and being in good order If put to a wrong use your tractor can be dangerous for you as well as for third per sons Avoid using equipment not intended for installation on the tractor Make sure any additional equipment or auxiliary units are mounted correctly and that they ar
339. low should be measured only with locking devices connected to CAN bus which are engine electronic control module on one side and integrated indicator on the other side each of them equipped with in parallel resistor of 120 Ohm In case of disconnection of any of the devices resistance between the wires CAN_high and CAN _low will make 120 3 Ohm In case both locking devices are dis connected resistance between signal wires will be equal to infinity break e If short circuit is not detected a break of wire and resistance R which is different from 60 3 Ohm nonoperability of instruments can possibly occur For unequivocal identifica tion of instruments operability it is necessary to find properly operating II and instrument clus ter and to ensure proper operation of new instruments 2 Check voltage availability in signal wires CAN_high and CAN _low for which pur pose switch instruments on shift switch SA9 into position I Measure voltage between CAN_high and tractor frame instrument power supply minus by means of multimeter volt age should make from 2 5 to 2 6 V Voltage should make from 2 3 to 2 4 V between CAN_low and tractor frame instrument power supply minus In case of absence of voltage ensure engine electronic control unit circuit continuity 7 14 8 3 On multifunction display of Il a message C BUS is displayed II and instru ment cluster are not displaying engine operational parameters and data displaying moni
340. lugs operation principle are possible The specified failures should be eliminated prior to the beginning of tractor operation 7 14 8 Search and elimination of failures in engine management system 7 14 8 1 General information Electronically controlled engine is installed on tractors BELARUS 2022 5 Connec tion of engine electronic control unit to test instruments Integrated indicator and instru ment cluster is made via special cable CAN cable being a part of wire bundle Note in EECS cables two wires queued can be used instead of CAN cable According to electric circuit diagram of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 electrics shown in Annex D CAN cable violet is composed of two signal wires CAN_high CAN_low and display CAN_GND as indicated in Figure 7 14 2 313 2022 5 0000010 OM Integrated Indicator 10 terminal block 628496 7 5 10 Parameter value Weight CAN Low Tractor turn Trailer turn d ol_ o 2 5 a olzisS CAN High 6 CAN Low to output TX M Parametrization 3 ode Program Console 5 7 Ai r pressure Alarm air press Oil pressure GB Fuel level Reserve of fuel Oil filter GSP AB add Charge indicator CAN Low CAN Shield Lightning Sound buzzer Instrument Console Figure 7 14 1 Connection of test instruments by means of CAN cable being a part of instrument board CAN_ Shield Screen armour K gt A LPO oo eege oer ve P
341. lutions lock with the nut 13 turning the fork 16 in or out bring the holes in the lever 18 and in the fork 16 in coincidence lock with the nut 15 turn the lever 18 clockwise having engaged the higher pass of the gearbox re duction unit protract the cylinder 11 rod bring the holes in the lever 18 and the fork 16 into co incidence join the lever 18 and the fork 16 by means of the pin 17 mount the washer and forelock screwing the bolt 20 in or out stop the spherical part of the bolt against the lever 18 lock with the nut 19 9 2022 5 0000010 OM n i if amp Hib id 19205 wie 8 7 6 1 speed shifting fork 2 range switching fork 3 bracket 4 20 bolt 5 shaft 6 switch 7 hydraulic valve group 8 pressure sensors 9 12 oil pipelines 10 cen ter 11 control cylinder 13 15 19 nut 14 double end bolt 16 fork 17 pin 18 lever Figure 3 4 6 Mechanism of switching between the higher and the lower passes of the re duction unit 3 4 3 5 Gearbox control The gearbox controls are located in the tractor cab the ranges are switched by means of a lever A figure 3 4 7 the speeds of forward and reverse travel are shifted by means of a lever B the lower and the higher passes L H of the reduction unit are turned on by means of buttons on the speed shifting lever B Speed shifting diagram Range shifting diagram Lever B
342. lves for uplift 9 and lowering 7 RLL ECS connecting harnesses with electrical connectors 4 and 6 fuse of RLL ECS 3 located in the fuse block The electronic part of rear lift linkage control operates in the following way After the engine is started the supply voltage comes to the electronic control unit 2 of RLL ECS The electronic control unit inquires sensors system controls and after analysis gives nec essary commands to electromagnets of the regulator The system is controlled either with the control console 1 located in the cabin or with a help of the remote control buttons 5 situated on rear wheel fenders According to the position sensor the electronic control system identifies the position of RLL relative to the tractor and at position control ensures holding the mounting imple ment in a set position relative to the tractor According to the force sensors the RLL electronic control system defines the force applied during operation to lift linkage in horizontal axial direction from the coupled imple ment At draft control the tillage depth is kept in proportion to resistance force of the im plement Therefore for example at tillage in the mode of draft control the RLL ECS raises the implement up in the area with tight soil and puts the implement deeper in the areas with soft soil receiving signals from position and force sensors At combined control the RLL control electronic system takes into account signals from position
343. m brackets shall be from 180 to 240 N o 1 nuts for front wheels mounting on reducing gear flanges of FDA 2 nuts for rear wheels mounting on hubs 3 rear wheels hub bolt 4 nuts for front wheels disks mounting on the rim brackets Figure 6 4 9 Check of threaded joint torqueing of wheels mounting 6 4 2 3 Task 17 Washing of the tractor and cleaning of the cabin inside Wash the tractor and clean the cabin inside 6 4 2 4 Task 18 Check of bolts torqueing of air duct clamps of CAC Check and tighten the clamp bolts 1 Figure 3 1 2 of CAC air ducts if necessary with torque from 10 to 15 N m 6 4 2 5 Task 19 Check of pneumatic pressure in tires Pressure in the front and rear tires is determined from load per single tire driving speed and operations performed If it is necessary bring the pressure up to the required value in compliance with subsection 4 2 8 Selection of optimal internal pressure in tires de pending on the operating conditions and load on the tractor axles and tires operating rules ATTENTION CONTROL AND BRINGING THE TIRES INTERNAL PRESSURE UP TO THE NORMAL VALUE WHEN NEEDED SHALL BE CARRIED OUT EACH TIME THE TRACTOR IS CONVERTED FROM ONE OPERATION TO ANOTHER AND IS REEQUIPPED WITH OTHER IMPLEMENTS ANA INSTRUMENTS COUPLED 243 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 2 6 Task 20 Check adjustment of clutch operating control Check the state of the expansion chamber main forward and reverse line and operati
344. m voltage converter can be executed by means of mul timeter connection in current measurement mode measurement range is up to 10A in stead of fuse element installed on the converter housing Test should be carried out after some period of operation when charging rate is decreased in converter output circuit up to 5A Meanwhile in converter output circuit current of 10A should be displayed depending on AB charging rate GB2 2 Indicating lamp in voltmeter scale in instrument cluster P2 does not light up after engine start when instruments are engaged with motor not running Perform the following a check presence of ground on the converter housing if there is no ground draw a wire from tractor transmission housing b provide ground for terminal K of the converter UZ1 if indicating lamp does not light up check circuit K for continuance within the range from the converter UZ1 to in strument cluster P2 if the circuit is operational check instrument cluster P2 or replace the converter UZ1 3 Main reasons for nonoperability of properly operating converter UZ1 voltage on terminal Q of generator is below 5 5 V voltage of on board circuit is below 12 4 V voltage of on board circuit exceeds 15 6 V overheating VC at temperature exceeding 110 C load current at terminal 52 28 VY is below 15 mA bad contact in charging cir cuit terminal corrosion of converter fuse block installation
345. maged sealing disks under Replace sealing disks dosing pump cover bolt heads ee ee ee ee Different minimum minimal radius of tractor turning to the left and to the right Faulty toe in Adjust toe in ees SEES Ee 2 ee ea SE EEE eee Partial steering angle of steerable wheels Insufficient pressure in HSC hy draulic system due to the follow ing reasons faulty adjustment of dosing Contact the dealer Adjust pressure relief valve for pump pressure relief valve low the required pressure Operation is performed only pressure by maintenance department Faulty feed pump Contact the dealer Increased FDA reducing gear Make repair of FDA steering torque 295 2022 5 0000010 OM End of Table 7 11 Failure i l Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Breakdown of feed pump High pressure in HSC hydraulic system due to the following rea sons Incorrect high pressure hose Connection should be carried out in strict corre connection spondence to operation manual locking of back pressure valve or dosing pump pressure relief valve perhaps due to dirt accu mulation Contact the dealer Rinse of dosing pump compo nents is required Assembly and check of operabil ity should be is performed only by maintenance de pane in accordance with manufacturer s instruc tion Considering baffling complexity and responsibility of dosing pump from the point of view of steering system safety its assembly a
346. manufacturer instructions In case the operating conditions have been changed adjust the tire pressure Maintenance of the adequate internal pressure in the tires effects significantly drawbar features passing ability and tire life Internal tire pressure reduction promotes ex tension of contact area on the tire with ground reduction of the tractor ground pressure and improvement of drawbar features Therefore when the tractor is operated on mellow soils with low supporting capacity it is recommended to reduce tire pressure up to the minimum value permissible for such load Noncompliance with pressure norm reduces significantly tires life Use of tires standard sizes unspecified by the manufacturer operation of the chassis with overload caused by excess of the tires and tractor axles maximum bearing capacity at given pressure and speed can result in failure and damage not only to the chassis a tire car cass break etc but also to other tractor units or can cause an accident and the overall trac tor operating life reduction Check the tires pressure and an adjust it if necessary with regard to specific load and selected driving speed loads and speeds Permissible loads on the tractors tires and internal air pressure values correspond ing to them depending on the driving speed are specified in 4 2 8 Choice of the tires opti mal internal pressure according to the operating conditions load on the tractor axles and instructions for ti
347. mbient temperature 3 harness of engine control sys tem 4 elements of HLL valve group section control Figure 3 2 5 Installation of sensor of ambient temperature i 1 harness of engine control system 2 fuse block 3 electronic unit of RLL con trol Figure 3 2 6 Installation of SCR heater fuse block 76 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 harness of engine control system 2 coarse fuel filter 3 sensor of water presence in fuel filter Figure 3 2 7 Installation of sensor of water presence in fuel filter 2 3 4 5 i f i rr pas D a f r L j l ly yaaa gt ann 1 SCR system harness 2 pipe for urea intake 3 pipe for urea drain 4 pipe for urea delivery 5 feeding module o MEAN Figure 3 2 8 Connection of the EECS to the feeding module and pipe heaters l 2 3 1 valve of urea heating in the tank 2 SCR system harness 3 coupling clutch body Figure 3 2 9 Connection of the EECS to the valve of urea heating in the tank T1 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 3 Coupling 3 3 1 Coupling clutch A dry friction double disk spring loaded coupling clutch is mounted on the engine flywheel 1 figure 3 3 1 The clutch driving part is a flywheel 1 a pressure plate 3 and a center plate 2 hav ing three tenons on outer surfaces which intrude into special mortises of the flywheel 1 The clutch driven part consists of two driven plates 24 with torqu
348. means of plug wire for a short period If oil pressure gauge pointer in cluster is pointing at O circuit is faultless replace sensor BP2 If oil pressure gauge pointer is still goes off the scale find and correct circuit brake along section from oil pressure gauge pointer to sensor BP2 If circuit operates properly replace instrument cluster P2 7 14 9 7 No data is displayed on tractor speedometer and error message 0 km h or 0 km h on multifunction display of II a Check circuits continuity from speed sensors BV1 BV3 to integrated indicator P1 reset circuits when necessary b If circuits are properly operating replace corresponding sensor depending on er ror message if 0 km h replace left speed sensor if 0 km h replace right speed sensor Guidelines for sensors installation are specified in subsection 3 22 4 Installation and adjustment of speed sensors and rear PTO rpm sensor Note In case if wrong speed data are displayed and absence of error messages on multifunction display of Il it is necessary to check the set speed programming parameter values in Il Correct parameter value for tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are shown in subsec tion 3 22 3 Order of integrated indicator programming In case of mismatch set parame ters listed in Table 3 4 7 14 9 8 With rear PTO shaft operating no rear PTO shaft rom indicator readings are displayed and no rpm digital data
349. ment and also when turning the tractor make sure there is no danger of catching somebody or stumbling on the hurdle The mounted and semi mounted machine is to be lowered into its operating position and up lifted into the hauling position only with a straight line motion of the assembly unit To avoid breakdown of the tractor or the agricultural implement drive and turn the tractor assembly with the agricultural implement uplifted only after you make sure the front and rear PTOs are disengaged Linking and hinging the agricultural machines and implements on the tractor the rear operator shall stay at a safety distance until the operation is fully stopped The linkage hinge shall be started only after the tractor operator gives a command Engaging the rear PTO move the control rod smoothly from off position to on po sition in order to avoid breakdown of the drive shaft gears of the gear group and the rear PTO end extension Linking the machine cardan shaft to the RPTO disengage the RPTO stop the trac tor by means of the parking brake and stop the engine After disconnecting the machines driven by the rear or the front RPTO remove car dan drives and cover the PTO end extensions with protective caps Cardan shafts transferring torque from the front and rear PTOs of the tractor to the implement working units shall be safeguarded Operating with stationary machines driven by the front and rear PTOs always en gage the parking b
350. ment and insufficient light of a working area lift people by means of loader lift and move loads if there are people in dangerous zone danger line is near the moving members and working attachments of loader is within 5 m unless other exclusive requirements are specified in specification or manufacturer s instruction carry out tractor maintenance with loader arm raised make loading and unloading operations under electric power lines carry loader bucket over a car cabin 22 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION TO IMPROVE LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND RELIEF OF LOAD ON FRONT AXLE TRACTOR COUPLED WITH LOADER CAN BE EQUIPPED WITH REAR LINKAGE MOUNTED BALANCE WEIGHTS OPERATION OF LOADER ON THE SLOPE MORE THAN 8 GRADES IS FORBID DEN Tractor service brake control pedal should be blocked during loader operation Avoid abrupt start braking sharp turns and longterm frictional slip of tires at tractor operation with loader When tractor with loader travels along the public roads traffic regulations should be observed Traveling speed of tractor with loader must not exceed 25 km h Operation speed of tractor with loader must not exceed 10 km h Before starting traveling along the public roads raise loader in transport position and fix it properly It may be a problem of spontaneous lowering of loader In this respect loader should be shifted in lowermost position and loader hydraulic control mechanism levers should be fixed in
351. missible tempera ture 2 14 7 Rear PTO control The handle to engage the rear PTO drive 22 figure 2 1 1 has two positions upper position PTO drive engaged lower position PTO drive disengaged The rear PTO control lever has two positions shifting the lever 2 figure 2 14 2 from the rear extreme position to the front ex treme position engages the rear PTO shifting the lever from the front extreme position to the rear extreme position dis engages the rear PTO Note The PTO control lever 2 in figure 2 14 2 is set into position PTO disen gaged 1 instruction shield for rear PTO control 2 rear PTO control lever Figure 2 14 2 Rear PTO control lever The shaft for switching modes of the rear PTO drive 38 figure 3 3 6 is located to the left on the coupling clutch body under the HLL pump The rear PTO drive has two operation modes standard 540 and 1000 rpm economy 7 0 and 1460 rpm under engine rated speed Switching between the modes of the rear PTO standard and economy shall be carried out only with the engine killed or with the engine min speed To do this it is re quired to loosen a fixing bolt 39 figure 3 3 6 and turn the shaft 38 until engaged into the clutch after that tighten the fixing bolt To engage the standard mode it is necessary to turn the shaft contraclockwise against the stop to engage the economy mode it is required to turn the shaft clockw
352. mits max pressure in the charging line within the limits of 14 0 14 5 MPa The anti shock valves 7 limit pressure in the cylinder lines under impact load Pressure of anti shock valves is to be adjusted within 20 and 22 MPa The air inlet valves 8 provide for the necessary delivery of the working liquid to the hydraulic cylinder at emergency operation and as the anti shock valves go off 128 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 15 3 Steering hydraulic cylinder The tractor is equipped with FDA with two hydraulic cylinders 3 figure 3 15 3 and a steering tie rod 4 mounted behind the FDA Cylinder rods are connected with pivoted levers 2 of the wheel drives through cone pins 1 and the hydraulic cylinder bodies are connected with a cylinder bracket 6 which is mounted on the FDA casing Spherical joints 4 that require periodical lubrication through grease cups 5 are installed in the eyes of the hydraulic cylinder bodies and in the rod heads 1 cone pin 2 lever of wheel drive 3 hydraulic cylinder 4 sperical joint 5 grease cup 6 cylinder bracket Figure 3 15 3 FDA with two hydraulic cylinders in the steering linkage and a steer ing tie rod The steering hydraulic cylinder consists of body 3 figure3 15 4 a rod 4 a piston 1 a cover 6 and a cap nut 8 The piston is fixed on the rod with a nut 15 which is locked by punching of the land in rod 4 slots In eyes of the body and the rods spherical bearings 7 that
353. mplete set without dismounting parts and assembly units Tires storage is regulated by provisions of subsection 8 1 General instructions Disconnect the accumulator batteries Electrolyte level and density should comply with recommendations for storage and maintenance of accumulator batteries listed in clause 6 4 3 2 of subsection 6 4 3 Maintenance services in every 250 hours of operation If tractor is stored at low temperatures or over one month accumulator batteries must be dismounted and sent to warehouse 8 4 Requirements for outdoors long term storage Before putting a tractor in the storage check its technical condition Carry out basic maintenance services Technological maintenance when preparing tractor for long term storage includes cleaning and washing dismounting and preparing for storage tractor components subject to storage in specially equipped warehouses sealing of openings and cavities from ingress of moisture and dust tractor and its components preservation putting tractor on supporting blocks plates After operation the tractor must be cleaned off dust mud oil leaks vegetation and other remains Components where water is not allowed generators relays etc are pro tected with protecting cover After tractor is cleaned and washed it must be blown off with compressed air to remove moisture Damaged painting is restored by putting varnish and paint coating or protective grease Paint
354. n control relay The systems allows switching reduction passes only with the lever 3 in neutral posi tion contact of the sensor 5 of GB neutral position are closed ATTENTION SWITCH BETWEEN THE GB REDUCTION PASSES ONLY WITH THE TRACTOR STOPPED Signals to the annunciators 13 12 and 15 14 come from the respective pressure sensors 8 and 7 After the engine start up the lower reduction pass turns on Hereby the annunciators 13 and 15 must stay on The higher reduction pass shall be switched by pressing the button 11 Hereby the annunciators 13 and 15 must go out and the annunciators 12 and 14 must light up Switching from the higher reduction pass to the lower one is performed by pressing the button 10 The engine can be started only when the GB range shifting lever 1 figure 2 13 1 is set into neutral position The electrical circuit diagram of the reduction unit electro hydraulic control is intro duced in Annex B ae a Figure 3 5 1 Allocation of components of reduction unit electro hydraulic control on the gearbox 93 2022 5 0000010 OM To figure 3 5 1 Allocation of components of reduction unit electro hydraulic control on the gearbox 1 sensor of the lower reduction pass engaged condition 2 sensor of the lower reduction pass disengaged condition 3 reduction pass switching valve group 4 gear box neutral position sensor 5 sensor of range reduction neutral position engine start up
355. n 6 Mainte draulic cylinders have not been nance service tightened Clearance in steering joints Correct clearance in steering joints as indicated in section 6 Maintenance service Worn out steering column Replace lower universal joint fork splines shank Worn out steering column cardan Replace cardan shaft shaft Spool recentering springs of dos Contact the dealer Replacement of springs as ing pump have lost spring power sembly and check of operability should be is per or are broken formed only by maintenance department in accor dance with manufacturer s instruction a Wobbling of steerable wheels when moving Cone shaped pins of HSC hy Tighten pin nuts as indicated in section 6 Mainte tightened section 6 Maintenance service Worn out mechanical joints or Replace worn out components bearings Air in HSC hydraulic system Bleed air from the HSC hydraulic system by turning steering wheel with movement of guide wheels from left most to the right most position stop stop to stop position for 2 3 times Break of dosing pump air tightness throughout spool shank socket cas ing gerotor twin cover Wear of spool sealing Contact the dealer Replacement of faulty sealing assembly and check of operability should be is per formed only by maintenance department in accor dance with manufacturer s instruction Loose dosing pump cover bolt Tighten bolts with torque of 30 to 35 N m Da
356. n SU operability of headlight relay K11 when switch SA8 is on replace headlights relay when necessary c If headlight relay K11 is properly operating check circuits from relay K11 switch SA8 fuse element FU17 to headlamp bulbs E6 E7 of tractor If circuits are properly operating replace bulbs EL11 and EL12 311 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 14 4 7 Stop lights HL36 HL37 do not work a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU18 15A replace it when necessary b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on stop light lamp ter minal of nonoperating lamp when switch SB2 is on brake pedal is depressed and avail ability of ground in nonoperating lamp If power is not supplied replace switch SB2 If power is supplied replace switch EL18 or EL19 of the corresponding back lamp 7 14 4 8 Working lights E3 E4 E9 E10 E11 E12 on the cab roof do not work a Check in SU operability of the corresponding fuse element FU11 FU10 FU14 replace it when necessary b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on nonoperating lamp when switches SA5 SA3 SA4 are on or working lights pairs and availability of ground in nonoperating lamp If power is not supplied replace the switch If power is supplied replace a lamp EL3 EL4 EL22 EL23 EL24 EL25 of the corresponding nonoperating lamp WARNING WORKING LIGHTS INSTALLED ON CAB ROOF DO NOT OPERATE WHEN KEY OF STARTER AND INSTRUMENT SWITCHES SA9 ARE
357. n Table 7 1a Table 7 1a Failure l Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Clutch coupling does not transmit full torque clutch skidding Clearance space between clutch Adjust clearance space between clutch release release bearing and release lever bearing and release lever according to clause clutch is disengaged in a half is nil 3 3 4 1 Adjustment of clutch control insufficient clutch pedal clearance Partial engagement of clutch cou Detect and eliminate the cause as indicated in Ta pling clutch arm 34 Figure 3 3 4 ble 7 1b Possible failures in clutch coupling control does not return to initial position and guidelines for troubleshooting when the clutch pedal is released due to failure in clutch operation control Clutch driven disk facing is worn Change facings or driven disks assembled out Clutch driven disk facings are Detect and eliminate the cause of oil ingress into oiled up due to ingress of oil into dry compartment dry section Poor compression spring force Change compression springs spring shrink due to continuous skidding and clutch overheating a Clutch coupling can not be fully disengaged clutch grabs and shudders Clearance space between clutch Adjust clearance space between clutch release release bearing and release lever is bearing and release lever according to clause increased substantial clutch pedal 3 3 4 1 Adjustment of clutc
358. n controlled adjustment the implement is hold in the predetermined position in relation to the tractor frame mixed type power operated with position controlled in any combination 2 For the implements and aggregated units having support wheels mixed type power operated with position controlled in any combination Figure 5 3 1 Rear lift linkage diagramm of LL 3 type 189 2022 5 0000010 OM mas AON Ale ae ae e G 8 as y 45 Figure 5 3 2 Rear lift linkage diagramm of LL 4 type Table 5 1 Basic parameters and coupling dimensions of RLL Standard size configuration LL 3 LL 2 2 of the device Figure 5 3 1 Figure 5 3 2 1 Category acc to ISO 730 1 Category 3 Category 2 2 Design features Device consisting of three links upper one and two lower ones pivot connected with the tractor coupling ele ments of the implement during operation free ends of links with hinge pivots are coupled during implement coupling with the implements elements cou pled 3 Purpose To connect mount or coupling of mounted semi mounted implements 4 Lower links Solid with FC and changeable hinge joints 5 Length of lower links mm 1060 1060 6 Hinged joint width of the upper 51 45 51 45 lower link mm 7 Diameter of a pin of a rear end 39 25 hinged joint of the upper link mm 8 Diameter of holes in rear hinge joints 37 28 7 of lower li
359. n he roof saten d o o o O sma Working tights rear internat on the roof switch Jo SC S sas working Ugh front on the roof suten eooo E AV CCS sat contra tight switch E CS saa working ght switer on bangin SSCS A CS sas starter and instrument switch with startup ock eon ia O sa Grondewieh Cid CC sant underveetevteh or turns and road ug o CS sna feens Cid PCS S e ce sar 2 brake spat wits SSCS CCS 565 unck sna even SSCS CCS E A sas Emergency indication suten poo su Sensor of braking fud aarm SSS spt sensor of air futer cwggea corato ooo E A E CS ss sensor of enerseney ar rese Table C1 continued pea d Designation Denomination Mpume saHue W1 Voltage converter oo S XA91 Socket for connection of agricultural implements Jif o C EE os 5 ES Maleconnectors S OE connectors AE LXPLALXPLA0 Receptacte 502601 x021 x027 Receptace soz SSCS 1 SSS XP XP4 2XP4 3 Receptacle some o o ii d XP9 1 XP9 2 Receptacle 1 480673 0 2 AMP Germany XP10 1 Receptacte1 0965423 1 1 AMP Germany Plug WC32012W M 7 h a ld ooo y XP35 1 Plug 7811230 14 schiemmer Germany ee e ee xst1 xs10 Receptacte 602601 CT Cd SAA Receptacle 602602 st s iC TLC kig Receptacte 601202 CT o yY O XS21 Receptacte 30 16 0570 Cid oo X520 Receptacle 0 190907 1 SSS AMP Germany X2 Receptacle 282080 1 Sit AMP Germany X531 R
360. n one front or one rear tractor wheel for selection of pressure in tires a during operation of tires on single wheels T Ge S G e Ea tractor tire accordingly where G and G are loads acting on one front or one rear b during operation of tires on doubled wheels considering a permissible load on a tire during operation of tires on doubled wheels 1 7 G doubl G 1 7 G doubl G 223 2022 5 0000010 OM G doubl G a J Z f doubl L7 L7 where G doub ANd G doubl are Calculated loads for pressurization of tires during operation of tires on doubled wheels Further according to the calculated loads from Table 4 3 of loading instructions tire pressure shall be determined subsection 4 2 9 Selection of tires internal pressure in de pending on operating conditions and load on the tractor axles and tires operating rules For operator convenience tables 4 2 and 4 3 tire pressure standard during operation on doubled wheels distribution of load on accuracy degrees and indication of the corre sponding value of tires pressure Tractor controllability criterion calculation T f kr i with water solution in front tires k Fr g g i M where Tris load on the tractor front axis H kr is tractor controllability criterion M is tractor operating weight during calculation ballasts weights in the tractor oper ating weight M are not taken into account kg m3 weight of water solut
361. n starter terminals and starter fixture b Test state of charge level and electrolyte density and state of accumulator bat teries terminal and cap surface cleanness Charge and carry out maintenance services of AB if necessary c If after abovementioned operations have been carried out starter starting rom have not changed contact your dealer for starter repair 7 14 3 2 Solenoid starter switch responds when it is switched on token sound can be heard but starter does not rotate a If indicating lamp on instrument board operates normally contact your dealer for starter repair b If indicating lamp on instrument board deaden significantly then perform opera tions described in cl 7 14 3 1 7 14 3 3 Starter won t start The following types of failures and troubleshooting methods 1 Check starter for operability by means of connection with indicating lamp indicat ing lamp for starter test should be 24V to ground by one wire and by another wire one at a time to load bearing terminal solenoid starter switch terminal by turning starter switch key to position Il with range se lector lever set in neutral position If in both cases indicating lamp lights contact your dealer for starter repair won t light or lights in one of the abovementioned cases make repairs on electri cal power supply circuits and start control 2 Test starter interlock switch SB3 operation with transmission range engaged
362. n the field is first of all limited by the performance quality Besides as for traction machine the operating speed is limited by drawbar features of the tractor and as for the drawbar driven units the operating speed is limited by permissible PTO shaft hydraulic extraction power and capacity of the imple ments The main condition for optimal tractors BELARUS 2022 5 coupling is proper use of the engine power defined by loading factor indicating the degree of the tractor rated engine power use required for technological processes by the implements coupled For each group of agricultural tasks there are approximate values of degree of utilization of engine rated brake power Average reserve power shall make 10 15 of the engine rated power Adequately chosen tractor operating mode means such coupling of the tractor subject to all guidelines and operation limitations at which not only task performance in compliance with agrotechnical requirements for the tasks performed the engine load mode the unit speed con trol permissible slipping mode but also all the instructions on safe tractor operation speed choice mode of loading are complied with The engine load efficiency can be changed by reducing or increasing in number of im plements alteration of grasp width depth of processing and driving speed in coarse of the unit working operation If due to change of number of the implements and operation speed the rea sonable engine load is imp
363. n the tractor cab are presented in fig 2 1 1 Figure 2 1 1 Layout of controls and instruments of the tractor ZZ 2022 5 0000010 OM To the figure 2 1 1 Layout of controls and instruments of the tractor 1 sun visor 2 cab light with switch 3 place for radio receiver car stereo installa tion 4 conditioner control panel 5 upper shield unit of button switches 6 deflectors 7 recirculation shutters 8 supplementary switch of rear screen wiper 9 accumulator bat tery remote disconnect switch 10 starter and instruments switch 11 left multifunctional underwheel switch 12 steering wheel 13 instrument board 14 pilot lamps unit 15 integrated indicator 16 integrated indicator control panel 17 right multifunctional under wheel switch 18 emergency flashing switch 19 central light switch 20 switch of front working lights mounted on front lights brackets 21 information display 22 handle to en gage rear PTO drive 23 parking brake control lever 24 clutch control pedal 25 handle for steering rake tilt fixation 26 left brake control pedal 27 right brake control pedal 28 accelerator pedal 29 range shifting lever 30 lever to switch between gears and passes of the reduction gear unit 31 rear lift linkage control console 32 console to control rear axle DL and FDA drive 33 console of engine control
364. n valve valve spool None of the drives FDA rear axle DL FPTO can be engaged and GB reducing gear can not be shifted to the high gear Hydraulic system pressure loss Eliminate failures in transmission hydraulic system When the front PTO drive is engaged indicating lamp lights up but the PTO shaft end extensions does not rotate Ensure that cylinder pin is moving If cylinder rod is moving FPTO shaft electric control is when engaged operating in a proper manner Check adjustment of FPTO brake Adjust if necessary band tightness FDA drive or rear axle DL can not be engaged in an automated mode when the di rective wheels are in forward motion position Large clearance between bracket and Adjust the clearance within the range of 340 2 mm by end of left and right directive wheels means of turning of nuts 6 and 7 as shown in Figure angular position sensors OBUT C3 ocak Break of power supply circuit minus Check the respective electric circuit for normal opera or circuit signal leading to the right tion according to the diagram Annex C or left angular position sensor accord ingl Faulty left or right angular position sen Replace the faulty sensor sor accordingly FDA drive and rear axle DL are permanently engaged in an automated mode do not shut off with driving wheels turn Break of power supply circuit plus Check the electric circuit plus for normal operation ac leading to the righ
365. nd disassembly can be carried out only by servicing personnel of manufacturing company or other authorized maintenance de partment properly trained studying dosing pump design and service and dosing pump assembly disassembly manuals and provided they have all required service tools ac cessories and special hydraulic stand ensuring adjustment and check of dosing pump parameters and operability after the repairs have been made Otherwise a person per forming dosing pump assembly and disassembly replacement of parts and components or adjustment of valves as well as tractor owner bears full responsibility for dosing pump nonoperability 296 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 12 Possible failures in the electronic control system of RLL and guidelines for troubleshooting Cables and control system of RLL connecting diagrams is shown in Figures 7 12 1 7 12 2 Rules of failure diagnostics of the RLL ECS are specified in clause 2 15 4 Troubleshooting of RLL electronic control system of subsection 2 15 Lift link age controls Possible RLL electronic control system errors codes and guidelines for trou bleshooting are shown in Table 7 12 ATTENTION DISCONNECTION OF THE ELECTRIC SOCKETS OF THE REAR LIFT LINKAGE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SHALL BE CARRIED OUT WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING ONLY ATTENTION ALTERATIONS OF THE SPECIFIED VOLTAGE VALUES SHALL BE DONE WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING WITH DUE ATTENTION TO THE SAFETY MEASURES IF OPERATIN
366. nd oil Make sure there are no flammable materials near the exhaust manifold and the muffler during engine running Harvesting hay and thatch operating at places with enhanced danger of fire avoid amassment of inflammable materials on a muffler guard and on gas links Turn the power disconnect switch off when finishing to operate the tractor 180 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 4 Tractor final assembly and run in 4 4 1 Tractor final assembly The BELARUS 2022 5 tractors are supplied to a consumer ready assembled final assembly is not required 4 4 2 Technical maintenance before tractor run in Before placing a new tractor in operation do the following wash the tractor remove preservative lubricant if any on the tractor carefully inspect the tractor check it for completeness and availability of instruction manuals remove accumulator batteries set them into working condition and mount back check outer threaded joints for tightness and tighten if necessary check oil level in the engine oil sump in the transmission in FDA case in cases of FDA wheel gear groups in HLL and HSC oil tanks in the FPTO gear group and if neces sary add as per section 6 Maintenance services drain the available fuel from the fuel tank and fill the fuel tank with new settled fuel in winter winter grade in summer Summer grade check the braking fluid level in tanks of main cylinders of clutch hydrostatic drives and working
367. nd speed Single cone synchronizers that are controlled through forks carriers and levers from the tractor cab are mounted on splines of the shaft 48 The synchronizer 58 provides for engagement of the fifth and the sixth speeds the synchronizer 37 on the shaft 42 provides for engagement of the first and the second speeds The primary shaft is mounted in the block of the roller bearing 74 in the gearbox case on the one side and the ball bearing 52 in the cage 53 on the other side The axial movement of the parts on the shaft is prevented by mounting splined nuts 49 75 on both sides of the shaft with their further locking In the inner bore of the primary shaft 48 the throttle 2 is mounted which also intrudes into the bore in the secondary shaft 12 and serves to supply lubricant over the bores from one shaft to the other The driven gears 41 39 34 33 are mounted on the intermediate shaft 42 the gears 38 35 of the first and the second speeds are mounted on the needle bearings 36 The shaft is located in the block of the ball bearing 46 on the one side and the spherical near ing 32 on the other side On the toothed rim of the intermediate shaft 42 the clutch 28 is mounted which provides for range B engagement through the fork the carrier and the lever in the tractor cab figure 3 4 7 Inside the intermediate shaft 42 figure 3 4 2 there is a PTO drive shaft 44 which is linked to splines of the shaft in the coupling clutch with its one splin
368. ne by means of a delivery pipe 2 1 case 2 delivery pipe 3 air intake 4 cover 5 rubber valve 6 main filter ing element MFE Figure 3 1 1 Air purifier To indicate the air cleaner impurity there is a pilot lamp located in the pilot lamp unit of the instrument dashboard An electronic sensor of air cleaner impurity is mounted in the area of air delivery pipeline and responses as discharging reaches 7 kPa 68 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 1 3 System of charged air cooling Intermediate cooling of charged air is a means increasing density of air charge coming to engine cylinders thus enabling more effective burning of fuel in the cylinders and as a result ensuring increase of power with decrease of specific fuel consumption An air cooled cooling system is used in engine with a plate fin air cooler radiator 5 figure 3 1 2 The charged air cooler 5 is mounted in front of the water radiator and is linked to the turbocharger and engine intake manifold through the system of air pipelines 3 and pipes 2 4 joined by clamps 1 The CAC is an air heat exchanger consisting of a core as finned aluminum pipes tanks and connection tubes Air is delivered to the CAC from the turbocharger cooled inside it to improve power efficient and ecological parameters of the engine and further comes to the engine air intake 1 clamps 2 heat resistant silicone pipes 3 air pipelines 4 pipe 5 charged air
369. ne control system panel shall light up and go out thus confirming workability of the annunciator lamp and its correct con nection to the tractor on board system If the errors are detected the testing annunciator provides a light code of the fault The detected faults shall be eliminated before the engine is started 3 The information screen displays a company logo for several seconds thus con firming workability of the screen Then in case there are no failures with the EECS operation the information screen functions in operation mode it displays actually measured parame ters of the engine If failures are detected the information screen produces an acoustic sig nal and a brief description of the detected failures emerges on the screen The failures de tected shall be eliminated before the engine is started 4 On the pilot lamp unit a pilot lamp of emergency oil pressure in HSC will light up On the dashboard a signal lamp of oil emergency pressure in engine lubrication system and a buzzer sounds a signal lamp of air emergency pressure in the pneumatic system if it is below the accepted value a signal lamp of fuel reserve capacity in the tank when reserve volume of fuel remains in the tank a pilot lamp of 24V charging the additional battery light up On the integrated indicator a pilot signal annunciator of engaged parking brake will turn on in a flashing mode with 1 Hz frequency 5 On the pilot lamp unit a pilot lamp that
370. near movement As the tractor turns outer forces exceed friction in the disks that skid and the differential gets unlocked Preload of the drive gear tapered bearings 2 4 is adjusted by matching spacer rings 3 and tighten ing a nut 1 with a required torque Preload in bearings 6 24 of the differential and meshing of gears of the main drive 12 25 are ad justed by nuts 7 19 with lock plates 18 and by bolts 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 1 nut 2 4 tapered roller bearing 3 spacer rings 5 housing 6 24 tapered roller bearing 7 19 adjust ing nut 8 level ill plug 9 22 axle shaft 10 locking bolt 11 bolt 12 driven gear 13 14 differential case 15 cage 16 17 disks 18 lock plate 20 pinion shaft 21 pinion 23 axle shaft gear 25 drive gear 26 collar Figure 3 12 2 Central reduction unit 119 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 12 3 Wheel gear group The wheel gear group set is a parallel shaft planetary reduction unit which is meant for transfer and increase of torque from the FDA differential at various turning angles of the front driving wheels The reduction unit consists of a double joint a cylindrical and planetary drive pivot connection and levers controlling front wheel turning The double joint 21 figure 3 12 3 is connected with the FDA differential by means of a shaft 17 from one side and with a drive gear 9 meshed with a driven gear 27 of the
371. neously with change of oil To replace exchangeable filter cartridge of HSC tank perform the following actions unscrew four bolts 4 figure 6 4 32 and remove cover 2 with filter cartridge and bowl assembled unscrew two bolts 3 and disconnect filter cartridge from bowl clean internal space of the bowl insert a new filter cartridge and assemble cover with filter cartridge and bowl fas tening them by bolts 3 insert filter cartridge assembled in oil tank shell and tighten bolts 4 check level of oil and is necessary refill the oil if necessary 1 1 plug 2 cover 3 4 bolt 5 HSC tank Figure 6 4 32 Replacement of an exchangeable filter cartridge of HSC tank 257 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 5 Maintenance service in every 1000 hours of operation 6 4 5 1 General guidelines Complete the abovementioned tasks and the tasks listed in the present subclause 6 4 5 also 6 4 5 2 Task 48 Change of oil in HLL tank Before changing oil in order to warm up the oil in HLL systems up to standard op erating temperature run the engine and set any of the hydraulic outputs control levers in Lift position and keep it in this position until the oil in HLL is warmed up To change the oil in the HLL tank perform the following actions position the tractor on level surface set the RLL links into the lowermost position FLL links into the uppermost position put the parking brakes on and stop the engine unscr
372. nes and implements except for wide cut the RLL links shall not freely move in vertical direction in the arm yokes For this reason the pins 5 shall be equally mounted on the right and on the left arms as the tractor operates with wide cut mounted and semi mounted agricultural ma chines it is required to mount the pins 5 in the grooves slots A of the arm yokes 3 to ensure vertical displacement of the links with respect to the arm yoke 1 screw with joint 2 tube 3 yoke 4 forelock 5 pin 6 washer 7 lock nut Figure 3 18 3 Arm 140 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 19 Rear lift linkage electronic control system 1 2 3 4 5 i h 3 5 6 J AET Mises 8 i ii Hi 1 RLL control console 2 RLL electronic control unit 3 fuse of RLL ECS in the fuse block 4 cab harness of RLL ECS 5 remote buttons 6 transmission harness of RLL ECS 7 electromagnet for lowering 8 position sensor 9 electromagnet for up lift 10 right force sensor 11 left force sensor Figure 3 19 1 Allocation diagram of RLL electronic control system components 141 2022 5 0000010 OM The electronic part of rear lift linkage control includes the following components RLL control console 1 figure 3 19 1 remote buttons 5 for RLL control RLL electronic control unit 2 force sensors 10 and 11 RLL position sensor 8 electromagnetic va
373. ng cyl inders hydraulic amplifier and valves The systems shall be liquid and oil tight Clear the clutch coupling operating control drive and control pedals from foreign matters and dirt Checking of a clutch coupling operating control shall be carried out according to cl 3 3 4 1 Adjustment of clutch operating control Note Checking of a clutch coupling operating control shall be carried out when the engine is shut down by two persons 6 4 2 7 Task 21 Drain of the sediment from fuel tank To drain the sediment from the fuel tank it is necessary to perform the following screw out the tank adapter 1 with a screw key S 17 Figure 6 4 10 which is lo cated in the bottom of the fuel tank 2 drain the sediment until the clean fuel appears after the clear fuel without water and dirt appears screw in the tank adapter 1 x 2 1 1 tank adapter 2 fuel tank Figure 6 4 10 Drainage of the sediment from the fuel tank 6 4 2 8 Task 22 Drain of the sediment from coarse fuel filter To drain the sediment from coarse fuel filter it is necessary to perform the following screw catch water bowl 1 Figure 6 4 11 out of filter cartridge of coarse fuel filter 2 drain the sediment from cnutb catch water bowl lubricate sealing 3 between filter cartridge 2 and catch water bowl 1 with motor oil screw up water bowl over filter cartridge 1 catch water bowl 2 filter cartridge of coarse fuel filter
374. ng of the door locking device into position Open or Close no contact of the pusher 6 with the screw 5 head is allowed The lock unlocking should be done only in position Open of the door locking device by pushing the button 3 of the handle In position Closed of the door lock ing device when pushing the button 3 no contact of the handle parts with the screw 5 head is allowed Make adjustment with a help of the screw 5 then lock the screw 5 with a nut 7 1 handle 2 lever 3 bolt Figure 3 24 3 Door locking device view from outside the cab 1 detent 2 key 3 button 4 catch 5 screw 6 pusher 7 nut Figure 3 24 4 Door locking device top view 154 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 bolt 2 hinge 3 center support of cab frame 4 plane Figure 3 24 5 Door fastening to cab frame lf necessary the equal adjoining of the door to the door aperture can be achieved by installation of additional plates 4 figure 3 24 5 between the center support 3 of the cab and the hinges 2 3 24 4 Side screens The side screens are open type hinged to the cab frame The screen in open and closed conditions is secured by a handle 1 figure 3 24 6 If necessary the equal adjoining of the side glass to the window aperture is ensured by installation of additional washers 3 between the screen and a bracket 4 of the screen clamper Figure 3 24 6 Fixation of side screen
375. nks mm 9 Distance between PTO shaft end extension face and suspension axis 672 mm 10 Column height 1 mm 11 Length of the suspension axis along the shoulders 1 mm 12 Lifting power of the device KN a on the suspension axis b at overhang of 610 mm from the Suspension axis 965 825 1 Dimension refers to the implement coupled 2 Basic variant recommended for the general application 190 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 3 3 Three point front lift linkage Optionally FLL may be installed on tractor BELARUS 2022 5 Front lift linkage with dimensions corresponding to standard size LL 2 is similar on critical parameters to the rear lift linkage Front lift linkage is designed for the following pur poses forming of combined units tiller is in front of the machine and seeder is behind and etc forming of echelon linkage mounting front and side cut mower and etc transportation of individual implements detached from the combined units located in the rear end during long distance transportation for mounting of front hanging ballast Front lift linkage of a tractor is used with tilling machines only in a propelling condi tion FLL is not designed for use with tilling machines on reverse IT IS PROHIBITED TO OPERATE FLL WITH LOGGING BLADES AND FOR JACKING OF TACTOR FRONT ELEMENT Note Rules on coupling of implements with FLL guidance on changing of FLL op erating position into the transport
376. nostic equipment 152 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 24 Cab 3 24 1 General information The cab of the tractors BELARUS 2022 5 provides comfortable working conditions heat and noise insulation corresponds to safety and observability requirements The cab has the following emergency exits doors left and right rear screen lateral screen right and left Natural ventilation of the cab is realized through the opening side and rear screens and through the roof hatch The cab glass is safety and has a bend form ATTENTION DURING OPERATION AND REPAIR WORKS AVOID CAB GLASS KNOCKS 3 24 2 Cab installation The cab is mounted on tractor frame through vibration isolators 4 figure 3 24 1 In case of cab dismantling the following shall be done unlock splint pins 1 do nuts 2 off dismount bolts 3 take off the cab with a help of a beam crane with a capacity not lower than 1000 kg and using 3 eye screws M16 which are mounted on upper surface of the roof at places A figure 3 24 2 el ee pees i ta he a a nee atk d iy n prh URE 4 9 ey FAD A a ah f a E 1 splint pin 2 nut 3 bolt 4 vibration isolator 5 bracket to attach cab to cou pling clutch housing 6 bracket to attach cab to rear axle shaft body Figure 3 24 1 Cab installation on vibration isolators Figure 3 24 2 Places of eye screw installation on the roof 153 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 24 3 Door
377. nsion 13 ball Figure 3 8 1 Front PTO mechanical part To link the reduction unit to the crankshaft it is required to shift the bushing 7 figure 3 8 1 to the engine side having compressed the spring 6 and move the clutch 5 with the shaft 4 bringing it into mesh with the expansion clutch 3 until the balls 13 are fixed by the spring loaded bushing 7 in groove A The shaft 4 is brought out of meshing with the expansion clutch 3 mounted on the engine crankshaft in a similar way If the FPTO is not used on the tractor its drive shall be disconnected from the en gine crankshaft in order to reduce engine load and ensure long service life of the front PTO components 102 2022 5 0000010 OM The hydraulic cylinder rod is moved by changing the direction of oil flow in the valve group of the FPTO 4 figure 3 8 2 Oil Supplied through a pressure pipeline 1 is directed either to a pipeline 2 connected with the cylinder rod end FP TO off rod retracted or to a pipeline 3 connected with the bottom end of the cylinder FP TO on rod protracted 1 2 3 pipeline 4 FPTO valve group Figure 3 8 2 Front PTO hydraulic part When running the FPTO for a long time check the extraction of the control cylinder rod dimension Q in figure 3 8 2 If the rod extraction value in position FPTO off 50 3 mm or in position FPTO engaged 6543 mm does not correspond to the above stated adjust the band bra
378. nsion reaches 320 min a lower seg ment of the rear PTO gauge 9 lights up in combination with the annunciator 6 as the speed further increases together with the annunciator 6 the rear PTO indi cator segments light up successively from bottom upward in the following order 8 7 5 4 15 then in the process of the rear PTO operation the rear PTO speed is displayed on the indicator 3 in accordance with the upper lighting segment of the RPTO as per table 2 2 32 2022 5 0000010 OM The working order of the rear PTO speed indicator 6 when switching the mode 540 rom efficient is the same as for the mode 540 rpm Upon engaging the rear PTO in the mode of 1000 rpm the integrated indicator op erates in the following way the annunciator of 540 rpm of rear PTO speed scale range 6 lights up figure 2 1 as the speed of the rear PTO shaft end extension reaches 320 rpm a lower seg ment of the rear PTO gauge 9 lights up in combination with the annunciator 6 as the speed further increases together with the annunciator 6 the rear PTO indi cator segments light up successively from bottom upward in the following order 8 7 5 4 as the speed of the RPTO shaft extension exceeds 750 rpm the annunciator 6 as well as the segments 9 8 7 5 4 go out Then the annunciator 10 and the lower segment 9 light up as the speed further increases together with the annunciator 10 the rear PTO in
379. o the following decrease engine speed fully press the clutch pedal set the range switching lever and the speed and pass shifting lever into neutral position release the clutch pedal stop the tractor by means of service brakes engage the parking brake ATTENTION FOR TRACTOR EMERGENCY STOP SHARPLY PRESS THE CLUTCH AND BREAK PEDALS TOGETHER 4 2 5 Engine stop ATTENTION BEFORE STOPPING THE ENGINE MOVE DOWN THE LIFT LINK AGES UNTIL THEY REACH GROUND IF THEY ARE UPLIFTED LET THE ENGINE RUN AT 1000 100 RPM FOR 3 TO 5 MINUTES THIS WILL ALLOW TO REDUCE EN GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE To stop the engine do the following set the rear PTO control lever into position off and the rear PTO drive activation handle into position PTO drive off engage the rear axle differential lock the FDA drive the FPTO drive if installed shift the handles of the hydraulic lift linkage valve group control into a neutral posi tion set the handle to control the lift linkage into disengaged position turn the conditioner off turn the key of the starter and instruments switch from the position I into the posi tion 0 deactivate the accumulator battery when the engine is stopped for a long time ATTENTION FOR ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP TURN THE KEY OF THE STARTER AND INSTRUMENTS SWITCH FROM THE POSITION I INTO THE POSI TION 0 4 2 6 Getting off the tractor Getting off the tra
380. ockwise and re move it withdraw carefully main filter cartridge 3 clear inside and sealing surface of housing with wet cloth from dust and dirt It is also necessary to prevent air duct from dust and dirt entrance assembly of air cleaner should be carried out in reverse order ensure that installation of MFC is carried out correctly and close locking device 1 place tractor hood mask back to its place ATTENTION MANUFACTURER OF THE AIR CLEANER STRONGLY RECOM MENDS TO CARRY OUT MFC REPLACEMENT RATHER THAN CLEANING TO AVOID DAMAGE AND TO PROVIDE THE MAXIMUM PROTECTION OF THE ENGINE 1 locking device 2 cover 3 main filter cartridge MFC Figure 6 4 39 Check of engine air cleaner If filter clogging indicating lamp has light up and there is no possibility to replace MFC at once clearing of MFC is allowed To clean MFC perform the following blow over main filter cartridge carefully with cry compressed air inside out until dusting is stopped To avoid paper shutter break air pressure should be from 0 2 to 0 3 MPa Point air stream at right angle to filter cartridge surface During maintenance it is necessary to protect filter cartridge from mechanical damage and oiling up check MFC for possible failures shutter breakout bottom coming unstuck wipe O ring of MFC with wet cloth and install MFC into air cleaner housing Cleaned MFC do not have the same service life as a new one IT IS FIRBIDD
381. of linkage uplifting 9 handle to select control method 10 handle to adjust speed of lowering 11 annuncia tor of linkage uplifting red color 12 annunciator of linkage lowering green color 13 troubleshooting annunciator red color 14 dampening button 15 dampening annun citor green color 16 RLL position indicator green color upper scale point RLL in max raised position lower scale point RLL fully lowered Figure 2 15 2 Rear lift linkage control console TY 03 Note RLL position indicator 16 figure 2 15 2 is not used on BELARUS 2022 5 tractors Rules on using the RLL control console 1Y 03 manufactured by Izmeritel plant are similar to rules on use of the RLL control console produced by BOSCH company intro duced in figure 2 15 1 49 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 15 3 Remote buttons of RLL control system Remote buttons of RLL control are used as a rule for coupling agricultural imple ments and machines to the rear lift linkage Uplift and lowering of the rear lift linkage with the remote buttons on rear wheel fenders can be carried out at different control modes the handles 1 2 3 4 7 figure 2 15 1 and similar handles of the RLL control console 1Y 03 can be left in any position as the system of control from inside the cab is hereby blocked To lift the RLL up press any of the buttons 4 figure 2 15 3 and hold it depressed To lower the RLL press any
382. of radiator Evaporator cooling section angele urut of radiator monoblo ck uriti W Condenser Heater valve Hose Din 10 Hose Din 13 From engine cooling systern Quick coupling on KI hoses between cab and compressor WS Compressor Figure 3 23 1 Cab air conditioning and heating system The compressor 7 figure 3 23 2 is located to the left at the top of the engine the condenser 6 in front of the charged air cooling radiator the filter drain 3 on a bracket attached to the water radiator the pressure sensor 4 on the filter drain 3 the heater cooler 8 under the roof above a ventilation box panel the cold air regulator and the fan switch are located on the upper compartment panel the service valves on fittings near the compressor 7 and the filter drain 3 150 2022 5 0000010 OM Era hie RE ratai j A tote EEA ei k i i _ a 3 ree E Oo a L b night view as tractor moves 1 coolant supply line from condenser to filter drain 2 coolant supply line from compressor to condenser 3 filter drain 4 pressure sensor 5 coolant supply line from filter drain to cooler heater 6 condenser 7 compressor 8 cooler heater 9 quick couplings 10 coolant supply line form cooler heater to compressor 11 coolant drain line from cooler heater to engine cooling system 12 coolant supply line from en gine cooling system to cooler h
383. ol a ni EE of cooling liquid level in the engine e ing system EE O i lt X lt Xx 6 Check tires state Check air conditioner hose fixtures 8 Inspect hydraulic system components X Ce from the condensate water CAC radiator 12 Check rinse of gripper tools of FLL and RLL X X 13 Check breaks functioning in running order en gine steering light alarm devices operability 14 Drain condensate water from the pneumatic sys X tem balloon 15 Drain condensate water from the radiator tanks X X of CAC win sum ter mer ing 17 Wash tractor and clean cabin inside surfaces X 18 Check bolts torquing of air duct clamps of CAC X 19 Check pneumatic pressure intires X 22 Drain sediment from coarse fuelfiter lal sisson ing systems oil level in the main gear housing and wie wheel hub drive of the FDA Lubricate holding down clip bearings of FDA 1X 26 Lubricate pivot axis bearing of FDA ea I i X Check adjust air conditioner compressor drive X belt tension 234 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 6 2 continued Operation description e AL tion No 250 500 1000 Carry out maintenance of AB a Check oil level in FPTO reducing gear O Lubricate HSC hydraulic cylinders hinged joints __ ak mesh filter of transmission hydraulic tem 32 Check adjust clearances in steering link joints B Check and adjustment of wheels toe in O Lubricate clutch release yoke be
384. on maintenance services performed by the operator on long storage of the tractor are shown in section 8 Tractor storage of the operation manual Deviation of 10 for MS 1 2MS 1 and MS 2 and 5 for MS 3 from the set in tervals of MS are permitted advancing or delayed MS depending on the operating condi tions for the chassis 232 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 2 Providing access to the components for maintenance services Before starting maintenance work open hood 3 Figure 6 2 1 Hood 3 can be opened and fixes in two positions To open the hood 3 in the first position it is necessary to perform the following open lock 2 by pulling control cable handle 1 open the hood 3 anchor it in the opened position by means of link 4 in supporting bracket 5 ensure that the hood 3 is fixed properly in raised position To open the hood 3 in the second position it is necessary to perform the following open lock 2 by pulling control cable handle 1 open the hood 3 anchor it in the opened position by means of link 4 in supporting bracket 5 disconnect highlight cable from the engine cable heft the hood 3 to release the link 4 from supporting bracket 5 place the link 4back to its place holding the hood 3 by a hand pull locking mechanism 7 along the tractor longitudi nal axis from the cabin open the hood 3 into the second position fix it in an opened position by means of a link 8 in supporting bracket 9
385. on manual Carry out scheduled maintenance Run tractor for 15 20 minutes Cor rect detected faults if necessary 323 2022 5 0000010 OM 8 8 Safety requirements for preservation The preservation procedure comprising surfaces preparation coating with preser vation materials paper marking and cutting packing shall be carried out only by persons of the age subjected to medical examination properly instructed on labor and fire safety and receiving primary instructions on the working place Preservation remises and sec tions should be separated from other production premises and equipped with plenum exhaust ventilation Materials used for preservation are combustible substances with flash temperature from 170 to 270 C and should comply with state standards technical specifi cations and have quality certificate Conservation materials being supplied should bear label with material description Perform preservation operations in special clothes and footwear and use individual protec tion means When performing preservation operations observe personal hygiene rules dry clean special clothes in time don t wash it in emulsions solvents kerosine By the de gree of impact on human health preservation materials are classified as of moderate haz ard SO use recommended individual protection means while handling materials With prolonged exposure of skin to preservation oils greases and liquids it may be injured White spirit vapors in
386. on of electric welding for the tractor shall be carried out while the AB switch is off To avoid ignition or explosion hazard prevent the fuel tank engine fuel system and accumulator batteries from being close to the open flame sources 269 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 6 3 Guidelines for safe use of leveling jacks and statement of places where they shall be installed Use leveling jacks to lift tractor and after lifting insert backing blocks and limit stops under the front axle beam rear wheels semi axles or base components of the tractor frame Places for a leveling jack installation on the tractor are marked by a sign shown in Figure 6 6 1 Figure 6 6 1 Sign of a place for a leveling jack installation To lift rear elements of the tractor set leveling jacks or single jack under the rear axle tube as illustrated in Figure 6 6 2 oy gt ii A A ae hy f i JHE nyo m K i ii Wa IE Jo a rl El a 19 Sm l RL ANI HE faa pic nei ATEN zai e Aih Ges Peay it i ai a Tractor rear view b Tractor bottom view Figure 6 6 2 Scheme of leveling jacks installation for lifting of the rear elements of the tractor To lift front elements of the tractor set leveling jacks or single jack under the front driving axle beam as illustrated in Figure 6 6 3
387. on the multifunctional display Parameter tested Sample of fault displaying Fault description on the Integrated Indicator i In case there are no signals coming ie ata p er from the speed sensor for 10 12 sec a tion of speed sen sensor message in the form of 0 digit Is dis ears right played on the multifunctional display wheel characterizing the location of the faulty _ oe sensor left or right or breakage in the circuit of the given sensor Testing workabil If there is no signal coming from the ity of the frequency i frequency fuel volume sensor for two fuel volume sensor sec a message FUEL is displayed on the screen Testing workabil li If there are no signals through CAN ity and connection of PIG bus of the integrated indicator a mes AN bus to the Inte sage C BUS appears on the multi grated Indicator with functional display AN interface If the signal coming from the engine control unit is missing the respective indication modes are switched off automatically and the message C BUS appears in the information field 2 of the multifunction display figure 2 7 3 Each of the abovestated fault messages is displayed in priority on the information field 2 of the multifunctional display irrespective of the information currently displayed With sequential pushing the Mode button of the integrated indicator control module the mes sages shall be listed in turn After the last message has been
388. one as tractor skidding is not taken into account The velocity gauge 1 is actuated by signals coming from pulse sensors of rotation frequency of toothed gears of final drives of right and left rear wheels The speed is indi cated in accordance with the signal from the sensor installed on the final drive gear of the wheel turning with a less speed In case one of the speed sensors is faulty the integrated indicator shows speed readings in accordance with the signal coming from the correct sensor Specific faults of circuits or speed sensors when the signals from them are missing are displayed in the mul tifunctional indicator as 0 digit characterizing the fault location to the right or to the left see below 2 2 2 The engine speed gauge 2 figure 2 7 1 indicates rotation frequency of the engine crankshaft on a needle indicator Information on engine speed comes from the electronic control unit The range of speed readings is from 0 to 3500 rpm 2 2 3 Rear PTO speed gauge 3 figure 2 7 1 displays the rear PTO speed on a light indicator The rear PTO speed gauge is actuated by signals coming from a pulse speed sen sor installed above the toothed washer of the rear PTO reduction unit Upon engaging the rear PTO in the mode of 540 min the integrated indicator op erates in the following way the annunciator of 540 min of rear PTO speed scale range 6 lights up as the speed of the rear PTO shaft end exte
389. ontrol unit PTO power takeoff shaft PRS power reception shaft HSC hydrostatic steering control HLL hydraulic lift linkage HS hydraulic system FFVS frequency fuel volume sensor STM shift time maintenance RPTO rear power takeoff shaft SPTA spare parts tools and accessories RA rear axle RLL rear lift linkage II integrated indicator GB gearbox CECS complex electronic control system MTU machine and tractor unit CC coupling clutch LL lift linkage IAH inlet air heater FDA front driving axle FPTO front power takeoff VC voltage converter FLL front lift linkage FDAD front driving axle drive CM control module IICP integrated indicator control module HPH high pressure hoses HP heating plugs SM seasonal maintenance TCH turbocharger MS maintenance service MS1 maintenance service No1 MS2 maintenance service No2 MS3 maintenance service No3 DH drawbar hitch ECS electronic control system EECS engine electronic control system EE electrical equipment 10 2022 5 0000010 OM 2022 5 0000010 OM The manufacturer uses standard international symbols regarding application of in struments and control units Given below are the symbols with indication of their meanings LL see the manual brake P manual brake
390. or example with a free wheeling clutch 209 2022 5 0000010 OM ATTENTION MANUFACTURER OF THE IMPLEMENT CARDAN DRIVEN FROM THE TRACTOR PTO SHAFT SHALL INFORM YOU IN ADVANCE ABOUT THE NECES SITY OF APPLICATION OF A SAFETY CLUTCH CLUTCH DESIGN FEATURES AND CONSEQUENSES OF THE IMPLEMENTS APPLICATIONS WITHOUT THE SAFETY CLUTCH When you need to decide on the purchase or operation of the cardan shaft follow the implements and cardan shaft manufacturers guidelines first of all It is recommended to apply with the tractor the implements with active working attachments where the length between the articulations of the fully off set cardan shaft does not exceed 1 m When coupling the implements with RLL or FLL Figure 5 10 2 the length of the car dan shaft is determined by distance L fully off set cardan shaft with the lower drawbars placed horizontally Shaft extension occurs when the implement is lifted therefore in up posi tion it is necessary to check overlapping of extensible components In joint of the cardan shaft large angularity appears in transport position of the implement when the tractor PTO shaft is disabled Cardan joints are not large and equal to each other in operating position and usu ally L4 L2 is assured Therefore in this case an extensible cardan shaft with gimbal joint with guard housing can be used LIFLEASB Figure 5 10 2 Cardan shaft length finding scheme in course of the tractor coupling with the implem
391. or tractor driving and having got admission to operate certain tractor is allowed if tractor owner or any person liable for tractor operation does not operates tractor himself he must ensure that before starting operations all persons related to the tractor have been duly instructed on safety operation requirements and on correct coupling of im plements with the tractor and have studied the operation manuals for the tractor and the engine enclosed ATTENTION OWNERS AND OFFICIALS OR OTHER PERSONS MUST NOT AL LOW THE TRACTOR FOR ROAD TRAFFIC AND COUPLING WITH IMPLEMENTS OR ADMIT OPERATORS FOR DRIVING THE TRACTOR IN CONTRAVENTION OF CUR RENT TRAFFIC REGULATIONS AND THE PRESENT OPERATION MANUAL ATTENTION BEFORE STARTING THE TRACTOR IN STRUCTURE OF MTU EN SURE THAT THERE IS NO PEOPLE IN CLOSE VICINITY TO THE TRACTOR INCLUDING THE AREA BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTS OR TRAILERS SEMITRAIL ERS COUPLED 185 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 2 Types of implements coupled with tractor BELARUS 2022 5 According to the type of coupling with tractors BELARUS 2022 5 the implements are divided into the following types mounted implement is fixed in three points to the upper and lower draft arms of LL The tractor can carry weight of an implement in full Implement structural components at carry is not in touch with ground contact area While changing the implement position from operating to transport the point in which the implement is
392. ossible then in order to save the fuel you have to choose the appro priate fragmentary operating mode by throttling down the fuel The engine load efficiency is determined by crankshaft rotation speed Operation shall be carried out at a bit faster crankshaft rotation speed than the nominal speed indi cated in tachospeedometer If the operating speed is more than the required speed then the lower gear shall be actuated Permissible slipping mode for tractors BELARUS 2022 5 makes 16 Assembly of MTU and choice of speed mode within the limits of permissible slipping Excessive slipping of tractor driving machine results in destruction of soil structural particles with subsequent develop ment of wind erosion and water erosion processes 205 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 8 Selection of ploughs Matching of share plough is carried out with regard to the permissible range of drawbar powers generated by the tractors BELARUS 2022 5 in on stubble field within the range from 27 to 36 KN Tilling is the most power consuming type of the activities According to the traction indexes of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 in the original configuration can be coupled with seven bodied share plough with overall grasp width from 30 to 40 cm and processing width from 15 to 22 cm on well moistured soils of average density Plough type and grasp width number of shells depends on the soil its mechanical composition stone infestation of soil tilling depth P
393. oubles ignition or accidents Notes about performance of maintenance services shall be made in the tractor ser vice book Comply with storage precautions and waste recovery rules Never discharge used liquid on the ground Use special tanks for safe storage of waste WARNING DURING CARRYING OUT OF MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SER VICES COMPLY WITH SAFETY PRECAUTIONS LISTED IN SUBSECTION 6 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS IN THE COURSE OF MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SER VICES ATTENTION IF THERE IS NO SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE OR ADJUSTMENT SERVICES ETC STOP THE DIESEL ENGINE AND ENGAGE PARKING BREAKS IN CASE SAFETY GUARDS AND COVERS ARE OFF ENSURE THEY ARE MOUNTED BACK AFTER MAINTENANCE SERVICES HAS COMPLETED BEFORE YOU START OPERATING THE TRACTOR During hydraulic lift system steering and transmission line hydraulic system main tenance services oil change and filters replacement intervals should be observed It is not allowed to use oil not specified in the tractor operation manual for filling refilling Before refilling and replacement of filter cartridges clean filler plugs necks and caps and adjoining surfaces from dirt and dust During replacement of filter cartridges wash the internal surfaces of filter housings and caps with the diesel fuel When the tractor is coupled with hydraulically operated implements clean clutches couplings adapting pipes and other connecting parts of the implement and the tractor
394. ower of about 15 20 kW is needed per one plough shell on the soils of average density with processing depth up to 20 cm and grasp width 35 cm To achieve flat breaking reversible or turning ploughs are used ensuring unilateral soil overturning Despite of plough design variety there are general principles and procedures of their preparation to operate with the tractor Plough design is determined according to the drawbar power range generated by the tractor and with regard to soil type and processing depth It is recommended to carry out inspection of the plough working attachments ar rangement and adjustment on specially equipped representative area with hard surface and markings corresponding to the regular layout of the working attachments In the field conditions only testing with string or long direct staff having applied will be enough If plough share blades are located in different height and plough body are in different plains then the plough will move unstable and drawbar power and fuel consump tion will increase 206 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 9 Power take off shaft ends Shaft ends drives Figure 5 9 1 of the front and rear power take off shafts FPTO and RPTO of the tractors BELARUS 2022 5 correspond in design and arrangement to regulatory document and standards covering power take off shafts of the agricultural trac tors Shaft ends parameters and FPTO shaft and RPTO drives specifications are shown in Table 5 9 Front PTO sh
395. perability Replace in case of failure b Test power circuit breaker QS1 for operability by testing its switching ability in manual mode If power circuit breaker does not operate in manual mode replacement is needed If power circuit breaker operates in manual mode check operability of remote bat tery disconnect switch SA10 in instrument board and circuit operability from key SA10 to terminal 3 of circuit breaker QS1 including fuse element FU29 15A operability in SU 7 14 2 2 AB GB1 charge is nil with the motor running generator does not operate a Test generator G1 for operability for what connect testing apparatus to terminal B and generator housing Test voltage it should be about 12 12 7 V before engine start up and 13 5 15 V after engine start up If these conditions at standard AB GB1 charge are not observed contact your dealer for generator repair b It is necessary to check voltage terminal Q of the generator with gauges en gaged SA9 switch key is in the first position l and with the motor stopped Voltage should be from 0 8 to 1 2 V in case it differs correct the trouble in added resistance circuit R32 located in SU ATTENTION TEST OF GENERATOR OPERABILITY BY MEANS OF BATTERY DISCONNECTION CONNECTION OF TERMINAL B TO TRACTOR FRAME WITH THE MOTOR RUNNING CAN RESULT IN GENERATOR BREAKDOWN 714 2 3 Auxiliary AB GB2 charge is nil with the motor running Absence of char
396. ping abilities depend on soil type and load applied to tractor axles Air pressure in tires influences the wheel point being in contact with soil and affects its gripping abilities as well as tractor operational performance depending on soil conditions Rates of loads on tires to select operation mode at various inner pressures and speeds are set forth by a tire manufacturer and are provided in table 4 1 The pressure value depends on travel speed and weight loads on tractor axles cre ated by weight of coupled implements with due account for tractor own weight and ballast weight and also operation conditions Inner pressure in tires for each specific case of tractor coupling with implements is different Therefore if tractor operational conditions are changed it is required to check and if necessary adjust pressure value in tires Failure to comply with pressure rates decreases tire life significantly Tractor operation with tire pressure set below the required rate results in the follow ing wheel failures tire turning on rims wearing of tire bead against rim edge occurrence of cracks on tire sides ply separation or rupture of a tire tear out of tire valve for tubed tires Operation with tire pressure higher than the rated pressure results in the following wheel failures noticeable increased wear of tires stretching of carcass layers and decrease of tire flexibility increased skidding of wheels increased s
397. plied to the clutch booster under pressure thus moving the piston 2 Hereby the disk pack gets compressed locking the gear 1 and the drum 3 and ensuring torque transfer As the FDA is positively engaged oil is supplied to the clutch booster irrespective of the rear wheel skidding As the FDA is disengaged the valve group overlaps the charging line and oil goes from the clutch booster for drain For checking pressure in the drive clutch booster there is a testing hole shut with a plug 14 The switch 13 and the electro hydraulic valve group 11 are guarded with a housing 10 Rules for FDA drive control are provided in section 2 Controls and instruments 3 12 4 2 Adjustment of FDA drive automatic switch A BH i Fi J ae m FEEN aw fa iiey Saa Aal Do a TEET ERAS Brians 1 A K Renae be io ae Hee TrA LE er S oe ea i 1 S T ty ee DS a meme ri P AN Baa FET i i Af li Hidi ena pa si 5 ee 1 ioe a Sipen EMA mam A te TEN Fa a og Fan j Steere ame aI SH BS i F B BN Bake et m ETENEE he ZAN Sl IC Looe 2 ay fs 6 F iij oh a Position I b Position I On Off 1 drum 2 half clutch 3 pusher 4 shim 5 switch 6 cover Figure 3 12 5 Adjustment of FDA drive automatic switch The adjustment of the switch 5 figure 3 12 5 shall be carried out after the hydraulic clutch ha
398. pped and the system gets blocked The sys tem is controlled only with the remote buttons and is not controlled from the main console The troubleshooting annunciator shows a failure code After the failure has been elimi nated and the engine started the system recovers With light faults the troubleshooting annunciator shows a fault code but the system remains controlled and is not blocked In case of light faults the RLL control system oper ates improperly there is no correct soil sensing After the fault has been eliminated the troubleshooting annunciator turns off In case the system detects a failure relating to any group of complexity the following actions shall be taken o read the code o stop the engine o eliminate the failure in accordance with instructions of subsection 7 2 Possible failures in electronic control systems of RLL and guidelines for troubleshooting o start the engine and if there are no faults get down to work If the RLL control console T Y 03 manufactured by Izmeritel plant is installed trou bleshooting annunciator 13 figure 2 15 2 RLL control handle 1 troubleshooting of the RLL electronic control system is the same 2 15 5 Front lift linkage control The front lift linkage installed upon request is controlled by a handle 2 and 3 figure 2 16 2 that in their turn control the second and the third sections of the hydraulic valve group respectively Note Connection of the FLL cont
399. r Figure 6 4 24 Cleaning of rotor wheel of centrifugal oil filter of GB ATTENTION CENTRIFUGAL OIL FILTER OF GB IS CONSIDERED TO BE PROPERLY OPERATING IF AFTER THE HEATED UP DIESEL ENGINE HAS BEEN STOPPED SOUGH GENERATED BY ROTOR ROTATION IS HEARD FOR 30 TO 60 SECONDS 252 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 4 Maintenance services in every 500 hours of operation 6 4 4 1 General guidelines Complete the abovementioned tasks and the tasks listed in the present subsection 6 4 4 6 4 4 2 Task 36 Cleaning of filter cartridge of air pressure regulating filter in the pneumatic system To clean filter cartridge of air pressure regulating filter 3 Figure 6 4 25 in the pneumatic system perform the following actions unscrew bolts 1 and remove cap 2 withdraw filter cartridge rinse it with cleaning solution and blow it off with a com pressed air insert the filter cartridge and than mount the cap in its place l 3 1 bolt 2 cap 3 air pressure regulator in the pneumatic system Figure 6 4 25 Cleaning of filter cartridge of air pressure regulating filter Note Cleaning of filter cartridge air pressure regulating valve of pneumatic system is carried out only on regulator 80 3512010 Designation mark of air pressure regulating valve is located on the top side A of the regulating valve housing 6 4 4 3 Task 37 Adjustment of service brake control Check and adjust when necessary service brake control as ind
400. r The tapered bearings 10 and 11 shall be adjusted to have a clearance of 0 01 to 0 1 mm 13 12 11 10 1 shaft 2 crown wheel 3 lock plate 4 bolt 5 washer 6 tube 7 bushing 8 cover 9 axle shaft 10 bearing 11 bearing 12 carrier 13 sun gear Figure 3 6 2 Rear axle final drive adjustments 97 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 6 7 Differential lock mechanism 3 6 7 1 General information The electrohydraulically controlled differential dog clutch is mounted on the splined bushings 2 and 6 figure 3 6 3 of the driven gears 1 7 of final drives and consists of a half clutch 4 secured on the bushing by a pin 3 and a shifting half clutch 5 fitted on splines of a bushing 6 and contolled by the electrohydraulic system The differential is locked by way of the half clutch 5 shifting under the influence of the fork 13 moved by the piston 11 as the oil is supplied under pressure to channel A of the rear axle upper cover 14 The piston with the fork and Belleville springs 12 are mounted in a bracket 8 attached to the rear axle cover As the half clutches are tuned on the splined bushings 2 6 and the pinions of the planetary final drives close with each other The differential is unlocked automatically under the influence of the Belleville springs 12 as the channel A opens into the drain pressure relieved 3 6 7 2 Differential lock mechanism adjustment The adjustments are not
401. r 15 and by the emergency air pressure sensor 16 The system is provided with a condensate drain valve 3 for drain of condensate from the tanks 12 The condensate is drained thanks to deviation of a pusher sideway and up by a ring The air is bled from the pneumatic drive for tire inflation etc through the air bleed valve 14 of the pressure regulator 13 113 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 10 4 2 Check and adjustment of single line and double line brake valves of the pneumatic system 3 10 4 2 1 General information ATTENTION MAKE ADJUSTMENT OF BRAKE VALVE DRIVES WITH THE SER VICE BRAKE PEDALS NOT PRESSED AND THE PARKING BRAKE COMPLETELY TURNED OFF BOTH BEING PREVIOUSLY ADJUSTED ATTENTION CHECK AND IF NECESSARY ADJUSTMENT OF THE SINGLE LINE AND DOUBLE LINE BRAKE VALVES OF THE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT AFTER ADJUSTMENT OPERATIONS OF SERVICE BRAKE CONTROL AND OF PARKING BRAKE CONTROL HAVE BEEN CARRIED OUT 3 10 4 2 2 Check and adjustment of the single line brake valve actuator of the pneumatic system RI La e oh ch alt fork 5 pin 6 lever Figure 3 10 4 Check and adjustment of the single line brake valve of the pneumatic system Check and if necessary adjustment of the brake valve actuator of single line pneumatic drive shall be carried out in the following order 1 Connect a pressure gage with scale division of not less than 1 MPa to the con necting head with black cover of the tractor pneumati
402. racket 5 on the one end and their rods are connected to a lower link unit 2 mounted on a shaft in the lower part of the bracket 5 The upper link 1 is attached to the upper part of the FLL bracket 5 with a pin 1 upper link 2 lower link unit 3 hydraulic cylinder 4 towing device 5 7 bracket 6 turnbuckle 8 strip 9 beam 10 high pressure hose 11 linch pin Figure 3 20 1 Front lift linkage 3 20 2 Rules of shifting FLL from operating position to transport position The FLL is shifted from the operating position to the transport one in the following order remove the upper link 1 figure 3 20 2 from the bracket 5 and mount in a bracket 4 located on the left side strengthening strip 8 remove pins 3 from the hole A of the lower link unit 2 turn the links 6 with grips around the pin 7 till the holes A in rotating ends of the links match with the holes B in link unit put the pin 3 in matched holes B jm a 1 upper link 2 a lower link unit 3 pin 4 5 bracket 6 link 7 pin 8 strip Figure 3 20 2 Transport position 143 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 20 3 Rules for coupling agricultural machines with FLL Coupling of agricultural machines with FLL is the same as with RLL The pivot joints of lift linkage lower links should be placed on a lower axle of the ag ricultural machine Drive slowly to the machine with max lo
403. rake and lock the rear wheels at the front and at the back Make sure the machine is securely fixed Make sure the safeguards of the front and rear PTOs are mounted and if the PTO is not used put back the cap of the PTO shaft end extension Do not wear loose clothes when working with the front and rear PTOs or near rotat ing equipment To avoid breakdown of the tractor or the agricultural machine turning the tractor as sembly is possible only after the working units of the machine have been fully raised from the ground When the tractor assemblies are operating in a column they shall have an interval not less than 30 m between each other Depending on operation conditions use natural ventilation of the cab or the unit of air cooling and heating During tractor operation the operator shall use standard means of protection for hearing organs In case the tractor assembly is operated or is driven in an area of power transmis sion lines a distance between the top of the tractor assembly and wires shall conform to table 4 8 Table 4 8 Line voltage KV up to 20 25 110 154 220 330 500 Horizontal distance m not less than 15 2 4 6 Vertical distance m not less than 1 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 3 2 Fire safety measures The tractor shall be equipped with fire fighting equipment i e a shovel and a fire ex tinguisher Operating the tractor without fire fighting equipment is forbidden Never fuel the tractor with the engine
404. raulic systems engine exhaust pipe and inlet air purifier pipe relative openings after starter removal and other cavities through which atmospheric precipitation may get inside inner cavities of a tractor assembly units with caps polyethylene film sacks or other special accessories Set shift levers and pedals to a position excluding spontaneous engagement of tractor units and implements Only pneumatic tires unloaded are allowed for outdoor storage on tractors resting on supports Tire surface should be covered with protective agent Tires pressure should be decreased up to 70 of the standard Clean exterior surfaces of the hydraulic system flexible hoses off mud and oil Hoses may be kept on the tractor In this case they are coated with protective substance or wrapped with insulating material wax paper polyeth ylene film etc Cabin hoods and doors should be closed During long term storage in a cold season lubricate cylinder mechanism located in a button 3 Figure 3 24 4 of the door lock knob by way of injection of agents HG 5503 HG5501 WD 40 Maintenance during storage includes checking if machines are properly placed on supporting blocks plates absence of cocking completeness air pressure in tires air tightness state of anticorrosion coatings protective grease paint integrity absence of cor rosion integrity and strength of sheathes and covers Detected defects should be cor rected Tractor technological maintenanc
405. rculate hydraulic brake fluid drive system due to dent or clog through the hydraulic system ging Oil leakage through O rings of hy Replace O rings in hydraulic amplifier draulic amplifier Insufficient clutch pedal travel Rotating yoke 5 Figure 3 3 4 and bolt 3 extend pedal striking cab wall clutch pedal full travel Adjust clearance space between main cylinder pis ton and piston follower according to clause 3 3 4 1 Adjustment of clutch control Circulate hydraulic brake fluid through the hydraulic system Full stroke of clutch lever 34 and hydraulic ampli fier piston stroke accordingly when the clutch pedal is fully depressed shall be not less then size W No clutch pedal force There is an air in hydraulic system or cups or O ring in main and operating cylinder are worn out Replace cups and O rings in main and operating cylinder Check if cylinder bearing surface has sharpened edges ridges or pits Circulate hydrau lic brake fluid through the hydraulic system inder and lever 34 Figure 3 3 4 cylinder and lever 34 by shifting plate 13 before are out of alignment tightening of bracket 28 bolts and lengthen 278 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 2 Possible failures in gearbox and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures in gearbox and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Failure l Troubleshooting external manifestations cause Tractor won t
406. re Qualification and experience of the tractor operator are of great significance for pro viding of possibility to move in the field with variable physical and mechanical composition or in road sections with variable relief or when the weather conditions are changed As a rule on the peat bog soils the soil supporting capacity declines with depth in creasing It can be seen in perennial grasses mattal winter stubble field and in sites with high level of ground waters In this conditions when the tractor operating weight is in creased by ballasting and additional loading of the implement coupled depth of the track rolling and slipping resistance escalates sharply that is drawbar features are reduced along with the track deepening 5 12 2 Ways of changing of drawbar features and passing ability of the tractors Drawbar features of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 can be changed as follows increase in adhesive weight of the tractor increase in tire traction to the ground Increase in adhesive weight of the tractor can be achieved by virtue of application of hinge mounted quick detachable ballast filling up the tires with water solution Increase in tire traction to the ground can be achieved by virtue of selection of optimal tire pressure depending on the operation conditions and load on the tractor axles application of the rear axis differential blocking wheels doubling 5 12 3 Application of hinge mounted quick
407. re use In the specified case of the tractor application exact amount of load fallen on the front and rear wheels shall be determined by practical weighing of the tractor with the im plement coupled Load per one independently taken wheel shall be determined by halving of load amount fallen within the front and rear tractor axis accordingly Then on the basis of the received load amount and driving speed the required pressure is selected 219 2022 5 0000010 OM Change of rated loading per tire depending on the speed is applied in cases when the tire is not operated for a long time with high torque on the driving wheels Tabular fig ures on the loads at 30 km h shall be applied only in conditions not requiring great efforts for example in course of the seeding and harvest implements coupling Tire pressure in excess of 0 16 MPa and under 0 09 MPa shall better not be used 5 12 9 Application of rear axle differential blocking The tractor rear axle differential provide means for driving wheels rotation with dif ferent rate that is necessary for moving along the curvilinear trajectory and along the rough road when right and left rear driving wheels travel over different distance for the same time period Differential ability to transmit overall torque to a lagging non slipping wheel ensures high passing ability and improvement of adhesion of tractor wheels in difficult conditions Tractor operation with differential blocked on a firm and
408. reduction housing 10 and consists of a piston 24 a friction disk 6 and a thrust disk 25 The friction disk 6 is installed on splines of the drum 5 As pressure is fed into the brake booster the piston 24 compresses the disks 6 and 25 braking the drum and the PTO end extension The axial clearance in the tapered roller bearings 18 shall not exceed 0 1 mm The adjustment is carried out matching rings 19 The nut 21 is tightened with a torque of 220 N m Setting the PTO speed switch into position standard mode figure 3 3 6 by replac ing the end extensions as specified above two standard turning speeds of PTO extension are obtained 540 and 1000 rpm Setting the PTO speed switch into position economy mode by replacing the end extensions two additional turning speeds of PTO extension are obtained 770 and 1460 rpm 99 2022 5 0000010 OM Old Jeey 1 Z ainbi4 Buds Zz uojsid yoynjo UONOW 97 YySIP snay GZ uO SId eyeig pz see BALIP z e3 UBALIP Ze nu z wausem Oz Buu 6 Huneaq 1 01 parade g Hulusng 4 uoisuazx pus yeys sjqeebueuo 9 deo G bul S 9 y IQUSEM SnI 1409 Z ebeo p Huisnoy 0 e986 peipawa u 6 19101 Q 48 US0 Jeip w UI 7 ySIP USALIP Byesg 9 WNP G ySIP SAWP YOINID UONOW y YSip UBALIP YOINJO uopo E yeys sAUp Z yN Bulyoums
409. ressing the button 3 activates graphical displaying of parameters in the course of time functions as parameter analogue recorder The required parameters are chosen with a sequential pressing the button 3 as per table 2 5 A temporary net can be adjusted in a configuration menu from 2 10 or 30 min to 1 2 4 or 8 hours To enter the configuration menu it is necessary to press the button 5 for more than 3 sec Also it is possible to choose metric and British units of measurement in this menu among available languages it is possible to choose English Spanish Swedish French German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian ATTENTION ONLY DEALERS ARE AUTHORISED TO CHANGE SETTINGS OF CONFIGURATION MENU When errors faults are detected during operation the monitor produces a sound signal and a rhombic flashing window with an exclamation mark appears on the screen After the button panel has been called up a list of active errors faults is invoked with the button 4 Moving over the list is carried out with the button 1 and 2 To exit displaying of the lift of active errors it is necessary to confirm reception of all errors by pressing the button 3 After the errors stop to come into the display they are automatically deleted from the list 38 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 9 Engine control panel The engine control panel is introduced in figure 2 9 1 Location of heater activation relay 1 button switch of testing activation
410. riven gear 2 bolt 3 13 axle shaft gear 4 17 brake 5 25 tube 6 19 pinion drive shaft 7 16 cage 8 roller bearing 9 15 rear axle drive pinion 10 11a 12a differential body 11 differential cross 12 satellite gear 14 tapered roller bear ing 18 cover 20 satellite gear 21 roller 22 satellite gear center 23 driven gear 24 42 semi axle 26 washer 27 set of gaskets 28 bolt 29 lock plate 30 sun gear 31 carrier 32 crown wheel 33 driven gear bushing 34 movable dog clutch 35 unmovable dog clutch 36 rear axle body 37 rear PTO 38 driven gear 39 driven gear bushing 40 43 shaft 41 44 cage 45 bearing Figure 3 6 1 Rear axle cross cut 95 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 6 2 Main drive The main drive is bevel with spiral teeth it consists of a driving bevel gear made as all in one piece together with the GB secondary shaft and a driven gear 1 figure 3 6 1 secured by bolts 2 between the differential bodies 10 11a 12a The main drive backlash shall stay within 0 25 to 0 55 mm The tooth contact shall make not less than 50 of surface with print location in the tooth middle part or closer to cone vertex The backlash shall be adjusted before installing the final drives by way of re locating gaskets from under the cage 7 and 16 flanges without changing their total num ber 3 6 3 D
411. rizontal plane degrees not less than 8 Connecting pindiameter mm 8 Connecting pindiameter mm pin diameter mm 10 Connection point of a protective mean to the tractor Lifting device bore 1 Implement accessory ATTENTION MOUNTING OF COVER PLATE TO DRAW BAR BOTTOM WITH OVERTURN TO REDUCE HEIGHT OF YOKE POSITIONING AGAINST SUPPORTING SURFACE IS NOT ALLOWED 197 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 4 6 5 Drawbar hitch DH 1 Lower link right Lower link left Figure 5 4 5 Installation scheme of DH 1 Table 5 7 Basic parameters u coupling dimensions of DH 1 Standard size configuration DH 1 crossbeam 1 Mounting location On a suspension axis of rear lift link age 2 Design features Draw crossbeam on suspension axis of rear lift linkage For connection and coupling of trailed semitrailed and semimounted implements equipped with towing yokes and connection pin axis mm a E pin mm 6 Vertical load on DH in hitch point KN not more than 7 7 Protective mean type mean 7 Protective mean type Safety chain rope 8 Connection point of a protective mean to the tractor Lifting device bore 1 Implement accessory 198 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 5 Usage patterns of tractor hydraulic system for driving of operated parts and other elements of unitized hydraulically operated machines and aggregates Hydraulic control system for implements mounted on tractor BELARUS 2022 5 provide
412. rol to the first section of the hydraulic valve group having the fixed position uplift is not reasonable as this section is intended to control the hydraulic units of coupled machines having a hydraulic drive with permanent oil circulation hydraulic motor 51 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 16 Controlling sections of the HLL valve group remote cylinders 2 16 1 HLL pump control The HLL pump is located on the coupling clutch body to the right The HLL pump switching shaft 1 figure 2 16 1 has two positions shaft on the shaft is turned clockwise against the stop shaft off the shaft is turned contraclockwise against the stop Before turning the shaft 1 to any of 2 two positions loosen a bolt 3 by 1 5 2 revo lutions and turn the shaft 1 together with a locking plate 2 Tighten the bolt 3 1 shaft 2 locking plate 3 bolt 4 pressure adjustor in pneumatic system Figure 2 16 1 HLL pump control Note The figure 2 16 1 shows the position HLL pump on ATTENTION THE PUMP SHALL BE TURNED ON AND OFF ONLY WITH THE MIN IDLE SPEED OF THE ENGINE In case failures in HLL occur that lead to oil leakage out of the hydraulic lift linkage the pump shall be turned off when moving the tractor to repair facilities 2 16 2 HLL valve group section control The control handles are located on the right lateral console of the cab The handles have the following positions neutral lo
413. rs Ea CAN L Figure 7 14 2 CAN cable structure Control over engine operation is carried out by data display monitor integrated elec tronic panel integrated indicator and instrument cluster In the present subsection methods for troubleshooting of engine management system integrated indicator and instrument clus ter are covered Only dealer is allowed to diagnose and eliminate malfunctions in data dis play monitor and integrated electronic panel Integrated indicator P1 is connected to CAN cable by means of instrument board cable and displays the following engine operational parameters engine shaft revolution instantaneous flow rate of fuel accumulated elapsed time of engine operation tractor on board circuit voltage low coolant level in cooling system 314 2022 5 0000010 OM Instrument cluster P2 is connected to CAN cable by means of instrument board ca ble and displays the following engine operational parameters engine oil pressure engine oil pressure alarm lamp responds on the basis of in formation of the signal temperature of coolant in the engine engine coolant temperature alarm lamp re sponds on the basis of information of the signal In case there are no signals generated by engine control unit ECU with the motor running and transmitted to multifunction display of Il a message C BUS is displayed In this case correct the trouble as indicated in clauses specified below 7 1
414. running Do not smoke when fueling in the tractor Do not fuel the tank to the max Leave some volume for fuel to expand Never add petrol or mixtures to engine fuel This combination may create increased danger of inflammation or explosion Places for tractor parking storing of fuel and lubricants shall have a plowed around band of not less than 3 m width and also be provided with fire extinguishing means The tractor must be filled with fuel and lubricants by a mechanic way and with the engine stopped Use lighting at night time It is not recommended to fill in tanks using buckets Carrying out repair operations in field conditions using electric gas welding clean parts and assembly units from plant remains Prevent the manifold and muffler from getting dirty with fuel thatch etc Avoid thatch winding around rotating parts of the implements coupled with the trac tor Washing parts and assembly units with kerosene or gasoline take care to exclude a possibility of inflammation of flushing fluid vapor Do not operate the tractor in places subjected to fire risk with the hood and other protective units removed from hot parts of the engine Do not use open fire to warm up oil in the engine sump to fill in fuel tanks to burn out dirt in a radiator cell In case a fire bed occurs pour some sand onto it cover with canvas cloth sack cloth or other dense texture Use a carbon dioxide fire extinguisher Do not pour water over burning fuel a
415. s The cab has two doors opening backwards that make easier access to operator s position The doors are hinged to the frame The door in an open position is fixed by pneumatic lifts The left and the right doors are opened from outside by pressing a handle button 3 fig ure 3 24 4 From inside the door is opened by shifting a lock lever 2 figure 3 24 3 The locks of the left and right door are blocked only from inside the cab by putting a detent 1 figure 3 24 4 in up position with the door closed From outside the left door can be opened turning the key 2 by 180 and pushing the button 3 To lock the left door from outside it is necessary to turn the key by 180 in an opposite direction To adjust the door positioning relative to the door aperture the following shall be done loosen bolts 1 figure 3 24 5 fastening hinges 2 to the cab frame supports find an effective position of the door a positive minimum allowance between the door contour and the door aperture contour should be 2 mm tighten the bolts adjust position of the catch 4 figure 3 24 4 having loosened bolts 3 figure 3 24 3 moving the catch in a vertical plane achieve optimal up down position relative to the lock Ad just the door adjoining to the door aperture in a horizontal plane moving the catch to or from the lock there should be no gaps between door weather strip and the door aperture Turning a pusher 6 figure 3 24 4 together with a key 2 by 180 shifti
416. s been assembled and the cover 6 has been mounted on the transmission in the following order turn the drum 1 and set put it into position I when the jaws of the half clutch 2 and the drum 1 are fully closed the pusher 3 is projected into the extreme position mount the initial number of the adjusting shims 4 five or six pieces under the end surface of the switch 5 removing one adjusting shim 4 achieve the switch position when its contacts are closed put the half clutch 2 into position II when the jaws of the half clutch 2 and the drum 1 are fully opened the pusher 3 is recessed to the extreme position check opening of the switch 5 contacts in position H The switch is considered correctly adjusted if its contacts are closed in position and opened in position II Check per the pilot lamp It is possible to check per the annun ciator on the dashboard with the FDA drive control button in the upper position ATTENTION IN POSITION IP THE DIMENSION A FROM THE PUSHER 3 END SURFACE FIGURE 3 13 5 TO THE SWITCH 5 END SURFACE BEING BELOW 11 5 MM IS NOT PREMITTED VIOLATION OF THIS REQUIREMENT MAY RESULT IN SWITCH BREAKDOWN 122 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 13 Electronic system for rear axle differential lock control front driving axle drive control front and power take off shaft control 3 13 1 Rear axle differential lock control Elements of electronic rear axle DL control system are shown in
417. s manufac turers documentation In the short run for the PTO shaft operated with no load For the implements transport position when the PTO shaft is disabled 213 2022 5 0000010 OM 14 In case of mounted and semimounted implements operation with the cardan drive block the lower links of the lift linkage 15 After the cardan shaft dismounting it is necessary to put guard hoods on the PTO shaft end extensions and PRS 16 After the PTO shaft is disabled consider the hazard of the cardan shaft and indi vidual mechanisms of the implement coupled coasting Therefore the dangerous area be tween the tractor and the implement can be entered only after the PTO shaft is completely despinned 17 Check for operation of the implement with the cardan shaft mounted to the PTO shaft and PRS at the minimum and maximum rpm of the tractor engine shaft 18 At transporting of the tractor with the trailed semitrailed and semimounted im plements for considerable distances including from one field to another disconnect the cardan shaft from the tractor and from the implement 19 Maintenance cleaning and repair services of the implement with the cardan drive coupled to the tractor shall be carried out only when the PTO shaft and the tractor engine are disabled The PTO shaft shall be disabled in the following cases after the tractor has been stopped but only after the implement coupled has came full duty cycle on turns when
418. s means for oil extraction for operation of the implements coupled Meanwhile the following variants are possible oil extraction by unilateral and bidirectional hydraulic cylinders hereinafter referred to as hydraulic cylinders replenishment of oil volume in a tank caused by flooding of cylinder and fittings chambers shall be assured after trial of performance of the hydraulic system of the tractor with an implement oil extraction for hydraulic motors drives hereinafter referred to as hydromotors While operating hydraulically operated machines with hydraulic motor its drain pipe must be connected to a special tractor output to ensure free oil drain into the tank by passing integrated unit ATTENTION FOR ENSURING OF THE REQUIRED ROTATIONAL SPEED OF THE HYDROMOTOR OF THE IMPLEMENTS COUPLED CERTAIN OIL SUPPLY IS NECESSARY HYDRAULIC FLUID FEEDING ON THE TRACTOR BELARUS 2022 5 DEPENDS ON THE ENGINE RPM THEREFORE IMPLEMENT HYDRAULIC DRIVE MUST BE EQUIPPED WITH ITS OWN FLOW ADJUSTING VALVE In case of use of outputs of tractor hydraulic system for maintenance of the imple ment coupled it is necessary to ensure the required volume of oil in a tank Extraction of oil by cylinders of the implement coupled should not exceed 10 liters Excessive oil extraction during coupling causes load increase on hydraulic system of a tractor At long term use of a hydraulic drive it is necessary to track a temperature range in a hydraulic system
419. se of mismatch turn the guide 2 clockwise or contraclockwise till the holes match put the linch pin 3 in the hole and secure with a spring clip 139 2022 5 0000010 OM The setup turnbuckle unlocked shall be carried out in the following order turn the guide by 90 and match the groove on the guide 2 with the hole in the slide piece 4 turning the guide 2 place the hole in the slide piece 4 on the center of the groove adjust the right and the left turnbuckles put the linch pin 3 in the hole and secure with the clip 1 screw 2 guide 3 linch pin 4 slide piece Figure 3 18 2 Turnbuckle ATTENTION AS THE TRACTOR OPERATES WITH A PLOUGH IT IS NECES SARY TO USE THE SETUP TURNBUCKLE UNLOCKED AT TRANSPORT OPERA TIONS THE SETUP TURNBUCKLE LOCKED SHALL BE USED IT IS PROHIBITED TO USE THE TURNBUCKLE WITHOUT SECURING THE SLIDE PIECE IN THE GUIDES BY MEANS OF THE LINCH PIN 3 18 3 Arm The arm consists of a screw with a joint 1 a tube 2 a yoke 3 a forelock 4 a pin 5 a washer 6 lock nuts 7 figure 3 18 3 The adjustment of the arm length is carried out in the following order turn lock nut 7 off change the arm length by turning the tube 2 clockwise or contraclockwise as the arm length is adjusted lock the screw connection with the lock nut 7 The arm is adjusted in the following way when the tractor operates with all mounted and semi mounted agricultural ma chi
420. shall not be lower than 10 mm from mark M When necessary turn off a cap 3 Figure 6 4 35 of oil filler and refill the oil up to the required mark H Normal oil level is considered to be between 5 mm from mark TT 1 oil level gauge 2 GB centrifugal oil filter Figure 6 4 1 Check of oil level in the transmission line 6 4 1 3 Task 2 Check of oil level in the HLL tank Before checking the oil level set the tractor on the flat horizontal ground Lower RLL links to the lowermost position Stop the engine and put the parking brakes on Carry out visual inspection of the oil level according to the oil level pointer 3 Figure 6 4 2 on the tank Level shall be between marks O and T of the oil level gauge When necessary refill the oil up to the TI mark through an oil filler opening for which turn off the plug 1 When tractor is operated coupled with implements with higher oil consumption fill the oil up to mark C of the oil level gauge with retracted rods of hydraulic cylinders of the implement coupled with tractor gt l 2 3 1 oil filler plug 2 HLL tank 3 oil level pointer Figure 6 4 2 Check of oil level in the HLL tank ATTENTION OIL LEVEL CHECKING OPERATIONS IN THE HYDRAULIC LIFT LINKAGE TANK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY WITH THE RETRACTED ROD OF FLL RLL HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS AND CYLINDERS OF THE IMPLEMENTS COUPLED WITH THE TRACTOR 231 2022 5 000001
421. sic speed modes operating and optional are used The operating mode is basic Change of operating speed influences on the quality of technological process performance according to agrotechnical requirements In the imple ments operation manuals operation speed tolerance ranges are specified for each individ ual implement model Any change of operating driving speed of the tractor with the imple ment coupled including operative maneuvering at working operation is allowed only within the limits determined by agrotechnical requirements Usually reference operation speed within the given limits is established in combination with width of cut and depth of process ing planting of the implement Optional mode is defined by the tractor driving speed with the implement coupled on the nearest transportation facilities at idle soeed on turns and crossings with working attachments disengaged Speed mode of the tractor with the implement on the nearest transportation facili ties is limited by safety requirements mostly As a result of relatively short duration of turns ne cessity to comply with instructions on traveling speed limitation during crossing from one field to the other relative tractor traveling speed at idle speed is often close to the operating speed In case the implement for coupling is determined the only thing to do is to determine operating speed and the corresponding gear Operating speed of the tractors during their operation i
422. signment and operation principle of integrated indicator gauges 32 2 3 Pilot lamps of the integrated INdICAtOM ccc ccc cece cece eee eee ee seen eeseaeeeeens 35 2 7 4 Description of testing the integrated indicator performance 00e0e 36 ZO MMLOFMAUOM CIS play oie isirsatounnirnasseyetetet asta a ian buannatinndae tates 36 2201 Geile la MO Atl Ol cesia a na r a EERE 36 2 8 2 Adjustment of brightness and sharpness of the information display 36 2 8 3 Call up of changeable images and parameters on the screen of the information dS DIIY statcececeacsennessescecscanseneecasoanasanenassocoh oasien aa O E O AEE 37 2 ENGING CONUO DAMON essre renan ENa ATA 39 ZNO EEN a a e A A A 39 2 10 1 General information ssssrrrrnnnnrrreeeeessenrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreereeeerrrernre 39 2 10 2 Steering wheel adjustments 0c cece cece cece eee e nese eee eeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaes 40 211 Pakng Drake COM UOl aiz4 a tcoatenavainennasaiatanes shintanaaanaentdia REN 40 2 12 Pedals and handle for fuel feed manual Control ccceccee eee eeeeeeee eee eaens 41 2 13 Switching of ranges gears and passes of the gearbox reduction unit ccee eee 41 2131 General MiormatlO Neessen dTa 41 2 1 2 LFAGLOF VEIOCIY GIAGFAIM esirin ekien TE EE EEE TE 42 2 14 Control panel for rear axle DL FDA and FPTO drives Rear power takeoff control 43 214 T General INTOLMAUO
423. sion line up to the normal operating temperature by means of driving the tractor and check oil level Refill new oil up to mark TI if necessary 259 2022 5 0000010 OM A h S a V7 1 transmission drain plugs 2 semi axle tube drain plug 3 filler cap Figure 6 4 35 Change of oil in transmission line WARNING BE CAREFUL IN ORDER TO AVOID CONTACT WITH HOT OIL 6 4 5 5 Task 51 Change of oil in main gear housing and wheel hub drive casing of the FDA Before changing oil warm up the main gear housing up to the normal operating temperature by means of driving the tractor To change oil in the housings perform the following actions place the tractor on level horizontal ground engage the parking brake and lock the wheels against movement fore and aft by anti recoil limit stops excluding tractor self movement The engine must be stopped unscrew level check fill plug 5 Figure 6 4 13 and drain plug 6 of the main gear housing drain the oil from the main gear housing unscrew level check fill plugs 2 and drain plugs 1 of the wheel hub drive casing 3 drain the oil from the wheel hub drive casing 3 screw drain plugs 1 and 6 fill in a new oil through the hole in the level check fill plug 5 up to the lower edge of the hole in the plug 5 in the main gear housing fill in a new oil through the hole in the level check fill plug 2 up to the lower edge of the hole in the plug 2 in the wheel hub driv
424. sm The speed shifting mechanism is mounted in the speed group the fork housing 65 figure 3 4 2 and in the control mechanism case 1 In the cage 53 carriers with the attached forks shifting the first the second and the fifth the sixth speeds are installed The carriers are secured in the cover be means of ball locks The fork position on the carriers is adjusted with the help of hexagon fit bolts and locked with wire 89 2022 5 0000010 OM ja 13 12 1 40 9 1 fork 2 hood 3 sphere 4 spring 5 7 pins 6 case 8 cover 9 shaft 10 spring 11 bolt 12 bushing 13 cover 14 key 15 20 levers 16 switch 17 screw 18 bushing 19 lock ring Figure 3 4 4 Speed shifting mechanism In supports of the cover 13 figure 3 4 4 and the case 6 the shaft 9 is mounted to which the lever 15 and the bushing 12 are attached two bushings 18 and the spring 10 are mounted between the lock rings 19 The bushings rest against the screw 17 and the end of the case 6 with their end surfaces This system serves to set the lever into a neutral position By means of pins 5 and 7 the shaft 9 is connected with the fork 1 to which the speed shifting lever is attached The fork 1 is mounted in the case 6 in the sphere 3 and is supported by the spring 4 The switch 16 is mounted in the orifice of the coupling clutch case and is meant to prevent the synchronizer on the second shaf
425. sphalt concrete paving blocks and etc or the territory is not cleaned from snow and ice ice covered ground is not sanded or covered with special agent in winter slope of work area where loader is to be operated exceeds 8 grades Stop loader operation in the following cases tire puncture or insufficient tire pressure detection of failure in steering hydraulic and breaking system availability of extraneous noises and slap noises in engine chassis loader work ing attachments 228 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 15 3 Information about mounting holes In the present subsection data on availability of mounting holes of tractor which can be used by manufacturers of front loaders for loader installation and also by manufacturer of tractors for installation of various equipment are set forth The mounting holes arrangement scheme for tractor BELARUS 2022 5 is shown in Figure 5 15 2 Parameters of mounting holes are listed in Table 5 15 Table 5 15 Parameters of mounting holes of tractor BELARUS 2022 5 Denomination Ne1 Neo2 Neds Ned Ne5_ M16 7H M16 7H M16 7H M16 6H Length 10 100 835 4 _ ee Denomination Ne6 Nev NeB Ned N10 M16 6H M16 6H M16 6H M16 6H M16 6H Length 14 4h 4 A 4 Be ee ee ee ae eee aa eae Denomination Ne11 Ne142 NO13 Ne44 N15 M16 6H M16 6H M16 6H M16 6H M16 6H ee eee Denomination Ne16 Net7 NO18 Ne19 Ne20 M16 6H Length BE BF 8
426. st force of springs 3 and 4 so that air pressure in the tank at which a relief valve 6 opens made 0 77 to 0 8 MPa mark this position of the cover 2 using paint applied on a treaded part of the casing and put the cap 1 Slightly open the condensate drain valve in the tank and reduce air pressure to 0 65 0 MPa At this pressure values the valve 6 should close and switch the pneumatic com pressor over to tank filling with compressed air disconnect the test pressure gage from the connecting head 1 cap 2 cover 3 outer spring 4 inner spring 5 filter 6 relief valve 7 safety valve 8 lock nut 9 adjusting screw Figure 3 10 6 Pneumatic system pressure regulator Note Filter 5 figure 3 10 6 is mounted only in the regulator 80 3512010 The other regulators of the pneumatic system do not have the filter mounted 116 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 11 Transmission hydraulic system A transmission hydraulic system circuit diagram is shown in figure 3 11 1 A list of parts of the transmission hydraulic system without FPTO shown in figure 3 11 1 is introduced in table 3 1 Table 3 1 Pat Bump dive EE E Bi __Transmission case o o a Gear pump i Q 25sm rev al een a O ey ee ee eee oo S Ss A2 _ Coarseoilfiter Z o Z oo JIo y O E es es EE _A3__ Distributing filter 80 1737110 _ _ J1 Kal Hvaraulie system vav
427. st of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 FLM Name and designation of fuel and lubrication materials 2 z am z 2 j gt Lan g 3 7 3 z o 5 fgs 2 3 T a 3 E 5 22 2 5 a E z gt F 2 Tae r D yn 2 2 3 or os amp D a Pa B o 2 Z OD op so ay a gl2e 8 z z EE E 2 5 5 lt SEES U Z l S E a E 2 and more and more every shif Diesel fuel Not available Diesel fuel CTB 1658 2006 a EH 590 2004 with sulfur content not with sulfur content exceeding not exceeding 50 50 mg kg 0 005 mg kg 0 005 Grade B At ambient temperature of minus At ambient temperature of minus 5 C and more 15 C and more Diesel fuel Not available Diesel fuel CTB 1658 2006 a ik EH 590 2004 with sulfur content not with sulfur content exceeding not exceeding 50 50 mg kg 0 005 mg kg 0 005 Grade C At ambient pando S S S of minus 20 C D Came S S S more Diesel fuel Not CTB 1658 2006 available with sulfur content not exceeding 50 mg kg 0 005 Grade F Tank for Chemical agent AdBlue AUS 32 STB ISO 22241 1 2009 or analo 201 Each shift chemical gous as agreed upon with RUE MTW agent Ad Blue urea 2 Oils Engine oil i i i 20 5 0 5 crankcase Inclusive of the filter 7 140 05 2 2 Transmis i i i i Engine oil Engine oil 540 5 Sea sion hous gt is the same as SAE 15W 40 ing CC GOST 8581 78 filled in the summer GB and summer engine crank RA case SAE
428. sts of the exhaust pipe 15 figure 3 1 4 the brackets to fix the exhaust pipe to the cab 14 the dampers 13 the guard 16 of the exhaust pipe 15 the metal hose To ensure a required chemical composition of exhaust gas under Stage Tier llIB the system of selective catalytic reduction SCR is additionally installed in the exhaust system The SCR consists of a catalyst 3 a mixing pipe 10 a dosing module injector 8 a feed ing module pump 11 a tank for AdBlue agent urea 2 a bracket to fix the catalyst 12 clamps to fix the catalyst 7 cooling pipelines of dosing module 19 20 and pipelines for warming up Ad Blue tank 23 and 24 AdBlue intake pipeline 21 a pipeline to deliver AdBlue 18 a pipeline to take AdBlue away 22 AdBlue warming up valve 6 guard 17 of the catalyst 3 The SCR operation principle is based on reduction of nitrogen oxide NOx level in exhaust gases to reach a required min level For this reason AdBlue agent is injected in the mixing pipe 10 in front of the SCR catalyst 3 by means of the dosing module 8 The location of the dosing module dimensions and form of the mixing pipe ensure max even distribution of AdBlue agent at the entrance to SCR catalyst In SCR catalyst in presence of the inbuilt catalyst a chemical reaction of NOx reduction to nitrogen N2 and water vapour H20 that are safe for the environment occurs To maintain optimal temperature mode for the chemi cal reaction of reduction and to decrease
429. system 34 handles to control the hydraulic lift linkage valve group 35 rear PTO control lever 36 handle to control fuel supply Notes recirculation shutters are installed on BELARUS 2022 5 tractor upon re quest When FPTO is installed upon request pos 32 console to control rear axle DL drives of FDA and FPTO 2 2 Switches of instrument board 1 starter and instruments disconnect switch 2 left multifunctional underwheel switch 3 right multifunctional underwheel switch 4 emergency flashing switch 5 cen tral light switch 6 switch of front working lights mounted on front lights brackets 7 ac cumulator battery remote disconnect switch Figure 2 2 1 Switches of instrument board The starter and instruments disconnect switch 1 see fig 2 2 1 has four positions 0 off l instruments pilot lamps unit heating plugs are on ll starter is on non fixed position lll radio set is on The layout of positions of starter and instruments disconnect switch is given in fig 2 2 2 and in informational plate of the switch 23 2022 5 0000010 OM Figure 2 2 2 Layout of positions of starter and instruments disconnect switch ATTENTION THE REPEATED SWITCH ON OF THE STARTER IS POSSIBLE ONLY AFTER RETURN OF THE KEY INTO POSITION 0 OF THE SWITCH TO TURN THE STARTER AND INSTRUMENTS SWITCH INTO POSITION IP IT IS NECESSAR
430. system failure or make adjust ment of hydraulic relief valve Replace faulty components pressure sensor or indicating lamp or led lamp Check according to the electric circuit diagram Annex B operability of circuit sensor indicating lamp or sensor led lamp and correct opening in faulty circuit FDA drive is permanently engaged Open circuits leading to the FDA drive control valve solenoid Check the electric circuit for normal operation lead ing to the respective FDA drive control valve sole noid according to the electric circuit diagram An nex B In case an open circuit is detected elimi nate it The FDA drive control valve spool Rinse the FDA drive control valve was blocked abroach Left sensor installation Right sensor installation Pil BR 3202 mm 1 ee 7 2 3 4 i 6 1 1 3 4 brackets 2 angular position sensor 13 DL 5 angular position sensor 25 FDA 6 outer nut 7 inner nut 8 front axle top view Figure 7 3 1 Directive wheels angular position sensors BNT C3 adjustment 281 2022 5 0000010 OM 7 4 Possible failures in rear axle and guidelines for troubleshooting List of possible failures in rear axle and guidelines for troubleshooting are shown in Table 7 4 Table 7 4 Failure external manifestations Troubleshooting cause Improper adjustment of gears en adjust of gears engagement of ma
431. t 1 filler neck of HLL tank 2 HLL oil tank 3 oil level gage 4 arms to control HLL valve group sections 5 valve group BOSCH integrated unit 6 pressure pipe 7 8 11 low pressure oil pipelines 9 free drain clutch 10 drain oil filter 12 high pressure delivery hose 13 oil pipeline for hydraulic cylinder drain 14 HLL oil pump 15 oil pump drive 16 oil tank breather Figure 3 16 1 Location of lift linkage components on the tractor 131 2022 5 0000010 OM Hydraulic circuit diagram of BELARUS 2022 5 HLL with Bosch hydraulic units is shown in figure 3 16 2 1525 503 537 A he j HHP dalia HEA E Ri EHR 3 LS 0521 610 806 Eiht amp 1 1 R 2 F ormas wh lao X bo P W f TT AN LIC oo i 12 E E 7 a B cE i 1 0 2 F WOE meee E R717 007559 A E a _ s A 1 0 Z F i ae a E R97 007559 ee 1525 503 535 m HTT p 20 Mna 25 microns S UF l Distributor in a set with with regulator EHR23 L5 R917 001488 0 HB e 2 Hydraulic cylinders 190x250 3 Pump HII34 Q 60 Vmin 4 Oil tank 5 Drain filter n 1290 rpm H JIR Ri Figure 3 16 2 Hydraulic circuit diagram of HLL for tractors with Bosch hydraulic units 132 2022 5 0000010 OM Hydraulic circuit diagram of BELARUS 2022 5 HLL with the hydraulic unit PI170 1523 1 is shown in figure 3 16 3 EHPHC1 00
432. t and holding a handgrip 2 push the rear screen 3 until the screen is fixed in an opened position To close the rear screen pull the handgrip 2 until the screen 3 is fixed in a closed position 1 handle 2 handgrip 3 rear screen Figure 2 19 3 Rear screen opening 2 19 4 Cab hatch opening Installation of two hatch variants for roof upper part is possible on tractors BELA RUS 2022 5 hatch with a detent hatch with a handle To open the hatch with the detent pull the board 2 figure 2 19 4 down move the detent 3 forward along tractor movement push the board 2 up until the hatch 1 is fixed in an opened position 62 2022 5 0000010 OM To close the hatch 1 pull the board 2 down until the hatch is fixed in a closed posi tion 1 hatch 2 board 3 detent Figure 2 19 4 Opening of hatch with detent To open the hatch with the handle move the handle 2 figure 2 19 5 down and push it up Then fix the hatch 1 in an opened position pressing the handle 2 to the right along tractor movement To close the hatch turn the handle 2 to the position not fixed pressing it to the left along tractor movement Pull the handle 2 down and then turn it to the right along tractor movement until the hatch is fixed in a closed position a hatch closed b hatch opened 1 hatch 2 handle Figure 2 19 5 Opening of hatch with handle 63 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 20 Seat and its
433. t 2 on the cylinder rod by several turns turning the rod 1 of the working cylinder adjust the cylinder length and pin stroke of the working cylinder fork within the necessary limits 106 2022 5 0000010 OM tighten the lock nut 2 attach rod 7 of parking brake actuator If it is not possible to adjust necessary dimensions it is necessary to remove the lever 5 from the brake shaft 6 having preliminary loosened the bolt of the lever 5 hub then put it back having turned by one spline in necessary direction the turn by one spline changes dimensions by 8 mm Adjust the length of right brake working cylinder in the same order 1 j j ose oe genre _ ae A 1 EN i j 4 f _ U ee i ee 1 rod 2 lock nut 3 fork 4 pin 5 lever 6 brake shaft 7 link 8 working cylinder 9 relief valve Figure 3 9 4 Working cylinder length adjustment 4 Bleed the hydraulic system of brake control in the following order fill the tanks 3 4 figure 3 9 5 of the main brake cylinders 1 2 with brake fluid to the Max marks on the tanks to the level of 15 5 mm from the upper face During bleed ing watch the fluid level avoiding its drop below the Min mark latch the brake pedals 5 6 with the interlocking strap A clean the relief valves of the brake working cylinders from dust and dirt remove the caps from them fit a tube onto the head of the breli
434. t from engaging passes L H of the reduction unit when the gearbox speed is engaged ATTENTION TO ADJUST THE SWITCH 16 FIGURE 3 4 4 IT IS NECESSARY TO MOUNT A REQUIRED NUMBER OF ADJUSTING SHIMS IF THE ADJUSTMENT IS NOT EFFECTED BY MOUNTING A REQUIRED NUMBER OF SHIMS THEN IT IS NEEDED TO REPLACE THE SWITCH AND REPEAT THE ADJUSTMENT 3 4 3 3 Range shifting mechanism The range shifting mechanism is installed in the case 54 figure 3 4 2 of the gear box and in the control mechanism case 1 In the control mechanism in supports of the cover 12 figure 3 4 5 and the case 18 the shaft 9 is mounted to which the lever 10 are attached by means of keys The shaft 9 is secured by the ball lock 14 and by means of the pins 5 and 7 the shaft is connected with the fork 1 to which the range shifting lever is attached The fork 1 is mounted in the case 18 in the sphere 3 and is supported by the spring 4 90 2022 5 0000010 OM f u iy Ly 1 fork 2 hood 3 sphere 4 spring 5 7 pins 6 10 levers 8 12 covers 9 shaft 11 sector 13 17 keys 14 ball lock 15 nut 16 bolt 18 case 19 bracket Figure 3 4 5 Range shifting mechanism 3 4 3 4 Mechanism of switching between the higher and the lower passes of the gearbox reduction unit The mechanism of switching between the higher and the lower passes of the gear box reduction unit is mounted on the shifting mechanism cov
435. t or left angular po cording to the diagram Annex B sition sensor accordingly in the course of slowing down the tractor treadling both brake pedals simultane ously FDA drive can not be engaged and rear axle DL can not be disengaged treadling any of the brake pedals Faulty one or both brake actuation Simulate sensors responses one by one by means of contact closure in cable sockets to the sensors Re pedals place the faulty sensor Check the cable for operability according to the electric BK 12 21 failure circuit diagram Annex B Faulty relay in FDA drive enabling circuit Replace the relay and rear axle DL disabling circuit in course of slowing down 280 End of Table 7 3 Failure external manifestations cause 2022 5 0000010 OM Troubleshooting After engine start up indicator of the reducing unit first gear engagement does not light up or after reducing unit top gear is engaged indicator of the reducing unit top gagement does not light Oil pressure in pilot hydraulic sys tem is below 0 8 MPa Faulty pressure sensor HCUM M of GB reducing unit first or top gear accordingly or burned out lamp indicating GB reducing unit en gagement or burned out GB re ducing unit led lamp Opening of circuit leading from sensor to indicating lamp or open ing of circuit from sensor to led lamp Check oil pressure value according to oil pressure indicator in transmission located on gauge board Correct hydraulic
436. t the end of the connecting lines the valve type coupling heads 6 and 7 are in stalled The coupling head valves prevent air loss in case of use of the pneumatic drive without a trailer for example for tire inflation When the trailer brake lines are connected to the tractor lines the coupling head valves open ensuring passage of compressed air from the tractor pneumatic drive to the trailer Hereby it is recommended to connect the pneumatic lines with no pressure in the cylinder 9 of the tractor Tires are inflated through the air bleed valve 11 of the pressure regulator 10 Note Rules on checking and adjustment of the brake valve of the double line pneumatic drive are given in clause 3 10 4 2 3 3 10 4 Combined pneumatic drive of trailer brakes 3 10 4 1 General information The combined pneumatic drive provides brake control of trailers and agricultural machines equipped both with single wire and with two wire pneumatic brake drive as well as tire inflation A diagram for the combined pneumatic drive is shown in figure 3 10 3 3 7 Z 8 2 a e e P4 ae pmi e 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 compressor 2 line from engine intake manifold 3 condensate drain valve 4 brake valve single line 5 connecting line 6 feed line 7 8 9 connecting heads 10 control line 11 brake valve double line 12 tank 13 pressure regulator 14 air bleed valve 15 air pressure sensor
437. t with cotter pin then 14 Check and tighten up if necessary two locking nuts M27x1 5 with left and right headed thread of steering link tube kpyra nm with torque of 100 to 140 N m 263 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 4 6 Maintenance service in every 2000 hours of operation 6 4 6 1 General guidelines Complete the abovementioned tasks and the tasks listed in the present subclause 6 4 6 6 4 6 2 Task 59 Change of coolant in the engine cooling system To change liquid coolant LC in the engine cooling system perform the following place the tractor on level horizontal ground engage the parking brake and lock the wheels against movement fore and aft by anti recoil limit stops excluding tractor self movement The engine must be stopped open plug 10 of expansion chamber 9 Figure 3 1 3 unscrew drain plug 11 of water radiator 4 and drain the coolant screw in drain plug 11 of water radiator fill the coolant through the expansion chamber neck 9 Filling shall be carried out up to the moment when the coolant level in the expansion chamber is below the level of the filler neck upper edge by 50 70 mm start the engine Warm it up to the moment when the temperature of LC reaches 92 to 95 C Stop the engine check the uniformity of upper and lower radiator tanks warming up and radiator core Let the engine cool down check the level of the coolant it shall be below the level of the expansion chamber filler neck upper edg
438. ted by you in different operating conditions main operation and transport During load sensing on the tractor axles the technological load weight for example weight of seeds distributed by a seeder must be considered ATTENTION TO REDUCE OVERLOAD OF THE REAR WHEELS AND FDA DUR ING COMPOUND UNITS COUPLING TOGETHER WITH USE OF RLL AND FLL IT IS NECESSARY TO LIFT RLL WITH THE IMPLEMENT FIRST AND FLL WITH THE IM PLEMENT NEXT GROUNDING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN REVERSE ORDER For finding of a load on the tractor axis by means of weighting on truck scales it is necessary to place the measured axis wheels of the tractor on a weighing platform and other axis wheels shall be kept out of the area of weighting on a level with the platform The following formula is used for load sensing f m f where T is load H Mis mass kg and g 9 8 is gravity acceleration m s Calculation of load on the front tractor axis Ty where T is load on the front tractor axis H M is amount of the tractor operating weight with ballast unit installed distrib uted on the tractor front axis kg g 9 8 is gravity acceleration m s Calculation of load on the rear tractor axis Tz M g where T is load on the rear tractor axis H M is amount of the tractor operating weight with unit installed ballast distributed on the tractor rear axis kg g 9 8 is gravity acceleration m s Calculation of load acting o
439. tem Figure 4 2 2 Tire inflation 72 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 9 Rear wheel track formation The rear wheel track with the wheels of basic configuration 580 70R42 is changed by moving the hub together with the wheel over the axle shaft and by replacing the wheels from one sideboard to the other one To change the rear wheel track perform the following operations put the tractor on a level ground put the stops under the front and rear wheels clean the axle shafts from dirt jack up the corresponding axle tube release four tie bolts 1 figure 3 14 1 of the inserts 3 and 4 two on each insert by three full revolutions The other bolts are to be screwed out Screw the bolts of the inserts in the thread holes for disassembly if it is impossible to squeeze the inserts out by means of disassembly bolts 1 fill kero sene or other liquid penetrant in places where inserts are detached from the hub body wait for some time and then screw the disassembly bolts in simultaneously knocking on the hub body until the inserts fully squeeze out move the hub to a required track use the table 4 5 to set the track K figure 4 2 3 by way of measuring the dimension L from the axle shaft end to the insert end face screw the tie bolts out of the disassembly holes and screw them into the inserts Tighten the bolts with a torque of 550 to 600 N m in several stages until all bolts are tightened with the required torque set the
440. temperature on the mixing pipe surface heat insu lation of the mixing pipe is provided To control temperature of exhaust gases a temperature sensor 9 is mounted on the mixing pipe AdBlue agent is supplied by the feeding module 11 A required quantity of the injected AdBlue agent is controlled by a sensor of exhaust gas chemical composition located behind the SCR catalyst AdBlue agent is filled into a special tank 2 AdBlue warm up pipeline is attached to the tank 2 which is equipped with sensors of AdBlue temperature and AdBlue level AdBlue consumption makes approximately 5 to 10 of diesel fuel consumption To ensure a SCR optimal operation mode as well as SCR opera tion ability under low ambient temperatures heating cooling of some parts and units of SCR system is provided Heating of AdBlue tank and cooling of the dosing module is performed by the en gine cooling system The dosing module is permanently connected to the tractor cooling system and the AdBlue tank is connected by means of electromagnetic valve when re quired The pipelines for urea transportation and pipelines of the feeding module are heated by means of electronic system of engine control when necessary SCR system op eration is functionally linked with the electronic system of engine control 72 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 2 Engine electronic control system The EECS consists of an engine electronic control unit 9 figure 3 2 1 an informa tion display 5 a board of eng
441. ter the engine has been started the lower pass of the reduction unit is engaged by default an annunciator 7 turtle figure 2 14 1 lights up on the panel With the tractor stopped pressing the button 6 figure 2 13 1 on the lever handle en gages the higher pass of the reduction unit Hereby the annunciator 7 figure 2 14 1 turtle goes out and the annunciator 6 hare lights up With the tractor stopped pressing the lower button on the lever handle switches back from the higher pass to the lower pass of the reduction unit The annunciator 6 hare goes out and the annunciator 7 turtle lights up on the panel Simultaneously with lighting up of the annunciators 7 and 6 corresponding annuncia tors on the lever of shifting gears and passes of the reduction unit light up IT IS FORBIDDEN TO SHIFT REDUCTION UNIT PASSES DURING TRACTOR MOVEMENT 43 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 14 3 Front power take off shaft control FPTO if installed is controlled with a switch 11 figure 2 14 1 and a button 9 FPTO engagement indication is performed by an annunciator 10 In initial condition the FPTO drive is disengaged by default the annunciator 10 does not burn To engage the FPTO after the engine has been started it is required to set the switch 11 into position Engaged and press the button 9 After that the annunciator 10 will light up confirming that the FPTO is in engaged condition To disengage the FPTO it is required to s
442. th lock nuts and rear axles washers rope hooks shall be put on front driving axle semiaxles Figure 9 1 1 Tractor roping diagram 9 2 Towing of tractor Towing of tractor with HSC pump disengaged is allowed at a speed of not more than 10 km h for a distance of 5 km Before starting tractor towing set the range selector lever to a Neutral position In order to connect a towing rope there is a towing shackle located on a spacer plate with ballast weights on tractors without FLL basic configuration In order to connect a towing rope there is a towing shackle located on supporting bracket of FLL with ballast weights on tractors with FLL additional configuration THE TOWING SHACKLE MUST NOT BE USED TO LIFT THE TRACTOR ATTANTION DURING TOWING OF THE TRACTOR OBSERVE THE TRAFFIC REGULATIONS RIGIDLY 325 2022 5 0000010 OM 10 TRACTOR DISPOSAL When disposing tractor upon expiration of service operation life it is necessary to Drain and in the established order send for processing oils from engine lubrication system main gear housing and wheel reduction HLL and HSC integrated tank FDA wheel hub drives transmission line FR TO reduction gears and HLL and HSC integrated tank Drain cooling fluid from engine cooling system cabin heating system and send it for reprocessing in a prescribed manner Drain hydraulic brake fluid from break hydraulic control system clutch control sys tem and send it for reproc
443. the an gle above 13 or when any or both brake pedals are depressed Herewith the annunciator 4 goes out The mode DL automatic control is disengaged by setting the switch 5 into position DL disengaged The annunciator 4 will go out Use the mode DL automatic control when carrying out operations with significant relative skidding of rear wheels If there is a necessity of rear axle DL positive engagement for short time irrespec tive of front wheel turning angle it is required to push the switch 5 and hold it pressed in position DL engaged positively The rear axle DL remains engaged during holding the switch 5 depressed Simultaneously the annunciator 4 goes off On releasing the switch 5 the RADL returns to its initial disengaged state and the annunciator 4 goes out IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR WITH RADL ENGAGED WHEN THE SPEED OF MOVEMENT IS ABOVE 13 KM H IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR WHEN TRAVELLING ON ROADS WITH HARD SURFACE WITH RADL CONSTANTLY ENGAGED 45 2022 5 0000010 OM 2 14 6 Annunciation of emergency oil temperature in the hydraulic lift linkage BELARUS 2022 5 tractors manufactured since 2012 can have an annuncitor of emergency oil temperature in the hydraulic lift linkage instead of the blind plug 8 figure 2 14 1 The annuncitor of emergency oil temperature in the hydraulic lift linkage lights up when oil temperature in the hydraulic lift linkage tank exceeds the per
444. the rear axle and is controlled by a cam 3 attached to a turn shaft 2 To install the BOSCH sensor proceed as follows raise the RLL to the extreme upper position herewith the sensor ball shall stay opposite a mark A or a little displaced to a mark B figure 3 16 7 if this is not effected release a screw 1 and turn the cam 3 by a required angle tighten the screw 1 screw the sensor in manually to the end of its thread then turn it out by 0 5 1 0 rev and lock with a nut 5 If the sensor is installed correctly the indicator of the RLL uplift goes out as it the RLL reaches its extreme uplift position ATTENTION DO NOT WRENCH THE NUT 5 OFF IN ORDER NOT TO DAMAGE THE SENSOR 6 MADE OF ALLUMINIUM ALLOY ATTENTION OPERATION OF BOSCH SENSOR IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN A SET WITH A CAM OF BOSCH COMPANY 136 2022 5 0000010 OM 1 screw 2 turn shaft 3 cam 4 cover 5 lock nut 6 position sensor A mark on ascend ing part of the cam Bb mark on descending part of the cam Figure 7 Installation and adjustment of BOSCH position sensor To install the sensor 1 01 of Izmeritel plant proceed as follows raise the RLL to the extreme upper position thread a positioning screw 7 figure 3 16 8 into the rear axle cover 4 against the stop directing it to a hole A on a working surface of a cam 3 tighten a bolt 1 thread the positioning screw o
445. tion pressure and temperature of fuel and air electromagnetic actuating mechanisms fuel governor electromagnetic injection valves electronic unit of control and communication check circuits low pressure pipelines high pressure pipelines fuel fine filters fuel coarse filters System of engine start up is electric starter A means of start up facilitation under low environmental temperatures is a heating plug System of air delivery consists of a turbocharger an air pipeline and a system of charged air cooling The turbocharger is executed as follows radial centripetal turbine and centrifugal single stage compressor with cantilever arrangement of wheels in relation to supports The system of air purification consists of a dry type air cleaner of Donaldson com pany FPG100318 with one paper filtering element P781039 This air cleaner has two stages of purification Cooling system for charged air is of a radiator type The CAC radiator is intended for cooling the air charged into the inlet collector System of engine cooling is closed type with coolant compulsory circulation exe cuted by a centrifugal pump The water pump is driven by a V belt from the crankshaft pul ley For acceleration of engine warming up after start up and for automatic control of a temperature mode at various loadings and ambient temperatures there are two thermo stats TC 107 mounted on the delivery line To provide for a required chemical composit
446. tion be low 15 of total time of tractor running ATTENTION THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OF THE COUPLED MACHINE ELETRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE ALTERNATOR SHALL HAVE FUSES WITH CORRESPONDING RATING 67 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF TRACTOR CONSTITUENTS 3 1 Engine and its systems 3 1 1 Engine The BELARUS 2022 5 tractor is equipped with a diesel engine 260 4 S3B manufactured by JSC Minsk Motor Plant Data on operation procedures maintenance arrangement and elimination of Q 260 4 S3B engine failures is provided in H260 S3B 0000100 engine operation manual attached to your tractor 3 1 2 System of engine air cleaning The BELARUS 2022 5 tractor has an air purifier of Donaldson company FPG100318 of dry type using one paper filtering element P781039 This air purifier has two stages of cleaning preliminary inertia air cleaning in built cyclone It is carried out inside the air puri fier at the cost of tangential intake and centrifugal forces emerging by air spiral rotation with relation to the axis of the case 1 figure 3 1 1 of the air purifier Dust is discharged through a rubber valve 5 mounted on the cover 4 of the air purifier as the engine is stopped and started at the cost of excess pressure emerging inside the air purifier dry cleaning with a main filtering element 6 Air is fed through the air intake 3 The air is delivered to the turbocharger through the air pipeli
447. tion disks 1 figure 3 9 1 with metal ceramic linings five intermediate disks 9 two pressure disks 10 tightened with four springs 2 six steel balls 8 located in drop shaped cups of the pressure disks two pushers 12 with springs 13 a cam 11 a Shaft 7 mounted on two roller bearings 5 with a collar 6 a cover 4 with gaskets 3 fixed with seven bolts to the rear axle tube When pressing the service brake pedal 7 the force is transmitted through the hy draulic actuator system and the cam 11 turns influencing the pushers 12 The pressure disks 9 turn relative to each other and as a result the balls 8 run out of the cups and open the pressure disks The brake disk pack 1 9 10 is compressed and brakes of the shaft on which the brake is mounted The brakes disk lubrication and cooling is effected by means of oil delivery from transmission lubrication system through the hole A The backlash in friction pairs 1 5 0 3 mm is ensured by mounting gaskets 3 in the amount up to 3 pcs 104 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 9 2 Service brake control The service brake control scheme is shown in figure 3 9 2 1 1 right working cylinder 2 right brake lever 3 4 10 13 pipelines 5 left brake pedal 6 right brake pedal 7 main cylinders 8 left brake lever 9 left working cylinder 11 12 flexible brake hoses Figure 3 9 2 Service brake control diagram The brakes control is intende
448. tion documentation on equipment coupled When purchasing new implements for tractor it is necessary to specify the required kitting with the corresponding operating equipment appropriate for coupling with tractor BELARUS 2022 5 For the implements driven from the rear PTO it is necessary to order a cardan shaft of the required length and type according to the coupling dimensions The implements driven from the rear PTO have technical capability of integration with the reducing gear ensuring the cardan shaft rotation clockwise and counterclockwise Therefore when pur chasing the implement explain to the firm representative the necessity to complete the im plement with the reducing gear driven from the cardan shaft with PRS shaft rotating coun terclockwise viewed from the side of the implement drive to the end cardan shaft yoke end 203 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 Third step Test for vertical stationary load on DH or LL lifting power compliance with the load imposed by the implement with regard to the technological load weight Ensure possibility to lift or land the implement coupled by the lift linkage with full op erating weight Note that the load imposed by the implement shall not exceed the LL lifting power values and permissible vertical load on DH specified in the operation manual 4 Forth step Test for vertical stationary load on tractor axles including controllability criterion for additional ballasting requirement Determine by ca
449. tion line sary If the failure can not be eliminated replace the oil suction line Check integrity and replace if necessary suction line hose pipe Check and replace if necessary O ring under foot pipe Water in HLL tank oil became red Change oil whity Lighting up of the lift indicator lo Perform the RLL position sensor adjustment ac cated in the RLL control panel after cording to the Table 7 12 code 22 the lifting is completed means that the RLL position sensor is not ad justed One or more distribution valve con Adjust lever hub on axis ensuring their free trol levers are not in neutral posi movement tion Levers don t go back to neutral position after they were taken off from fixed operating position Low oil level in HLL tank Refill oil up to the required level 303 2022 5 0000010 OM Continuation of Table 7 13 Failure external manifestations Troubleshooting cause Overheating of HLL oil in course of tractor operation with an implement with hydraulic oil motor coupled Wrong choice of hydraulic motor for Adjust engine rom or change hydraulic motor or in the implement Hydraulic motor oil stall hydraulic fluid cooler on hydraulic motor drain consumption should be by 10 15 below pump output flow at engine operating speed Implement delivery pipe or drain Replace pipes by the recommended ones accord pipe have restricted flow passages ing to subsection 5 5 Features of tractor hydra
450. tling of design stipulated protective enclosures or safeguards from the tractor as well as other parts and assembly units which affect its safe operation protective guard of the fan rear PTO enclosure etc The technical condition of the braking system steering controls lighting and indica tion devices and the drive system should conform to safety requirements of relevant stan dards and the present Manual The trailed agricultural machines and harvest trailers shall be fitted with rigid cou pling which excludes swaying and colliding thereof with the tractor during the transporta tion The tractor controls shall be provided with reliable locking in their operative posi tions Keep all the warning tabs of the tractor clean and readable If damaged or lost re place them with new ones Tractor use without availability of the accumulator battery in the electrical equipment system is not allowed The first aid kit shall be completed as per regulations adopted in the territory of the state where the tractor is used 161 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 Tractor use 4 2 1 Boarding the tractor The tractor is boarded through the cab left door To make tractor boarding easier there is a foot step 4 2 2 Preparing for start and starting the engine To start the engine of BELARUS 2022 5 tractor carry out the following actions engage the tractor parking brake if required fill in fuel and bleed the fuel delivery system to remove
451. to a pin 4 tighten the bolts 3 put the cover 2 rofl Zaz ar a ae aF ine dy Ae SO a es il iy J ee lt Ly inal 4 3 1 eccentric bushing 2 rear upper cross member 3 cap 4 nut Figure 3 24 8 Rear screen adjustment 1 lock 2 cover 3 bolt 4 pin 5 rear screen Figure 3 24 9 Rear screen fixation 156 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 24 6 Outside mirrors For position adjustment of a mirror 3 in horizontal plane it is necessary to loosen a bolt 1 figure 3 24 10 move out a tube 2 to a required length and tighten the bolt 1 y 4 1 gt tube Figure 3 24 10 Mirror position adjustment in horizontal plane The mirror rotation angle in horizontal plane is adjusted by turning a bracket Turn ing the mirror body other mirror positions can be achieved left right down up 3 24 7 Roof with opening hatch There are two modifications of the roof In the first modification the hatch in a closed position is secured by a detent 1 figure 3 25 11 of a panel 2 the hatch in an opened position is secured by pneumatic lifts 1 figure 3 24 12 EEEE ne ae Co oD ss RRS nE 1 detent 2 panel Figure 3 24 11 Roof hatch fixation first modification in closed position 1 pneumatic lift 2 hatch Figure 3 24 12 Roof hatch fixation first modification in opened position 157 2022 5 0000010 OM In the second modification th
452. tor on the right side cab post and IEP do not display engine operational parameters For the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting repeat actions listed in cl 7 14 8 2 To that it is necessary to measure voltage check continuity and wires closing from sockets for connection to instruments in cable in the instrument board to engine electronic control unit socket If there are short circuits or breaks of electric connections of CAN cable stop them 315 2022 5 0000010 OM If short circuit is not detected a break of wire and resistance R which is different from 60 3 Ohm nonoperability of engine electronic control unit can possibly occur or interruption of power supply to electronic unit Test for power supply If power supply to engine elec tronic control unit is available contact your dealer for repair or replacement of the unit Note Electric circuit diagram for engine electronic control unit is shown in Annex A 7 14 9 Search and elimination of failures in test instruments located in instru ment board 7 14 9 1 No data is displayed on II and instrument cluster faulty lamps in control in dicator unit a Check SU fuse element for operability in instrument board FU23 25A power supply circuit replace it wnen necessary b SU fuse element for operability in instrument board 7 5A power supply circuit replace it when necessary c Check SU instrument power relay K14 for operability when starter and instru ments switch
453. tractor with rear wheels twinned is presented in subsection 4 2 8 of this manual Operation peculiarities of BELARUS 2022 5 completed with twinned wheels are provided in section 5 Coupling of implements 174 2022 5 0000010 OM 4 2 11 Front wheel track formation The front wheel track is adjusted stepwise both by displacing the wheels from one sideboard to the other and by changing a position of the wheel disk relative to the rim The front wheel track may have the following dimensions 1620 1725 1790 1890 1940 2040 2105 2205 Installation diagrams and track dimensions for tires 420 70R24 basic configuration are given in table 4 7 Table 4 7 Front wheel track adjustment Variants of mounting the Disk offset X sae Description of mounting disk and the rim mm tire 420 70R24 method i 90 1725 Main position The inner surface of the disk mates with the gear group flange and the disk is located from the outer side of the wheel support Ex works condition The rim is displaced relat ing to the disk The inner surface of the support mates with the disk The rim is turned by 180 The disk mates with the eae support inner surface Standard disk mounting with rim displacement The rim is turned by 180 The disk mates with the Support outer surface 2040 175 2022 5 0000010 OM Table 4 7 continued Variants of mounting the Disk offset X Tractor track Description of mounting
454. treme rear position and the lever 22 of the PTO control cock 13 into the lower position changing the length of the stem 5 of the cable by way of screwing the fork 3 in or out having previously loosened the lock nut 11 bring the holes in the fork 3 and the lever 23 of the switch 24 together as well as the holes in the rod 12 and the lever 22 of the PTO control cock connect them by pins 2 and splint after adjustment tighten by means of lock nuts 4 check function of the control mechanism Under the applied pressure of not more than 30 N the lever 1 of the switch shall move without seizure and clearly get fixed in two positions 1 control lever 2 pin 3 fork 4 lock nut 5 cable stem 6 cable 7 8 14 bracket 9 damping device 10 drain hose 11 lock nut 12 rod 13 rear PTO control cock 15 19 gasket 16 brake hose 17 friction clutch hose 18 flange 20 oil supply hose 21 damping device hose 22 lever of PTO control cock 23 switch lever 24 switch Figure 3 7 2 Rear PTO control 101 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 8 Front power takeoff shaft The front power takeoff shaft is mounted on the tractor upon request The FPTO is intended to drive agricultural machines with active working units located on the front lift linkage The front PTO has an independent drive with clockwise rotation of the PTO shaft end extension when looked at its end an
455. ts listed above allow coupling of implements of various machines in structure of MTU machine and tractor unit or tractor mounted units ATTENTION TRACTORS BELARUS 2022 5 ARE DESIGNED FOR COUPLING OF MOUNTED SEMIMOUNTED SEMITRAILED AND TRAILED IMPLEMENTS IN STRUCTURE OF MTU ONLY TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WHICH RELATED TO ABILITY TO BE COUPLED ARE COMPARABLE TO TRACTOR SPECIFICATIONS OTHER APPLICA TION OF TRACTOR IS NOT ALLOWED Selection and buying of agricultural implements fertilizer distributors plungers motor cultivators harrows seeding machines rotary tooling and other implements for tractors BEL ARUS 2022 5 is carried out by the customer itself according to its needs and with considera tion of the implement and tractor performance specifications and also local conditions i e agro technical requirements soil conditions personal experience guidelines of corresponding re gional advisory centers and institutions for agricultural industry ATTENTION GUIDELINES AND DATA ON SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF USAGE OF IM PLEMENTS WITH A TRACTOR AND DATA ON THE RECOMMENDED TRACTOR PER FOMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ARE PRESENTED IN OPERATIONAL DOCUMENTATION FOR IMPLEMENTS COUPLED Possibilities of agricultural tractors applications in the specified use environment are lim ited by tolerance range of force exerted on hook rating and engine power tractor maximum permissible load roadhold of chassis frictional sliding operation dr
456. tumn tions for engine when changing to spring winter operating period summer operating period D Listed in Operation manual supplied with tractor 268 2022 5 0000010 OM 6 6 Safety measures during maintenance and repair operations 6 6 1 General safety requirements It is forbidden to dismount the hood side panels and or open the hood mask of the tractor with the engine running Maintenance repair operations shall be carried out only if the engine is not running and FPTO and RPTO are disengaged Hinged implements shall be grounded the tractor shall be stopped with the parking break Adhere to the safety requirements during application of the lift and carry means During inspection of units under control and adjustment use the portable lamp with voltage of 36V The lamp shall be protected by wire guard Tools and accessories for MS shall be properly operating answer the purpose and ensure safe operation In order to avoid injury be careful draining refilling the coolant from the engine cooling system the hot oil from the engine hydraulic systems of LL and HSC transmis sion bodies and FPTO and FDA reducing gears Avoid contact with hot surfaces of the abovementioned units Mounting and dismounting of the engine shall be carried out by means of a rope fastened to eye bolts on the engine Do not make alterations in the tractor or its separate parts design without sanction of the manufacturing works Otherwise the
457. uit of the heating plug temperature sensor or break age in the heating plug temperature sensor circuit or sensor failure Time of engine pre start heating as well as plug heating after engine start up is set forth in the table 3 3 IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR UNTIL FAILURES OF THE HEATING PLUG SYSTEM ARE FOUND OUT AND ELEIMINATED AS IT MAY LEAD TO DISCHARGE OF ACCUMULATOR BATTERIES Table 3 3 Heating plug operation time depending on engine temperature Engine temperature C Time of engine pre start Time of heating after en heating sec gine start up sec O OD ooo p 1 146 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 22 3 Order of integrated indicator programming 3 22 3 1 Control panel of inteqrated indicator XPT Figure 1 Control panel of integrated indicator The control panel 16 figure 2 1 1 makes it possible to perform manual programming of the indicator by means of Parameter and Value buttons figure 3 22 1 and to change the mode of displaying the parameters to be shown on the LCD A diagnostic connector XP1 located on the front surface of the control panel makes it pos sible to perform automatic programming reprogramming of the integrated indicator Il by means of a special device if provided Should such a device be unavailable the programming shall be performed by means of the above mentioned buttons On BELARUS 2022 5 tractors the XP1 con nector is not enabled 3 22 3 2 Algorithm of integr
458. ulic system use for actuation of mover working attach ments and other components of coupled hydrauli cally operated implements and units of this opera tion manual lost efficiency coefficient through active section of distribu tor spare drain tion valve a HLL pressure loss RLL can not be lifted pressure loss or no pressure of pres sure at external outputs hydraulic system overheating does not occur Locking of differential pressure Perform the following actions control valve overload relief valve rinse the valve in access cap of integrated unit check pressure at any external output which should be 20 0 25 MPa valve rinsing should be carried out at the dealers center by specially trained personnel Spontaneous lowering of RLL lowering without a command received from the instrument panel or remote control buttons Deadlock of the lowering valve of a Failure can be eliminated only by a dealer in a ser regulatory section EHR 23LS if vice centre in the following manner integrated unit BOSCH is installed dismount the electro hydraulic section EHR by unscrewing the nuts of the stud bolts of the integral unit During dismounting procedure pay attention to integrity of the O rings and the shuttle valve OR VALVE both in the regulatory section and in the distribution valve neighboring section disassemble the lowering valve EHR 23LS and rinse its components according to subsection 7 13 3
459. ulty adjustment of the position sensor Disconnect the cable socket from the sensor Unscrew the sensor Lift the LL in an uppermost position by re mote buttons or button lift on the solenoid bottom so lenoid Screw the sensor in by hand as far as it may go and unscrew by 2 turns Connect the cable socket to the sensor Lower and lift in an uppermost position the LL by means of the control panel Lift indicator shall be out If the indicator is still flashing make the position sensor further by 1 6 of a turn Check the system op eration again If it is necessary lift indicator is not out in an uppermost position make the position sensor a lit tle bit further and try to check again If the adjustment was made in a proper manner LL shall be lowered and lifted by means of the control panel to the extreme posi tions The lift indicator shall be out in an uppermost po sition 2 Failure of the position sensor To check the position sensor for proper operation you can dismount it from the tractor According to the elec tric circuit diagram of the RLL control system voltage of 10V should be supplied if the power supply unit is not available a voltage of 12V can be supplied from the ac cumulator battery to output 1 load minus and to the output 3 plus and pressing by a finger the sen sor migrating rod measure the voltage at the sensor output by the testing apparatus between the output 2 signal and t
460. unnunciators 5 or 6 turn on ATTENTION IN ORDER TO AVOID HLL PUMP FAILURE IT IS FORBIDDEN TO OPERATE THE TRACTOR IF ANNUNCIATOR 5 DOES NOT GO OUT AFTER THE IM PLEMENT WAS UPLIFTED ATTENTION AT THE EMERGENCY STOP OF THE TRACTOR IN ORDER TO AVOID FURTHER PENETRATION OF THE AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENT SHIFT THE HANDLE 7 INTO POSITION DISENGAGED AFTER STARTING TO MOVE SHIFT THE HANDLE INTO POSITION LOWERING THE IMPLEMENT WILL PENETRATE TO DEPTH SET UP BEFORE It ls required to know the following operation peculiarities of RLL control system after the engine was started the diagnostics annunciator 9 lights up indicating workability and blocking of the control system to unblock the system it is necessary to set the handle 7 into operating condition for one time uplift or lowering Hereby the diagnostics annunciator 9 goes out after the system is unblocked during first engagement automatic speed limitation for the RLL uplift and lowering is provided for safety s sake Moving the handle 7 into posi tion Disengaged and then into position Uplift or Lowering removes the speed limita tion Besides the functions described above the RLL electronic control system has a mode dampening suppression of oscillations of the agricultural implement in a transport mode Turn on the dampening mode in the following order set the handle 7 into uplift position herewith the RLL lifts up to th
461. upling of the implements with tractors BELARUS 2022 5 is made in several steps 1 First step Preparation and collection of data Read the operation manual carefully Determine main technical characteristics and parameters of the tractor drawbar category nominal drawbar power engine power allowable power of mechanical and hydraulic extraction type and coupling dimensions of DH or LL PTO shaft end extension hydraulic outputs appliance receptacles pneumatic drive of trailer brakes mutual bracing of PTO shaft end extension against axis suspension axis center of LL of connection pin of DH speed ranges admissible track width availability of the required operating equipment gross weight trailer towed axis and tires weight limit Read the operation manual carefully Determine main technical performance char 202 2022 5 0000010 OM acteristics of the implement drawbar resistance power of mechanical PRS electrical and hydraulic extraction coupling dimensions and type hinge strain of draft pole or stub pole connection triangle PRS end hydraulic outputs electrical plug pneumatic head mutual bracing of PRS end butt against suspension axle center of conjunction triangle or hinge strain of draft pole or stub pole modifiability of PRS end type configuration and di rection of PRS end rotation operation speed ranges full operating weight with technologic load availability of brakes availab
462. ut of the rear axle cover screw the sensor 6 in until it stops against the cam then turn it out by 1 rev and lock with a nut 5 If the sensor is installed correctly the pilot lamp of the RLL uplift goes out as it the RLL reaches its extreme uplift position ATTENTION OPERATION OF THE SENSOR Q 1 01 OF IZMERITEL PLANT IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN A SET WITH A CAM OF IZMERITEL PLANT ad 1 bolt 2 turn shaft 3 cam 4 rear axle cover 5 lock nut 6 position sensor 7 positioning screw A location hole Figure 3 16 8 Installation and adjustment of position sensor I 01 of Izmeritel plant 3 16 5 3 Force sensor installation Force sensors 5 figure 3 16 9 are executed as force measuring pins which are put into a bracket 3 and serve as an attachment center for lower links 4 An angular position of the pin in the bracket is determined by a clamp 1 The position sensor pin enters with its flat tened surfaces a groove of the ciano 1 oe on the prac e 3 with bolts 2 i 1 clamp 2 clamp mounting bolt 3 bracket 4 lower link 5 force sensor Figure 3 16 9 Force sensor installation 137 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 17 Indication of emergency states of hydraulic lift linkage On BELARUS 2022 5 tractors produced since 2012 an indicator of emergency oil temperature in the HLL tank may be installed instead of a blind plug 8 figure 2 14 1
463. utton 1 To exit the mode of choosing between the dis played parameters in the upper right corner it is required to press button 5 after activation of the button panel 6 After that the parameters are chosen between with the buttons 1 and 2 After the button panel 6 has been called up a four segment imaging of parameters on the screen 7 is activated with the button 2 After the first pressing the button 2 four pa rameters are displayed in a digital mode on the screen in the upper left corner engine speed in the upper right corner coolant temperature in the lower left corner on board voltage in the lower right corner oil pressure in the lubrication system When pressing the button 2 for the second and the third time four parameters are displayed on the screen in an analog from Using the mode of choosing between displayed parameters the customer can acti vate if necessary displaying of various engine parameters on the screen as per table 1 The mode of parameter choosing is activated after calling up of the button panel with short time pressing the button 5 Sequential pressing the button 1 changes the parameters displayed in the upper left corner pressing the button 2 changes the parameters in the up per right corner button 3 in the lower left corner button 4 in the lower right corner The parameter choosing mode is exited with short time pressing the button 5 As the button panel has been called up p
464. viewed and the Mode but ton has been repeatedly pressed the multifunctional display changes into displaying the cyclic mode of the operating parameters specified before The fault messages are displayed on the LCD screen every time the device is actu ated until the cause is eliminated When the integrated indicator is powered on the multifunctional display shows in formation in the indication mode which has been chosen before the moment of powering off the integrated indicator 2 7 3 Pilot lamps of the integrated indicator The operating principle of pilot lamps on the integrated indicator is as follows pilot lamp to indicate switching on the road lights upper beam 11 figure 2 7 1 lights up when switching on the upper beam indicators of tractor turns and trailer turns 13 and 12 operate in a flashing mode when actuated with the underwheel multifunctional switch 2 figure 2 2 1 or when the emergency button 4 is pushed in pilot lamp to indicate the parking brake is enabled 14 figure 2 7 1 operates in a flashing mode with 1 Hz frequency when the parking brake sensor goes off pilot lamp to indicate increased on board voltage 15 gets activated when the trac tor on board supply voltage goes up above 19V and goes out when the voltage falls below 17V 35 2022 5 0000010 OM pilot lamp to indicate low level of coolant It is not used on BELARUS 2022 5 tractors ATTENTION WHEN THE TRACTOR ON BOARD SUPPLY VOLT
465. wered grips of the lower links till the grip mouth is situated under the joints on axle of the machine For coupling it is nec essary to lift up front ends of the links until the pivot joints are fixed in lower links grips Mount the linch pin 11 figure 3 20 1 Attach the upper link 1 figure 3 20 3 with pin 2 to the agricultural machine simul taneously screwing in or out the screwed parts with pivot joints having previously loos ened lock nuts 3 and 4 Further adjustment of the machine operating position is carried out with the machine coupled at the expense of changing the length of the upper link 1 figure 3 20 1 turning a tube 1 figure 3 20 3 by the handle After adjustment tighten the lock nuts 3 and 4 1 tube 2 pin 3 4 lock nut Figure 3 20 3 FLL upper link 144 2022 5 0000010 OM 3 21 All purpose drawbar hitch In basic configuration of BELARUS 2022 5 tractor the drawbar hitch of lift type in cludes a yoke TSU 3V Against order the tractor may be equipped with a yoke TSU 2V a draw bar TSU 1M 01 and a Python unit TSU 2R The yoke TSU 38V is intended for operation with two wheel and four wheel trailers It consists of a towing yoke 4 figure 3 21 1 with a kingpin 5 and side bars 2 The yoke is se cured in a bracket 1 by means of a pin 3 with a key The yoke position can be changed up down by means of moving in the guides of the bracket and also by way of turning the TSU 3V round the
466. wering floating and uplift The handle 3 controls a left section of the valve group as viewed along tractor movement left rear outlets of the hydraulic system It can be fixed in positions floating and neutral When set into positions lowering and uplift the handle shall be held with a hand when released the handle will automatically return to neutral position The handle 2 controls a middle section of the valve group middle rear outlets of the hydraulic system It can be fixed in positions floating and neutral When set into posi tions lowering and uplift the handle shall be held with a hand when released the handle will automatically return to neutral position The handle 1 controls a right section of the valve group right rear outlets of the hy draulic system It can be fixed in positions floating neutral and uplift When set into position lowering the handle shall be held with a hand when released the handle will automatically return to neutral position For the valve group of BOSCH company the handle 1 will automatically return from the uplift position as the automatic return pressure is reached 17 5 to 19 5 MPa Your tractor can be equipped with a valve group of the hy draulic unit PI170 1523 1 where the handle 1 does not have a mechanism of automatic re turn from the uplift position In this case as the uplift op
467. witch SA2 If power is supplied replace motor reducer M5 7 14 6 3 Windscreen washer of front M3 or rear M6 window a Check operability of corresponding fuse element FU21 and FU6 in SU Replace fuse element if it is faulty b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on electric motor of washer reservoir pump when windscreen washer switch is on and availability of ground on electric motor M3 or M6 of reservoir If power is supplied replace windscreen washer electric motor If power is not supplied replace the corresponding switch 7 14 6 4 Acoustic alarms HA1 and HA2 do not work a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU16 15A of power supply of acoustic alarms replace fuse element if it is faulty b By means of indicating lamp test power supply availability on coil terminals K10 2 85 of horn relay K10 when switch SA11 is on If power is not supplied replace switch In case of relay actuation relay audible click replace acoustic alarms 7 14 7 Search and elimination of failures in operation of heating plugs Failures in operations of heating plugs can be detected by hampered engine start at subzero temperatures in case tractor operating conditions and operability of other systems are observed Under mode of indicating lamp operation of heating plugs on HG1 block gov erned by control unit of heating plugs K8 different heating plugs operational failures listed in subsection 3 22 2 Heating p
468. xle under the tube flanges The lower links have eyelets 8 on which turnbuckles are mounted with their forked part by means of pins The turnbuckles limit cross travel of lower links 7 in operating and transport positions BOG 1 rear axle cover 2 turn shaft 3 external levers left and right 3a hydrau lic cylinder rod pins 4 hydraulic cylinders 5 arms 6 top link 7 lower links 8 eyelets 9 turnbuckles 10 pins 11 brackets 12 turnbuckle brackets 13 pins po sition sensors 14 brackets Figure 3 18 1 Rear lift linkage 3 18 2 Turnbuckle The turnbuckles 9 figure 3 18 1 are attached to the eyelets 8 of the lower links 7 with their one end The other end of the turnbuckle with a pivot is installed in the turnbuckle brackets 12 The turnbuckle brackets12 are fastened on a bottom part of the rear axle tubes The turnbuckle consist of a screw 1 figure 3 18 2 a guide 2 a slide piece 4 and a linch pin 3 The guide 2 has a through groove on its side face and a through opening at a plane perpendicular to it The slide piece has two through openings in one plane The turnbuckles have to be adjusted with agricultural machine mounted on rear ends of lower links and put down on its supporting surface The setup turnbuckle locked shall be carried out in the following order match the hole for the linch pin 3 in the guide 2 with the hole in slide piece 4 in ca
469. y Place for marking acciplance of technical contra office Figure 3 4 1 Gearbox layout SO 2022 5 0000010 OM Main gearbox elements gearbox case speed group shaft of low speeds and reverse travel gear train secondary shaft control mechanism FDA drive shaft rear PTO shaft creeper drive gear hydraulic system technical description is given in subsection 3 11 Transmis sion hydraulic system 1 6364 656667 6869 at ie x P a fe i ST Pe vet soe Ea vs 5 AC E TE L E gi st tesa i in a r H 5 e p oa E i ig a EL P prt gt i 5 al WEER pee fe a vo laea A oe all a LEN js me ac ia ae 7 M a BES a 72 Te ee nanu ee Ml o n dl eee m F i a i i i i i H j i i 1 i P i i h i r i i i f 0 39 38 37 36 35 3433 323120 29 2927 26 125 24 23 22 21 Bo Figure 3 4 2 first part Gearbox 86 2022 5 0000010 OM 97 699 100 for 102 103 108 see ESE E 3 om a f alle re net es E aime z Tamai m5 aa az att la st manges T awl I of forward aml reverse travel de 26 I iit E i ie Af a r ie d Rocker for switching chteli of a 3 t ranges O and Iw nog hatch switching fork of i fat oe Fork for switching between higher ower pass af the j rehet wut FDA engagenment fiction chibet l 1 case 2 throttle 3 30 67 111 fork 4 76 68
470. y K9 coil K9 2 to interlock switch SB3 for which purpose connect an indicating lamp between terminal of AB and switching unit output F to terminal 86 of relay coil K9 2 with relay K9 withdrawn thus The led lamp should be on when transmission range selector lever is in neutral position and if circuit under test operates properly The led lamp should be off when shifting of transmission range selector lever into on position or if circuit under test has failures 4 Check operability of circuits and engine start up ware for which purpose perform the following remove instrument board side bar check operability of starter switch SA9 by connecting an indicating lamp to ground with one wire and with another wire to switch terminals one at a time a terminals 30 19 green wires battery disconnect switch should be on b terminal 58 yellow wires key should be turned into first position c terminal 50 red wires key should be turned into second fixed position Indicating lamp should be on in all cases check circuits operability and current supply to terminal K9 of starter relay located in SU connect indicating lamp to ground with one wire and with another wire to relay terminals one at a time a power terminal K9 1 30 b coil terminal K9 2 85 Key should be turned into second fixed position Indicating lamp during starter relay K9 test use 24V in
471. y adjustable 3 Purpose For coupling of semitrailed imple ments and implements of tractors semi trailers types having also hitch clevis 4 Distance between PTO shaft end extension and 108 connection pin axis mm 5 5 Connecting pin diameter mm pin 5 Connecting pin diameter mm mm 6 Vertical load on DH in hitch point kN not A than 7 Protective mean 7 Protective mean type Safety chain rope a point of a protective mean to the Lifting device bore Implement accessory ATTENTION IT IS FORBIDDEN TO PUT THE DEVICE TO A LOWERMOST PO SITION WHERE IT OVERHANGS THE DH SUPPORTING BRACKET END 196 2022 5 0000010 OM 5 4 5 Drawbar hitch DH 1M 01 282 8 i SE mf i N N LO TI A S Figure 5 4 4 Installation variants scheme of DH 1M 01 Table 5 6 Basic parameters n coupling dimensions of DH 1M 01 Standard size configuration DH 1M 01 draw bar 1 Varan gt First position Second position 2 paat ean location At the bottom of rear axis body and rear lifting device 3 Purpose For connection and coupling of trailed semitrailed implements with traveling wheels excluding tractor trailers and semitrailers 4 Design features Draw bar with possibility to change its horizontal position against PTO shaft end butt 5 Distance between PTO shaft end extension and connection pin axis mm 6 Vertical load on DH in hitch point kN not more E than 7 Trailing appliance steering angle in ho
472. y defines possibility of the tractor movement according to a vertical road clearance and fordable depth Agricultural tractors application is limited by terrain relief described by slope and configuration of the field cuts and their altitude The field cut height influence coefficients are the atmosphere pressure and the ambient temperature Engine power is decreased by 1 0 per each 100 0 m of height exceeding sea level and the fuel consumption is in creased quite as much Tractors BELARUS 2022 5 are designed primary for flat conditions and restrict edly for terrain with significant slope gradient and altitude 215 2022 5 0000010 OM Drawbar features and flotation of the agricultural tractors depend not only on their features and technical condition but on the type and state of the soil in the field cut The tractor power is decreased significantly in soils prepared for seeding as compared with the same values on stubble fields of average humidity Change in the passing ability parameter and in drawbar features of the tractor BELARUS 2022 5 by virtue of increase in operating weight within tolerable limits is the most effective in circumstances where the deeper is the track the bigger is the soil sup porting capacity For example when the tractor weight is increased due to additional bal lasting the draft power of the tractor on winter stubble field on mineral soils is also in creased by 8 8 28 3 depending on the soil moistu
473. y of relay K17 when key SA7 is switched in position II and under wheel switch SA11 is on replace relay K17 when necessary c If relay is properly operating replace faulty lamps EL1 or EL2 of road headlights E1 or E2 7 14 4 4 Emergency light alarm does not work when switch SB5 is on a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU22 15A of power supply of turn signal lights of tractor right and left sides and replace it when necessary b Check in SU operability of turn relay K12 when switch SB5 is on replace turn re lay when necessary c If turn relay K12 is properly operating check circuits from relay K12 switch SB5 fuse element FU22 to turn signal lights of tractor and operability of the lamps themselves 7 14 4 5 Turn signal lights of tractor do not work when under wheel switch SA11 is on a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU28 7 5A of power supply of turn signal lights of tractor right and left side lamps replace it when necessary b Check in SU operability of turn relay K12 when switch SA11 is on replace it when necessary c If relay is properly operating check circuits from relay K12 switch SA11 fuse element FU28 to headlamp bulbs of tractor rights and operability of the lamps themselves 7 14 4 6 Working lights do not work at bumper bar when switch SA8 is on a Check in SU operability of fuse element FU17 15A of power supply of tractor working lamp bulb and replace it when necessary b Check i
474. ype 3 20 splines 45mm or type 2 21 splines 35mm is mounted on the tractor the other shaft end extensions of RPTO are attached to the set of spare parts tools and accesso ries against order It is necessary to use a type of shaft end extension correctly depending on the power takeoff value on PTO shaft according to the instructions of section 5 Coupling of implements The RPTO modes standard mode and economy mode shall be switched between only with the engine killed or at min idle speed of the engine For this purpose release the fixing bolt 39 figure 3 3 6 and turn the shaft 38 until engages with the clutch after that tighten the fixing bolt To switch on the standard mode it is necessary to turn the shaft contraclockwise against the stop to switch on the economy mode it is necessary to turn the shaft clockwise against the stop Detailed description of RPTO operation principle is given in subsection 3 7 Rear power take off shaft For operation with rear PTO take off a protective cap 3 figure 4 2 1 that protects a shaft end extension 4 for this unscrew two fixing bolts 1 After finishing to operate with RPTO it is obligatory that you put the protective cap back To exchange the shaft end extension proceed as follows take off a cap 3 having unscrewed two bolts 1 unscrew four bolts 5 and remove a thrust washer 2 remove the shaft end extension 4 from the opening of a bushing 7 mount the other shaft end ext

MTZ 2022.5 Tier 4 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents